MX 2301N 2600N 3100 S3e

2
: '09/Sep
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3100/S3E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL
NOTE FOR SERVICING [1] [2] [3] [4]
MX-2301N MX-2600N/3100N MX-2600G/3100G

DETAILS OF EACH SECTION [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1 [C] RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1 [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1 [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 [H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . H-1 [ i ] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i -1 [J] [L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1 FUSER SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1 [K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1 [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION. . M-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1 [O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1 [P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1 [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
CONTENTS
PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION For unpacking and installation, refer to the installation manual (00ZMX3100/I3E)
[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 [11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.
: '09/Sep
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. Article constitution (Main unit and option) . . . . . . . . .1 - 1 2. Main function of the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2 3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1 CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . .3 4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1 3 6 6
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1 [B] OPERATION PANEL 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4 [C] RSPF SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . C - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 8 [D] SCANNER SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . D - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 3 [E] PAPER FEED SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . E - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 5 [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . F - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2 [G] LSU SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . G - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 3 [H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . H - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 3 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .i - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2 [J] DEVELOPING SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . J - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2 [K] TRANSFER SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . K - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 3 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 4 [L] FUSER SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . L - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 3 [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . M - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3 [N] DRIVE SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 1 [O] PWB SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 1 [P] FAN SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 1 [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
[2] [3]
[4]
2
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION * For unpacking and installation, refer to the installation manual (00ZMX3100/I3E). EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . .5 - 1
[5]
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 3 [7] SIMULATION 1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1 2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 3 3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 8 [8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1 2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4 3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 7 [9] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1 2. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 4 3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 -36 [10] FIRMWARE UPDATE 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 11 3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -35 [12] OTHERS 1. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 5 3. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7
MX-3100N
NOTE FOR SERVICING

This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord. Service Manual
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it forcibly or do not pull it extremely. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing

1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except when performing the communication test, etc. It may cause an injury or an electric shock. 2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme care when servicing. It may cause a burn. 3) 4) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. 5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to pinch your hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other driving sections. Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. 7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. Alternatively, follow the instruction of the MSDS 8) 9) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing. Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner may pop and burn you.
6)
Keep the power cable away from a heat source. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
7)
Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which may drop inside the machine. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or do not perform servicing. It may cause an electric shock.
8)
3. Note for installing site

Do not install the machine at the following sites. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity. Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications described later.
6)
2)
Place of much vibrations It may cause a breakdown.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified one only. If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken, causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine. 11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag. It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. 2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. 3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result. To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, grounding must be made. 4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the following points. It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock. Gas tube Lightning conductor A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a grounding object by the authorities. Grounding wire for telephone line MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i 3) Poorly ventilated place An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a machine may produce an odor of ozone. Install the machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
4)
Place of direct sunlight. Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo qualitative change. It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5)
Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammonium. Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result in dirt copy.
6)
Place of much dust When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
7)
Place near a wall Some machine require intake and exhaust of air. If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30cm
30cm
45cm
8)
Unstable or slant surface If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a breakdown. If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified, it is recommendable to use them. When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock the casters.
MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
: '09/Sep
MX-3100N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Article constitution (Main unit and option)
Service Manual
Paper exit system
Document feeder system
12 MX-SCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
6 MX-TRX1 7 MX-FNX9
FINISHER
EXIT TRAY UNIT
1 MX-RPX2
REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER
2 MX-VRX1
DOCUMENT COVER
DIGITAL FULL COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM PUNCH MODULE
2 MX-2301N/2600N/3100N
Paper feed system
10 MX-PNX1
A/B/C/D
MX-2600G/3100G
12 MX-SCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
5 MX-LCX1
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
13 AR-SC3 (For saddle) 9 MX-FN10 11 MX-PNX5

A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
8 MX-RBX3
PAPER PASS UNIT
3 MX-DEX6
Image send expansion
STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
4 MX-DEX7
STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
Printer expansion
14 MX-PBX3 15 MX-PKX1
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
17 AR-PF1
BARCODE FONT KIT
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
18 MX-FXX2
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT
19 AR-SU1 20 AR-SV1
STAMP UNIT
21 MX-FWX1 22 MX-NSX1
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT
23 MX-AMX1
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE
16 MX-PUX1
XPS EXPANSION KIT
STAMP CARTRIDGE
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT
Authentication/Security
Application/Solution
24 MX-FR10U
Memory
DATA SECURITY KIT
25 MX-FR10
DATA SECURITY KIT
26 MX-USX1 27 MX-USX5
SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT
29 MX-US50
31 MX-AMX2 32 MX-AMX3
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE
33 MX-KBX1
KEYBOARD
30 MX-USA0
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
34 MX-SMX3
EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD
28 MX-US10
MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1
: '09/Sep
2.
2
Main function of the main unit

MX-2301N STD --STD OPT*1 MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1" OPT STD STD STD STD STD --OPT MX-2600N/3100N STD --STD OPT*1 COLOR WVGA 8.5" OPT STD STD STD STD STD OPT*2 OPT OPT OPT MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1" STD OPT*3 MX-2600G/3100G
Copier GDI printer PCL printer PS printer Main body LCD FAX Scanner Filing HDD RSPF Automatic duplex Security Internet Fax
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option OPT*1: Product key target. When PS is used, PCL function must be available. OPT*2: Product key target. OPT*3: When expansion for PCL printer, GDI printer is not available.
3.
2
Combination of options
Section Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER DOCUMENT COVER STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER LARGE CAPACITY TRAY EXIT TRAY UNIT FINISHER PAPER PASS UNIT SADDLE STITCH FINISHER PUNCH MODULE PUNCH MODULE STAPLE CARTRIDGE STAPLE CARTRIDGE PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PS3 EXPANSION KIT XPS EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT STAMP CARTRIDGE INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE KEYBOARD EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD Model name MX-RPX2 MX-VRX1 MX-DEX6 MX-DEX7 MX-LCX1 MX-TRX1 MX-FNX9 MX-RBX3 MX-FN10 MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D MX-PNX5 A/B/C/D MX-SCX1 AR-SC3 MX-PBX3 MX-PKX1 MX-PUX1 AR-PF1 MX-FXX2 AR-SU1 AR-SV1 MX-FWX1 MX-NSX1 MX-AMX1 MX-FR10U MX-FR10 MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KBX1 MX-SMX3 MX-2301N STD --{ { --{ { ----{ ------STD { --{ { ----{ STD { ----{ { { { { { { ----MX-2600N/ 3100N STD --{ { { { { { { { { { { STD { {*4 { {*2 { { { STD { { { { { { { { { { STD/{*3 { MX-2600G/ 3100G { { { { { { { { { { { { { { {*1 {*1, *4 { {*2 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { --{ Product key target Remarks
Document feeder system Paper feed system Paper exit system
A4 Inner finisher
For inner finisher For saddle stitch finisher For finisher For saddle { { {
Printer expansion
Image send expansion
{ { { { {
Includes the Sharpdesk. Commercial version Authentication version
Authentication/ Security Application/ Solution
{ { 1GB
Memory
STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected. * 1: Printer expansion (PCL) is required. * 2: No support for some destinations. * 3: Standard for North America and some destinations, option for the other destinations. * 4: Memory expansion are required. MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2
: '09/Sep
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-3100N
(4) Warmup Service Manual

Warm-up time Pre-heat recovery time from jam * 60 seconds or less (The value may be increased by operating condition) Yes 30 sec. or less
1.
(1)
Type
Basic specifications
Type
Desktop
A. Base engine
* Condition: After the door is kept open for 60 seconds, the polygon motor halt.
(5)
First copy time

Platen/RSPF Monochrome 6.0 sec. or less 10.7 sec. or less Color 8.9 sec. or less 13.5 sec. or less
(2)
Engine composition
OPC (Drum diameter:30mm) Black x1, Color x 3 Electronic photo (Laser) Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development Charged saw-tooth method Primary transfer belt Counter blade Heat roller No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle system
Photoconductor kind Copying method Developing system Charging system Transfer system Cleaning system Fusing system Waste toner disposal
Platen RSPF
* Measurement conditions: When paper of A4/8.5 x 11 is fed to narrow side direction from the main unit tray 1, and the polygon motor is rotating.
(6)
Engine resolution
Copy: 600 x 600dpi Print: 1200 x 1200dpi (26/31 ppm model) / 600 x 600 dpi (23 ppm model) No Copy: 600 x 600dpi Print : 600 x 600 (1bit) / 600 x 600 (4bit) / 1200 x 1200 (1bit) (Except 23 ppm model)
Writing resolution
Smoothing Gradation (Monochrome/Color)
(3)
2 2
Dimensions / Weight
MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: 620 x 670 x 795 mm MX-2600N/3100N: 620 x 695 x 950 mm MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: 970 x 670 mm MX-2600N/3100N: 970 x 695 mm
Outer dimensions (W x D x H) Dimensions occupied by Machine (W x D) (State of the manual paper feed tray is expansion.) Weight (Including OPC drum/ excluding consumble parts)
(7)
Printable area
299 x 450 mm Lead edge: 4mm or less Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
Max. print size Void area Image loss
MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: Approx. 102 kg MX-2600N/3100N: Approx. 112 kg
Full A3 / 11 X 17 dimension (299 x 450 mm) can be printed with PCL / PS driver.
(8)
Engine speed (ppm)
a. Tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding

2
Paper type Standard paper Paper size A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R A5R Extra 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 13 8.5 x 13.4 8.5 x 13.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 7.25 x 10.5R 5.5 x 8.5R A4 B5 A5R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 5.5R A4R B5R 8.5 x 11R 7.25 x 10.5R In the other sizes 23-sheets model Monochrome Color 12 12 14 14 23 16 11 12 14 23 16 23 16 11 12 14 23 16 26-sheets model Monochrome Color 13 13 15 15 26 18 12 13 15 26 18 26 18 12 13 15 26 18 31-sheets model Monochrome Color 14 14 17 17 31 20 13 14 17 31 20 31 20 13 14 17 31 20
Heavy paper
12
12
12
12
12
12
9 7
9 7
9 7
9 7
9 7
9 7
* LCC is not allowed the heavy paper passing. MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
: '09/Sep
b. Manual paper feed tray paper feeding

2
Paper type Standard paper Paper size A3W *1 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R A5R Extra 12 x 18 *1 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 13 8.5 x 13.4 8.5 x 13.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 7.25 x 10.5R 5.5 x 8.5R A4, 8.5 x 11 A4R, 8.5 x 11R Monarch, Com-10, DL, C5 A4 B5 A5R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 5.5R A4R B5R 8.5 x 11R 7.25 x 10.5R In the other sizes 23-sheets model Monochrome Color 11 11 12 12 14 14 22 23 23 16 11 12 14 23 16 12 9 8 16 11 12 14 22 16 10 7 7 26-sheets model Monochrome Color 12 11 13 12 15 14 22 23 23 16 18 17 18 12 13 15 23 18 12 9 8 11 12 14 22 16 17 18 10 7 7 31-sheets model Monochrome Color 13 11 14 12 16 14 22 23 23 16 19 17 20 20 13 14 16 23 19 20 12 9 8 11 12 14 22 16 17 20 10 7 7
OHP Envelope Heavy paper
12
10
12
10
12
10
9 7
7 5
9 7
7 5
9 7
7 5
*1: Engine speed in finisher output
(9)
Power source
100V series 200V series 100 - 127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A 50/60Hz Fixed type Inlet (Direct connection) 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover; Secondary switch: the operation panel)
B. Controller board
(1) Controller board
Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (800MHz) No 1 port Interface
Voltage / Current Frequency Power source code Power switch
CPU Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Ethernet
(10) Power consumption

USB 2.0 Max. Rated Power Consumption *1 100V series 1.44Kw 200V series 1.84Kw
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification heater is OFF.
USB authentication acquisition Serial I/F Memory expansion slot
Support Protocol 1 port (Either on the front section or rear section) For connection of USB memory, USB keyboard, IC card reader, IC reader writer or USB hab No 1 port 1 slot
10Base-T , 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/ SPX , NetBEUI , EtherTalk
(2)
Memory, hard disk
Memory capacity, HDD capacity

Local Memory (Copy) System Memory (Print) Standard Memory Standard Memory Expansion Memory Max. 80GB * 1GB 512MB 1GB (Except 23 ppm model) 1.5GB
HDD
* Capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status. MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 2
: '09/Sep
C. Operation panel
(1)
2
D. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation
600 x 300 dpi (Default) 600 x 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi Color 600 x 600dpi RSPF Mono600 x 400 dpi (Default) chrome 600 x 600 dpi Color 600 x 600dpi Internet Fax / Scanner Fax Direct SMTP 200dpi x 100dpi Standard (middle tone not (203.2 x 97.8 dpi) 100dpi x 100dpi allowed) (middle tone not allowed) Fine 200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) Super Fine 300dpi x 300dpi 200dpi x 400dpi (203.2 x 391 dpi) Ultra Fine 400dpi x 400dpi 400dpi x 400dpi (406.4 x 391 dpi) 600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi --Xenon 10bits B/W: 1bit Gray scale: 8bit Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each copy mode Platen Monochrome
Display device
a. Monochrome LCD (MX-2301N/2600G/3100G)

Type Size Display dot number LCD drive display area LCD backlight LCD contrast adjustment Dot matrix STN LCD, touch panel 8.1 inch 640 x 240 dots (H-VGA) 192 x 72 mm Fluorescent lamp backlight system Yes
Scanning Resolution (dpi)
b. Color LCD (MX-2600N/3100N)

Type Size Display dot number LCD drive display area LCD backlight LCD contrast adjustment Dot matrix TFT LCD, touch panel 8.5 inch 800 x 480 (W-VGA) 184.8 x 110.88mm Fluorescent lamp backlight system Yes
In sending Resolution (dpi)
Exposure lamp Reading gradation Output gradation
(2)
Document table
Document table fixed system (Flat bed) 297 x 432mm Left bottom reference Yes Automatic detection Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5 Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5 Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5 AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Platen AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13 AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5 AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.4 AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.5 Supplied as a service part DKIT-0373FCZZ
Type Scanning area Original standard position Detection detection size
Dehumidifying heater (Scanner section)
(3)
Automatic document feeder

RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder) Monochrome (A4 / 8.5 x 11) Color (A4 / 8.5 x 11) Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit) Single: 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit) 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit) Duplex: 16-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit) 14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) N/A Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit) Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit) Yes Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit) Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4 AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11 RSPF AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11 AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11 AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11 AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 11
Type Scan speed Copy
FAX / Internet FAX Scanner Detection Paper detection size
MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 3
: '09/Sep
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding) Standard size (Refer to the "paper detection size") Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only) Internet FAX 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available. Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled Random paper feed (The following two kinds of sizes can be combined; A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11" and 8.5". AMS is available.) * In random paper feeding, scanning with duplex is not available. Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2) Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2) Max. 100 sheet (21 lbs Bond, 80g/m2) or 13 mm (height limitation) OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit is allowed.) Option
Original standard position Document size
Original copy weight Max. loading capacity of documents Transport disable document Finish stamp
E. Paper feed section

(1)
Type
Type
Standard: 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray Full option: 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed + LCC Yes Service parts (Supported by kit)
(4)
Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray)

Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11 R, 7.25 x 10.5R Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, heavy paper Plain paper: 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) Maximum position of paper guide width Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) 20W (Power is supplied from main unit) with adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm without adjuster 590 x 670 x 303 mm
Paper capacity Paper size
Paper type
Paper type setting Dehumidifying heater
Feedable Paper Weight
(2)
Tray 1, 2 (Main unit)

Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, heavy paper Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Heavy paper: 28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209g/m2) AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3 Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5 x 11, Tray 2: 11 x 17 Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) Paper size setting when shipping Paper remaining detection Power consumption Dimensions (W x D x H)
Paper capacity Paper size
Paper type
Feedable Paper Weight Paper size setting when shipping Paper remaining detection
(5)
Tray 5 (LCC)
3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" Simulation setup A4 Yes Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2) Effective height: 385 mm Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none) The transport motor (DC brush-less motor) and control PWB are built-in to LCC. 3mm (Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment) Normal operation : 26.4W During lift-up : 40.8W 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main unit 370 x 550 x 520 mm 370 x 550 (mm) * Clearance with main unit: 235 mm Approx. 30 kg Auto detection system
(3)
Manual paper feed tray (main unit)

Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) envelope/OHP: 20 sheets Tab paper, Gross paper: 20 sheets Heavy paper: 40 sheets A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 , 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 12 x 18, envelope Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, heavy paper, Thin paper, envelop, OHP, Label paper, Tab paper, Gross paper Thin paper: 13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) Plain paper: 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2), 110 lb index - 140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2)
Paper capacity
2
Paper size
Type Transport speed Paper size Paper size setting Paper size setting when shipping Paper type setting Allowable paper type and weight for paper feed Paper capacity Paper remaining detection Driving form Off-center adjustment Power consumption (without heater) Power source External dimensions (W x D x H) Dimensions occupied by Machine (W x D) Weight Optional detection
2
Paper type
2
Feedable Paper Weight
F. Paper exit section

(1) Center tray of main unit
Center section of the main unit Face-down paper exit system 500 sheets (When A4, 8.5 x 11) (recommended paper for color) Thin paper: 13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) Plain paper: 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2), 110 lb index -140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2) * A3W/12x8 paper exiting is not allowed. Yes Yes
(3)
Color copy mode

Copy mode automatically discerning color/ monochrome. Full color copy (Red/Black mode) Copies with one color (R/G/B/C/M/Y) that is replaced from red color area in document, and black color. Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Auto color selection Full color Two color
Paper exit section Paper exit system Paper exit capacity Paper exit paper size/ weight
Single color
(4)
Duplex
Non stack system A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R Plain paper: 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Heavy paper: 28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209 g/m2) Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letter head, re-printed paper, pre-punched paper, heavy paper
System Paper size
Shifter function Paper exit full detection
(2)
Shifter
55 - 256g/m2 Offset mode Size: Envelope and custom size are not acceptable Type: Envelope, OHP, label paper and tab paper are not acceptable 30 mm Non-offset Getting out: It doesn't fall down from tray Offset mode Getting out: within 50 mm FR shift: within 10 mm JOB distance: 10 mm or more
Type and weight of paper which can be passed Paper type
Paper weight Paper size/type
(5)
Copy functions
Job reservation (99 items) Tray installation priority Program call/register (48 items) Document paper size input Indefinite paper size input Duplex copy direction switching (Multi shot) (Centering provided, page printing based on number of original pages is provided)
Offset width Integrity
(3)
Paper exit tray

Exit tray unit Paper exit to external in the right side of the main unit/Paper exits in face-down 100 sheets (When A4/8.5 x 11) (recommended paer for color) All of allowable paper for paper feed except envelope, tab paper and gloss paper. Yes No
Type Paper exit position/ system Paper exit capacity Paper exit paper size/ type Paper exit paper full detection Shifter function
G. Copy functions
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Normal ratio AB series 1 :1 0.8% 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400% Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%, 400% 25-400% (RSPF: 25-200%) 4
Function Automatic paper selection Automatic magnification ratio selection Paper type selection Auto tray switching Rotation copy Electronic sort Special functions Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/ side erase) 2 in 1 Center binding (Centering provided) Large volume document mode Tandem copy Cover paper insertion Only insertion of tab paper. Combination with tab copy is not allowed.
Copy magnification ratio
Zoom Preset magnification ratio
(2)
Density/copy image quality process

Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph, Map, light document 9 steps Yes * Off on printed photo, photograph or light document
Book copy Tab copy Card shot Automatic temporary save Filing Trial copy Document count Mixed document feeder OHP insert paper Thin paper scanning Document control (When the data security kit is installed) Print menu Color adjustment Date print Stamp RGB Color balance Character print Page print Sharpness Brightness adjustment Modifying image Background Vividness removal adjustment Photo repeat A3 wide copy Auto color calibration (Setting with system) Enlargement Centering Registration continuous copy (Setting with system) Mirror image Black-white reversion
Exposure mode
Number of manual steps Toner save mode
: '09/Sep
H. Printer function
(1) Platform
I. Image send function

(1) Mode
Scan to e-mail Scan to Desktop Scan to FTP Scan to Folder (SMB) Scan to USB memory Scan to e-mail with Meta Scan to Desktop with Meta Scan to FTP with Meta Scan to SMB with Meta Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin) Fax to Fax (Manual) Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer) Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing) Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin) Internet Fax to Internet FAX (Manual) Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing) Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
IBM PC/AT Macintosh
Scanner
(2)
Support OS
OS Custo m PCL6 Custom PCL5c Custo m PS PPD SPLC -c Yes Yes No Fax No Yes No Yes No
Windows
2
Mac
98 / Me NT 4.0 SP5 or later 2000 XP XP x 64 Server 2003 Server 2003 x 64 Vista Vista x 64 Server 2008 Server 2008 x 64 9.2.2 X 10.2.8 X 10.3.9 10.4.11 X 10.5-10.5.6
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Internet Fax
(2)
No Yes No
Support system
Scanner SMTP FTP (TCP / IP) SMB Internet Fax POP server SMTP server ESMTP server Fax ---
No
No
Mode Corresponding server/protocol
(3)
2
PDL emulation
Enulation MX-2600G/ MX-3100G Option MX-2301N/ MX-2600N/ MX-3100N Standard
(3)
Support image
Scanner Monochrome: TIFF, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS Color/ Gray scale: Color TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS Monochrome: Non-compression G3 = MH G4 = MMR Color / Gray scale: JPEG (High compression/ Middle compression/ Low compression) Internet Fax TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S) Fax
Mode File format
PCL5c compatibility, PCL6 compatibility PostScript 3 compatibility
---
Option
(4)
Font
Built-in fonts Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font Option font Font for bar code = 28 fonts Compression system
Emulation PCL5c copatibility, PCL6 compatibility PostScript 3 compatibility
Non-compression, MH, MMR
---
Roman outline fonts = 136 fonts
(5)
Print channel
PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment LPR IPP PAP:EtherTalk FTP NetBEUI Raw Port (Port 9100) USB 1.1 (Windows98/Me/2000/Server2003/XP/Vista) USB 2.0 (For Windows2000/XP/Vista only) HTTP (Web Submit Print) POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Conversion for each page to a file (Available to quantity specification)
Support print channel
Yes
---
(6)
Environment setting
General Basic settings for using the printer such as the number of copies and the print direction Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS error, setting of binary data outputting
Setting item Default setting PCL PS
(4)
Item Number of registration items

No. of registration items 999 items Max. number of registration items for one group (500 items) 48 items Total of bulletin board / confidential letter / relay and broadcast: 100 items FAX, Internet FAX: 1 item Scanner: 1,000 items 50 items 18 items 30 items 30 items 30 items 10 items Internet FAX: 50 items, Fax: 50 items (In total 50 items) FAX: 10 items
Document filing function PC- FAX send log User authentication
Item One-touch/ Group
Filing Automatic temporary save Yes Yes
Program Memory box Sender registration User list (Return address list) Transfer table list Sender number Item name File name Fixed phrase Meta data set list Receive rejection address Polling allow number
K. Document filing function

(1) Basic function
38GB Monochrome (Text): 5,500 pages or 3,000 files (*1) Full color data (Text and Photo): 2,500 pages (*2) 12GB Monochrome (Text): 1,700 pages or 1,000 files (*1) Full color data (Text and Photo): 800 pages (*2) Max. 1,000 folder
J. PC-Fax, PC internet Fax functions

(1)
OS
Number of files that can be saved in the standard folder/user folder Number of files that can be saved in temporary file folders. Number of folders that can be made as user folders. Number of users which can be registered
Same as that of account users of the main unit
Working environment
Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more) Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows server 2003 Windows Vista IBM PC/AT compatible machine Pentium II 300MHz or more Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above Number of colors: 256 colors or above 64 MB or more Empty capacity of 50MB or above USB 2.0 10/100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T LPR / lp Port9100 (RAW) IPP USB2.0
(*1): When the standard document (A4 monochrome: test sheet C) is used. (*2): When the color document (A4, greg fruit) is used.
Original (Text, A4): Test Sheet C Original (Color, A4): Greg fruit
PC CPU Monitor Memory HDD Interface
Communication protocol
(2)
Data operation by each function

Each folder in the standard folder /user folder ConfiSharing dential storage storage Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes No Yes Temporary folder Sharing storage Confidential storage
(2)
Functions
Yes (When FAX is installed) FAX number max. 64 digits Yes (Internet FAX expansion kit is required) Internet FAX address: max. 64 digits 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi / 400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11 x 17 / 8.5 x 14 / 8.5 x 11 / 5.5 x 8.5 / 8.5 x 13 MH / MMR / JBIG Yes (Max. 500 items) Yes Sub address Yes (Max. 20 digits) Pass code Yes (Max. 20 digits) Yes Yes Yes Prints always Yes Yes Job
PC-FAX send
PC-Internet FAX send Resolution Send document size Compression system Broadcast send F-code send
Telephone book registration, Send function Covering letter attachment function Covering letter making function Sender print Preview Delivery confirmation (Notification to PC by NJR)
Copy Printer Direct print (FTP pull) Direct print (FTP push) Direct print (USB pull) Direct print (e-mail push) Direct print (Web push) Direct print (SMB pull) Scan to e-mail/FTP Scan to SMB FAX send Internet FAX send PC FAX / PC Internet FAX send Scan to HDD
: '08 Oct 15
(3)
Data operation contents

Operation panel WEB
L. Ambient conditions
(1) Working environment
(Humidity)
85%
Operation content Reprint Resend Delete Shift Attribute change (Common/ Confidential/Protection) Confidential file setting Confidental folder setting File name change Creation of a folder File transfer to Local PC Machine HDD occupying rate display Confirmation of save data image (Preview) Retrieval Collective print (When the user name and the password of target files in the folder are the same) Delete with the time specified Multi file selection (print only)
Yes
60%
No Yes Yes (The print data displays only the first page.) Yes
20% 10 30 35 (Temperature)
Standard environmental conditions Usage environmental conditions
Yes Quality Guarantee Period
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is disabled.
Temperature 20 25 C Humidity 65 5 %RH Temperature 10 35 C Humidity 20 85 %RH Atmospheric 590 1013 hPa pressure (height: 0 2000m) Toner and Developer: 24 months from the production month (unopened) Drum: 36 months from the production month (keep packing)
(4)
Reprint / resend limitation items for each job

Mode Job kind Copy Data save Color Monochrome Color Monochrome Color Monochrome Monochrome Monochrome Color Monochrome Reprint MonoColor chrome Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No Resend MonoColor chrome Yes Yes No No
Copy
Printer
Printer
Image send
Scan send FAX send Internet FAX send Scan save
No
Yes
No
Yes
Document filing
Yes No
Yes No
* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."
MX-3100N [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. 1 Item Toner Cartridge (Black) Content Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 Life 18K *1 Model Name MX-31NTBA Remarks * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%) * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5%
2 3 4 5 6
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Developer (Black) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors/set)) Drum Drum Unit
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip Developer (Black) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) OPC Drum Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each Charger cleaner
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
15K *1 15K *1 15K *1 100K 60K
MX-31NTCA MX-31NTMA MX-31NTYA MX-31NVBA MX-31NVSA
7 8
x1 x1 x1 x1
100K (Black) 60K (Color) 100K (Black) 60K (Color)
MX-31NRSA MX-31NUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

No. 1 Item Toner Cartridge (Black) Content Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 Life 18K *1 Model Name MX-31GTBA Remarks * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%) * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5%
2 3 4 5 6
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip Developer (Black) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) OPC Drum Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each Charger cleaner
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
15K *1 15K *1 15K *1 100K 60K
MX-31GTCA MX-31GTMA MX-31GTYA MX-31GVBA MX-31GVSA
7 8
x1 x1 x1 x1
MX-31GRSA MX-31GUSA
C. Asia/Hong Kong
No. 1 Item Toner Cartridge (Black) Content Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 Life 18K *1 Model Name MX-31ATBA Remarks * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%) * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5%
2 3 4 5 6
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip Developer (Black) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) OPC Drum Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each Charger cleaner
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
15K *1 15K *1 15K *1 100K 60K
MX-31ATCA MX-31ATMA MX-31ATYA MX-31AVBA MX-31AVSA
7 8
x1 x1 x1 x1
MX-31ARSA MX-31AUSA
MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1
D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
No. 1 Item Toner Cartridge (Black) Content Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 Life 18K *1 Model Name MX-31FTBA Remarks * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%) * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5%
2 3 4 5 6
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
15K *1 15K *1 15K *1 100K 60K
MX-31FTCA MX-31FTMA MX-31FTYA MX-31FVBA MX-31FVSA
7 8
x1 x1 x1 x1
MX-31FRSA MX-31FUSA
E. Brazil
No. 1 Item Toner Cartridge (Black) Content Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 Life 18K *1 Model Name MX-31BTBA Remarks * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%) * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% * Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5%
2 3 4 5 6
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
15K *1 15K *1 15K *1 100K 60K
MX-31BTCA MX-31BTMA MX-31BTYA MX-31NVBA MX-31NVSA
7 8
x1 x1 x1 x1
MX31NRSA MX-31NUSA
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
No. 1 Item Heat roller kit Content Upper heat roller unit Upper separation pawl Upper separation pawl spring Lower separation pawl Lower separation pawl spring Upper thermistor Lower heat roller unit Lower thermistor Primary transfer belt Transfer cleaning blade PTC unit Primary transfer roller Belt drive gear Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer idle gear Upper thermistor PA Ozone filter CJ Paper ejection filter PS paper dust removing unit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) DV blade N kit DV side seal F (three in one) DV side seal R (three in one) Toner filter unit Main charger unit Drum cleaning blade Cleaning Gum P2 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge Stamp cartridge Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) Fuser cleaning roller Bearing x1 x4 x4 x4 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x3 x1 x1 x1 x3 x3 x2 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 Life 200K Model name MX-310HK Remarks
Primary transfer kit
200K
MX-310Y1
Secondary transfer kit
300K
MX-310Y2
4 5 6 7
Filter kit PS paper dust removing unit Waste toner box kit DV blade kit
100K 100K 50K Black: 100K, Color: 60K
MX-310FL MX-310PD MX-310HB MX-310DS
5% coverage for each color; 25% color ratio
Main charger kit
Black: 100K, Color: 60K 2000 times x 3 5000 times x 3 100K
MX-310MK
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Staple cartridge Staple cartridge Stamp cartridge Primary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit Fusing unit Fuser cleaning roller kit
AR-SC3 MX-SCX1 AR-SV1 MX-310U1 MX-310U2 MX-310FU1 MX-310FU MX-310CR
For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) For finisher (MX-FNX9/ MX-FN10)
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
No. 1 Item Upper heat roller kit Content Upper heat roller unit Upper separation pawl Upper separation pawl spring Upper thermistor Lower heat roller unit Lower separation pawl Lower separation pawl spring Lower thermistor Primary transfer belt Transfer cleaning blade PTC unit Primary transfer roller Belt drive gear Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer idle gear Upper thermistor PA PS paper dust removing unit Ozone filter CJ Paper ejection filter Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 x4 x4 x1 x1 x4 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 x1 Life 200K Model name MX-310UH Remarks
Lower heat roller kit
200K
MX-310LH
Primary transfer belt kit
200K
MX-310B1
4 5 6
Primary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer roller kit
200K 300K 300K
MX-310X1 MX-310B2 MX-310X2
7 8 9
PS paper dust removing unit Filter kit Waste toner box kit
100K 100K 50K
MX-310PD MX-310FL MX-310HB 5% coverage for each color; 25% color ratio
No. 10
Item DV blade kit
11
Main charger kit
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Content DV blade N kit DV side seal F (three in one) DV side seal R (three in one) Toner filter unit Main charger unit Drum cleaning blade Cleaning Gum P2 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge Stamp cartridge Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) Fuser cleaning roller Bearing
x1 x1 x1 x3 x1 x1 x1 x3 x3 x2 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2
Life Black: 100K, Color: 60K
Model name MX-310DS
Remarks
MX-310MK
AR-SC3 MX-SCX1 AR-SV1 MX-310U1 MX-310U2 MX-310FU MX-310CR
For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) For finisher (MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
C. Hong Kong
No. 1 Item Heat roller kit Content Upper heat roller unit Upper separation pawl Upper separation pawl spring Lower separation pawl Lower separation pawl spring Upper thermistor Lower heat roller unit Lower thermistor Primary transfer belt Transfer cleaning blade PTC unit Primary transfer roller Belt drive gear Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer idle gear Upper thermistor PA Ozone filter CJ PS paper dust removing unit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) DV blade N kit DV side seal F (three in one) DV side seal R (three in one) Toner filter unit Main charger unit Drum cleaning blade Cleaning Gum P2 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge Stamp cartridge Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) Fuser cleaning roller Bearing x1 x4 x4 x4 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x3 x1 x1 x1 x3 x3 x2 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 Life 200K Model name MX-310HK Remarks
200K
MX-310Y1
300K
MX-310Y2
4 5 6 7
MX-310FLN MX-310PD MX-310HB MX-310DS
Main charger kit
MX-310MK
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AR-SC3 MX-SCX1 AR-SV1 MX-310U1 MX-310U2 MX-310FU MX-310CR
For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) For finisher (MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
D. Asia/Middle East/Agency
No. 1 Item Heat roller kit Content Upper heat roller unit Upper separation pawl Upper separation pawl spring Lower separation pawl Lower separation pawl spring Upper thermistor Lower heat roller unit Lower thermistor Primary transfer belt Transfer cleaning blade PTC unit Primary transfer roller Belt drive gear Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer idle gear Upper thermistor PA Ozone filter CJ PS paper dust removing unit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) DV blade N kit DV side seal F (three in one) DV side seal R (three in one) Toner filter unit Main charger unit Drum cleaning blade Cleaning Gum P2 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge Stamp cartridge Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) Fuser cleaning roller Bearing x1 x4 x4 x4 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x4 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x3 x1 x1 x1 x3 x3 x2 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 Life 200K Model name MX-310HK Remarks
200K
MX-310Y1
300K
MX-310Y2
4 5 6 7
MX-310FLN MX-310PD MX-310HB MX-310DS
Main charger kit
MX-310MK
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AR-SC3 MX-SCX1 AR-SV1 MX-310U1 MX-310U2 MX-310FU1 MX-310FU MX-310CR
For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) For finisher (MX-FNX9/ MX-FN10)
3. Definition of developer/drum life end

When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level. When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level. When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end. In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output may differ greatly. When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color selection). In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates. Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end. To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13. (840K rotations = 7,916,813cm)
Developer/drum counter B/W Full color 100K 60K Developer/drum rpm B/W Full color 840K 840K rotations rotations Color developer/drum 44,000 56,000 60,000 64,000
4. Production number identification

A. Drum cartridge
10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows. The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
1: 2: 3: 4: Number For this model, this digit is 2. Alphabet Indicates the model conformity code. Number Indicates the end digit of the production year. Number or X, Y, Z Indicates the production month. X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Number Indicates the day of the production date. X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Number Indicates the day of the month of packing. X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Number Indicates the day of the packing date. Alphabet Indicates the production factory.
Developer/ drum
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi
Black developer/drum 56,000 85,000 100,000 107,000
5/6:
7:
8/9:
120,000 Black drum Color drum 100,000
10:
B. Developer
Printable counter
80,000
BK
60,000
40,000
C. M .Y
20,000
Single multi
2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows. The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the developer bag.
1: 2: 3/4: 5/6: 7: 8: Alphabet Indicates the production factory. Number Indicates the production year. Number Indicates the production month. Number Indicates the production day. Hyphen Number Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the side of the toner cartridge.
Part name
Destination Toner color Production place Incompatibility
Production year/month/day Version Serial No. in production day Example: 1st of production onJune 1, 2008
MX-3100N Service Manual [5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1.
Identification of each section and functions
A. External view
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
When a finisher / saddle stitch finisher is not installed
When a keyboard is installed When a finisher is installed
(15)
(8)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name Automatic document feeder Front cover Paper pass unit* Operation panel USB connector (A type) Exit tray unit (right tray)* Output tray (center tray) Keyboard* Saddle stitch finisher*
(9)
(10) (11) (12)
(13)
(14)
NOTE
10 11 12
13 14 15
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)* Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)* Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed)* Finisher*
function/Operation This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned. Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge. This transfers output to the saddle stitch finisher. This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. When installed, output can be delivered to this tray. Output is delivered to this tray. This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can be stored under the operation panel. This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are also available. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded in each tray. This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded. When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed, this is tray 4. This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
* Peripheral device. The peripheral devices are basically options. There are some destinations that peripheral device is provided as a standard unit.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1
B. Internal operation parts

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
No. 1 2 Name Toner cartridges Fusing unit
(8)
(9)
(10) (11) (12) (13)

NOTE
Function/Operation These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must be replaced. Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
Transfer belt
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Right side cover Paper reversing section cover Bypass tray Main power switch Waste toner box Waste toner box release button Handle Right cover of stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer Right cover of stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed) Paper tray right side cover Right side cover release lever
During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of the photoconductive drums are combined together on the transfer belt. During black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the transfer belt. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension. This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position. This collects excess toner that remains after printing. Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to replace the waste toner box or clean the laser unit. Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine. Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
Caution: The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when removing a paper misfeed. Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may cause a defective image.
12 13
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2. To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
C. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(9) (8)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name Paper feed roller Document feeding area cover Original guides Document feeder tray Original exit tray Scanning area Original size detector Reversing tray Document glass function/Operation This roller rotates to automatically feed the original. Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller. These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original. Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up. Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning. Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here. This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass. During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is temporarily output to this tray in order to be turned over for scanning of the reverse side. Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder. NOTE
D. Connector
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(6) (7)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
No. 1
Name USB connector (A type)
2 3 4
LAN connector USB connector (B type) Service-only connector
function/Operation Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. This connector is not initially available for use. If you wish to use the connector, contact your service technician. Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length. When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket. When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.
NOTE
5 6 7
Power plug Extension phone socket Telephone line socket
E. Operation panel
(1) MX-2600N/3100N
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) (10) (17)
JOB STATUS
PRINT READY DATA IMAGE SEND LINE DATA
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
LOGOUT
(7)
No. 1 Name Touch panel
(8)
(11)
(12)
(13) (14)
(15) (16)
NOTE
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
3 4
[JOB STATUS] key PRINT mode indicators READY indicator DATA indicator
function/Operation Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation. Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use. Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place. These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings). Press this key to return the number of copies to "0". Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
Numeric keys
6 7
[CLEAR] key ( [HOME] key
IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image in scan mode. This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent. Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode. Press this key to copy or scan an original in color. This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax. Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line. When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used when dialing. Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state. Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original. Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shutoff mode. Use this key to turn the machine power on and off. This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
DATA indicator
9 10 11
[BLACK & WHITE START] key [COLOR START] key [LOGOUT] key ( )
12 13
[#/P] key (
) )
[CLEAR ALL] key (
14 15
[STOP] key ( ) [POWER SAVE] key (
) / indicator
16 17
[POWER] key ( ) Main power indicator
2 2
: '09/Sep
(2)
MX-2301N/2600G/3100G
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) (11)
DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND COPY JOB STATUS
PRINT READY DATA LINE DATA
SYSTEM SETTINGS
LOGOUT
(7)
No. 1 Name Touch panel
(8) (9)(12)
(13)
(14) (15)
(16) (17) (18)

NOTE
Mode select keys and indicators
function/Operation Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation. Use these keys to change the mode displayed in the touch panel. The indicator of a key lights when the key is selected. Press this key to switch to document filing mode when you wish to store a document as an image file on the hard drive or print or transmit an image stored on the hard drive. Press this key to select network scanner / fax mode to use the scanner function or fax function. Press this key to select copy mode. Hold the [COPY] key down to view the machine's total page use count and amount of toner remaining.
[DOCUMENT FILING] key
[IMAGE SEND] key [COPY] key 3 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator DATA indicator 4 IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator DATA indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
Numeric keys
6 7 8
[CLEAR] key ( ) [JOB STATUS] key [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
9 10 11 12
Function key [BLACK & WHITE START] key [COLOUR START] key [LOGOUT] key ( )
13 14
[#/P] key (
) )
[CLEAR ALL] key (
15 16
[STOP] key ( ) [POWER SAVE] key (
) / indicator
17 18
[POWER] key ( ) Main power indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image in scan mode. This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent. These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings). Press this key to return the number of copies to "0". Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs. Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use. To use the SharpOSA function, press this key to switch to SharpOSA mode. Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode. Press this key to copy or scan an original in colour. This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax. Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line. When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used when dialling. Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state. Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original. Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shutoff mode. Use this key to turn the machine power on and off. This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
F. Status display
Copies in progress from tray 1. Ready to scan for next copy job. Color Mode Full Color Interrupt Job Status MFP Status Special Modes 020/015 2-Sided Copy Output File Quick File Copy Ratio Waiting Original Auto 8x11 Paper Select Auto 8x11 Plain 020/015 Waiting Maintenance Information DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
(1)
Job Status MFP Status
Plain 8 x11
Exposure Auto
/ 1. 1 2 / 2. 1 2 / 3. 1 2
Copying 020/015 Waiting 020/015
8 x11 8 x11R 8 x14 4. 11x17
100%
Example: Basic of copy mode

No. 1 Name Display selection key
(2)
(3)
NOTE
Job Status display
MFP Status display
function/Operation The status display can be switched between Job Status and MFP Status. If the job status screen is displayed, the status display automatically changes to "MFP Status". This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of job, the set number of copies, the number of copies completed, and the job status appear. Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only be manipulated in the job status screen. This shows machine system information. Maintenance Information: This shows machine maintenance information by means of codes.
G. Sensor
SPLS2
SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3 SOCD
SPED SPPD5 SPPD4 SPWS
SPLS1
MHPS
OCSW
TFD2 HPOS POD2 POD1 HLPCD TH_UM_IN TH_US_IN 1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK DHPD_K TCS_K PPD2 REGS_F REGS_R POD3 APPD1
TFD3
DSW_ADU
TH_LM_IN
DHPD_CL TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C
APPD2 MPED MPFD PPD1 CLUD1 CPFD1 DSW_C CLUD2 CPFD2 MPWD MTOP1 MTOP2 MPLD
TH_M/HUD_M
CPED1 CSS1 CSPD1
CPED2 CSS2 CSPD2
Signal name 1TUD_BK 1TUD_CL APPD1 APPD2 CLUD1 CLUD2 CPED1 CPED2 CPFD1 CPFD2 CSPD1 CSPD2 CSS1 CSS2 DHPD_CL DHPD_K DSW_ADU
Name Transfer belt separation BK detection Transfer belt separation CL detection ADU transport path detection 1 ADU transport path detection 2 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 installation detection Tray 2 installation detection CL phase detection BK phase detection ADU transport open/close detection
Function/Operation Detects the transfer belt separation BK. Detects the transfer belt separation CL. Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Detects tray 1 paper pass. Detects tray 2 paper pass. Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity. Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity. Detects the tray 1. Detects the tray 2. Detects the CL phase. Detects the BK phase. Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close.
Type
NOTE
Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type
Transmission type
Signal name DSW_C HLPCD HPOS MHPS MPED MPFD MPLD MPWD MTOP1 MTOP2 OCSW POD1 POD2 POD3 PPD1 PPD2 REGS_F REGS_R SOCD SPED SPLS1 SPLS2 SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3 SPPD4 SPPD5 SPWS STMPU TCS_C TCS_K TCS_M TCS_Y TFD2 TFD3 TH_LM_IN TH_M/ HUD_M TH_UM_IN TH_US_IN
Name Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Fusing pressure release sensor Shifter home position detection Scanner home position sensor Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper entry detection Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Original cover SW Fusing rear detection Paper exit detection Right tray paper exit detection Resist pre-detection Resist detection Pro-reg sensor F Pro-reg sensor R SPF open/close sensor SPF document empty sensor SPF document length detection short sensor SPF document length detection long sensor SPF paper entry detection 1 sensor (Also used for random detection) SPF paper entry detection 2 sensor (PS front) SPF scan front sensor SPF reverse gate front sensor SPF reverse rear sensor SPF document width sensor SPF stamp unit installation detection Toner density sensor Toner density sensor Toner density sensor Toner density sensor Paper exit full detection Right tray paper exit full detection Lower main thermister Temperature/humidity detection Upper main thermister Upper sub thermister
Function/Operation Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close. Detects pressure release of the fusing roller. Detects the shifter home position. Detects the scanner home position. Detects the manual feed paper empty. Detects the manual feed paper entry. Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing position). Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out position). Detects the trigger for document size. Detects the paper exit from fusing. Detects the paper from paper exit. Detects the paper exit to right tray. Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. Detects the registration shift of the machine front (F) side and detects color toner patch. Detects the registration shift of the machine rear (R) side and detects black toner patch. Detects open/close of the RSPF. Detects document empty in the RSPF tray. Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Detects paper entry and detects paper size in random paper feeding. Detects the paper in front of the PS roller. Detects the paper in front of scan point. Detects the paper in front of reverse gate. Detects reversed paper. Detects width of document on the tray. Detects the finish stamp unit. Detects the toner density (C). Detects the toner density (K). Detects the toner density (M). Detects the toner density (Y). Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the temperature. Detects temperature and humidity. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature.
Type
NOTE
Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Manual paper feed unit Volume resistor Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Reflection type Reflection type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Transmission type Volume resistor Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor Transmission type Manual paper feed unit Manual paper feed unit
H. Switch
SCOV
PWRSW DSW-R
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal name 1TNFD DSW-F
Name Waste toner full detection switch Front door open/close switch
Type Mechanical switch Micro switch
Function/Operation Detects the waste toner full. Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/ OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU laser. Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/ OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU laser. Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source. Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source. Detects the paper feed cover open/close.
NOTE
DSW-R
Right door open/close switch
Micro switch
MSW PWRSW SCOV
Main switch Operaton panel power supply switch SPF cover switch
Seesaw switch Push switch Micro switch
I. Clutches and solenoids
MPUC
PCSS
MPFS
MPGS STMPS SPFC SPFC SGS
SRRC
LSUSS_B LSUSS1 1TURC
CPUC1 CPLC1 CPFC CPUC2 CPLC2
Signal name 1TURC CPFC CPUC1 CPUC2 LSUSS_B MPFS MPGS MPUC PCSS SGS SPFC SRRC STMPS
Name Primary transfer separation clutch Tray vertical transport clutch Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) LSU shutter solenoid 1 Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Manual paper feed gate solenoid Manual paper feed clutch Process control shutter solenoid SPF document exit gate solenoid SPF paper feed clutch SPF resist roller clutch Stamp solenoid
Type Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic clutch -
Function/Operation Controls the primary transfer separation mode. Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section. Opens/closes the LSU shutter. Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close. Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF. Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor. Reverses the paper exit guard by ON operation. Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller. Controls ON/OFF of the PS roller. Drives the finish stamp.
NOTE
J. Drive motor
PRM OSM POM FUM
PGM
WTNM
MIM
SPFM SPRM
PFM TNM_K CPFM
TNM_Y TNM_M TNM_C
ADUML ADULM
CLUM1
DVM_CL DVM_K
CLUM2
RRM
Signal name ADUML CLUM1 CLUM2 CPFM DVM_CL DVM_K FUM MIM OSM PFM
Name ADU motor lower Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Paper feed motor Developing drive motor (CL) Developing drive motor (K) Fusing drive motor Scanner motor Shifter motor Transport motor
Type Stepping motor DC brush motor DC brush motor Brush-less motor Brush-less motor Brush-less motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor
Function/Operation Drives the right door section. Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Drives the paper feed section. Drives the OPC drum/developing section (CL). Drives the OPC drum/developing section/transfer section (K). Drives the fusing unit. Scanner (reading) section Performs offset of paper. Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller and the right door section. Scans the laser beam. Drives the paper exit roller. Adjusts the fusing roller pressure. Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF. Drives the transport roller and the PS roller. Drives the roller for paper feeding and drives the SWB transport roller. Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit. Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit. Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit. Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit. Stirs waste toner.
NOTE
PGM POM PRM RRM SPFM SPRM TNM_C TNM_K TNM_M TNM_Y WTNM
Polygon motor Paper exit drive motor Fusing pressure release motor Resist motor SPF transport motor SPF paper feed reverse motor Toner motor C Toner motor K Toner motor M Toner motor Y Waste toner drive motor
DC brush-less motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Stepping motor Synchronous motor
: '09/Sep
K. Lamps/Gates
1 CLI CCFT
HL_U HL_LM
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
Signal name CCFT CLI DL_C DL_K DL_M DL_Y HL_LM HL_U No. 1
Name LCD backlight Scanner lamp Discharge lamp C Discharge lamp K Discharge lamp M Discharge lamp Y Heater lamp lower main Heater lamp upper Name RSPF reverse gate
Type Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Xenon lamp LED LED LED LED
Function/Operation Backlight for LCD Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Heats the lower heat roller. (Main) Heats the upper heat roller. Function/Operation Guide paper which is switched back by the paper exit roller to the transport roller when duplex scanning of a document is performed. Switches the paper route which is discharged to the inner tray or the right tray. Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
NOTE
Type
NOTE
2 3
ADU reverse gate ADU gate lower
L. Fans and filters
POFM_R POFM_F RCFM
FUFM CCFM
MFPFM PSFM2 PSFM
OZFM
Signal name CCFM FUFM MFPFM OZFM POFM_F POFM_R PSFM PSFM2 RCFM NO 1 2 3
Name Process air inlet fan motor Fusing fan motor Controller cooling fan motor Ozone fan motor Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Power cooling fan motor Power cooling fan motor2 Rear cooling fan motor Name Ozone filter Toner filter Paper exit filter
Function/Operation Cools charger section of the process. Cools the fusing unit and peripheral area. Cools the controller PWB. Exhausts ozone. Cools the fusing unit. Cools the fusing unit. Cools the power unit. Cools the power unit. Cools rear (R) part of the machine. Function/Operation Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section. Prevents dispersing of toner. Deodorizes smell generated by the fusing unit.
NOTE
NOTE
M. PWB
8.5 inch
14 15 16
8.1 inch
13 15 16 14
33
13 31
10 32 12
9 11
26
2 25 24
23 27 30 8 17 34
35
18 6
21 22 33 7
5 19 28 29
20
3 4
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name RD I/F PWB Tray installation detection PWB DC power PWB Driver main PWB MC PWB Primary transfer PWB AC power PWB Scanner control PWB
Function/Operation Detects each sensor in the right door unit. Detects the tray. Outputs the secondary side voltage. Drives the transport motor and related sections. Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage. Generates the primary transfer voltage. Controls the primary side power source. Controls the scanner section.
NOTE
NO 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Name CCD PWB CL inverter PWB Document detection light collector PWB Document detection light emitting PWB LCD INV PWB LVDS PWB MFP OPE-P PWB Power SW PWB HL PWB Secondary transfer PWB MFP cnt PWB Mother PWB PCU PWB PCU Flash ROM PWB BD PWB LSU PWB LSU thermistor DL PWB LD PWB PROG1 ROM PWB PROG2 ROM PWB SCN Flash ROM PWB USB connector PWB USB converter PWB USB-HUB PWB RSPF drive PWB TM drive PWB
Function/Operation Scans document images. Drives the xenon lamp. Outputs the document size detection signal. Emits light for document size detection. Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight. Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD. Outputs the key operation signal. Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source. Controls the heater lamp. Generates the secondary transfer voltage, the transfer belt cleaning voltage and the pre-transfer voltage. Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine. Interfaces the MFP cnt PWB and other PWB. Controls the engine section. The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB. Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal. Controls the LSU. Measures the temperature in LSU. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Controls laser lighting. Stores the program to boot the printer controller. Stores the program. Stores the scanner control program. For connecting the USB Controls the USB keyboard. Branches off the USB line. Drives the RSPF. Control the toner motor.
NOTE
Only for the keyboard standard equipment model
N. Fuses/Thermostats
15
8.1 inch
10 HLTS2 HLTS1
HLTS3
11 14 12 13 8 9 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
Signal name HLTS1 HLTS2 HLTS3 NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F101 F102 F103 F301 F1 Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Thermostat Thermostat Thermostat
Name
Specifications Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing roller overheat protection Specifications T6.3AH 250V T6.3AH 250V T6.3AH 250V T6.3AH 250V T6.3AH 250V 15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) T10AH250V (200V only) T2AH 250V T2AH 250V (200V only) 200mA 250V 12A 125V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V) T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V) T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) 1.25A 250V
Section Fusing unit Fusing unit Fusing unit Section DC power PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB AC power PWB AC power PWB AC power PWB AC power PWB LCD INV PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB DC power PWB CL inverter PWB
Name
O. Roller
1 2 4 3 5 6 8 7 9 10 50 51 48 49 52 53 12 11 14 16 15 13
41 43 42 40 55 54 44 45 46 47 36 17 19
26 27 39 38
20 21 22 23 24 25
18 37 35 33 34 32 31 30 56 57 29 28
NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Name Pickup roller Paper feed roller Separation roller U-turn roller PS follower roller PS roller Transport follower roller
8 9 10
Scan front roller Scan rear roller Transport follower roller
11
Transport roller in SWB pass section
Function/Operation Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Sends paper to the paper feed roller. Guide roller to transport paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the PS roller to give the transport power of the PS roller to the paper. Synchronizes the document lead edge and the scan start position. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the PS roller to the scan rear roller. Transports paper from the scan front roller to the SWB roller or paper exit roller. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the SWB roller to the PS rear roller.
NOTE
NO. 12
Name Transport follower roller
13 14
Paper exit roller Paper exit follower roller
15 16
SWB roller Transport follower roller
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Resist roller (Drive)
Function/Operation Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Discharges paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the paper. The transport direction is switched back to reverse paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Sends paper to the paper feed roller. Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Sends paper to the paper feed roller. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Sends paper to the paper feed roller. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4. Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7. Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports the paper to resist roller. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
NOTE
27 28
Resist roller (Idle) Transport roller 1 (Idle)
29 30 31
Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transport roller 3 (Idle) Transport roller 4 (Idle)
32 33 34
Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transport roller 5 (Idle)
35 36
Transport roller 6 (Idle) Transport roller 7 (Idle)
37 38
Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transport roller 8 (Idle)
39 40
41 42
43 44
45 46
47
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
NO. 48
Name Transport roller 13 (Drive)
49
Transport roller 13 (Idle)
50
Paper exit roller 1 (Idle)
51 52
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Paper exit roller 2 (Idle)
53 54 55 56 57
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Fusing roller (Heating) Fusing roller (Pressing) Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transport roller 14 (Idle)
Function/Operation Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the paper. Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section. Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the paper. Discharges paper. Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images. Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating). Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4. Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper.
NOTE
MX-3100N
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General
Service Manual
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number must be observed. If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2.
Adjustment item list

Adjustment item list Adjust the developing doctor gap Adjust the developing roller main pole Toner density control reference value setting Adjusting high voltage values Simulation
Job No ADJ 1 ADJ 2 ADJ 3 ADJ 4
ADJ 5
Image density sensor (image registration sensor) adjustment
4A 4B 4C 5A 5B
Adjust the main charger grid voltage Adjust the developing bias voltage Transfer voltage adjustment Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) adjustment
8-2 8-1 8-6 44-13 44-2 61-4 50-22 44-31 50-10 50-10 50-22 50-20 50-21
ADJ 6 ADJ 7 ADJ 8 ADJ 9 ADJ 10
ADJ 11
ADJ 12 ADJ 13 ADJ 14
ADJ 15 ADJ 16 ADJ 17 ADJ 18
ADJ 19
7A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 7B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) Image registration adjustment (Print engine section) 10A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Auto adjustment) 10B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 10C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Scan image distortion adjustment 11A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment 11B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment 11C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit) Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment) RSPF parallelism adjustment (RSPF mode) 13A RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode) 13B RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode) Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning (Document table mode) direction) (Document table mode) 14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Document table mode) Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main/sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode) Scan image off-center adjustment 16A Scan image off-center (Document table mode) 16B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) Copy image position, image loss adjustment 18A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode) 18B Adjust the original scan start position (Adjust the scanner read position in SPF-mode front face scan) (RSPF mode) 18C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section)
Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) OPC drum phase adjustment
48-1 48-1 48-1 50-12 50-12 50-10/50-1 50-1 (50-2)
50-6 (50-7) 50-5
MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Job No ADJ 20
Copy color balance/density adjustment
ADJ 21
Printer color balance/density adjustment
Adjustment item list 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy mode) 20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20E Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20F Copy color balance/gamma adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Normally not required) 20G Monochrome copy density/gamma adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required) 20H Condition setting of document density reading operation (exposure) in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally not required) 20I Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20J Copy density adjustment for low density section (Each copy mode) (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20K Color copy text, line image edge gamma, density adjustment/ TextMap mode gamma, density adjustment 20L Color document reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20M Black ingredient amount adjustment in color copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20O Copy high density part density correction setting (Prevents against tone gap) (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20P Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode) (Normally not required) 20Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 20R Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment) 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 21C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 21D Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density part tone gap countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change) 21E Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment) 21F Automatic copy/printer color balance and density adjustment Document size sensor detection point adjustment Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor
Simulation 63-3 (63-5) 46-24 46-21 46-1 46-2 46-10 46-16 46-19
46-32 46-63 46-27 46-37 46-38 46-60 46-23 46-25 46-9 26-53 67-24 67-25 67-36 67-34
26-54 46-74 41-2 41-2 40-2 53-7 65-1 50-28 50-28 50-28
ADJ 22 ADJ 23 ADJ 24 ADJ 25 ADJ 26 ADJ 27
23A 23B Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (RSPF mode) Touch panel coordinate setting Image loss, void area, image off-center, image 27A magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28 27B 27C
Adjusting the fusing paper guide position Document size sensor adjustment
27D
Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment Image off-center automatic adjustment Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image offcenter, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (RSPF mode)
3.
Details of adjustment gap
4)
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The developing unit has been disassembled. * When the print image density is low. * When there is a blur on the print image. * When there is unevenness in the print image density. * The toner is excessively dispersed. 1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor cover. 5)
Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of 0.60 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm 70mm 40mm 40mm
2)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
Note for use of a thickness gauge Do not insert the gauge diagonally. The gauge must pass freely. The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG roller oscillation. * Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
A
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.60mm in between 40mm - 70mm from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm 70mm 40mm 40mm
7)
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller

main pole
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The developing unit has been disassembled. * When the print image density is low. * When there is a blur on the print image. * When there is unevenness in the print image density. * The toner is excessively dispersed. 1) 2) 3) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface. Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin. Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not provide a correct position.) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
23mm
After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate with the fixing screw.
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference

value setting
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When developer is replaced. NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. 1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9($'-B0B. $7'(9($'-B0B& $7'(9($'-B0B0 $7'(9($'-B0B< $7'(9(92B/B. $7'(9(92B/B& $7'(9(92B/B0 $7'(9(92B/B< . & 0 < (;(&87( $7'(9(92B0B. $7'(9(92B0B& $7'(9(92B0B0 $7'(9(92B0B< &/26(
4)
M
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B. $7'(9(92B0B& $7'(9(92B0B0 $7'(9(92B0B< &/26(
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 0.5mm. If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
.
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9($'-B0B. $7'(9($'-B0B& $7'(9($'-B0B0 $7'(9($'-B0B< $7'(9(92B/B. $7'(9(92B/B& $7'(9(92B/B0 $7'(9(92B/B< & 0 <
(;(&87(

Abnormal end
Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112 7(67
&/26( $7'(9(92B0B. $7'(9(92B0B& $7'(9(92B0B0 $7'(9(92B0B<
A 37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9($'-B0B. $7'(9($'-B0B& $7'(9($'-B0B0 $7'(9($'-B0B< $7'(9(92B/B. $7'(9(92B/B& $7'(9(92B/B0 $7'(9(92B/B<
6)
Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
&
<
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 7&'B.(((/ 7&'B& 7&'B0(((/ 7&'B< 7&9B.(((/ 7&9B&(((/ 7&9B0(((/ 7&9B<(((/ &/26(
&
<
(;(&87(

2) Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole position comes to the specified range. 3)
Close the front cabinet. Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner density, and the output value is displayed. The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set (saved) as the reference toner density control value. When the reference toner density control adjustment operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is completed or not. The above operation is executed each of the lower speed mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner density control value is set for each of them. NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment result is not reflected. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values

4-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63(('*%B. &/26(

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0 ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
Error display EE-EL EE-EU EE-EC
Error name EL abnormality EU abnormality EC abnormality
Detail of error Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not, Control voltage: 8.0V or above. Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not, Control voltage: 2.0V or below. Sensor output level: other than 2.5V 0.2V
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
5) 6) 1)
Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter. Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
or after 30 sec.

&/26(
NOTE: When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely affected. Black developer can be replaced individually. 2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data. If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction may not be performed correctly. 3) When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0 ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
2) 3)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB) Monitor voltage Check (Specified value) pin 17.8 1.1V GB-K 17.8 1.1V GB-C 17.8 1.1V GB-M 17.8 1.1V GB-Y 17.7 1.1V GB-K 17.7 1.1V GB-C 17.7 1.1V GB-M 17.7 1.1V GB-Y
Item MIDDLE A B C D A B C D MIDDLE SPEED GB_K MIDDLE SPEED GB_C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y LOW SPEED GB_K LOW SPEED GB_C LOW SPEED GB_M LOW SPEED GB_Y K C M Y K C M Y
Mode Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Main charger grid voltage(Low speed mode)
Adjustment range 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850 150 - 850
Actual voltage -630V -630V -630V -630V -620V -620V -620V -620V
LOW
Remark: Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is outputted. The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted mode.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship. To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed mode, and then adjust the other mode. If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically changed. Use care for that. Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value. If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the procedures below. 1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec. If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this procedure as short as possible. If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter. If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts may be defective. MC/DV high voltage PWB PCU PWB Development unit OPC drum unit High voltage circuit electrode
2 1
2) 3) 4) 5)
Open the PWB holder. Enter the SIM 8-2 mode. Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key. Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
4-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1)
Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63((''9%B. &/26(

% 0,''/(63((''9%B& & 0,''/(63((''9%B0 ' 0,''/(63((''9%B<

0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
after 30 sec. or

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

% 0,''/(63((''9%B& & 0,''/(63((''9%B0 ' 0,''/(63((''9%B<

0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
2) 3)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB) Monitor voltage Check (Specified value) pin 19.2 1.2V BS-K 19.2 1.2V BS-C 19.2 1.2V BS-M 19.2 1.2V 19.2 1.2V 19.2 1.2V 19.2 1.2V 19.2 1.2V BS-Y BS-K BS-C BS-M BS-Y
Item MIDDLE A B C D A B C D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y LOW SPEED DVB_K LOW SPEED DVB_C LOW SPEED DVB_M LOW SPEED DVB_Y K C M Y K C M Y
Mode Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) Developing bias voltage Developing bias voltage Developing bias voltage Developing bias voltage Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) (Low speed mode) (Low speed mode) (Low speed mode) (Low speed mode)
Adjustment range 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600
Actual voltage -450V -450V -450V -450V -450V -450V -450V -450V
LOW
Remark: Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is outputted. The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
5)
Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship. To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed mode, and then adjust the other mode. If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically changed. Use care for that. Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value. If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the procedures below. 1) Remove the rear cover of the machine. 6) Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted mode. Press [EXECUTE] key. The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec. 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter. If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts may be defective. MC/DV high voltage PWB PCU PWB Development unit OPC drum unit High voltage circuit electrode
7)
2 1
2) 3) 4)
Open the PWB frame. Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1. Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
4-C Transfer voltage adjustment

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Secondary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1)
Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-6.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7+96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 7&/2:63(('&/. &/26(

% 7&0,''/(63(('&/. & 7&/2:63(('&/& ' 7&0,''/(63(('&/& ( 7&/2:63(('&/0 ) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0 * 7&/2:63(('&/< + 7&0,''/(63(('&/< , 7&/2:63(('%:. - 7&0,''/(63(('%:. . 7&3/$,1&/63; / 7&3/$,1&/'3; (;(&87( 2.

10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7+96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 7&/2:63(('&/.

% 7&0,''/(63(('&/. & 7&/2:63(('&/& ' 7&0,''/(63(('&/& ( 7&/2:63(('&/0 ) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0 * 7&/2:63(('&/< + 7&0,''/(63(('&/< , 7&/2:63(('%:. - 7&0,''/(63(('%:. . 7&3/$,1&/63; / 7&3/$,1&/'3; (;(&87( 2.

2) 3)
Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key. By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage is outputted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z TC1 LOW SPEED CL K TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K TC1 LOW SPEED CL C TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C TC1 LOW SPEED CL M TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y TC1 LOW SPEED BW K TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX TC2 PLAIN CL DPX TC2 PLAIN BW SPX TC2 PLAIN BW DPX TC2 HEAVY CL SPX TC2 HEAVY CL DPX TC2 HEAVY BW SPX TC2 HEAVY BW DPX TC2 OHP CL TC2 OHP BW TC2 ENVELOPE CL TC2 ENVELOPE BW TC2 CLEANING TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Primary transport bias reference value Color
Content K C M Y Black/White Secondary transport bias reference value Color Black/White Color Black/White Secondary transport bias reference value Color Black/White Color Black/White Cleaning process In low speed print In middle speed print Cleaning Heavy paper K Standard paper In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface OHP Envelope
Setting range 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
Default value 80 109 80 109 80 109 80 109 80 109 130 120 99 99 78 78 78 68 78 68 78 78 63 0 0 85
Actual output setting range 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 0V -1500V 0V -1500V 0V -1500V
Secondary transport cleaning bias reference value
Default value of actual output value 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 40A 35A 25A 25A 15A 15A 15A 10A 15A 10A 15A 15A 8A 0V 0V -500V
Item/Display AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM VPTC LOW SPEED CL VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL VPTC LOW SPEED BK VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK FPTC LOW SPEED CL FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL FPTC LOW SPEED BK FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK DCPTC LOW SPEED CL DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL DCPTC LOW SPEED BK DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK PTC_HT PTC applied voltage control (AC constant voltage setting) PTC applied voltage control (frequency setting value) PTC applied voltage control (DC constant voltage setting value) PTC heater operating environment setting Setting of the supply power in PTC heater constant operation (Duty ratio setting) Color
Content In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed
Setting range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-6
Default value 100 100 100 100 184 184 184 131 93 149 149 149 1
Actual output setting range 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0V 2KV 0V 2KV 0V 2KV 0V 2KV
Black/White Color Black/White Color Black/White
Default value of actual output value 2.5KV 2.5KV 2.5KV 2.5KV 0.5KHz 0.5KHz 0.5KHz 0.5KHz -1.0KV -1.4KV -1.4KV -1.4KV
0: OFF 1-6: Environment conditions
Always ON
AN
HT_DUTY
0: OFF 10: Lighting-up fully
0 - 10
0% 100%
50%
ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image

registration sensor) adjustment
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each machine. To correct this, calibration is executed. This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the image density sensor (image registration sensor) is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment methods. * Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration SIM44-13 * Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) calibration SIM44-2 NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density and image registration on front frame side, the black image density sensor detects black image density and image registration on rear frame side. That is, two functions is assigned to each one sensor. Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following items. * Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) are clean. * Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate is clean. * Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from scratches.
5-A Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration

1) 2) Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste toner box. Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.
3)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the primary transfer belt tension.
UNLOCK
CAUTION: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position. 4) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5)
Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer belt unit.
8) 9)
Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section). Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet. 11) Press [EXECUTE] key. Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Display/Item A PCS_CL CARB OUT PCS_CL LED ADJ Content Color image density sensor LED current adjustment target value Color image density sensor LED current adjustment target value (PCS CL CARB OUT) registered LED current level Adjustment value range 1 - 255 Default 108
1 - 255
21
6)
Install the color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section. Engage the pawls (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it to the rear frame side.
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again. If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised. Color image density sensor PCU PWB Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt, scratch, discoloration)
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the PTC terminal.
A A
Image density sensor calibration plate NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low temperature, low humidity and dark place.
5-B Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) adjustment
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17 3&6B&/&$5%287 3&6B&//('$'- &/26(
NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of registration adjustment operation and process control operation as well as SIM44-2. 1) Enter SIM44-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&21*$,1$'-8670(17 3&6B&//('$'- 3&6B./('$'- 3&6B&/'$5. 3&6B.'$5. 3&6B.*51' 3&6B.%(/70$; 3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B)*51' 5(*B5*51' 5(*B)%(/70$; 5(*B)%(/70,1 5(*B)%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/7',) 5(*B)3$7&+. 5(*B)3$7&+& 5(*B)3$7&+0 5(*B)3$7&+< (;(&87( &/26(
(;(&87(

3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B5/('$'-
EXECUTE
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B5'$5.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17 3&6B&/&$5%287 3&6B&//('$'- &/26(
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) are automatically adjusted. After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
(;(&87(

: '09/Sep
Default 21 Mode Adjustment value for image registration operation mode Display/Item Y REG_R PATCH (K) REG_R PATCH (C) REG_R PATCH (M) REG_R PATCH (Y) Content Patch detection level R for check (K) Patch detection level R for check (C) Patch detection level R for check (M) Patch detection level R for check (Y) Range 0 - 55 Default 0
Mode Adjustment value for process control operation mode
Display/Item A PCS_CL LED ADJ PCS_K LED ADJ PCS_CL DARK PCS_K DARK PCS_K GRND
Content Color image sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value Black image sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value Dark voltage of color Dark voltage of black Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment Maximum value of belt base detection level Minimum value of belt base detection level Belt base detection level difference (Item E - Item F) Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F Image registration sensor dark voltage F Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R Image registration sensor dark voltage R Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment Maximum value of belt base detection level (F side) Minimum value of belt base detection level (F side) Belt base detection level difference (Item O - Item P) Maximum value of belt base detection level (R side) Minimum value of belt base detection level (R side) Belt base detection level difference (Item R - Item S) Patch detection level F for check (K) Patch detection level F for check (C) Patch detection level F for check (M) Patch detection level F for check (Y)
Range 1 - 255
1 - 255
21
0 - 255
C D E
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0
AA
0 - 255
AB
0 - 255
PCS_K BELT MAX PCS_K BELT MIN PCS_K BELT DIF REG_F LED ADJ
0 - 255
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

Mode Adjustment value for process control operation mode Error display BK_SEN_ADJ _ERR Error content PCS_K LED ADJ error (The target value is not obtained after retried three times.) PCS_CL LED ADJ error (The target value is not obtained after retried three times.) PCS_K GRND error (The surface detection level is maximum or the minimum value difference is outside a reference range. ) REG_F LED ADJ error (The target value is not obtained after retried three times.) REG_R LED ADJ error (The target value is not obtained after retried three times.) REG_F GRND error (The surface detection level is maximum or the minimum value difference is outside a reference range. ) REG_R GRND error (The surface detection level is maximum or the minimum value difference is outside a reference range. )
0 - 255
0 - 255
CL_SEN_ADJ _ERR
Adjustment value for image registration operation mode
1 - 255
56 BELT_READ _ERR
REG_F DARK REG_F GRND
0 - 255
Black image density sensor adjustment abnormality Color image sensor adjustment abnormality Transfer belt surface reading abnormality
0 - 255
0 Adjustment value for image registration operation mode REG_SEN_F _ADJ_ERR Registration sensor F adjustment abnormality Registration sensor R adjustment abnormality F side transfer belt surface reading abnormality R side transfer belt surface reading abnormality
REG_R LED ADJ
1 - 255
56
REG_SEN_R _ADJ_ERR
REG_R DARK REG_R GRND
0 - 255
0 REG_BELT_F _READ_ERR
0 - 256
REG_F BELT MAX REG_F BELT MIN REG_F BELT DIF REG_R BELT MAX REG_R BELT MIN REG_R BELT DIF REG_F PATCH (K) REG_F PATCH (C) REG_F PATCH (M) REG_F PATCH (Y)
0 - 255
REG_BELT_R _READ_ERR
0 - 255
0 - 255
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any abnormality. Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) PCU PWB Transfer belt (dirt, scratch) Transfer belt cleaner Color image sensor calibration plate If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again. If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
2)
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU

unit)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the color shift occurs. * When the LSU unit is replaced. * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit. * When a color image registration mistake occurs. * When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. (Required depending on the cases.) * When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth). * When the color phase is not matched by the color balance adjustment. * When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. * When the primary transfer unit is replaced. NOTE: This adjustment can be executed efficiently by executing the following procedures in advance. The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly adjusted for that. 1) 2) 3) Press [REGIST] button in SIM50-22 mode to execute the automatic image registration adjustment. The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display menu. Put down the displayed skew level value.
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by changing the value of set item B. Press [EXECUTE] key. The check pattern is printed out. Check the printed black image for any skew. Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns printed in black. There are following two methods of checking the black image for any skew (right angle). Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good Method 2: Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for judgment of good or no good. (NOTE) In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to be used in advance. (Method 1) a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print pattern.
4
3) 4)
(Meaning of the skew level value) * When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the value. * When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number of the value. At that time, the fractional part after the decimal point is rounded. NOTE: The K (black) image skew level cannot be checked with this adjustment. To check and adjust the K (black) image skew, follow the procedures below and execute the adjustment. 1) Enter SIM61-4 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17 $ 08/7,&2817 &/26(
Diagonal line D
Diagonal line C
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and D of the diagonal lines. c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the following range. C D = 0.8mm If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there is no need to adjust.
% 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17 $ 08/7,&2817
% 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
(Method 2) a) Fit the side of A3 or 11x17 paper to the long side of the rectangle print pattern.
Comparison line 0.5mm or less
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
4
A3 or 11 x 17 paper
4
*B
Direction A Direction B
Direction A *B
Yellow
Cyan Magenta
*A
Direction B
*A: Rough adjustment print pattern *B: Fine adjustment print pattern
(
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper and side of the rectangle print pattern. If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to adjust. If not, execute the following procedures. 5) 6) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box. Loosen the LSU unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the LSU (writing) unit skew. (When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance) When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the adjustment screw in the direction of Y. When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the adjustment screw in the direction of X. (When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance) If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in the highest density sections is within 1 step. (Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare only the same-color patterns.) If the above condition is not met, do the following: 11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to adjust.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by 5 - 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1 dot size). When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller number) from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B (to the larger number), turn the adjustment screw clockwise. 12) Print the check pattern. 13) Check the color image skew pattern.
7) 8)
Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet. Execute procedures 3) - 4). (Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained.) Repeat procedures 11) - 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained. The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
9)
If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten the adjustment screw. (The black image skew adjustment is completed with the above.)
2)
Press [ALL] key. (The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/ image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.) The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registration adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this adjustment simultaneously.
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the color shift occurs. * When the photoconductor drum is replaced. * When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit. * When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled. * When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. * When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. * When the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) is replaced. * When the color image sensor (image registration sensor R) is replaced. 3)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration adjustment are executed automatically.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB Example PHASE Example Image regist adjustment value is displayed. ( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value. This time 105.0, previous time 103.0 : 105.0 (+2) OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed. ( ) is the previous adjustment value. This time 90, previous time 45 : 3 (2)
7-A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)

1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(: &/1* 0/1* </1* &/26(
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
5(*,67
'580326
$//
(;(&87(

EXECUTE

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57 (55257211(5(037< &/26(
(;(&87(
7-B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment)

NOTE: The OPC drum phase adjustment by manual is not recommended. Cause judgement of adjustment pattern differ in individuals. Auto adjustment mode with SIM50-22 is recommended. 1) Enter SIM44-31 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '580326,7,216(77,1* $ 35,1702'(6(79$/8( &/26(
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.

% &2/25 & 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Each identification number ("1" - "8") is printed on each printed page of 8 adjustment patterns. 5) Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK] key.
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '580326,7,216(77,1* $ 35,1702'(6(79$/8( &/26(
% &2/25 & 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
When the deflection exceeds the range between 2 lines in the printed result.
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
94mm
94mm
94mm
94mm
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '580326,7,216(77,1* $ 35,1702'(GHJ
&/26(
NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle (94mm pitch), check the following conditions. OPC drum drive section Transfer belt drive section Paper feed drive section Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
% &2/25 & 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
2) 3)
Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and press [OK] key. Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key.
: '09/Sep 6) Change the set value of set item A. When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed by 0.1mm. When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is decreased. Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ADJ 8 Print engine image

magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * When the color shift occurs. 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-10.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 &/26(
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment

(Print engine section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * When a paper tray is replaced. * When the paper tray section is disassembled. * When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scanning direction) is performed. * When the manual feed tray is replaced. * When the manual feed tray is disassembled. * When the duplex section is disassembled. * When the duplex section is installed or replaced. * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced. * When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
(;(&87( 2.
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&&

* When the regist roller section is disassembled. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. (Note) Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following item. * Check that the print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly adjusted. 1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 &/26(
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.

$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.

2) 3) 4)
2
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray. Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The check pattern is printed out. Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240 0.5mm.
5)
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.

240 0.5mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 17
2)
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Display/Item Content Main scan print magnification ratio BK Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) Print off center adjustment value (LCC) Print off center adjustment value (ADU) Setting range 60 - 140 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default 100 50 50
5)
Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct position. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV 2.0mm 2.0mm
A B C
BK-MAG MAIN-MFT MAIN-CS1
MAIN-CS2
1 - 99
50
MAIN-CS3
1 - 99
50
MAIN-CS4
1 - 99
50
MAIN-LCC
1 - 99
50
MAIN-ADU
1 - 99
50
NOTE: Before execution of

this adjustment, check to insure that the adjustment items A - G have been properly adjusted. If not, this adjustment cannot be made properly. Registration Manual motor ON paper feed Timing Standard adjustment tray DESK LCC ADU Number of print Tray Manual paper selection feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Duplex Yes print No selection
FV 2.0mm
2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA FV: FRONT VOID AREA RV + FV 4.0mm RV = 2.0 2.0mm FV = 2.0 2.0mm If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 999 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 50 50 50 50 50 1 2 (CS1)
I J K L M N O
SUB-MFT SUB-CS12 SUB-CS34 SUB-LCC SUB-ADU MULTI COUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO
6) 7)
Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B - H) to be adjusted with the scroll key. Change the adjustment value. Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side. When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is changed by about 0.1mm. Repeat procedures 3) - 7) until the conditions of procedure 5) are satisfied.
DUPLEX
0-1
1 (NO)
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
3) 4)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2). Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed.
8)
Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
10-A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are executed simultaneously and automatically. 1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(: &/1* 0/1* </1* &/26(
5(*,67
'580326
$//
(;(&87(

E X ECUTE

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 12:(;(&87,1*
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment

(Print engine section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the color shift occurs. * When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. * When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit. * When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning direction occurs. * When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning direction occurs * When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. * When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.) * When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scanning direction) is performed. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. Note before adjustment (Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments must have been completed.) * Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) * [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scanning direction) (print engine section) 2) 3) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode. Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed. It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57 (55257211(5(037< (;(&87(
Abnormal end

&/26(
(;(&87(
Display/ Item MAIN C F
Content Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) Registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) Registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) Registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) Registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow)
Display 1.0 199.0
Default 100
NOTE
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image registration adjustment mode below. * Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-20) * Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-21)
1.0 199.0
100
10-B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)

NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process control is executed, the image registration adjustment is executed automatically and updates the result in each case.
1.0 199.0
100
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits). 1) Enter SIM50-20 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21 $ &<$1)5217 &/26(
MAIN R
1.0 199.0
100

% &<$15($5 & 0$*(17$)5217 ' 0$*(17$5($5 ( <(//2:)5217

1.0 199.0
100
) <(//2:5($5 * 08/7,&2817 + 3$3(5&6 , '83/(;12
(;(&87(
2.
1.0 199.0
100
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

SUB
1.0 199.0
100
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21 $ &<$1)5217
&/26(

% &<$15($5 & 0$*(17$)5217 ' 0$*(17$5($5 ( <(//2:)5217 ) <(//2:5($5 * 08/7,&2817 + 3$3(5&6
1.0 199.0
100

1.0 199.0
100
, '83/(;12
(;(&87(
2.
2)
-99.9 99.9 -99.9 99.9 -99.9 99.9 If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of numerical value. If the value is minus, L is displayed to left side of numerical value. When the value is in the -4 to +4 range, "OK" is displayed to right side of numerical value. If not, "NG" is displayed to right side of numerical value.
SKEW
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by changing the value of set item H. Press [EXECUTE] key. The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scanning direction is printed.
3)
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed. ( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value. Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2) * In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 20
A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range (0 1) 4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear frame sides. Use the visually highest color density section as the center, and measure the shift amount. The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are adjusted independently. To check the image registration, therefore, check the front frame side and the rear frame side individually.
E Rough adjustment print pattern check Fine adjustment print pattern check Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at the center for the rough adjustment reference pattern. Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the center for the fine adjustment reference pattern. YELLOW (FRONT) D Adjustment value range 1 - 199
Display/Item C MAGENTA (FRONT)
Content Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) (R side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (R side)
Default 100
MAGENTA (REAR)
1 - 199
100
1 - 199
100
YELLOW (REAR)
1 - 199
100
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjustment is not required.) If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode adjustment item A - F to be adjusted with the scroll key and change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item A CYAN (FRONT) Content Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (R side) Adjustment value range 1 - 199 Default 100
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained. For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the adjustment value, refer to the following. (Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the adjustment value) a) Measurement of the shift amount * Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern Use the visually highest color density section as the center, and measure the shift amount.
CYAN (REAR)
1 - 199
100
(Example) The measurement value of the figure is "14.
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from that. The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as 120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks corresponds to 40. (Example) In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus polarity, and the measurement is "40. * The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment shift amount. Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount. When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the minus polarity. (Example) In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 54. Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)
Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)

-18 -16 -14 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-40
-12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
120 -120
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
-18 -16 -14
40
-12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A - F. b) Adjustment value calculation Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new adjustment value. (When the shift amount (correction value) is plus) Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value) (When the shift amount (correction value) is minus) Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift amount (correction value)
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
Yellow E
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-18
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
Magenta C
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-18
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
Cyan A
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-18
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
120 -120
-32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
(Example)
Previous value before adjustment A: 100 B: 112 C: 95 D: 98 E: 102 F: 96 New adjustment value A: 86 (=100-14) B: 88 (=112-24) C: 97 (=95+2) D: 120 (=98+22) E: 116 (=102+14) F: 140 (=96+44)
1)
Enter SIM50-21 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21 $ &<$1 &/26(

% 0$*(17$ & <(//2: ' 08/7,&2817 ( 3$3(5&6 ) '83/(;12

NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be careful of that.
(;(&87( 2.
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)

NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process control is executed, the image registration adjustment is executed automatically and updates the result in each case. In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhibits) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21 $ &<$1
&/26(

% 0$*(17$ & <(//2: ' 08/7,&2817 ( 3$3(5&6 ) '83/(;12

(;(&87(
2.
2) 3)
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by changing the value of set item H. Press [EXECUTE] key. The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 24
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color. Use the visually highest color density section as the center, and measure the shift amount.
-40
Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)

A
-120 120
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Rough adjustment print pattern check
Fine adjustment print pattern check
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at the center for the rough adjustment reference pattern. Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
B
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjustment is not required.) If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode adjustment item A - C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item A CYAN Content Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow) Adjustment value range 1 - 199 Default 100
0 -38
MAGENTA
1 - 199
100
-36 -34 -32
YELLOW
1 - 199
100
-30 -28 -26 -24 -22
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained. For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the adjustment value, refer to the following. (Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the adjustment value) a) Measurement of the shift amount * Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern Use the visually highest color density section as the center, and measure the shift amount. (Example) The measurement value of the figure is "14. * Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from that. The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as 120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks corresponds to 40. (Example) In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus polarity, and the measurement is "40. A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A - C.
C 40
Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)

A
-120 120
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
B
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34 -32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
b)
Adjustment value calculation Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new adjustment value. (When the shift amount (correction value) is plus) Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value) (When the shift amount (correction value) is minus) Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift amount (correction value)
-120 120
-120 120
-120 120
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34 -32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34 -32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 -38 -36 -34 -32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Previous value before adjustment A: 100 B: 112 C: 95
New adjustment value A: 46 (=100-54) B: 126 (=112+14) C: 125 (=95+30)
4)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion

adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the copy image is distorted. 5)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B. If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures. Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which is not in contact. Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment

Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table glass. (For details, refer to [C]-3.) 1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps. 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment

1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
4)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will do.)
L = 10mm L
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference position as shown below.) With the document cover open, make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
5)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
6)
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3) is satisfied. If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment

1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
3)
Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction. If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La
Lb
L = 10mm L
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform the following procedures. 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles, there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are needed.
7)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the specified range. Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range. If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with the above procedures, perform ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)

This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan image distortion adjustment. If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform the following procedure. 4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand and right-hand side images distortions. Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted. 1) 2) Loosen the fixing screw (A). Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Lc
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld There is no difference between the distortion on the right and that on the left. Lc Ld
Ld There is some difference between the distortion on the right and that on the left Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right. (The distortions are balanced.) If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6). If not, perform the following procedures. 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front frame side.
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment

(CCD unit position adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. * The CCD unit has been replaced. Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front frame side, change the overall height. * When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted. * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted. * U2 trouble has occurred.
1)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 $ &&'0$,1 &/26(
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the CCD unit base as shown below.

% &&'68% & 63)0$,1 ' 63)68% ( 63)%0$,1 ) 63)%68%

2.
2)
Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value). Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. * This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is replaced. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
3)
Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* Never loosen the screws marked with X. 4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode, and make a copy. 5) 6) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale length in terms of length. Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main scanning direction from the following formula. Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% (Example) Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the copy image. Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced. 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning direction) to change the installing position. When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%. At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in procedure 9).
B
100mm scale (Orignal)
10
20
90
100
110
1.0mm
Copy image (1mm (1%) shorter than the original)
10
20
90
100
110
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%, repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied. NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the following procedures. 7) 8) Remove the document table glass. Remove the dark box cover.
ADJ 13 RSPF parallelism adjustment

(RSPF mode)
13-A RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode)

1) Make an RSPF height adjustment sheet Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart>
Start of the adjustment
<Work procedure> a) Check section A. Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and close the RSPF unit. Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out the RSPF height adjustment sheet. * Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
A
Is No there a resistance? Yes The section A is lowered too much.
Adjust hinge D until there is a resistance in section A. (Counterclockwise)
b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit. If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF unit.
Turn the hinge D to lift the RSPF so that there is a resistance in the section A. (Clockwise)
c) Adjust the section F. Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance in the section F is 4.9mm - 5.5mm. If not, turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the section F so that the clearance is 4.9mm - 5.5mm. No Is there a resistance in the section B? Yes
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the edge (a) of the right lower cover of the base.
4.9 - 5.5mm
F a
Increase the clearance in the section F until there is a resistance in the section B. However, the max. is 5.5mm.
20mm
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the RSPF unit. Turn it counterclockwise to move down the RSPF unit.
F E
d) Check section B. Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and close the RSPF unit. Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out the RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is in contact, it is O.K.) * Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height adjustment sheet.
Check section B.
B
Is there a resistance? Yes No
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in section E clockwise to adjust.
Check section C.
Adjust hinge E until the separation in section C is deleted. (Counterclockwise) * The bosses in section A and B are excessively pressed. (The right side is separating.)
f) Check section C.
Is there a separating section. Yes
No
End of the adjustment
C b
13-B RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode)

1) 2) Set a test chart (A3) on the RSPF document tray, and make a copy. Measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. If (a) - (b) = 1mm or more, perform the diagonal adjustment.
5)
Close the RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw section. Turn the hex wrench of the RSPF skew adjustment screw to adjust the skew.
a TEST CHART
1 2
A3 size
* In the case of (A), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw counterclockwise. In the case of (B), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw clockwise.
b
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw section.
4)
Raise the RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
2 2 1
6)
Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a)(b)=1mm or less) is satisfied. Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
7)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Document table mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is not properly adjusted. * When the scanner motor is replaced. * When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing position adjustment) must have been completed.
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below. 2)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 $ &&'0$,1 &/26(

% &&'68% & 63)0$,1 ' 63)68% ( 63)%0$,1 ) 63)%68%

2.
2)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 $ &&'0$,1 &/26(
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode, and make a copy.
py magnifition ratio

% &&'68% & 63)0$,1 ' 63)68% ( 63)%0$,1 ) 63)%68%
(Original dimension - Copy dimension) Original dimension
100%

(Example 1) Copy A (Shorter than the original)
10
20
90
100
110
2.
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode, and make a copy.
Scale (Original)
10
20
90
100
110
4)
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%). If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following procedure.
(Example 2) Copy B (Longer than the original)

4)
10
20
90
100
110
5)
Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%. Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%). Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%). If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following procedure.
5)
Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
11) Change the mode to "F: SPFB (SUB)." The current magnification ratio correction value in the back surface sub scanning direction is displayed in 2 digits on the display section. 12) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made. <Adjustment specifications>
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%).
Mode Magnification ratio correction adjustment
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Main/sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the CCD unit must have been properly installed. To execute this adjustment, the OC mode adjustment when copying must have been completed. 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below, and make a normal copy to make a test chart.
Specifi cations Normal 1.0%
SIM SIM.48-1 <Main scanning direction> C: Front surface E: Back surface <Sub scanning direction> D: Front surface F: Back surface
Set value Add 1: 0.1% enlarged. Subtract 1: 0.1% reduced. Default: 50
Setting range 1 - 99
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center

adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. * When the RSPF section is disassembled. * When the RSPF unit is installed. * When the RSPF unit is replaced. * When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart, place the scale in parallel to the sides.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
2) 3)
Set the test chart on the RSPF, and make a normal copy. Compare the outputted copy with the test chart. If it is judged from comparison that an adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. Execute SIM48-1.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 $ &&'0$,1 &/26(
16-A Scan image off-center (Document table mode)

1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).
4)

% &&'68% & 63)0$,1 ' 63)68% ( 63)%0$,1 ) 63)%68%

A=B
2.
5)
Change the mode to "C: SPF (MAIN)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section. Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made. Change the mode to "E: SPFB (MAIN)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section. Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made. Change the mode to "D: SPF (SUB)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
6) 7)
8) 9)
10) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made.
2)
Check the copy image center position. If A - B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode)

NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the paper off-center must have been adjusted properly. 1) Set the test chart for center position adjustment (which is made by yourself) on the RSPF. <Adjustment specifications> Draw a straight line on paper in the scanning direction. 2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray. Compare the printed copy and the test chart. If an adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. Execute SIM50-12.
A'
A' - B' = 1.0mm (100%) B'

3)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 $ 2& &/26(

% 63)6,'( & 63)6,'(

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following procedures. 3) Enter the simulation 50-12 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 $ 2& &/26(
2.

% 63)6,'( & 63)6,'(

4) 5) 6)
Change the mode to "B: SPF (SIDE1)." The current off-center adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section. Enter a set value and press [START] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made. Change the mode to "C: SPF (SIDE2)." The current back surface off-center adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section. Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is saved and a copy is made.
2.
7)
4) 5)
Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. The entered value is set. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
<Adjustment specifications>
Mode Document off-center adjustment Specifications Center position (Default): 3750 pixel SIM SIM50-12 B: Front surface C: Back surface Set value Add 1: Shift to R side by 0.1mm. Subtract 1: Shift to F side by 0.1mm. Setting range 1 - 99
6)
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode and make a copy. Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is satisfied.
4)
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area)

adjustment (Print engine section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * When a paper tray is replaced. * When the paper tray section is disassembled. * When the manual feed tray is replaced. * When the manual feed tray is disassembled. * When the duplex section is disassembled. * When the duplex section is installed or replaced. * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced. * When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. * When the regist roller section is disassembled. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) in advance. 1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 &/26(
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below are in the range of the standard values.
Content X Y Z1/Z2 Lead edge void area Rear edge void area FRONT/REAR void area Standard adjustment value 3.0 1.0mm 2.0 - 5.0mm 2.0 2.0mm
Z1 2.0
2.0mm
X 3.0 1.0mm
Y 2.0 - 5.0mm
Z2 2.0
2.0mm
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired condition, execute the simulation 50-1. (Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. 5) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ 55&$ &/26(

% 55&%&6 & 55&%&6 ' 55&%/&&

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
( 55&%0)7 ) 55&%$'8 * /($'
End of print

+ 6,'( , '(1$ - '(1% . )52175($5
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
2.
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ 55&$

10-key
OK

&/26(

% 55&%&6 & 55&%&6 ' 55&%/&&

2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment target paper feed tray. Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed.
( 55&%0)7 ) 55&%$'8 * /($' + 6,'( , '(1$ - '(1% . )52175($5
3)
2.
: '09/Sep Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/Item Content Document lead edge reference position (OC) Resist Standard motor ON Tray timing Desk adjustLCC ment Manual paper feed ADU Lead edge image loss area setting Side image loss area adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment Rear edge void area adjustment FRONT/REAR void area adjustment OC document offcenter adjustment SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) Manual feed correction value Tray 1 correction value Tray 2 correction value Tray 3 correction value Tray 4 correction value LCC correction value ADU correction value Setting range 0 - 99 Default 50
6)
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image

loss adjustment
18-A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * When the regist roller section is disassembled. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) has been completed normally. 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below. Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide plate. Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead edge can be seen.
B C D E
Lead edge adjustment value
RRCA
RRCB-CS12 RRCB-CS34 RRCB-LCC RRCB-MFT
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50
F G H I
Image loss area setting value Void area adjustment
RRCB-ADU LEAD SIDE DENA DENB FRONT/ REAR OFSET_OC
1 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 30 20 30 30 20 50
J K L
N O P Q R S T
Off-center adjustment Magnification ratio correction Sub scanning direction print area correction value
SCAN_ SPEED_OC
1 - 99
50
DENB-MFT DENB-CS1 DENB-CS2 DENB-CS3 DENB-CS4 DENB-LCC DENB-ADU
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
50 50 50 50 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm. NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as follows: Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust. The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all paper feed tray. That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for each paper tray. After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check that the void area is within the specified range. Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
: '09/Sep Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ 55&$ &/26(
2)
Display/Item R S T Sub scanning direction print area correction value DENB-CS4 DENB-LCC DENB-ADU
Content Tray 4 correction value LCC correction value ADU correction value
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default 50 50 50

% 55&%&6 & 55&%&6 ' 55&%/&& ( 55&%0)7 ) 55&%$'8 * /($' + 6,'( , '(1$ - '(1% . )52175($5

4)
Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% mode. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% copy scale. If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. (Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
2.
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ 55&$ &/26(
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Scale image 3.0mm position Paper lead edge

% 55&%&6 & 55&%&6 ' 55&%/&& ( 55&%0)7 ) 55&%$'8 * /($' + 6,'( , '(1$ - '(1% . )52175($5

5mm 10mm
100%
2.
3)
Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Display/Item Content Document lead edge reference position (OC) Standard Tray Resist Desk motor ON LCC timing Manual adjustpaper ment feed ADU Lead edge image loss area setting Side image loss area adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment Rear edge void area adjustment FRONT/REAR void area adjustment OC document offcenter adjustment SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) Manual feed correction value Tray 1 correction value Tray 2 correction value Tray 3 correction value Setting range 0 - 99 Default 50
5mm
10mm
200%
B C D E F G H I
Lead edge adjustment value
RRCA
5)
Image loss adjustment When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, change these adjustment items.
Paper lead edge
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50
RRCB-ADU LEAD SIDE DENA DENB FRONT/ REAR OFSET_OC
1 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 30 20
Copy area Maginification ratio : 400%
1
30 30
4 5mm
10mm
J K L
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

20 Display /Item LEAD Content Image loss adjustment Lead edge image loss adjustment Side image loss adjustment Adjust ment range 0 - 99 Default 30 Standard adjustment value 3.0 1.0mm 2.0 1.0mm
N O P Q
Off-center adjustment Magnifica tion ratio correction Sub scanning direction print area correction value
50 1 - 99 50
SCAN_ SPEED_OC DENB-MFT DENB-CS1 DENB-CS2 DENB-CS3
SIDE 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 50 50 50 50
0 - 99
20
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image loss is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
: '09/Sep [Note] After completion of the RSPF scan position adjustment, execute the RSPF lead edge adjustment (for both sides). Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is obtained.
18-B Adjust the original scan start position (Adjust the scanner read position in RSPFmode front face scan) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The scan control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. * The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. * The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The RSPF section has been disassembled. * The RSPF unit has been replaced. This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in RSPF-mode front face scan. An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated by RSPF (front-face) mode scan. 1) Make a copy in RSPF (front-face) mode, and make sure that the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image is free from shadows.
18-C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode)

1) Place a scale on the OC table as shown in the figure below.
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart, place the scale in parallel to the sides.
2) 3)
Make a copy. Use the output copy as the original document, and make a copy of it from the RSPF. Check the output result. If an adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. Execute SIM50-6.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63) &/26(
Papar lead edge

4)
Image area
$ 6,'(

% 6,'( & /($'B('*(6,'( ' )5217B5($56,'( ( 75$,/B('*(6,'( ) /($'B('*(6,'(
Shadow image of RSPF

If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following steps. 2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 53-8. Press the [MANUAL] key. 5)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17 $872 0$18$/ &/26(
* )5217B5($56,'( + 75$,/B('*(6,'( , 2)6(7B63) - 2)6(7B63) . 6&$1B63(('B63) / 6&$1B63(('B63) 2.
Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that an image similar to the image adjusted in the previous OC image lead edge position is outputted.
<Set range and default value of each set value>

Item A SIDE1 Display Item Descriptions Front surface document scan start position adjustment (CCD) Back surface document scan start position adjustment (CCD) Front surface lead edge image loss quantity setting Front surface side image loss quantity setting Front surface rear edge image loss quantity setting Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
B

SIDE2
1 - 99
50
3)
Enter the adjustment value and press the Start key. <<Description of adjustment display>>
C Set range 1 - 99 Default value 25 Image loss quantity setting SIDE1 LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1) FRONT_REAR (SIDE1) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
0 - 99
20
Item
Display item ADJUST VALUE
Description RSPF scan position adjustment
0 - 99
20
0 - 20
30
When the set value is increased by 1, the distance from the home position to the RSPF scan position is increased. When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by 0.1mm. * Since the RSPF scan position distance are changed, RRCA is not changed by the adjustment value. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 41
: '09/Sep
Setting range 0 - 99 Default value 20
2)
Item F
Display Item Image loss quantity setting SIDE2 LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Descriptions Back surface lead edge image loss quantity setting Back surface side image loss quantity setting Back surface rear edge image loss quantity setting
Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in it.
Display/Item Content Printer lead edge image position adjustment Rear edge void area adjustment FRONT/REAR void area adjustment Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment correction value LCC rear edge void area adjustment correction value ADU rear edge void area adjustment correction value Number of print Tray Manual selection paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Duplex Yes print No selection Setting range 1 - 99 Default 30
0 - 99
20
DEN-C
0 - 20
30
B C D
DEN-B FRONT/REAR DENB-MFT
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
30 20 50
A, B: The greater the value is, the slower the scanning timing is. C - H: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. A - H: 1STEP=0.1mm The SPF rear edge image loss is provided against the shade. The default value is 0.
DENB-CS1
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS2
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS3
1 - 99
50
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position

adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the regist roller section is disassembled. * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer mode. 1) Enter the simulation 50-5 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 $ '(1& &/26(
DENB-CS4
1 - 99
50
DENB-LCC
1 - 99
50
DENB-ADU
1 - 99
50
K L
MULTI COUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO
1 - 999 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1
1 2 (CS1)
DUPLEX
0-1
1 (NO)

% '(1% & )52175($5 ' '(1%0)7 ( '(1%&6 ) '(1%&6 * '(1%&6 + '(1%&6 , '(1%/&& - '(1%$'8 . 08/7,&2817 / 3$3(5&6 (;(&87( 2.
3) 4)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed. Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is in the standard adjustment value range. Standard adjustment value: 3.0 2.0mm

10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
3.0

2.0mm
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 $ '(1&
&/26(

% '(1% & )52175($5 ' '(1%0)7 ( '(1%&6 ) '(1%&6 * '(1%&6 + '(1%&6 , '(1%/&& - '(1%$'8 . 08/7,&2817 / 3$3(5&6 (;(&87( 2.

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
: '09/Sep Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key. Change the adjustment value. Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm. (The following items affect the copy color balance/density adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently. When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.) 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
Adjustment item list Adjust the developing doctor gap Adjust the developing roller main pole position ADJ Adjust the main charger 4A grid voltage ADJ Adjust the developing 4B bias voltage ADJ Transfer voltage 4C adjustment Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment) CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) Adjusting high voltage values 8-2 8-1 8-6 Simulation
5) 6)
Job No ADJ 1 ADJ 2 ADJ 4
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density

adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment * After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/ density adjustment must be executed. * Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/ density adjustment Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment, check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color balance/density adjustment have been completed. The importance levels of them are shown below. (The following items affect the copy color balance/density adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execution of the image quality adjustments.) 1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
Adjustment Item List Image density sensor, image registration sensor adjustment Color image sensor calibration Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image registration sensor adjustment Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) ADJ 7A ADJ 7B ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment (Print engine section) ADJ 10A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Auto adjustment) Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) ADJ 5A ADJ 5B Simulation 44-13 44-2
ADJ 12 ADJ 20A
63-3
(Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy color balance/density adjustment) Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the servicing conditions. Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures depending on the actual conditions. There are following four, major cases. 1) 2) 3) 4) When installing When a periodic maintenance is performed. When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed. (When a consumable part is replaced.) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed. (Without replacement of a consumable part)
Job No ADJ 5
(2) Copy color balance and density check (Note) Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to execute the following jobs. * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) (Method) Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11), and check that they are proper. a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the color copy mode To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/ UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy. At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center). In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color. b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual). In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
ADJ 6 ADJ 7
64-1/61-4 50-22
OPC drum phase adjustment
44-31
50-22
ADJ 10B
50-20
ADJ 10C
50-21
: '09/Sep
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)] In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure the following conditions.
2
20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the CCD unit is replaced. * When a U2 trouble is occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326 FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is slightly copied. 1 2 3 4 SHARP gray chart
(1) Note before adjustment

8 9
10
SHARP GRAY CHART

5 6 7 W
1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from dirt and scratches. If they are dirty, clean them. If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
2)
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is slightly copied. 1 2 3 4 SHARP gray chart
(2) Adjustment procedures

8 9
10
SHARP GRAY CHART

5 6 7 W
1)
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table. Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on the left side.
Patch 3 is copied. Patch 1 is not copied.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/ UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)] In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart, check to insure the following conditions.
(Color copy)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly copied or not copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment method using the SIT chart. NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document table. UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2)
Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
20-B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is replaced. * The CCD unit has been replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. a. General

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17 2& &/26(
&&&555 000*** <<<%%%
(;(&87( 2&

NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature and low humidity.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 4624 or the user program automatically. (When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments of all the copy modes are revised.) There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment. 1) 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24 is used.) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.) The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to reduce the number of service calls. If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance. When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the machine environment is greatly changed, this function does not work effectively. On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining the normal color balance. To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully understood. b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 1) 2) 3) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly. Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
: '09/Sep
c. Adjustment procedure (Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM46-24) procedure flowchart Start
Execute ADJ20B Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic density). Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Automatic selection) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1) Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically performed. Cancel SIM46-24
Automatic color balance target change Change the factory color balance and density target which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11) NO
Check the color balance and density adjustment result.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326 FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density. Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Though the factory color balance and density target (available in 3 kinds) is changed, satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained (SIM63-11), or the service target is selected.
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level?
NO
YES
YES Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly performed. (*3) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (SIM44-21) Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density.
Execute ADJ20C (Manual copy color balance and density adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21). (*2) *1: When the copy color balance and density are customized and registered as the service target, select the service target. *2: If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained with ADJ20C (Manual copy color balance and density adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for any problems. *3: If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not properly made, satisfactory color balance and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for any problems. *4: If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
NO
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level? YES
End
1)
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode.
Remark: (Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the color balance auto adjustment menu.)

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance auto adjustment; Factory and Service. [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of the above two. Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM 63-11.) Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable) When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping. For the service target, the customized color balance gamma can be registered with SIM 63-7. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel. According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the half tone image correction is performed.
(;(&87(
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in procedure 2) on the document table. Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
3)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$ &/26(
2.
Remark: After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed. Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed.
4)
Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is customized with the manual color balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the service target.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 &203/(7('7+,6352&('85( &/26(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( 7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@ &/26(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
: '09/Sep Check the color balance and density. There are following three methods in the color balance and density check. (Method 1) Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch image is within the following specifications.
Low density High density Y M C Low density High density Y M C Bk
Q (Max) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
6)
Bk CMY blend
Q (Max) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and BK are not copied. 1) The max. density section is not blurred. 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and BK are not copied. 1) The max. density section is not blurred. 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. Patch B may not be copied. Patch A must not be copied. (Method 2) By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be checked more precisely.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color correction table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) (Method 3) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.) When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 20C). Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 20C). 7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
(;(&87(
: '09/Sep It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. (Normal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 5(68/7 &/26(
20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is replaced. * The CCD unit has been replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
&203/(7(
5(68/7
(;(&87(
a. General (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 (55256(1625$'-8670(17 &/26(
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust the copy density (15 point for each color) of CMYK. This is used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance. In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment. If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better efficiency. b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(;(&87(
1) 2) 3)
The print engine section must have been properly adjusted. The CCD gamma must have been properly adjusted. Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 8)

2
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.) If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures.
9)
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) (SIM44-26)
2
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/ density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.) Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be another cause. Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the beginning. If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 20C) (Manual adjustment).
: '09/Sep
c. Adjustment procedure
Start
Execute ADJ21B (Copy color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (*1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A3 (11 " x 17 ") paper. (Automatic selection) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment check pattern is printed.) Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K). Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10 key. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment check pattern is printed.) Check the patch color balance and density in the process gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly adjusted.)
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level? YES Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
NO
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (SIM44-21) Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density.
NO
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the half tone image correction is properly set. (*2) Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (SIM44-21) Perform the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density.
NO
*1: If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained with the adjustment, check the print engine for any problems. *2: If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic copy color balance adjustment. (SIM63-7) End
: '09/Sep Enter the SIM46-21 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ $ 32,17 &/26(
1)
Patch B may not be copied. Patch A must not be copied. When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color balance stated above. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color correction table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) 4)
(;(&87( 2.

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 <
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and select the adjustment point with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient way of adjustment. Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX) approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
5)
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ $ 32,17
&/26(

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color balance is satisfactory. If not, execute the following procedures.
6)
3)
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG0326FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.)
7)
Low density High density ; / % $M CMY Blend

3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. (Normal end (Auto transition))
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and BK is very slightly copied. 3) Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and BK are not copied. 1) The max. density section is not blurred. 4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 5(68/7

&/26(
&203/(7(
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 51
5(68/7 (;(&87(
: '09/Sep (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 5(68/7
&/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 (55256(1625$'-8670(17 &/26(
(5525.&0<
5(68/7
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment data as the reference data for the half tone correction. Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure. When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the operation is started. 8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. 9)
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG0326FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/ density check.) If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified level, there may be another cause. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the beginning. NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the color balance as the service target. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required. If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in the next color balance adjustment. In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance. (Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service color balance target) a. General When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. There are following three kinds of the target. Factory color balance (gamma) target Service color balance (gamma) target User color balance (gamma) target In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set to a desired level. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 46-21). * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. * When the user requests for customizing the color balance. * When the service color balance target gamma is judged as improper. Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
(;(&87(
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. (Normal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 5(68/7 &/26(
&203/(7(
5(68/7
(;(&87(
Type Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
Descriptions There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction. This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it. This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1)) If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance to the factory color balance target
Type User color balance (gamma) target
Descriptions Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24) Factory color balance target (DEF1)
Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three kinds of color balance targets. Factory color balance target (DEF1) Factory color balance target (DEF2) Factory color balance target (DEF3)
Service color balance target
Factory setting
Factory color balance target (one of DEF1 - 3)
Service color balance target (Unique)
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Execute SIM 63-8. (The service color balance target is the same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment Color balance target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24) By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target. Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8 Factory color balance target (DEF2)
+b* Direction of Yellow
Factory color balance target (DEF2) = Service color balance target/Color balance target for the user color balance adjustment SIM63-8 Factory color balance target (DEF1)
Hue
Direction of Green
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance target/Color balance target for the user color balance adjustment
Item
DEF1 (A)
Content
The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Default
DEF1
Direction of Red
DEF2
DEF3
Direction of Blue
Factory color balance target (DEF3)
SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly. (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the purpose of registration) This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is customized with SIM 46-21. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required. After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data by using adjustment pattern that was printed in this mode. By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the same color balance target to another machine. It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from discoloration and dirt. The service color balance target data are basically registered immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be judges as follows. When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting the service color balance target in SIM 46-24 is unsatisfactory or abnormal. In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be improper. This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously b. Setting procedure (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the service color balance target) 1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (adjustment pattern). If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an optional color balance is requested by the user, make an adjustment. 2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&( %&'() *+,-. 012 &/26(
&
<
6(783

3) 4)
Press [SETUP] key. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document table. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM 64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the printed pattern is normal. (When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press [EXECUTE] key to print.) A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another machine can be used. Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image (adjustment pattern). If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11, be sure to execute this procedure. 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&( &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
2) 3)
Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&( 6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@ &/26(
The service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low density and high density part at each copy density individually. * When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the copy by each the copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the copy mode individually.
(;(&87(
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request from the user, execute this adjustment. 1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.

The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&( 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1* &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@

$ $872
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
&/26(

% 7(;7 & 7(;735,17('3+272 ' 7(;73+272 ( 35,17('3+272 ) 3+272*5$3+ * 0$3 + /,*+7 , 7(;7&23<72&23<

(;(&87(
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as abnormal. In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again. 7) Press [OK] key. The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same color balance as the factory color balance target) This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
/ 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17 /2: +,*+ 2.
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@ $ $872 &/26(

% 7(;7 & 7(;735,17('3+272 ' 7(;73+272 ( 35,17('3+272 ) 3+272*5$3+ * 0$3 + /,*+7 , 7(;7&23<72&23< - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2:
+,*+
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item Content Auto Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map Light document Text (Copy document) Text/Printed Photo (Copy document) Printed Photo (Copy document) Text (Color tone enhancement) Text/Printed Photo (Color tone enhancement) Text/Photograph (Color tone enhancement) Printed Photo (Color tone enhancement) Photograph (Color tone enhancement) Map (Color tone enhancement) Single color Single color (Copy document) Two-color (Red/Black) copy Two-color (Red/Black) copy (Copy document) LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is obtained. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
A B C D E F G H I J
AUTO TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP LIGHT TEXT (COPY TO COPY) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) TEXT/PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) PHOTOGRAPH (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) MAP (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) SINGLE COLOR SINGLE COLOR (COPY TO COPY) TWO COLOR TWO COLOR (COPY TO COPY)
20-E Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When there is necessity to change copy density of the low density and high density part at each copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the copy by each the copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the copy mode individually. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request from the user, execute this adjustment. 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@ $ $872 &/26(
K L
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

% $872 & 7(;7 ' 7(;735,17('3+272 ( 7(;73+272 ) 35,17('3+272 * 3+272*5$3+ + 0$3 , 7(;7&23<72&23< - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< / /,*+7

R S T U
/2:
+,*+
2.
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@ $ $872 &/26(
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" mode and change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.

% $872 & 7(;7 ' 7(;735,17('3+272 ( 7(;73+272 ) 35,17('3+272 * 3+272*5$3+ + 0$3 , 7(;7&23<72&23< - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< / /,*+7

/2:
+,*+
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item Content Auto 1 Auto 2 Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map Text (Copy document) Text/Printed Photo (Copy document) Printed Photo (Copy document) Light document LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
1)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17 7(;7 0$3 7(;73573+272 /,*+7 35,17('3+272 &23<25* 3+2727(;73+272 &/26(
A B C D E F G H I J
AUTO1 AUTO2 TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP TEXT (COPY TO COPY) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) LIGHT
(;(&87(

TEXT

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@ $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
K L
10-key
OK
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" mode and change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@ $ 32,17

&/26(

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is obtained. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@ $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma by each the copy mode individually. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each color copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. 2) 3) 4)
* 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color key. Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Adjustment value range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 Default 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
Item/Display K L M N O P Q POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17
Density level (Point) Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17
Adjustment value range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755
Default 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
2)
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17 Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Adjustment value range 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 Default 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased. When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed out. The color balance at each density level (point) and the density can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased. When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed out. The density at each density level (point) can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it.
20-G Monochrome copy density/gamma adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When there is necessity to change the gamma in monochrome mode. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. 1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3* $ 32,17 &/26(
20-H Condition setting of document density reading operation (exposure) in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally not required)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for document density in monochrome auto copy mode. When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of document, change the setting. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When a copy with correct density is not obtained in monochrome auto mode. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 (;(&87( 2.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

(;32685(02'(6(783%:$( $(B02'( $(B6723B&23< $(B6723B)$; $(B6723B6&$1 $(B),/7(5 $(B:,'7+ 02'( 5($/7,0( 2)) 5($/7,0( 62)7 )8// 02'( 6723 21 6723 1250$/ 3$57 35(6&$1 6+$53 35(6&$1
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3* $ 32,17
&/26(

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 (;(&87( 2.

2)
Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART", in some cases.
Content Auto exposure mode Auto B/W exposure Stop (for copy) Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX) Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner) Auto exposure filter setting AE exposure width Set value MODE1, MODE2 REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN ON/OFF REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN SOFT NORMAL SHARP FULL PART Default MODE1 STOP
Document table/DSPF mode

3 to 7mm
Display/Item AE_MODE AE_STOP_COPY
AE_STOP_FAX AE_STOP_SCAN
ON STOP
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_FILTER
NORMAL
Document table mode

FULL
3 to 7mm
AE_WIDTH
NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast) MODE2: Normal gamma STOP: Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document, decides the output image density according to the density of that part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.) REALTIME: Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides the output image density according to the density of each part of the document. (The output image density may be not constant at whole area.) PRESCAN: The densities of the all surface of document are once scanned, and the output image density is determined according to the average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the surface.) AE WIDTH FULL: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship to PRESCAN MODE AE WIDTH PART: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship to PRESCAN MODE Operation in monochrome auto copy mode: When the density of the document of the read area is light, output image density is increased by control. When the density of the document of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased by control.
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
DSPF mode
3 to 7mm
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area
20-I Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background density in monochrome auto copy mode. When there is a desire to no reproducing the document background or reproducing the low density image, adjust this. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of the document. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When there is request from the user. 1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67
20-J Copy density adjustment for low density section (Each copy mode) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Use to adjust image density low density area in copy mode. When there is a desire to no reproducing the document background or reproducing the low density image, adjust this. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of the document. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When there is request from the user. 1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %*5(029($'-8670(17 $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &/26(
% &2/25&23<7(;7 & &2/25&23<35,17('3+272 ' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+ ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272 ) &2/25&23<0$3 * &2/25&23</,*+7 + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23< - &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23< . &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272 / &2/25386+7(;7 2.
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$ &23<2&
&/26(

% &23<563) & 6&$12& ' 6&$1563) ( )$;2& ) )$;563)

10-key
2.
OK
10-key
6,08/$7,2112 7(67

&/26( %*5(029($'-8670(17 $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
OK
% &2/25&23<7(;7 & &2/25&23<35,17('3+272 ' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+ ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272 ) &2/25&23<0$3 * &2/25&23</,*+7 + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23< - &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23< . &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272 / &2/25386+7(;7 2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* $ &23<2& &/26(

% &23<563) & 6&$12& ' 6&$1563) ( )$;2& ) )$;563)

2)
Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item Content Text print (color copy) Text (color copy) Printed photo (color copy) Photograph (color copy) Text/Photograph (color copy) map (color copy) Light document (color copy) Copy document, Text print (color copy) Copy document, Text (color copy) Copy document, Printed photo (color copy) Set value 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 Default 3 3 5 5 3 5 6 5
2.
A B C D E F G H
2) 3)
Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: RSPF" with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
Display/Item A B C D E F COPY : FOC COPY : RSPF SCAN : OC SCAN : RSPF FAX : OC FAX : RSPF Content Copy mode (for OC) Copy mode (for RSPF) Scanner mode (for OC) Scanner mode (for RSPF) FAX mode (for OC) FAX mode (for RSPF) Set value 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 Default 196 196 196 196 196 196
COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO COLOR COPY : TEXT COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO COLOR COPY : MAP COLOR COPY : LIGHT COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY) COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
1-9
1-9
Display/Item K L M N O P COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ PRINTED PHOTO COLOR PUSH:TEXT COLOR PUSH:PRINTED PHOTO COLOR PUSH:PHOTOGRAPH COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ PHOTO COLOR PUSH:MAP
Content Text print (color PUSH) Text (color PUSH) Printed photo (color PUSH) Photograph (color PUSH) Text/Photograph (color PUSH) map (color PUSH)
Set value 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9
Default 3 3 5 5 3 5
2)

Content Black character edge gamma skew adjustment Black character edge density adjustment Color character edge gamma skew adjustment Color character edge density adjustment Text/Map mode gamma adjustment (Text/Map mode) Text/Map mode density adjustment (Text/Map mode) Adjust ment range 1 - 99 Default 50
Display/Item (Copy mode) A BLACK TEXT (SLOPE) BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPT) COLOR TEXT (SLOPE) COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPT) ED TEXT (SLOPE) ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
B C
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, adjust by ADJ20D and ADJ20E.
D E
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
1 - 99
50
20-K Color copy text, line image edge gamma, density adjustment / Text Map mode gamma, density adjustment
(Adjustment 1) By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally. With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and lines can be varied. Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode (manual). This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is changed. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 $ %/$&.7(;76/23( &/26(
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the gamma at the line edge section is changed. When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge is decreased. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are increased, the image density at the line edge section is increased, and vice versa.
4) 5) 6)
Press [OK] key. Press [Close] key to exit the simulation. Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode (manual), check the copy. When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin character and line image. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37 & &2/257(;76/23( ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ( ('7(;76/23( ) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

2.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 $ %/$&.7(;76/23( &/26(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37 & &2/257(;76/23( ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ( ('7(;76/23( ) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

2.
(Adjustment 2) This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in the Text/Map copy mode. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy mode images. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 $ %/$&.7(;76/23( &/26(
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
20-L Color document reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow image when printing color document that included the red/yellow image in monochrome copy mode. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red image in case of making a color copy of the color document in monochrome copy mode. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37 & &2/257(;76/23( ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ( ('7(;76/23( ) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

2.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 $ 5*
10-key
OK

% %*

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 $ %/$&.7(;76/23( &/26(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37 & &2/257(;76/23( ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ( ('7(;76/23( ) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

10-key
OK
DEFAULT

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 $ 5* &/26(
2.

% %*
2)

Content Black character edge gamma skew adjustment Black character edge density adjustment Color character edge gamma skew adjustment Color character edge density adjustment Text/Map mode gamma adjustment (Text/Map mode) Text/Map mode density adjustment (Text/Map mode) Adjust ment range 1 - 99 Default 50

Display/Item (Copy mode) A BLACK TEXT (SLOPE) BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPT) COLOR TEXT(SLOPE) COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPT) ED TEXT (SLOPE)
'()$8/7
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
B C
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
EXECUTE
NO

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 $ 5* &/26(
D E
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50

% %*

ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
1 - 99
50
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed. When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
YES

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 $ 5* &/26(

% %*

4) 5) 6)
Press [OK] key. Press [CLOSE] key to cancel the simulation mode. Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check the output print.
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2)

Display/Item (Copy mode) A B R/G B/G Content Gray making setting (R/G) Gray making setting (B/G) Adjust ment range 0 - 99 0 - 99 Default 21 0
2) 3)
Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode key. Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Select button (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 Content Text print (Manual) Default (+) LUT1
Display/Item (Copy mode) MANUAL TEXT PRT
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
TEXT
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
4) 5)
Press [OK] key. Make a copy in monochrome text/printed phto copy mode (manual), check the copy. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO
Printed photo (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Photograph (Manual)
NORMAL
20-M Black ingredient amount adjustment in color copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (except character and line image) As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part changes. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When reproduction as solid of black image is required. * To make the black background and the dark area darker * When change of gradation of the shade part is required. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode.
TEXT PHOTO
Text/ Photograph (Manual)
NORMAL
MAP
Map (Manual)
(+) LUT1
CP ORG/ TEXT PRT
Copy document/ Text printed (Manual) Copy document/ Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
COPY ORG/ TEXT
(+) LUT1

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 7(;7357 /87 /87 7(;7 /87 /87 35,17('3+272 /87 /87 3+272 /87 /87 7(;73+272 /87 /87 0$3 /87 /87 0$18$/ $872 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ &/26(
COPY ORG/ PHOTO
Copy document/ Printed photo (Manual) Light document (Manual)
(+) LUT1
LIGHT ORIGINAL
(+) LUT1
(-)LUT2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 7(;7357 /87 /87 7(;7 /87 /87 35,17('3+272 /87 /87 3+272 /87 /87 7(;73+272 /87 /87 0$3 /87 /87 0$18$/ $872 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ &/26(
Display/Item (Copy mode) AUTO AUTO0
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO4
AUTO5
AUTO6
Select button (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2
Content Auto mode judgment 0
Default (+) LUT1
20-N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color auto copy mode.
Auto mode judgment 1
(+) LUT1
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image shade part. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When changing the sharpness of copy image in auto copy mode. (obtain crispy image)(decreases moire)
NORMAL
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image shade part (for decrease of asperity) * To make the black background and the dark area darker. * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
NORMAL
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17 $ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872 &/26(
(+) LUT1
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5 & &2/25&23<&0<21 ' &2/25&23<.21 ( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21 ) &2/25&23<&0<21 * &2/25&23<.21 + %:&23<21
(+) LUT1

(+) LUT1
, &2/25386+5*%21 - %:386+21
2.
4)
Press the black ingredient amount select button. When reproduction as solid of black image is required: Selects + button When there is desire to darken copy of black image: Selects + button When a dark color image is reproduced in the black: Selects - button
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
10-key
OK

&/26( &2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17 $ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5 & &2/25&23<&0<21 ' &2/25&23<.21 ( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21 ) &2/25&23<&0<21 * &2/25&23<.21 + %:&23<21 , &2/25386+5*%21 - %:386+21

5)
Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
2.
2)

Display/Item Content H L AUTO SOFT CENTER HIGH OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto copy mode Strong emphasis Soft emphasis Auto SOFT CENTER HIGH OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Setting range 1 2 3 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Default 3 (Auto) NOTE Apply to auto copy mode only
SCREEN FILTER LEVEL
AUTOMODE FILTER LEVEL COLOR COPY:CMY COLOR COPY:K SINGLE COLOR:CMY 2 COLOR COPY:CMY 2 COLOR COPY:K B/W COPY COLOR PUSH:RGB B/W PUSH
Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto copy mode Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in sigle color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in 2-color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color mode Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan monochrome mode
2 (CENTER)
C D
1 (ON) 1 (ON)
Available for the high density image except text and line image
E F G H I
1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1(ON)
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
3)
Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter process mode). Adjustment item A: When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pattern state automatically and adjusts sharpness. Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large numeric value to decrease moire. Adjustment item B: Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce moire. Adjustment item C - J: When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) 5)
Press [OK] key. Make a copy and check the copy image.
20-O Copy high density part density correction setting (Prevents against tone gap) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in color mode, or if there is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, change the setting. This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case of following, change the setting. * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. * When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density. * The CCD unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. a. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'( $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
Display/Item E YELLOW MAX TARGET BLACK MAX TARGET
Content Scanner target value for YELLOW maximum density correction Scanner target value for BLACK maximum density correction
Default 500
0 - 999
500
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone gap is better. * In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 to item A and B. The tone gap may occur in high density part. NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If these values is changed, density of the high density part is changed. If these values is changed, be sure to execute the copy color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
20-P Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in the single color copy mode to the user's request. The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each color. This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there is a request from the user.
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

2.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is required in the following cases. * The CCD unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'( $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
a. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 $ 5(' &/26(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

% *5((1 & %/8( ' &<$1 ( 0$*(17$ ) <(//2:

2.
2)
Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

Display/Item Content CMY engine maximum density correction mode Enable 1 CMY engine maximum density correction mode Disable 0 K engine maximum density correction mode Enable 1 K engine maximum density correction mode DIsable Scanner target value for CYAN maximum density correction Scanner target value for MAGENTA maximum density correction 0 Setting range Default
& 0 < 2.
CMY (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
10-key
0-1 0
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 $ 5('
OK

&/26(
K (0: ENABLE 1: DISABLE)

% *5((1 & %/8( ' &<$1

0-1
( 0$*(17$ ) <(//2:
CYAN MAX TARGET MAGENTA MAX TARGET
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
&
<
2.
2) 3) 4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key. Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Display/Item A B C D E F RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN
Adjustmen t range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
C 0 255 255 0 0 255
Default M 255 0 200 0 255 0
Y 200 255 0 255 0 0
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D (COPY HIGH)".
Item/Display A B C D COPY : LOW SCAN : LOW FAX : LOW COPY : HIGH Content RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF scanner mode exposre adjustment (Low density side) PSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF copy copy mcde exposure adjustment (High density side) RSPF scanner mode exposre adjustment (Low density side) RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (High density side) Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default 48 48 48 53
5) 6) 7)
Press [OK] key. Press [Close] key to exit the simulation. Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the copy.
E F
SCAN : HIGH FAX : HIGH
1 - 99 1 - 99
53 53
20-Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case of following, change the setting. * When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table mode. * When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high. * When the RSPF unit is replaced. * When the RSPF unit is disassembled. * The CCD unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. a. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. In case of increase of image density, input large numeric value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small numeric value.
4) 5) 6)
Press [OK] key. Press [Close] key to exit the simulation. Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the copy.
20-R Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto adjustment enable setting and adjustment)
a. General

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(1763) $ &23</2:
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53. NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy color balance and density and the user's operational ability are judged enough to execute the adjustment. When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.

% 6&$1/2: C )$;/2: D &23<+,*+ ( 6&$1+,*+ F )$;+,*+

2.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the PCU PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(1763) $ &23</2: &/26(

% 6&$1/2: C )$;/2: D &23<+,*+ ( 6&$1+,*+ F )$;+,*+

2.
2)
b. Setting procedure 1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left side.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21 $ <(612 &/26(
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color patch image (adjustment pattern).

Thin line
2.
6)
10-key
OK
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment, the display returns to the original operation screen.
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21 $ <(612 &/26(
adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment (Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/ density adjustment) Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment, the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been completed properly. (This adjustment is required in the following cases.) * Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color balance/density adjustment. * After the copy color balance/density adjustment. (2) Printer color balance/density check (Note) Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to execute the following procedures in advance. * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)

2.
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not displayed in the user program mode. (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment)) Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly. 1) 2) 3) 4) Enter the system setting mode. Enter the copy setting mode. Press the auto color calibration key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(Procedure) a. When the PCL mode is supported: Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The print test pattern is printed.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. Patch B may not be copied. Patch A must not be copied. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)

a. General The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user program. (When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments of all the print modes are revised.) There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment. 1) 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is used.) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.) The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to reduce the number of service calls. If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI model) Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black patch to check the color balance.
*1 Low density High density ; / % $M CMY Blend
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the machine environment is greatly changed, this function does not work effectively. On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining the normal color balance. To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully understood. b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 1) 2) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed properly. Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and BK is very slightly copied. Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and BK are not copied. 1) The max. density section is not blurred. 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 69
c. Adjustment procedure (Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment). Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17" ) paper. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1) Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically performed.) Cancel SIM67-24.
Automatic adjustment color balance target change Change the factory color balance and density target which is available in 3 kinds.(SIM67-26) NO
Though the factory color balance and density target (available in 3 kinds) is changed, satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained (SIM67-26), or the service target is selected.
NO
PCL printer? YES YES Execute ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density adjustment. (*2) Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density. Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density.
NO
YES
*1: When the color balance and density are customized and registered as the service target, select the service target. *2: If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for any problems. *3: If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained with ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for any problems. *4: If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End
1)
Remark: (Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the color balance auto adjustment menu.) There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance auto adjustment; Factory and Service. [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of the above two. Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM 67-27.) Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable) When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping. For the service target, the customized color balance gamma can be registered with SIM 67-28. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(
(;(&87(
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in procedure 2) on the document table. Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
3)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$ &/26(
PRINTER CALIBRATION
*1
*1
2.
Remark: After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This operation takes several minutes. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed. Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 &203/(7('7+,6352&('85( &/26(
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. 4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is customized with the manual color balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the service target.
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( 7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@ &/26(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
6)
Check the color balance and density. There are two methods to check the color balance and density. (Method 1) Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch image is within the following specifications.
*1 Low density High density ; / % $M
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) (Method 3) Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure cannot be used.) Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color balance and density. Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The print test pattern is printed out. Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.) When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26 to change the factory color balance target and repeat the procedures from 1). If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 20C). When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 21C). Cancel SIM 67-25. For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the adjustment is completed. If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. Patch B may not be copied. Patch A must not be copied. *1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. (Method 2) By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25 and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be checked more precisely.
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjustment. * After the copy color balance/density adjustment. a. General The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust the printer density (17 pts for each color) of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance. In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment. If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better efficiency. b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 1) 2) After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment. Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and BK is very slightly copied. Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and BK are not copied. The max. density section is not blurred. 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 72
c. Adjustment procedure
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure flowchart (SIM67-25) Start
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1) Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A3 (11 " x 17 ") paper. (Automatic selection.) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Check the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a target adjustment color with the color keys (C,M,Y,K). Select a target adjustment density level with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10 key. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Check the patch color balance and density in the process gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly adjusted.)
NO
YES Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
NO
PCL printer?
YES Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density adjustment result. (*2) Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density. Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density.
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level? YES Set the service target for the automatic printer color balance adjustment. (SIM67-27) End
NO *1: If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained with the adjustment, check the print engine for any problems. *2: If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for any problems.
1)
3)
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color balance is satisfactory. If not, execute the following procedures.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $ 32,17 &/26(
*1 Low density High density ; / %

(;(&87( 2.

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

&
<
$M CMY Blend
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed.
(;(&87( 2.
&
<
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level. Patch B may not be copied.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $ 32,17 &/26(
Patch A must not be copied. When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color balance stated above. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and select the adjustment point with the scroll key. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient way of adjustment. Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX) approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
5)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
6)
Cancel SIM 67-25. For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the adjustment is completed.
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service color balance target) a. General When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. There are following three kinds of the target. Factory color balance (gamma) target Service color balance (gamma) target User color balance (gamma) target In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set to a desired level. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the user requests for customizing the color balance. * When the service color balance target gamma is judged as improper. Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Factory color balance (gamma) target Descriptions There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction. This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it. This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduIf the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color balance targetction (DEF1)) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance target is also changed accordingly.
7)
Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print color balance and the density.
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure cannot be used.) Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The print test pattern is printed. 8) If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register the color balance as the service target. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required. If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in the next color balance adjustment. In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance. NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register the color balance as the service target. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required. If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in the next color balance adjustment. In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24) Factory color balance target (DEF1)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three kinds of color balance targets. Factory color balance target (DEF1) Factory color balance target (DEF2) Factory color balance target (DEF3)
Factory setting
Service color balance target (Unique)
Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Execute SIM 67-28. (The service color balance target is the same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment Color balance target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24) By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target. Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF2)

+b* Direction of Yellow
Factory color balance target (DEF2) = Service color balance target/Color balance target for the user color balance adjustment SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1) Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance target/Color balance target for theuser color balance adjustment
Direction of Green
Hue
Item

Content
The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting) The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Default
Direction of Red
Direction of Blue
Factory color balance target (DEF3)
SIM67-28
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-28). For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the purpose of registration) This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is customized with SIM 67-25. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required. After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target data by use of the printed adjustment pattern. By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from discoloration and dirt. The service color balance target data are basically registered immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. The correctness of the service color balance target data can be judges as follows. When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or abnormal. In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be improper. This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. b. Setting procedure (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the service color balance target) 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (adjustment pattern). If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an optional color balance is requested by the user, make an adjustment. 2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( %&'() *+,-. /012 &/26(
5)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1* &/26(
(;(&87(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( %$6( %&'() *+,-. /012 &/26(
&
<
5(3($7
2.

The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C, M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as abnormal. In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again. 7) Press [OK] key. The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same color balance as the factory color balance target) This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27. * When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 6726, be sure to execute this procedure.
&
<
6(783

1)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&( &/26(
3) 4)
Press [SETUP] key. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document table. A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another machine can be used. Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image (adjustment pattern). This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
2) 3)
Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target. MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 77
21-C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in printer mode. Adjust to reproduction (not reproduction) setting of the low density image. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When reproduction of low density image is required. When reproduction of low density image is not required, conversely. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When there is request from the user. 1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode.
* The CCD unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. a. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5 $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17 $ $3$7&+,1387 &/26(
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5 $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

2.
10-key
OK
2.
2)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17 $ $3$7&+,1387 &/26(
Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

Display/Item A CMY (0: ENABLE 1:DISABLE) 0 Content CMY engine maximum density correction mode Enable 1 CMY engine maximum density correction mode Disable 0 K engine maximum density correction mode Enable 1 K engine maximum density correction mode Disable Scanner target value for CYAN maximum density correction Scanner target value for MAGENTA maximum density correction Scanner target value for YELLOW maximum density correction Scanner target value for BLACK maximum density correction Setting range 0-1 Default 0

K (0:ENABLE 1: DISABLE)
0-1
2.
2)
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. In case of increase of the image density on low density part, increase the adjustment value. In case of increase of the image density on low density part, increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
C CYAN MAX TARGET MAGENTA MAX TARGET YELLOW MAX TARGET BLACK MAX TARGET
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
21-D Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density part tone gap countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in printer mode. This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case of following, change the setting. * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. * When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density.
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone gap is better. * In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 to item A and B. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
(NOTE) If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density of the high density part is changed. When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment)) Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly. 1) 2) 3) 4) Enter the system setting mode. Enter the printer setting mode. Press the auto color calibration key. Press [EXECUTE] key.
21-E Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
a. General In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-54. CAUTION: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy color balance and density and the user's operational ability are judged enough to execute the adjustment. When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. b. Setting procedure 1) Enter the SIM 26-54 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5 $ <(612 &/26(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left side. At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color patch image (adjustment pattern).
Thin line

6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment, the display returns to the original operation screen.
21-F Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
2.
OK
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is replaced. * When the CCD unit is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5 $ <(612 &/26(
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. a. General SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously. Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in this mode. This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the automatic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM6724). It saves considerable time when compared with performing each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjustment individually.

2.
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration (automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not displayed in the user program mode.
: '09/Sep
b. Adjustment procedures (Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM46-74) procedure flowchart Start Execute ADJ21F Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74) (Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment) Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Automatic selection) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1) Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) (Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1) Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically performed.) (*3) Cancel SIM46-74. Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. Though the factory color balance and density target (available in 3 kinds) is changed, satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained (SIM63-11), or the service target is selected.
Automatic adjustment color balance target change Change the factory color balance and density target which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11) NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density. Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
YES
Are the color balance and density at the specified level? YES
NO Execute ADJ20C (Copy color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21) (*3) *1: When the color balance and density are customized and registered as the service target, select the service target. *2: If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for any problems. *3: If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained with ADJ20C (Copy color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for any problems. *4: If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly performed. (*2) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (*2) Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment). (SIM67-24)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/ UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density.
Automatic color balance target change Change the factory color balance and density (available in 3 kinds). (SIM67-26) NO
NO
Are the color balance and density at the specified level? YES Though the factory color balance and density target (available in 3 kinds) is changed, satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained (SIM67-26), or the service target is selected.
NO
PCL printer? YES
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print check pattern. YES Use SIM67-25 to print the self print check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density. Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density. Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)
Are the color balance and density at the specified level? YES End
NO
1)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode.
4)
Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is customized by the manual color balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the [SERVICE] target.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( 7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@ &/26(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The high density process control is performed, and the copy color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 352&21(;(&87,1* &/26(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed and prints the color balance check patch image. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low density
High density ; / % $M
(;(&87(
3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in procedure 2) on the document table. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern).
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
Remark: (Descriptions on the factory service key button in the color balance automatic adjustment menu) There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance automatic adjustment: the factory target and the service target. FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the above two. Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (The color balance can be selected from the three kinds of fixed ones with SIM63-11.) Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable) When shipping from the factory, the service target gamma data and the factory target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping from the factory. For the service target, a customized color balance gamma can be registered with SIM63-7.
: '09/Sep Press [EXECUTE] key. The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( &21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;( $1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(
5)
*1 Low density High density ; / % $M

3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
(;(&87(
6)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the procedure 5) on the document table. Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern).
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section is not printed. 8) The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is displayed. Press [OK] key. The initial setting of the half tone image correction is performed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
PRINTER CALIBRATION
*1
*1
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
9)
When "COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjustment operation is completed. Cancel SIM46-74.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. 7) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is customized with the manual color balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the service target.
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 3/($6(:$,7 &/26(
12:5(*,67(5,1*7+(1(:7$5*(72)+$/)721(352&2167
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are completed. For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is invalid. 10) Check the copy color balance and density. There are two methods to check the color balance and density. (Method 1)
2.
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically performed and the color balance check patch image is printed out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.)
: '09/Sep When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 20C). Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 20C). (Method 2) By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be checked more precisely. It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.) If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures. 13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (SIM 44-21) 14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) (SIM44-26) 15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/ density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.) Though the procedures 13) - 15) are performed, the copy color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be another cause. Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the beginning. If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 20C) (Manual adjustment). 16) Check the printer color balance and density. There are two methods to check the color balance and density. (Method 1)
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
Low density
High density ; / % $M CMY Blend
3 /CZ
Incase that the PCL mode is supported (for the machines where only the GDI mode is supported, this method cannot be used) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print color balance and the density. Set each setting value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key, and the print test pattern is printed. (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.)
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) 11) Use SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction. (Compulsory execution) Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
(;(&87(
(Method 2) Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and compare the black patch color balance of each process (CMY) with the black patch. This procedure allows checking the color balance adjustment result correctly.
3 /CZ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2
ADJ 22 Adjusting the fusing paper

guide position
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the fusing section is disassembled. * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section. * When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section. * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear edge section. 1) 2) Loosen the fixing screw C. Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up and down direction).
A A B C C B
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual printer mode. (When the color balance target is DEF 1.) If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale. Change the position depending on the situation. * When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position upward (in the arrow direction A). * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow direction A).
ADJ 23 Document size sensor

adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the original size sensor section has been disassembled. * When the original size sensor section has been replaced. * When U2 trouble has occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
23-A Document size sensor detection point adjustment

1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 41-1.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3'6(1625&+(&. 2&6: 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' &/26(

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is 32 0.5mm by slowly tilting the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust. (If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document detection function may malfunction.)
23-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor

1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 &/26(
=':'%76'?
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 &/26(
32+ -0.5mm
#
=':'%76'?
Adjustment failed
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 &/26(
EXECUTE
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 &/26(
2&
(;(&87(
2)
Execute the sensor adjustment without document. With the document cover open, without placing a document on the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key. If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
2)
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled. * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 40-2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. The maximum width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized.
4)
(;(&87(
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size. Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display.
5)
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 (;(&87,1* &/26(
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized. 6) 7) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. 8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 3$326,7,21$'-8670(17 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
9)
Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. The minimum width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized.
Repeat the above procedure to adjust the A4R width MIN POSITION.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 &203/(7( &/26(
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When the operation is completed normally, the above data are saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(;(&87(
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width)

sensor adjustment (RSPF mode)
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting

This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The operation panel has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)75$<$'-8670(17 75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
1)
(;(&87(
2)
Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray size volume maximum value adjustment is started. * During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed. * After completion of the tray size volume maximum value adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjustment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM at each setting.)
2)
Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds and the display is reversed. When all the four points are pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again. Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display frame and the detection position when the touch panel is pressed. * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such as a needle or a pin).
3)
Set the tray document guide to A4R width position and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started. Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume minimum value according to the above procedures. Completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed. If the adjustment is not completed normally for any reason, "ERROR" is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must be executed again.
4) 5)
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image

off-center, image magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with SIM50-28. * ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) * ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) * ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment * ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment * ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) * ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
Display/Item OC ADJ Content Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode) Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment Adjustment result display Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
<Adjustment item and content>

NO. 1 2 3 4 Display TRAYVOLMAX TRAYVOLA4R TRAYVOLA5R TRAYVOLMIN Content Tray size volume maximum value Tray volume A4R size adjustment value Tray volume A5R size adjustment Tray size volume minimum value
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown in the table below. The value of the document width sensor (RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM. <Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D values to be saved>
Widths on the mechanism NO Guide plate position Maximum position Middle position (L) Middle position (S) Minimum position AB series 299 210 148.5 118 INCH series 299 215.9 139.7 118 Code in the figure below WIDTH _MAX WITH_P1 WITH_P2 WITH_MIN A/D value, code in the figure below AD_MAX AD_P1 AD_P2 AD_MIN
Remark BK-MAG ADJ SPF ADJ A4R OR LTR A5R OR INVR
1 2 3 4
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA
27-A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 2&$'63)$'5(68/7 %.0$*$'6(78335,17$''$7$ &/26(
6)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 3/($6(:$,7 &/26(
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17
(;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio 7) Press [OK] key. The adjustment result becomes valid.

2) 3)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. (Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 0)7 &6 &6 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 6,08/$7,21&203/(7( 3/($6(386+&$.(<
&/26(

(;(&87(

4) 5)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 2&$'63)$'5(68/7 %.0$*$'6(78335,17$''$7$ &/26(
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.

2) 3)
Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button. Select [ALL] with the key button.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( /($' $// 2))6(7 &/26(

(Note) By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items can be executed individually. * [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment * [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are executed simultaneously. 4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
27-C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 0)7 &6 &6 &6 &6 /&& $'8 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 2&$'63)$'5(68/7 %.0$*$'6(78335,17$''$7$

(;(&87(

2) 3)
Select [OC ADJ] with the key button. Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. (Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 0)7 &6 &6 &/26(
5) 6)
(;(&87(

4) 5)
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The following item is automatically adjustment. * Print image lead edge image position adjustment * Print image off-center adjustment
8)
Press [OK] key. The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
6)
2)
Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 3/($6(:$,7 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 6,'( $// 6,'(

&/26(
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17
(;(&87(

The following item is automatically adjustment. * Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 7) Press [OK] key. The adjustment result becomes valid.
3)
Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette used to print SPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corresponding button: SIDE1: SPF adjustment for the front side SIDE2: SPF adjustment for the back side ALL: SPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 6,08/$7,21&203/(7( 3/($6(386+&$.(< &/26(
Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print SPF adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print of SPF adjustment patterns. * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is self-printing SPF adjustment patterns. When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you can start SPF adjustments.
5)
6)
SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.

27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (RSPF mode)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 2&$'63)$'5(68/7 %.0$*$'6(78335,17$''$7$ &/26(
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print SPF adjustment patterns again. 7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is reading and calculating SPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).

The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment amount for the front side, the next screen appears where you can have the machine start reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
<Adjustment Item List> SPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) SPF original off-center adjustment (front side) SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (front side) 8) SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print SPF adjustment patterns again. 9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment amount for the back side, the next screen appears where you can view the results of the adjustments. <Adjustment Item List> SPF original leading edge adjustment (back side) SPF original off-center adjustment (back side) SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (back side) 10) The adjustment result screen appears. This screen shows the current values along with the previous values in parentheses. * By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print SPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides) again. * To have the machine start re-reading the SPF adjustment patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button. * To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button. * To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA] button. 11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and return to the top menu, press the [OK] button. * To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
MX-3100N [7] SIMULATION
Service Manual
1.
General (Including basic operations)
The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Various adjustments Setting of the specifications and functions Canceling troubles Operation check Counters check, setting, clear Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data check, clear. Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of the operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1)
1)
Starting the simulation

Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key ON CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of a main code of simulation Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON. Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel. Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON. Select an item with the scroll key and the item key. The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simulation operation.
* Entering the simulation mode
2) 3) 4) 5)
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode 1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode) Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key. Standby for entry of SIM code. Enter the main code of SIM with the 10-key. The main code of SIM is displayed.
NO
Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key
Press the START button.

YES
Standby for entry of SIM sub code Enter SIM sub code with the 10-key.
YES
Is there a sub code ?

NO
<Exclusion type> You have to exit simulation mode before entering into this mode for self printing type.
NO
Is it the same simulation main code? In the power OFF/ON type simulation, OFF/ON message is Press the SYSTEM displayed by the SETTINGS key SYSTEM SETTINGS key. YES Do you want to perform another simulation ?
NO
Press the START button.
Select the mode and the item with the scroll key and the item key.
The simulation mode is canceled.
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
YES
Press the EXECUTE button and OK button. Do you want to end the simulation ?
YES
NO
Operation is made according to the selected mode and item.
Press the clear all key.
Operating conditions check ?

NO
YES
Press the EXECUTE button and OK button.
The display is made according to the selected some and the item.
Data clear ?
YES
Press the EXECUTE button and OK button. The selected mode and the item are cleared.
NO
YES
Adjustments or setting (counter data change) ?
NO
Operation is made according to the selected mode and the item. (Other modes)
The display is made according to the selected mode and the item. Do you want to change the content ?
YES NO
The changed content is stored. Press the EXECUTE button and OK button.
Enter the new setting and adjustment values.
2.
List of simulation codes

Sub 1 2 5 1 2 3 2 3 10 2 3 5 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 6 1 6 8 9 12 1 2 6 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 19 90 Functions Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the control circuits. Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Used to adjust the finisher. Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control circuit of those. Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of those. Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit. Used to check the operations of the load in the transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits. Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Used to check the operations of the primary transport unit and the control circuit. Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle. Used to display the warm-up time. Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each color). The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. *When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously. Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control circuit. *When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously. Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/U2/LCC/PF troubles. Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Used to set the maintenance cycle. Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible. Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and the counter list. Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit. Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.) Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send. Used to output the various set data lists. Section Scanner (reading) Scanner (reading) Scanner (reading) RSPF RSPF RSPF Finisher Finisher Finisher Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Paper feed desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Operation panel Fusing Scanner (reading) Process Paper transport/Paper exit section Others Process (Transport) Fusing Others
Main 1
RSPF Process (Developing) Process (Charging) Process (Transport) Duplex Duplex Process (Developing)
10 13 14 15 16 17 21 22
LCC MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Firmware
Paper feed, ADU, LCC FAX RSPF Process
Main 23
Sub 2 80
24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 15 30 31 1 2
25
Functions Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.) Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter. Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.) Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.) Used to clear the copy counter. Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.) Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter. Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send. Used to initialize the administrator password. Used to initialize the service mode password. Used to check the operations of the developing section. Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Section
Paper feed, Paper transport
26
1 2 3 5 6 10 18 30 35 38 41 49 50 52 53 54 65 69 73 74 78 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2
27
30
33
Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.) Used to set the specifications of the auditor .(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.) Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.) Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles. Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached. Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding mode. Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards. Used to set functions. Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not. User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode) User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end. Poster, enlargement continuous shoot, card scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment Used to set the OSA trial mode. Used to set the password of the remote operation panel. Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function) Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function) Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function) Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS function) Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function) Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. (FSS function) Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function) Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function) Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error history. Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function) Used to set the FSS function connection test mode. Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the control circuits. Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits. Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
Process (Developing section) Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing/Transfer/ Cleaning) Paper exit Paper feed Auditor
Communication (RIC/ MODEM)
Main 40 41
43
Sub 2 7 1 2 3 1 4 20 21 22 23 24 1
44
Functions Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode. Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.) Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode. Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode. Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4. Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
Section Paper feed Paper feed
2 4 6 9
Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation.
12
Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor (registration sensor). Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration. Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Used to display the toner density control data. Used to set the half tone process control target. Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Used to set the process control execution conditions. Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB. Used to adjust the scan image density. Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode). Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode). Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents. Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported). Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode) Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default. Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges. Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode. Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode. Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode. Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode. Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode. Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images. Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing/Transfer/ Cleaning) Process Process Process Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing/Transfer/ Cleaning) Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing) Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/LSU Developing system Process Process Process Process Process Process Process Process Process Developing system
13 14 16 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 37 43 1 2 4 5 8 9 10 16 19 21 23 24 25 26 27 30 32 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
46
Main 46
Sub 45 47 51 52 60 61 62 63 74 1 5 6 1 3 1 2 5 6 7 10 12 20 21 22 24 27 28 1 2
48
49 50
51
53
55
56
6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 6 7 8 10 11 12 13
60 61
62
Functions Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi). Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG). Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode. Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode. Used to adjust the area separation recognition level. Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the auto exposure mode. Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section. Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction). Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor. Used to perform the firmware update. Used to update the operation manual in the HDD. Copy image position, image loss adjustment Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-1). Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE) Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.) Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.) Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.) Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21, and 22. Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode. Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio. Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage. Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.) Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width. Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor. Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position. Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW) Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW) Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.) Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory. Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM). Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM. Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. Used to set the laser power. Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit) Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) Used to delete the job log data. Used to delete the document filing data. Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
Section
Scanner section
RSPF RSPF
LSU
Main 63
64
Sub 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 1 2 4 5 6 7 1 2 5 17 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 33 33 34 36 52 52 70
65
67
Functions Used to display the shading correction result. Used to perform shading. Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting. Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch. Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Test print. (Self print) (Color mode) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Used to check the operation panel key input. Printer reset Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Used to set YES/NO of sending the machine calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC. (For GDI printer) Used to clear the printer calibration value. Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for GDI) Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section tone gap) Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (GDI) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
Section Scanner Scanner
Operation panel section
Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer MFP PWB
3.
Details of simulation
1-5 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Section Scanner (reading)
1
1-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed).
Item/Display OC SCAN 300DPI 400DPI 600DPI 1200DPI Operation mode 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 400DPI (259.5mm/s) 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 1200DPI (86.5mm/s) Default value 300DPI (346.0mm/s)
Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed). When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Item/Display OC SCAN 300DPI 400DPI 600DPI 1200DPI Operation mode 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 400DPI (259.5mm/s) 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 1200DPI (86.5mm/s) Default value 300DPI (346.0mm/s)
Scanner (reading)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5&+(&. 2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3, '3, &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5&+(&. 2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3, '3, &/26(
(;(&87(

(;(&87(
2
2-1 Purpose Operation test/check
1-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Section Operation/Procedure The operating status of the sensor is displayed. When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home position. Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed). When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Item/Display (SINGLE) 300DPI 400DPI 600DPI (DOUBLE) 300DPI 400DPI 600DPI Operation mode 300DPI (259.5mm/s) 400DPI (259.5mm/s) 600DPI (173.0 mm/s) 300DPI (259.5mm/s) 400DPI (259.5mm/s) 600DPI (173.0 mm/s) Default value 300DPI (259.5mm/s)
RSPF

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(56(1625&+(&. MHPS &/26(

300DPI (259.5mm/s)
2-3

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)$*,1* 63)6&$1 300DPI '3, '3, &/26(
Purpose
Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
SPFM SPRM_F SPRM_R SPFC SRRC SGS STMPS RSPF transport motor RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation) RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation) RSPF paper feed clutch SPF resist roller clutch RSPF document exit gate solenoid Finish stamp solenoid
RSPF
SINGLE
'28%/(
(;(&87(
2-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the control circuits. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted.
SSET SOCD SCOV SPED SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3 SPPD4 SPPD5 SPLS1 SPLS2 STMPU SWD_LEN SWD_AD RSPF installation detection RSPF open/close detector RSPF cover open/close detector RSPF document empty detector RSPF document pass detector 1 (Paper enter detection) RSPF document pass detector 2 (Resist roller front document transport detection) RSPF document pass detector 3 (Document scanning front document transport detection) RSPF document pass detector 4 (Reverse gate front document transport detection) RSPF document pass detector 5 (Document reverse rear document transport detection) RSPF document length detector 1 (Short) RSPF document length detector 2 (Long) SPF stamp unit installation detector RSPF guide plate position RSPF document width sensor (volume) output level
RSPF

&/26( 63)0 63 50B5 655& 67036 6350B) 63)& 6*6
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)287387&+(&.
(;(&87(

3
3-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure Finisher
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$' 66(7 62&' 6&29 63(' 633' 633' 633' 63/6 633' 63/6 633' 67038 &/26(
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted. <Inner finisher>
FED FBED FULD FMLLD FLLD FSLD1 FSLD2 FRLD FBRD FFJHPD FRJHPD FJPD FSTPD FSHPD FSTHPD Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1") Tray paper detection Tray upper limit detection Tray intermediate lower limit detection Tray lower limit detection Paper surface detection 1 Paper surface detection 2 Roller up/down detection Belt separation detection Alignment HP detection front Alignment HP detection rear Alignment guide position detection Staple tray paper detection Staple drive HP detection Staple shift HP detection

FSD FSTD FDSW FFANLK FPRPD FPUC FPHPD FPSHPD FPPD1 FPPD2 FPPD3 FPPD4 FPPD5 FPPD6 FPDD FPPEND FPDES1 FPDES2
Staple empty detection Staple lead edge position detection Door open detection Fan motor lock detection Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1") Punch unit connection detection Punch HP detection Punch side resist HP detection Punch paper surface detection 1 Punch paper surface detection 2 Punch paper surface detection 3 Punch paper surface detection 4 Punch paper surface detection 5 Punch paper surface detection 6 Punch dust detection Punch paper rear edge detection Punch destination detection 1 Punch destination detection 2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),16(1625&+(&. 3'33' )3$3+6B) )'73' )673' )7/056 )6/6 )66: )'5+6 )3++' )3'' )666+6 3'33' )3$3+6B5 )3/' )6056 )6+6 )736 )&' )33' )6$3+6 )66+6 3'&6 )$73' )33' )78/' )66+36 )&' )666: )6$73' )63*+6 )66(6 )33' )*+36 )63+6 )7//' )6(' )&' ))/ )666: )65+6 )66&6 &/26(

3-3 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. <Inner finisher>
FINRPS FSLS FPDS FBRS FRM FSWM FAM FFJM FRJM FSM FFSM FTLM FFANM FPNM FPSM Entry port reverse pass solenoid Paper surface detection solenoid Paddle solenoid Belt separation solenoid Registration motor Oscillation motor Bundle exit paper exit motor Alignment motor front Alignment motor rear Staple shift motor Staple motor Tray lift motor Fan motor Punch motor Punch side resist motor
<Saddle stitch finisher>

FATPD FPMRS PDPPD1 PDPPD2 PDCS FTULD FTLLD FTLMRS FPLD FPPD1 FSHS FSLS FSSSW1 FSED FPDFS FDTPD FPD FPCHPS FPHPS FTPS FFL FSSHPS FPAPHS_F FPAPHS_R FPTS FPES1 FPES2 FPES3 FPES4 FSMRS FPPD2 FSPHS FSTPD FSSW1 FCD1 FCD2 FDRHS FPPD3 FSATPD FSSSW2 FPHHD FGHPS FSAPHS FSPGHS FSRHS FPDD FSSHS FSSES FSSCS FPPS FCD FSSSHS Paper alignment tray paper detector Punch motor rotation sensor Paper pass paper transport detector 1 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor Tray upper limit detector Tray lower limit detector Tray lift motor rotation sensor Paper surface detector Paper delivery detector 1 Staple home position sensor Staple lead edge sensor Staple safety switch Staple empty detector Punch dust sensor Delivery tray paper detector Punch unit detection (connector) Punch home position sensor Punch unit home position sensor Tray position sensor Fan lock signal Stapler shift home position sensor Paper alignment plate home position sensor F Paper alignment plate home position sensor R Punch timing sensor Punch paper edge sensor 1 Punch paper edge sensor 2 Punch paper edge sensor 3 Punch paper edge sensor 4 Saddle motor rotation sensor Paper transport detector 2 Saddle plate home position sensor Saddle exit tray paper detector Safety switch 1 Cover detector 1 Cover detector 2 Delivery roller home position sensor Paper transport detector 3 Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector Stapler safety switch 2 Paper hold home position sensor Gripper home position sensor Saddle alignment plate home position sensor Saddle paper guide home position sensor Saddle roller home position sensor Delivery detector Saddle staple home position sensor Saddle staple sensor Saddle staple cover sensor Punch paper position sensor Finisher connection detector Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor
Finisher

FPTM1 FPAM-F FSSM FTLM FSM FPM FPSM FPAM-R PDPGS PDPTM PDCF FPTM2 FDRLM FSDM FGM FSPTM FSPAM FSPM FSDSM FPHS1 FPHS2 Paper transport motor 1 Paper alignment motor F Stapler shift motor Tray lift motor Staple motor Punch motor Punch shift motor Paper alignment motor R Paper pass paper gate solenoid Paper pass paper transport motor Paper pass cooling fan Paper transport motor 2 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor Saddle motor Gripper motor Saddle paper transport motor Saddle paper alignment motor Saddle positioning motor Saddle staple motor Paper holding solenoid 1 Paper holding solenoid 2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),1/2$'&+(&. 3'3*6 3'370 )*0 )60 )6370 )3+6 3'&) )3$0) )7/0 )63$0 )3+6 )370 )3$05 )370 )630 &/26(
Item/Display I STAPLE BOTH
Content Staple binding position adjustment (two positions at the center) Staple binding position adjustment (two positions in pitch) Punch center adjustment Punch hole position adjustment Saddle alignment position adjustment Gripper exit position adjustment
Default value 50
)'5/0 )660 )6'0 )6'60
STAPLE PITCH PUNCH CENTER PUNCH HOLE SADDLE_ADJ UST_POS GRIPPER_PO S
35 - 62
50
K L M
(;(&87(
35 - 65 30 - 60 35 - 65 35 - 65
50 50 50 50
3-10 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Adjustment Finisher Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjustment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding position adjustment" The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle folding position adjustment can be executed in the system setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system setting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation. If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system setting 5.0mm) In general, when the saddle binding position and the saddle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simulation, the above trouble will not occur.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26( ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17 $ 6$''/(326,7,21
<Inner finisher>
Item/Display A B C FRONT ADJUST REAR ADJUST STAPLE REAR Content Alignment position adjustment (front) Alignment position adjustment (rear) Staple binding position adjustment (one position at the rear) Staple binding position adjustment (one position in front) Staple binding position adjustment (center position of two positions binding) Staple binding position adjustment (staple pitch of two positions binding) Punch center positioning sensor Punch hole adjustment (paper transport direction) Setting range 2 - 18 2 - 18 68 - 132 Default value 10 10 100

% )2/',1*326,7,21 & )5217$'-867 ' 5($5$'-867 ( 67$3/(5($5 ) 67$3/(5($55 * 67$3/()5217

STAPLE FRONT STAPLE BOTH
68 - 132
100
68 - 132
100
+ 67$3/()52175 , 67$3/(%27+ - 67$3/(3,7&+
STAPLE PITCH PUNCH CENTER PUNCH HOLE
68 - 132
100
. 381&+&(17(5 / 381&++2/( 2.
G H
37 - 63 42 - 58
50 50
4

Item/Display A B C D E SADDLE POSITION FOLDING POSITION FRONT ADJUST REAR ADJUST STAPLE REAR Content Saddle stitch position adjustment Saddle folding position adjustment Paper alignment position adjustment (Front) Paper alignment position adjustment (Rear) Staple binding position adjustment (one position at the rear) Staple binding position adjustment (one position at the rear) Staple binding position adjustment (one position in front) Staple binding position adjustment (one position in front) Setting range 25 - 75 25 - 75 35 - 65 35 - 65 25 - 75 Default value 50 50 50 50 50
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control circuit of those. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted. <Desk> Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
STAPLE REAR R STAPLE FRONT STAPLE FRONT R
45 - 75
50
25 - 75
50
25 - 55
50
DCSI1 DPFD1 DLUD1 DPED1 DCSPD1 DCSS11 DCSS12 DCSS13 DCSS14
Desk 1 installation detection Desk 1 transport detection Desk 1 upper limit detection Desk 1 paper empty detection Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection Desk 1 rear edge detection 1 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4
DCSI2 DPFD2 DLUD2 DPED2 DCSPD2 DCSS21 DCSS22 DCSS23 DCSS24 DSW_DSK
Desk 2 installation detection Desk 2 transport detection Desk 2 upper limit detection Desk 2 paper empty detection Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection Desk 2 rear edge detection 1 Desk 2 rear edge detection 2 Desk 2 rear edge detection 3 Desk 2 rear edge detection 4 Desk transport cover open/close detection
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
'3)0 '38&

&/26( '/80 '75& '38& '/80
<A4 LCC>
LPFD LUD LDD LPED LCD LDSW LRE L24VM LLSW LTOD LCC transport sensor LCC tray upper limit sensor LCC tray lower limit sensor LCC tray paper empty sensor LCC tray insertion detection LCC upper open/close detection SW LCC lift motor encoder sensor LCC24V power monitor LCC upper limit SW LCC main unit connection detection
(;(&87(
4-5 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Section Operation/Procedure

Paper feed desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '6./&&6(1625&+(&. '&6, '&63' '&66 '3(' '&66 '3)' '&66 '&6, '&63' '&66 '/8' '&66 '3)' '&66 '6:B'6. '3(' '&66 '/8' '&66
&/26(
[Check the ON operation] Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation. Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not highlighted. [Check the OFF operation] Press the highlighted button which is ON.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&. &/26(

'75& /75&
'75&2)) /75&2))
4-3 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of those. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. <Desk>
DPFM DLUM1 DPUC1 DLUM2 DPUC2 DTRC Desk main motor Desk 1 lift-up motor Desk 1 paper feed clutch Desk 2 lift-up motor Desk 2 paper feed clutch Desk transport clutch
Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted display is maintained.
5
5-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure Operation panel
<A4 LCC>
LPFM LLM LPFC LPFS LTRC LCC transport motor LCC lift motor LCC paper feed clutch LCC paper feed solenoid LCC transport clutch
The LCD is changed as shown below. The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are checked.
5-3
NO.05-01 SIMULATION 7(67
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Scanner (reading)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
&23</$03&+(&.

&/26( 2&&23</$03
(;(&87(

5-2 Purpose Operation test/check 5-4 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y Discharge lamp K Discharge lamp C Discharge lamp M Discharge lamp Y
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Heater lamp operation check method: Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between the frames.
HL_UM HL_US HL_LM HL_UW Heater lamp upper main Heater lamp upper sub Heater lamp lower main Heater lamp upper main (For warm-up)
Fusing
Process

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ',6&+$5*(/$03&+(&. '/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< &/26(

7(67 +($7(5/$03/2$'6(783 6,08/$7,2112 &/26( +/B80 +/B86 +/B/0 +/B8:
$//
(;(&87(

(;(&87(

6
6-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Load operation check method: The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation sound.
Section Transport/ process Item/Display PFM RRM POMF POMR FUM CPFM OSM CPFC 1TURC PCSS WTNM PTCHT CLUM1 CPUC1 CLUM2 CPUC2 MPUC MPFS MPGS LSUSS Content Transport motor Registration motor Paper exit motor (normal rotation) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation) Fusing motor Tray paper feed motor Shifter motor Tray vertical transport clutch Primary transport separation clutch Process control shutter solenoid Waste toner drive motor PTC heater Tray 1 lift-up motor Tray 1 paper feed clutch Tray 2 lift-up motor Tray 2 paper feed clutch Manual paper feed clutch Manual feed take-up solenoid Manual paper feed gate solenoid LSU shutter solenoid
6-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively. Load operation check method: The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation sound.
Item/Display POFM OZFM PSFM CCFM RCFM FUFM MFPFAN Content Paper exit cooling fan motor (POFM_F and POFM_R are simultaneously ON.) Ozone fan motor Power cooling fan motor (PSFM, PSFM2 are simultaneously ON.) Process cooling fan motor Rear cooling fan motor Fusing fan motor Controller fan motor
Others
Paper transport/Paper exit section
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )$1/2$'6(783 32)0 36)0 5&)0 0)3)$1 2=)0 &&)0 )8)0
Paper feed

&/26(
LSU
$//
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )(('287387&+(&. 3)0 )80 785& &/80 038&
550 &3)0 3&66 &38& 03)6 320) 260 :710 &/80 03*6 3205 &3)& 37&+7 &38& /6866

&/26(
6-3 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary transport unit and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [TC1] key to highlight it. Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. (Separation operation is repeated in the sequence of BLACK COLOR FREE,) Process (Transport)
(;(&87(

During this operation, the transport belt status (the operation mode position) is displayed.
BLACK COLOR FREE Monochrome mode position Color mode position Non-transport position Monochrome mode position Color mode position Non-transport position (Monochrome mode position) The operation is repeated.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 75$16)(5/2$'&+(&. 326,7,21 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $*,1*7(676(77,1* $*,1* 0,6)(('',6$%/( :$5083',6$%/( 6+$',1*',6$%/( ,17(59$/ )86,1*',6$%/( '9&+(&.',6$%/( &&'*$,1)5(( &/26(
7&
(;(&87(
(;(&87(

6-6 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it. Press [EXCUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing pressure release are repeated. Fusing
7-6 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10key. Press [OK] key. The time entered in procedure 1) is set. * The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is displayed.
PRINT FREE Fusing pressure applying Fusing pressure release Fusing pressure applying Fusing pressure release (Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(5/2$'&+(&. 326,7,21 &/26(
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783 $ &<&/(7,0(6(&

2.
)86(5
(;(&87(
7-8
7
7-1 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The machine is rebooted in the aging mode. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING INTERVAL MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE WARMUP DISABLE DV CHECK DISABLE SHADING DISABLE CCD GAIN FREE Aging operation setup Intermittent setup JAM detection enable/disable setup Fusing operation enable/disable setup Warm-up skip setup DV unit detection enable/disable setup Shading disable setup No setting of the CCD gain adjustment
Purpose Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for warm-up is displayed * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 :$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1* 6(&21'6 &/26(
Others
(;(&87(
7-9 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each color). Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key. (Two or more colors can be selected.) The key of the selected color is highlighted. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Copying is performed with the selected color. When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy operation menu in the simulation mode.
K C M Y Setup/cancel of black Setup/cancel of cyan Setup/cancel of magenta Setup/cancel of yellow
8
8-1 Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch panel. Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4)

Process (Developing)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Key Item/Display A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y LOW SPEED DVB_K LOW SPEED DVB_C LOW SPEED DVB_M LOW SPEED DVB_Y Content K developing bias set value at middle speed C developing bias set value at middle speed M developing bias set value at middle speed Y developing bias set value at middle speed K developing bias set value at low speed C developing bias set value at low speed M developing bias set value at low speed Y developing bias set value at low speed Setting range 0-600
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17,1*&2/256(/(&7&2/2502'( . & 0 <
&/26(
MIDDLE
0-600
(;(&87(

0-600

LOW
0-600
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Set document reading quantity with 10-key. (Setting range:0 - 255) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. RSPF
0-600
0-600
0-600
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
0-600

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25,*,1$/66(77,1* $ 25,*,1$/6 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63((''9%B. &/26(

% 0,''/(63((''9%B& & 0,''/(63((''9%B0 ' 0,''/(63((''9%B<

2.
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
8-2 Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment

Key MIDDLE A B C D LOW/ HIGH A B C D Item/Display MIDDLE SPEED GB_K MIDDLE SPEED GB_C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y LOW SPEED GB_K LOW SPEED GB_C LOW SPEED GB_M LOW SPEED GB_Y Content K charging/grid bias set value at middle speed C charging/grid bias set value at middle speed M charging/grid bias set value at middle speed Y charging/grid bias set value at middle speed K charging/grid bias set value at low speed C charging/grid bias set value at low speed M charging/grid bias set value at low speed Y charging/grid bias set value at low speed
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control circuit. *When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch panel. Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] keys. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. Process (Charging)
Adjust ment range 150 850 150 850 150 850 150 850 150 850 150 850 150 850 150 850

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387 $ 0,''/(63(('*%B. &/26(

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0 ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
8-6 Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. Enter the set value with 10-key. Enter the default value specified on the following list. Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R TC1 LOW SPEED CL K TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K TC1 LOW SPEED CL C TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C TC1 LOW SPEED CL M TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y TC1 LOW SPEED BW K TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX TC2 PLAIN CL DPX TC2 PLAIN BW SPX TC2 PLAIN BW DPX TC2 HEAVY CL SPX TC2 HEAVY CL DPX TC2 HEAVY BW SPX TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Primary transport bias reference value Color Content K C M Y Black/White Secondary transport bias reference value Color Black/White Color Black/White Heavy paper K Standard paper In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface Front surface Back surface Setting range 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 Default value 80 109 80 109 80 109 80 109 80 109 130 120 99 99 78 78 78 68 Actual output setting range 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 30A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A Default value of actual output value 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 6A 10A 40A 35A 25A 25A 15A 15A 15A 10A
Process (Transport)
Item/Display S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM TC2 OHP CL TC2 OHP BW TC2 ENVELOPE CL TC2 ENVELOPE BW TC2 CLEANING TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING VPTC LOW SPEED CL VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL VPTC LOW SPEED BK VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK FPTC LOW SPEED CL FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL FPTC LOW SPEED BK FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK DCPTC LOW SPEED CL DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL DCPTC LOW SPEED BK DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK PTC_HT Secondary transport bias reference value
Content Color Black/White Color Black/White Cleaning process In low speed print In middle speed print Cleaning Color Black/White Color Black/White Color Black/White OHP Envelope
Setting range 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 51 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-6
Default value 78 68 78 78 63 0 0 85 100 100 100 100 184 184 184 131 93 149 149 149 1
Actual output setting range 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 2A 100A 0V -1500V 0V -1500V 0V -1500V 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0V 4KV 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz 2KHz 0V 2KV 0V 2KV 0V 2KV 0V 2KV
Secondary transport cleaning bias reference value PTC applied voltage control (AC constant voltage setting) PTC applied voltage control (frequency setting value) PTC applied voltage control (DC constant voltage setting value) PTC heater operating environment setting Setting of the supply power in PTC heater constant operation (Duty ratio setting)
Default value of actual output value 15A 10A 15A 15A 8A 0V 0V -500V 2.5KV 2.5KV 2.5KV 2.5KV 0.5KHz 0.5KHz 0.5KHz 0.5KHz -1.0KV -1.4KV -1.4KV -1.4KV
In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed In low speed In middle speed
0: OFF 1-6: Environment conditions
Always ON
AN
HT_DUTY
0: OFF 10: Lighting-up fully
0 - 10
0% 100%
50%

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7+96(77,1*$1'287387 $ 7&/2:63(('&/. &/26(
9
9-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Section Duplex

% 7&0,''/(63(('&/. & 7&/2:63(('&/& ' 7&0,''/(63(('&/& ( 7&/2:63(('&/0 ) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0 * 7&/2:63(('&/< + 7&0,''/(63(('&/< , 7&/2:63(('%:. - 7&0,''/(63(('%:. . 7&3/$,1&/63; / 7&3/$,1&/'3; (;(&87( 2.

Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted.
DSW_ADU APPD1 APPD2 ADU transport open/close detection ADU transport detection 1 ADU transport detection 2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $'86(1625&+(&. '6:B$'8 $33' $33' &/26(


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 721(502725$&7,9$7,21 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<

&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
Duplex
(;(&87(

13

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67
$'8/2$'&+(&. $'80B/
13-Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
(;(&87(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21

10
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. When [ALL ] key is pressed, all the items are selected. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the toner cartridges. If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner. If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black background copy in the single color copy mode of the target color.
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y Toner motor K Toner motor C Toner motor M Toner motor Y
Process (Developing)
14
14-Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/ U2/LCC/PF troubles. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5 &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
15
15-Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. LCC
17
17-Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21 &/26(
$5(<28685(" $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
<(6
12
(;(&87(
16
16-Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
21
21-1 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure * Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing cleaning roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not clarify.

Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
1) 2) 3)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL) MAINTENANCE COUNTER (COLOR) Content Maintenance counter (Total) Maintenance counter (Color) Setting range 0 : Default 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 999 : Free 0 : Default 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 999 : Free Default value 100K
B
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
60K

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783 $ 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5727$/ &/26(

% 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&2/25

2.
22
22-1 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ Check
TC2 BELT RANGE
TC2 BELT DAY FUSER UNIT FUSER ACUM DAY DRUM LIFE (K) DRUM LIFE (C) DRUM LIFE (M) DRUM LIFE (Y) DEVE LIFE (K) DEVE LIFE (C) DEVE LIFE (M) DEVE LIFE (Y) PTC
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.) Section Operation/Procedure Change the display page with [] [] key on the touch panel.
TOTAL OUT (BW) TOTAL OUT (COL) TOTAL (BW) Total output quantity of black and white Total output quantity of color Total use quantity of black and white Total use quantity of full color Total use quantity of 2color Total use quantity of 3color Total use quantity of single color Black and white copy counter Full color copy counter 2-color copy counter Single color copy counter Black and white print counter Full color print counter 2-color print counter 3-color print counter Single color print counter Black and white document filing print counter Color document filing print counter 2-color document filing print counter Single color document filing print counter Black and white other counter Color other counter Maintenance counter (Total) Maintenance counter (Color) Primary transport unit print counter Primary transport unit accumulated traveling distance (cm) Use day of primary transport unit (Day) Secondary transport unit print counter All prints including jams All prints including jams Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams) Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams) Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams) Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams) Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Billing target (excluding self print) Self print quantity Self print quantity
TOTAL (COL)
Secondary transport unit accumulated traveling distance (cm) Use day of secondary transport unit (Day) Fusing unit print counter Use day of fusing unit (Day) Accumulated number of drum rotations K (%) Accumulated number of drum rotations C (%) Accumulated number of drum rotations M (%) Accumulated number of drum rotations Y (%) Accumulated number of developer rotations K (%) Accumulated number of developer rotations C (%) Accumulated number of developer rotations M (%) Accumulated number of developer rotations Y (%) PTC counter
TOTAL (2COL)
TOTAL (3COL)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2817(5',63/$< 727$/287%: 727$/287&2/ 727$/%: 727$/&2/ 727$/&2/ 727$/&2/ 727$/6*/B&2/ &23<%: &23<&2/ &23<&2/ &23<6*/B&2/ 35,17%: 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/ 35,176&/B&2/ '2&),/%: '2&),/&2/ '2&),/&2/ '2&),/6*/&2/ 27+(5%: 27+(5&2/ 0$,17(1$1&($// 0$,17(1$1&(&2/ 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*( &/26(
TOTAL (SGL_COL) COPY (BW) COPY (COL) COPY (2COL) COPY (SGL_COL) PRINT (BW) PRINT (COL) PRINT (2COL) PRINT (3COL) PRINT (SGL_COL) DOC FIL (BW) DOC FIL (COL) DOC FIL (2COL) DOC FIL (SGL COL) OTHER (BW) OTHER (COL) MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE
22-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) Section Operation/Procedure The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 -$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$< 0$&+,1(-$0 563)'63)-$0 7528%/( &/26(

TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT
22-3 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible. Section Operation/Procedure The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) *For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12] OTHERS.
22-5 Purpose Others Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Section Operation/Procedure The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
S/N ICU (MAIN) ICU (BOOT) LANGUAGE GRAPHIC IMG DATA ROM COLOR PROFILE PCU SCU FAX (MAIN) FAX2 (MAIN) DESK LCC FINISHER PUNCH NIC POWER-CON E-MANUAL ESCP PDL Serial No. ICU (Main section) ICU (Boot section) Language support data version Graphic data for LCD MFP ASIC Flash ROM data Color profile PCU SCU FAX (main section) FAX 2-Line (Main section) (Japan only) Desk unit Side LCC Finisher Punch unit NIC Power controller Operation manual (HDD storage) ESCP font ROM PDL font ROM
Firmware

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 -$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< 33'B1&3)'B60)775$< 33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1 /&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&& 32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6 )'230)7 &/26(

22-4 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. Section Operation/Procedure The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) * For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in tht "[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$< ())/ )/)) )/)) ))+( 8)/( &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 61 ,&80$,1 ,&8%227 /$1*8$*( *5$3+,& ,0*'$7$520 &2/25352),/( 3&8 6&8 )$;0$,1121( )$;0$,1121( '(6.121( /&& ),1,6+(5 381&+ 1,& 32:(5&21 (0$18$/ (6&3 3'/ &/26(
22-6 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and the counter list. Section

Operation/Procedure * When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Item/Display A DATA PATTERN Print list mode 1 2 3 Print content Firmware version, counter data, etc. SIM50-24 data Data related to the process control
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step 1) .
: '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '$7$35,1702'( $ '$7$3$77(51 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$< 75$< 75$< 75$< 75$< 0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)7(19 /&& $'8 &/26(

(;(&87(
2.

22-8 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 22-10 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). Section Operation/Procedure The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the installed devices and options are displayed.)
MACHINE MX-2301N MX-2600G MX-3100G MX-2600N MX-3100N MX-RPX2 STANDARD AR-SU1 MX-DEX6 MX-DEX7 MX-LCX1 MX-PNX1A MX-PNX5A MX-FNX9 MX-FN10 MX-FXX2 MX-NSX1/ STANDARD MX-PBX3/ STANDARD MX-PKX1 MX-PUX1 MX-FR10U MX-FR10 Main unit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit. Section Operation/Procedure The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner related counters are displayed.
SPF SCAN STAPLER PUNCHER STAMP SADDLE STAPLER SADDLE V FOLD COVER HP_ON OC LAMP TIME Document feed quantity Number of times of scan Staple counter Puncher counter Stamp counter Saddle staple counter Saddle finisher V fold counter Cover open/close counter Number of scanner HP detection Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section (* hour * minutes)
SPF STAMP DESK LCC
Automatic document feeder Finish stamp Desk unit Large capacity tray (LCC) Punch unit Finisher FAX kit Network scanner expansion kit Printer expansion kit PS expansion kit XPS expansion kit Security kit (DSK) commercial version Security kit (DSK) authentication version Application integration module SDRAM capacity SDRAM capacity Hard disk capacity Bar code font I-Fax expansion kit Application communication module External account module

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$< 63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5 67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5 +3B21 2&/$037,0( &/26(
PUNCHER FINISHER FAX NETWORK SCANNER PRINTER PS XPS SECURITY

22-9 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check

AIM SDRAM (SYS) SDRAM (ICU) HDD BARCODE INTERNET-FAX ACM
MX-AMX1 *****MB *****MB *****MB AR-PF1 MX-FWX1 MX-AMX2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Section Operation/Procedure The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY MFT OHP MFT ENV LCC ADU Tray 1 paper feed counter Tray 2 paper feed counter Tray 3 paper feed counter Tray 4 paper feed counter Manual paper feed counter (Total) Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) Manual paper feed counter (OHP) Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
Paper feed, ADU, LCC
EAM
MX-AMX3
: '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$&+,1(6<67(0 0$&+,1(0;* 63)0;53; 67$03$568 '(6.0;'(; /&&0;/&; 381&+(50;31;$ ),1,6+(50;)1; )$;0;);; )$;0;)/; )$;0(025<$500 +$1'6(70;+1; 1(7:25.6&$11(50;16; 35,17(50;3%; 360;3.; ;360;38; 6(&85,7<0;)58 $,00;$0; 6'5$06<60% 6'5$0,&80% +''0% 1,&67$1'$5' %$5&2'($53) )217$53) ,17(51(7)$;0;):; 9(1'25&96+ &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<

&/26(

22-11 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/ receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) Section Operation/Procedure The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter are displayed.
FAX OUTPUT FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED SEND IMAGES SEND IMAGES_L2 SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME ACR SEND FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) FAX print quantity counter (for line 2) (Japan only) FAX send counter FAX receive counter FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) (Japan only) FAX send time FAX receive time Number of carrier prefix adding communications
22-13 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Section Operation/Procedure The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are displayed.
DRUM CTRG K DRUM CTRG C DRUM CTRG M DRUM CTRG Y DRUM RANGE K DRUM RANGE C DRUM RANGE M DRUM RANGE Y DRUM TURN K DRUM TURN C DRUM TURN M DRUM TURN Y DRUM DAY K DRUM DAY C DRUM DAY M DRUM DAY Y DEVE CTRG K DEVE CTRG C DEVE CTRG M DEVE CTRG Y DEVE RANGE K DEVE RANGE C DEVE RANGE M Drum cartridge print counter (K) Drum cartridge print counter (C) Drum cartridge print counter (M) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time C Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time M Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time Y Number of day that used drum (Day) K Number of day that used drum (Day) C Number of day that used drum (Day) M Number of day that used drum (Day) Y Developer cartridge print counter (K) Developer cartridge print counter (C) Developer cartridge print counter (M) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time C Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time M Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time Y Number of day that used developer (Day) K Number of day that used developer (Day) C Number of day that used developer (Day) M Number of day that used developer (Day) Y Toner motor print counter (K) Toner motor print counter (C) Toner motor print counter (M) Toner motor print counter (Y) Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (C)
FAX
Process

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )$;&2817(5',63/$< )$;287387 )$;287387B/ )$;6(1' )$;5(&(,9(' 6(1',0$*(6 6(1',0$*(6B/ 6(1'7,0( 5(&(,9('7,0( $&56(1' &/26(

22-12 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check

DEVE RANGE Y DEVE TURN K DEVE TURN C DEVE TURN M DEVE TURN Y DEVE DAY K DEVE DAY C DEVE DAY M DEVE DAY Y TONER MOTOR K TONER MOTOR C TONER MOTOR M TONER MOTOR Y TONER TURN K TONER TURN C
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.) Section Operation/Procedure The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) *For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12] OTHERS. RSPF
TONER TURN M TONER TURN Y
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (M) Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (Y)
22-90 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Change the display with [] [] key. Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel. Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST PCL SYMBOL SET LIST PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST PS FONT LIST PS KANJI FONT LIST PS EXTENDED FONT LIST NIC PAGE INDIVIDUAL LIST GROUP LIST PROGRAM LIST MEMORY BOX LIST ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON) ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$< '580&75*. '580&75*& '580&75*0 '580&75*< '5805$1*(. '5805$1*(& '5805$1*(0 '5805$1*(< '580'$<. '580'$<& '580'$<0 '580'$<< '(9(&75*. '(9(&75*& '(9(&75*0 '(9(&75*< '(9(5$1*(. '(9(5$1*(& '(9(5$1*(0 '(9(5$1*(< '(9('$<. '(9('$<& '(9('$<0 '(9('$<< &/26(
All setting list Printer test page
22-19 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send. Section Operation/Procedure Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner Change the display with [] [] key.
NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL NET SCN ORG_2CL NET SCN ORG_SGL INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND MAIL COUNTER FTP COUNTER SMB SEND USB CNT TRIAL MODE_B&C SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD_SGL Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (2-Color scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (Single-color scan job) Number of internet FAX output Number of internet FAX sending page Number of internet FAX receive Number of internet FAX send Number of times of E-MAIL send Number of FTP send Number of SMB send Number of times of USB storage Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color) Document filing list System setting list Address registration list (*)
Receive rejection number table Receive rejection/ allow address domain table To Email Transfer table list To administrator Transfer list Web setting list Meta data set list
INBOUND ROUTING LIST DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST WEB SETTING LIST METADATA SET LIST
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK model, this setting is invalid.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /,6735,17 $//&867206(77,1*/,67 3&/,17(51$/)217/,67 36)217/,67 36(;7(1'(')217/,67 ,1',9,'8$//,67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67 3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67 36.$1-,)217/,67 1,&3$*( *5283/,67 0(025<%2;/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67 $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17 $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1* $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021 $17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67 (;(&87( &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$< 1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B6*/ ,17(51(7)$;287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387 ,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9( ,17(51(7)$;6(1' 0$,/&2817(5 )73&2817(5 60%6(1' 86%&17 75,$/02'(B% & &/26(
352*5$0/,67 $//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67 $17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67
23
23-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.) Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)((' 3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67 &/26(
(;(&87(

24

24-1 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
MACHINE RSPF TROUBLE Machine JAM counter RSPF JAM counter Trouble counter

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 -$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5 0$&+,1( 563) 7528%/( &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 -$07528%/('$7$35,1702'( 35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
&/26(
(;(&87(
23-80 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Section Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and paper transport is outputted. Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and transport section. The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sensor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
SECTION STANDARD CURRENT (*1) PREVIOUS (*1) MAXIMUM (*1) MINIMUM (*1) Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation or load operation name) Reference value (ms) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final paper Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the final paper Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
Paper feed, Paper transport
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-2 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY MFT OHP MFT ENV LCC ADU Tray 1 paper feed counter Tray 2 paper feed counter Tray 3 paper feed counter Tray 4 paper feed counter Manual paper feed counter (Total) Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) Manual paper feed counter (OHP) Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) ADU paper feed counter
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5 75$< 0)7727$/ /&& 75$< 0)7+($9< $'8 75$< 0)72+3 75$< 0)72+3 &/26(
MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT TC2 BELT RANGE TC2 BELT DAY FUSER UNIT FUSER ACUM DAY PTC
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

Maintenance counter (Total) Maintenance counter (Color) Primary transport unit print counter Primary transport unit accumulated traveling distance (cm) Use day of primary transport unit (Day) Secondary transport unit print counter Secondary transport unit accumulated traveling distance (cm) Use day of secondary transport unit (Day) Fusing unit print counter Use day of fusing unit (Day) PTC counter
24-3 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
SPF SCAN STAPLER PUNCHER STAMP SADDLE STAPLER SADDLE V FOLD COVER HP_ON OC LAMP TIME RSPF document feed counter Scan counter Staple counter Puncher counter Stamp counter Saddle staple counter Saddle finisher V fold counter Cover open/close counter HP detection count OC section lamp total lighting time

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5 0$,17(1$1&($// 7&%(/7'$< )86(581,7 0$,17(1$1&(&2/ 7&%(/7 )86(5$&80'$< 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*( 37& 7&%(/75$1*( 7&%(/7'$< &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-5 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2)

Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
3)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5 63) 67$03 +3B21 6&$1 6$''/(67$3/(5 2&/$037,0( 67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' 381&+(5 &29(5
&/26(
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automatically.

Developer cartridge print counter (K) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Number of day that used developer (Day) K Developer cartridge print counter (C) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) Number of day that used developer (Day) C Developer cartridge print counter (M) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) Number of day that used developer (Day) M Developer cartridge print counter (Y) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-4 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5 . & 0 < &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-6 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
COPY BW COPY COL SINGLE COLOR 2COLOR Copy counter (B/W) Copy counter (COLOR) Single color 2-color
24-9 Data clear Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
PRINT BW PRINT COL PRINT (2COL) PRINT (3COL) PRINT (SGL_COL) OTHER BW OTHER COL Print counter (B/W) Print counter (COLOR) Print counter (2-colors) Print counter (3-colors) Print counter (Single color) Other counter (B/W) Other counter (COLOR)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5 &23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5 35,17%: 35,176&/B&2/ 35,17&2/ 27+(5%: 35,17&2/ 27+(5&2/ 35,17&2/ &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-7 Purpose Data clear

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
Drum cartridge print counter (K) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Number of day that used drum (Day) K Drum cartridge print counter (C) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) Number of day that used drum (Day) C Drum cartridge print counter (M) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) Number of day that used drum (Day) M Drum cartridge print counter (Y) Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
24-10 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
FAX OUTPUT FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED SEND IMAGES SEND IMAGES_L2 SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME ACR SEND FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1) FAX Print quantity counter (for line 2) (Japan only) FAX send counter FAX receive counter FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) (Japan only) FAX send time FAX receive time Number of carrier prefix adding communications

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '580&75*&2817(5&(/$5 . & 0 < &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-30

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5 )$;287387 6(1',0$*(6 $&56(1' )$;287387B/ 6(1',0$*(6B/ )$;6(1' 6(1'7,0( )$;5(&(,9(' 5(&(,9('7,0( &/26(
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator password. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The administrator password is initialized.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin" (default).

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(

&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL NET SCN ORG_2CL NET SCN ORG_SGL INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND MAIL COUNTER FTP COUNTER SMB SEND USB CNT TRIAL MODE_B&C SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD_SGL
Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (COLOR scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (2-color scan job) Network scanner document read quantity counter (single color scan job) Number of internet FAX output Number of internet FAX sending page Number of internet FAX receive Number of internet FAX send Number of times of E-MAIL send Number of FTP send Number of SMB send Number of times of USB storage Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color)
24-31 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode password. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The service mode password is initialized. If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "service" (default).

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=( &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5 1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/ ,17(51(7)$;287387 ,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9( 0$,/&2817(5 60%6(1' 75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B&/ 6&$172+''B6*/ 1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B6*/ ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1' )73&2817(5 86%&17 6&$172+''B%: 6&$172+''B&/ &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

25
25-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the developing section. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. Press [EXECUTE] key. The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is displayed.
TCD_K TCD_C TCD_M TCD_Y TCV_K TCV_C TCV_M TCV_Y Toner density sensor K Toner density sensor C Toner density sensor M Toner density sensor Y Toner density sensor control voltage level K Toner density sensor control voltage level C Toner density sensor control voltage level M Toner density sensor control voltage level Y
Toner density control adjustment value in the low speed process mode Toner density control adjustment value in the medium speed process mode Toner density sensor control voltage level in the low speed process mode Toner density sensor control voltage level in the medium speed process mode
Process (Developing section)
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K AT DEVE ADJ_L_C AT DEVE ADJ_L_M AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y AT DEVE ADJ_M_K AT DEVE ADJ_M_C AT DEVE ADJ_M_M AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y AT DEVE VO_L_K AT DEVE VO_L_C AT DEVE VO_L_M AT DEVE VO_L_Y AT DEVE VO_M_K AT DEVE VO_M_C AT DEVE VO_M_M AT DEVE VO_M_Y

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9($'-B0B. $7'(9($'-B0B& $7'(9($'-B0B0 $7'(9($'-B0B< $7'(9(92B/B. $7'(9(92B/B& $7'(9(92B/B0 $7'(9(92B/B< . & 0 < (;(&87( $7'(9(92B0B. $7'(9(92B0B& $7'(9(92B0B0 $7'(9(92B0B< &/26(
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this simulation. If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 721(56(1625287387021,725 7&'B. 7&'B& 7&'B0 7&'B< 7&9B. 7&9B& 7&9B0 7&9B< &/26(
26
26-1 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure Setting Paper exit Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
/2:
0,''/(
(;(&87(

1) 2)
Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
25-2 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel. Press [EXECUTE] key. Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
Item/Display YES NO Content Paper exit tray : YES Paper exit tray : NO
0 1

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5,*+775$<6(783 $ <(612 &/26(

The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is displayed. After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner density sampling results is set as the reference toner density control level. NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is not set normally. Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 30
2.
26-2 Purpose Setting

PF ADJ
Item/Display ON
Content Continuous printing is performed in the duplex print mode. If the remaining money expires during continuous printing, the sheets in the machine are discharged without being printed on the back surfaces. Continuous printing is not performed in the duplex print mode. (The remaining amount is checked for printing every surface in all the printing process.) If the remaining money expires during printing, the sheet is discharged without printing on the back surface. Vendor mode 1 Vendor mode 2 Vendor mode 3 When the paper lead edge passes the fusing rear sensor. When the paper rear edge passes the fusing rear sensor. When the paper rear edge passes the paper exit sensor in the main unit, the right tray, and the after process unit.
Default value OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.) Section Operation/Procedure Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
LCC 0 1 2 0 1 8.5 x 11 A4 B5 GRAM LBS OFF
Paper feed
G/LBS SET

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6,=(6(783 /&& */%66(7 h *5$0 $ /%6 % &/26(
VENDOR MODE (*) COUNTUP TIMING
MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 FUSER_IN
MODE 3 EXIT_ OUT
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT

26-3 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor .(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.) Section Operation/Procedure Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Item/Display BUILT-IN AUDITOR OUTSIDE AUDITOR P10 EC1 NONE P VENDOR1 Content Built-in auditor mode (standard mode) operation. EC1 mode operation No external connection vendor is used. Coin vendor mode (Only the copy mode can be controlled.) Vendor mode communicating with the parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer) (Japan only) NOT USED Serial vendor mode Support for the auditor in document filing print No support for the auditor in document filing print Default value P10
(*) Details of the vendor mode

Completion of the specified quantity. (Money remaining) Condition 1 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1 Insufficient money during copy job BW/Color (no money remaining) Condition 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 Operation 3 Color (Money remaining) Condition 3 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 2 Completion of the specified quantity. (No money remaining) Condition 4 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 3
Auditor
MODE1 MODE2 MODE3
NONE
Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, which can be changed in the system setting. Operation 2: Auto clear is not made. Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen.
P VENDOR2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8',7256(783 %8,/7,1 3 121( 327+(5 '2&$'3)$'9(1'2502'( &2817837,0,1* 21 21 02'( )86(5B,1 (& 39(1'25 6B9(1'25 2)) 2)) 02'( )86(5B287 02'( (;,7B287 39(1'25 &/26(
DOC ADJ
P OTHER S_VENDOR ON OFF
OFF
2876,'($8',725


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '(67,1$7,216(783 86$ $%B% $%B$ &$1$'$ (8523( &+,1$ ,1&+ 8. -$3$1 $86 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/ 11x17 size) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the setting value with 10-key 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2 Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display A B TOTAL (B/W) TOTAL (COL) Content Total counter (B/W) Total counter (Color) Default value 1 (Japan) 2 (Except Japan) 2
(;(&87(

26-10 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
TRIAL MODE ( 0 : YES 1 : NO ) 0 1 Trial mode setting Trial mode cancel (Default)
C D E F
MAINTE (B/W) MAINTE (COL) DEV (B/W) DEV (COL)
Maintenance counter (B/W) Maintenance counter (Color) Developer counter (B/W) Developer counter (Color)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $h&281783 $ 727$/%: &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783 $ 75,$/02'(<(612 &/26(
% 727$/&2/ & 0$,17(%: ' 0$,17(&2/ ( '(9%: ) '(9&2/

2.
2.
26-6 Purpose Setting 26-18 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item A B Display COPY PRINTER 0 1 0 1 Content Copy toner save mode is inhibited. Copy toner save mode is allowed Printer toner save mode is inhibited. Printer toner save mode is allowed. Default value 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected set content is saved.
U.S.A. CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA United States of America Canada Inch series, other destinations Japan AB series (B5 detection), other destinations Europe United Kingdom Australia AB series (A5 detection), other destinations China

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 721(56$9(02'(6(783 $ &23<<(612 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783 $ 21&($1< &/26(
% 35,17(5<(612

2.
2.
26-30 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Control allowed Control inhibited
26-38 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
Item/Display A MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER 0 1 Content Print continue Print stop Default value 0
2)
Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved. * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due to the power frequency, etc.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26( (1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1* $ 0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B
1 (CE not supported) 1 (CE not supported) 1 (CE not supported) 1 (CE not supported) 1 (CE not supported)
EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
0 (CE supported) 0 (CE supported) 0 (CE supported) 0 (CE supported) 0 (CE supported)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &(0$5.&21752/6(77,1* $ <(612 &/26(
2.

26-41 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding mode.
2.
Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 1 AMS Disable AMS Enable
26-35 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Only once display. Any time display.
2)
Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
<Default value of each destination>

U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA 1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)
2)
Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 33

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$03+/(702'($066(77,1* $ <(612 &/26(

Destination USA CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE UK AUS AB_A CHINA
Item A 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Item B 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0
Item D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2.
(*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not displayed)
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mode Single OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 2-color OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 2-Color/Single Counter OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
26-49 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards mode. Section Operation/Procedure Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23<63(('02'(6(783 3267&$5' /2: +,*+ &/26(
(*3) Target paper (postcard, envelope, label sheet, tab sheet, OHP) If it is set to "0," the operation is stopped when 30 sheets of a same kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of sheets are mixed and discharged and less than 30 sheets of a kind are continuously discharged, the operation is performed similarly to that of setting value "1". If it is set to "1," the operation is stopped when the paper exit tray is full or when 500 sheets (94mm thick) are discharged.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )81&7,216(77,1* $ %:5(9(56(<(6

&/26(
26-50 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A B C BW REVERSE COLOR MODE FINISHER FUNCTION Content 0 BW reverse copy Disable 1 BW reverse copy Enable 2-color/Single color copy mode Enable/Disable setting 0 Finisher special paper The number of paper exit is limited. 1 Finisher special paper The number of paper exit is not limited. 0 All colors and monochrome counters are displayed. 1 All are displayed except for the 3-color print counter. 2 Monochrome and full color print counters are displayed. 0 Paper feed tray color display ON during paper feed 1 Paper feed tray color display OFF during paper feed Default value Refer to *1 Refer to *1/*2 0 Refer to *3
% &2/2502'( & ),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6 ' &2/2502'(35,17(5 ( )(('75$<&2/25<(6
Setting

Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
2.
26-52 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Count up No count up
COLOR MODE (PRINTER)
Refer to *1
2)
FEED TRAY COLOR
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Destination U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B
Default 0 (Counted) 0 (Counted) 0 (Counted) 1 (Not counted) 0 (Counted)
Destination EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
Default 0 (Counted) 0 (Counted) 1 (Not counted) 0 (Counted) 0 (Counted)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5 $ <(612 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783 $ <(612 &/26(

2.

26-65 Purpose Section

2.
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Operation/Procedure Use the touch key to set. 26-53 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Inhibit Allow (Default) LIMIT SHEETS(L) Item LIMIT SHEETS Set value 30 50 LIMIT COPIES ON OFF 25 30 SADDLE COPIES ON Content Number of sheets of stapling: Max. 30 Number of sheets of stapling: Max. 50 Number of sets of stapling: Max. 50 sets Number of sets of stapling: Not Limited Number of sheets of stapling: Max. 25 Number of sheets of stapling: Max. 30 Number of sets loaded in the saddle staple: Limited (*1) Number of sets loaded in the saddle staple: Not Limited Setting range 30 or 50 Default value 50
ON or OFF
ON
25 or 30
25
2)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21 $ <(612 &/26(
ON or OFF
ON
OFF

*1: 1-5 sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets)/10-15 sheets (10 sets) LIMIT SHEETS (L) is applicable only for Saddle Finisher.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7 /,0,76+((76
2.
&/26(
21 21
2)) 2))
/,0,7&23,(6 /,0,76+((76/ 6$''/(&23,(6
26-54 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Inhibit Allow (Default)

2)
: '09/Sep D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after displaying the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is displayed at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets) The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%. (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper size and the print ratio.) Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed 1: Print Disable after toner near end 2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end 3: 50 sheets print Enable after toner near end
Setting range 0-1 Default value
26-69 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2 is saved.
Item/Display A TONER PREPARATION (0 : YES 1 : NO) 0 Content The toner preparation message is displayed. 1 The toner preparation message is not displayed. 0 The toner near end message is displayed. 1 The toner near end message is not displayed. 1 Operation Enable in TONER END 2 Operation STOP in TONER END 3 Operation STOP in TONER END Setting of the number of copy/print/FAX outputs Enable after TONER NEAR END. 0 Condition for Low status send of E-mail alert When the toner preparation message is displayed (in near near toner end) 1 Condition for Low status send of E-mail alert When near toner end
4: 100 sheets print Enable after toner near end 5: 200 sheets print Enable after toner near end NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number, printing can be made after toner near end. However, insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this case, toner end display is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
TONER NEAR END (0 : YES 1 : NO)
0-1

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
TONER END
1-3
721(51($5(1'6(77,1* $ 721(535(3$5$7,21<(612
% 721(51($5(1'<(612 & 721(5(1' ' 721(5(1'&2817 ( 721(5(0$,/$/$57

TONER END COUNT
1-5
TONER E-MAIL ALART
0-1
2.
26-73 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Poster, enlargement continuous shoot, card scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss (shade delete quantity) is increased.
Item/Display A DELETING SHADOW ADJ (M) DELETING SHADOW ADJ (S) Content Rear frame side image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment Lead edge image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment Setting range 0 - 50 Default value 0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step) 0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step)
<List of Default values and set values for each destination>

Set value Destination U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA Toner preparation message 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Toner near end message 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
0 - 50
(Contents of set items) A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%. B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display when the toner near end status is reached. C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner end status is reached. For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of the setting value. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 36

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17 $ '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0 &/26(
27
27-1 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Not detection Detection
% '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6

2.
26-74 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key.
Item/Display A OSA TRIAL MODE (0 : YES 1 : NO) 0 1 Content Used to set the OSA trial mode. OSA trial mode is canceled. Setting range 0-1 Default value 1
2) Setting

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ',6$%/,1*2)87528%/( $ ',6$%/(<(6 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.

2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1* $ 26$75,$/02'(<(612 &/26(
27-2 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1)
2.

Select an item to be set with touch panel. [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO] Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [SET] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) 26-78 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote operation panel. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter a password with 10 key. (5 - 8 digits) The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [SET] key. 3)
USER FAX_NO. SERVA TEL_NO.
Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits) Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits) If the connection process is not completed normally when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may be continuously made every time when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted. In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the HOST.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 523(3$66:25'6(77,1* 35(6(17 1(: &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )66)81&7,216(783,1387 35(6(17 1(: 86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
&/26(
6(7
6(7
3$86(

27-4 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting range 0-3 0
Item/Display A FSS MODE NEB1
Content Exclusive for send in NE-B mode Send/Receive in NE-B mode Exclusive for send in NE-F mode Send/Receive in NE-F mode Resend number setting when busy Resend timer setting (minute) when busy Resend number setting when error Resend timer setting (minute) when error 100% - 75% Toner order auto send timing setting 74% - 50% (K) 49% - 25% 25% or less NEAREND EMPTY Toner order auto 100% - 75% send timing setting 74% - 50% (C) 49% - 25% 25% or less NEAREND EMPTY Toner order auto 100% - 75% send timing setting 74% - 50% (M) 49% - 25% 25% or less NEAREND EMPTY Toner order auto 100% - 75% send timing setting 74% - 50% (Y) 49% - 25% 25% or less NEAREND EMPTY Set the FSS MODE
Default value 1
Remarks
NEB2 NFB1
1 2
NFB2 B C D E F RETRY_BUSY TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY RETRY_ERROR TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR TONER ORDER TIMING (K) 100% - 75% 74% - 50% 49% - 25% LOWER 25 NEAREND EMPTY 100% - 75% 74% - 50% 49% - 25% LOWER 25 NEAREND EMPTY 100% - 75% 74% - 50% 49% - 25% LOWER 25 NEAREND EMPTY 100% - 75% 74% - 50% 49% - 25% LOWER 25 NEAREND EMPTY
3 0 - 15 1 - 15 0 - 15 1 - 15 0-5 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 3 1 1 3 (49%-25%) * 0: No retry
* 0: No retry
TONER ORDER TIMING (C)
0-5
3 (49%-25%)
TONER ORDER TIMING (M)
0-5
3 (49%-25%)
TONER ORDER TIMING (Y)
0-5
3 (49%-25%)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )66)81&7,216(783 $ )6602'(1(% &/26(
% 5(75<B%86< & 7,0(50,187(B%86< ' 5(75<B(5525 ( 7,0(50,187(B(5525 ) 721(525'(57,0,1*. * 721(525'(57,0,1*& + 721(525'(57,0,1*0 , 721(525'(57,0,1*<

2.
27-5 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [SET] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7$*6(77,1* 35(6(17 1(: &/26(
A B
FSS FUNCTION ALERT
0 1 0 1
FSS function enable FSS function disable (*1) (Default) Alert call enable (*2) (Default) Alert call disable
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.) *2 Alert send timing
No alert cause Maintenance Service call Toner send request Toner collection request Alert resend Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert When the maintenance timing is reached. When pressing Service call. When the toner order automatic send setting is reached. Revision of the toner installation date (only for a new product)
6(7
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21 $ )81&7,21<(612

&/26(
% $/(57<(612

27-6 Purpose Setting 27-9 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Allow (Default) Inhibit
2.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3)

2)
Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
A FEED TIME 1 0100 0100 1 - 20 Threshold value of the paper transport time between sensors (Main unit) (50: Default) Threshold value of the paper transport time between sensors (RSPF) (50: Default) Threshold value of the gain adjustment retry number (11: Default) Alert judgment threshold value for occurrence of continuous jams Alert judgment threshold value for occurrence of continuous jams (Setting of the number of times of continuous jams as the alert for continuous jams) (Default: 10 times)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783 $ <(612
&/26(

FEED TIME 2
D
2.
GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY JAM ALERT
1100
27-7 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 39
* Item A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper; 100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. * Item C: Setting of 20 is invalid.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )66)81&7,21$'-8670(17 $ )(('7,0( &/26(
Item name SCAN GAIN ADJ1 SCAN GAIN ADJ2 SCAN GAIN ADJ3 SCAN GAIN ADJ4 SCAN GAIN ADJ5

% )(('7,0( & *$,1$'-8670(175(75< ' -$0$/(57

2.
Display Item Occurrence date (Display) 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99
Retry number 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits
Content Scanner gain adjustment retry history

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7 '$7(5(75< /68 /68 '(6. '(6. ),1,6+(5 ),1,6+(5 6&$1*$,1$'- 6&$1*$,1$'- 6&$1*$,1$'- 6&$1*$,1$'-

&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Target history Serial communication retry number history High density process control error history Half tone process control error history Automatic registration adjustment error history Gain adjustment retry history Paper transport time between sensors
6&$1*$,1$'-
27-12 Purpose Others Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error history. (FSS Function) Section Operation/Procedure The high density, the half tone, and the automatic registration adjustment error history are displayed.
HV_ERR1 HV_ERR2 HV_ERR3 HV_ERR4 HV_ERR5 H_TONE ERR1 H_TONE ERR2 H_TONE ERR3 H_TONE ERR4 H_TONE ERR5 AUTO REG ADJ1 AUTO REG ADJ2 AUTO REG ADJ3 AUTO REG ADJ4 AUTO REG ADJ5 High density error history 1 High density error history 2 High density error history 3 High density error history 4 High density error history 5 Half tone error history 1 Half tone error history 2 Half tone error history 3 Half tone error history 4 Half tone error history 5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5 &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
27-11 Purpose Others Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure The serial communication retry number history and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Display Item Occurrence date (Display) 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99

Retry number 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits 8 digits

Item name LSU1 LSU2 DESK1 DESK2 FINISHER1 FINISHER2
Content Serial communication retry number history display
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525 '$7((5525&2'( +9B(55 +9B(55 +9B(55 +9B(55 +9B(55 +B721((55 +B721((55 +B721((55 +B721((55 +B721((55 $8725(*$'- $8725(*$'- $8725(*$'- $8725(*$'- $8725(*$'-
&/26(
8 digits
27-13 Purpose Others Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure Change the display with [] [] key.
Code between sensors 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits 5 digits Reference passing time 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
Item/Display Main unit FEED TIME1 FEED TIME2 FEED TIME3 FEED TIME4 FEED TIME5 FEED TIME6 FEED TIME7 FEED TIME8 FEED TIME9 FEED TIME10 FEED TIME1(SPF) FEED TIME2(SPF) FEED TIME3(SPF) FEED TIME4(SPF) FEED TIME5(SPF) FEED TIME6(SPF) FEED TIME7(SPF) FEED TIME8(SPF) FEED TIME9(SPF) FEED TIME10(SPF)
Content History of paper transport time between sensors 1 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10
Occurrence date 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99 99/99/99 99:99:99
Passing time 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0( '$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0( )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) )(('7,0(63) &/26(
27-14 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection test mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Disable (Default) Enable
2)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )667(6702'(6(783 $ &211(&7,217(6702'(212)) &/26(

2.
: '09/Sep
CSPD2 CSS2 MPFD MPLD MTOP1 MTOP2 MPED Tray 2 paper remaining detection Tray 2 installation detection Manual feed paper entry detection Manual feed paper length detection Manual feed tray retraction detection Manual feed tray extension detection Manual feed paper empty detection
30
30-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the control circuits. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
PPD1 PPD2 POD1 POD2 POD3 TFD2 TFD3 HPOS DSW_R DSW_C DSW_F DHPD_K DHPD_CL 1TNFD HLPCD 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K Resist pre-detection Resist detection Fusing rear detection Main unit paper exit detection Right tray paper exit detection Paper exit full detection Main unit right tray paper exit full detection Shifter home detection Right door open/close detection Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection Front cover open/close detection K phase detection CL phase detection Waste toner full detection Fusing pressure release sensor Primary transport belt separation CL detection Primary transport belt separation BK detection

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1 &3)' &66 &63' 0723 &/8' &3)' &66 0723 &3(' &/8' 03)' 03(' &63' &3(' 03/' &/26(

33
33-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
CARD DATA CLOCK Card Yes/No detection Card number signal detection Reference clock signal detection

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$,181,76(1625&+(&. 33' 32' '6:B5 '+3'B&/ 33' 7)' '6:B& 71)' 32' 7)' '6:B) 78'B&/ 32' +326 '+3'B. 78'B. &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&. &$5' '$7$ &/2&. &/26(

30-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
CPFD1 CLUD1 CPED1 CSPD1 CSS1 CPFD2 CLUD2 CPED2 Tray 1 transport detection Tray 1 upper limit detection Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 installation detection Tray 2 transport detection Tray 2 upper limit detection Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection

40
40-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). Press [EXECUTE] key. The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). Press [EXECUTE] key. The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). Press [EXECUTE] key. The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). Press [EXECUTE] key. The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION P1(A4)POSITION P2(A4R)POSITION MIN POSITION Manual feed max. width Manual feed P1 position width (A4) Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) Manual feed min. width

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1* $ 0$;326,7,21 &/26(

% 3326,7,21 & 3326,7,21 ' 0,1326,7,21

Paper feed
2.
41
41-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
OCSW PD1 - 7 Document cover status Document detection sensor status Open: Normal display Close: Highlighted No document: Normal display Document present: Highlighted

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3'6(1625&+(&. 2&6: 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3'
&/26(

&/26(
(;(&87(

40-7 Purpose Adjustment/Setup 41-2 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without place a document on the document table. The sensor level without document is recognized.
Content Manual feed max. width Manual feed P1 position width (A4) Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) Manual feed min. width Default value 241 231 140 19
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved. Paper feed
2)
Item/Display A B C D MAX POSITION P1(A4) POSITION P2(A4R) POSITION MIN POSITION
Set A3 (11 x 17") paper on the document table, and press [EXECUTE] key. The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 &/26(
41-3 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Section Operation/Procedure The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 Content Original cover SW Document detection 1 Document detection 2 Document detection 3 Document detection 4 Document detection 5 Document detection 6 Document detection 7 Detection level range 0-1 ("1" to Close) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3'6(1625',63/$< 2&6: 3'> @ 3'> @ 3'> @ 3'> @ 3'> @ 3'> @ 3'> @ &/26(

43
43-1 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting range 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 30 - 200 Default value Group 2 SW-A SW-B 175 185 105 105 155 165 170 180 140 140 180 185 170 180 140 140 180 185 155 155
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J HL_UM READY HL_LM READY HL_US READY HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL WARMUP FUMON HL _UM T
Content Ready standby TH_UM set value Ready standby TH_LM set value Ready standby TH_US set value Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value Black-White plain paper TH_US set value Color plain paper TH_UM set value Color plain paper TH_LM set value Color plain paper TH_US set value Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value (Temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50C or less) Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set value (Time (sec) from completion of warm-up to stop of rotation of the fusing roller) (when the fusing temperature in warmup is 50C or less)
Group 1 SW-A SW-B 170 180 105 105 150 160 165 175 140 140 175 180 165 175 140 140 175 180 155 155
Group 3 SW-A SW-B 175 185 105 110 155 165 170 180 140 140 180 185 170 180 140 140 180 185 155 155
WARMUP FUMOFF HL _LM T
30 - 200
75
75
75
75
75
75
Item/Display L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI WARMUP END TIME HL_UM HEAVY PAPER HL_LM HEAVY PAPER HL_US HEAVY PAPER HL_UM OHP PAPER HL_LM OHP PAPER HL_US OHP PAPER HL_UM ENV PAPER HL_LM ENV PAPER HL_US ENV PAPER HL_UM GLOSS PAPER HL_LM GLOSS PAPER HL_US GLOSS PAPER HL_UM E-STAR HL_US E-STAR PRE-JOB HL_LM E-STAR HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER HL_UM WARMUP_120L HL_LM WARMUP_120L HL_US WARMUP_120L LO_WARMUP_TIME
Content Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50C or less) Heavy paper TH_UM set value Heavy paper TH_LM set value Heavy paper TH_US set value OHP-TH_UM set value OHP-TH_LM set value OHP-TH_US set value Envelope TH_UM set value Envelope TH_LM set value Envelope TH_US set value Glossy paper TH_UM set value Glossy paper TH_LM set value Glossy paper TH_US set value preheating TH_UM set value preheating TH_US set value Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) preheating TH_LM set value Heavy paper 2TH_UM set value Heavy paper 2TH_LM set value Heavy paper 2TH_US set value Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or less) Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or less) Warm-up TH_US set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or less) AF-AH applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in warm-up to the normal control temperature) Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Warm-up TH_US set value (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) AJ-AL applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) Fusing roller rotation start TH_UM (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AN-AP
Setting range 30 - 255 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 30 - 200 30 - 200 30 - 200 30 - 200 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 255
Group 1 SW-A SW-B 53 68 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 170 105 165 90 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 180 105 175 90
Default value Group 2 SW-A SW-B 56 73 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 170 105 165 90 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 180 105 175 90
Group 3 SW-A SW-B 55 73 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 170 105 165 90 170 140 175 165 135 165 180 145 180 180 140 160 145 130 160 50 170 140 175 180 105 175 90
AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ
HL_UM WARMUP_120H HL_LM WARMUP_120H HL_US WARMUP_120H HI_WARMUP_TIME HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HI_WU_END_TIME HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HI_WARMUP_BORDER
70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 255 30 - `200 0 - 255 70 - 230 1 - 119
170 105 150 10 125 40 140 50
180 105 160 10 125 40 140 50
175 105 155 10 125 40 140 50
185 105 165 10 125 40 140 50
175 105 155 10 125 40 140 50
185 105 165 10 125 40 140 50
Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 SW-A SW-B Japan U.S.A. Europe China Canada U.K. AB_B Inch AUS
AB_A
Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. (Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed. NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM TH_LM TH_US Fusing upper thermister main center Fusing lower thermister main Fusing upper thermister sub edge HL_UM HL_LM HL_US Heater lamp upper main Heater lamp lower main Heater lamp upper sub

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(036(783)253$3(5 $ +/B805($'< &/26(

% +/B/05($'< & +/B865($'< ' +/B803/$,13$3(5%: ( +/B/03/$,13$3(5%: ) +/B863/$,13$3(5%: * +/B803/$,13$3(5&/ + +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/ , +/B863/$,13$3(5&/ - :$5083)8021+/B807 . :$5083)802))+/B/07 / :$5083(1'7,0( 2.

43-4 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL DUP PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HL_US HEAVY PAPER CL DUP HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP Content Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value Black-White plain paper duplex TH_US set value Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value Color plain paper duplex TH_US set value Color plain paper duplex applying number of sheets Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_US set value Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Color Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value Color Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value Color Heavy paper duplex TH_US set value Color Heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value Setting range 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 60 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 60 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 60 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 60 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 Group 1 SW-A SW-B 165 175 100 165 0 165 100 165 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 100 180 0 175 100 180 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 Default value Group 2 SW-A SW-B 170 175 100 165 0 170 100 165 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 100 180 0 175 100 180 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 Group 3 SW-A SW-B 170 180 100 170 0 170 100 170 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 100 180 0 180 100 180 0 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175
Item/Display T U V W X HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP APP CNT HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP APP CNT
Content Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value Color Heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1)
Setting range 0 - 60 70 - 230 30 - 200 70 - 230 0 - 60
Group 1 SW-A SW-B 1 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1
Default value Group 2 SW-A SW-B 1 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1
Group 3 SW-A SW-B 1 1 170 100 175 1 170 100 175 1
Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 SW-A SW-B Japan U.S.A. Europe China Canada U.K. AB_B Inch AUS
AB_A
Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting. (Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed. NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(036(783)253$3(5 $ +/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83 &/26(

% +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83 & +/B863/$,13$3(5%:'83 ' 3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17 ( +/B803/$,13$3(5&/'83 ) +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/'83 * +/B863/$,13$3(5&/'83 + 3/$,13$3(5&/'83$33&17 , +/B80+($9<3$3(5%:'83 - +/B/0+($9<3$3(5%:'83 . +/B(+($9<3$3(5%:'83 / +($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17 2.

43-20 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/ L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display A B C D HL_UM READY LL HL_LM READY LL HL_US READY LL HL_UM PLAIN BW LL ContentSetting Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under LL environment Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under LL environment Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under LL environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change

Correction value Input value -49 1 -25 25 -5 45 Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 0 50 5 55 25 75 49 99
Group 1 55 55 55 55
Default value Group 2 Group 3 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
Item/Display E F G H I J HL_LM PLAIN BW LL HL_US PLAIN BW LL HL_UM PLAIN CL LL HL_LM PLAIN CL LL HL_US PLAIN CL LL WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T LL WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T LL WARMUP END TIME LL
ContentSetting Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under LL environment Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under LL environment Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment (Under LL environment, the warm-up complete time does not depends on this set value. When the temperature reaches the specified level, warm-up is completed.) Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) under LL environment Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Group 1 55 55 55 55 55
Default value Group 2 Group 3 55 55 55 55 55 55 60 55 55 55 55
1 - 99
55
L (*1)
1 - 99
80
M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF
HL_UM HEAVY LL HL_LM HEAVY LL HL_US HEAVY LL HL_UM OHP LL HL_LM OHP LL HL_US OHP LL HL_UM ENVELOPE LL HL_LM ENVELOPE LL HL_US ENVELOPE LL HL_UM GLOSS LL HL_LM GLOSS LL HL_US GLOSS LL HL_UM E-STAR LL HL_US E-STAR LL PRE-JOB LL HL_LM E-STAR LL HL UM HEAVY2 CL LL HL LM HEAVY2 CL LL HL US HEAVY2 CL LL HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 50 50 50 60 60 60 50 55 55 55 55
AG
HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL
1 - 99
55
AH
HL_US WARMUP_120L LL
1 - 99
55
AI AJ
LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 55
AK
HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL
1 - 99
55
AL
HL_US WARMUP_120H LL
1 - 99
55
AM (*1)
HI_WU_TIME_LL
1 - 99
50
Item/Display AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL
ContentSetting Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under LL environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under LL environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under LL environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1-ANAP under LL environment
Group 1
Default value Group 2 Group 3 50
AO (*1) AP
HI_WU_END_TIME_LL
1 - 99
60
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL
1 - 99
55
AQ
HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL
1 - 99
50
*1: 1 Count = 1sec Change

Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Japan U.S.A. Europe China Canada U.K. AB_B Inch AUS
AB_A
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(03$'-8670(17// $ +/B805($'<// &/26(

% +/B/05($'<// & +/B865($'<// ' +/B803/$,1%:// ( +/B/03/$,1%:// ) +/B863/$,1%:// * +/B803/$,1&/// + +/B/03/$,1&/// , +/B863/$,1&/// - :$5083)8021+/B807// . :$5083)802))+/B/07// / :$5083(1'7,0(// 2.

43-21 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2 is saved.
Item/Display A B C D E F HL_UM READY HH HL_LM READY HH HL_US READY HH HL_UM PLAIN BW HH HL_LM PLAIN BW HH HL_US PLAIN BW HH ContentSetting Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under HH environment Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under HH environment Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under HH environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under HH environment

Correction value Input value -49 1 -25 25 -5 45 Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 0 50 5 55 25 75 49 99
Group 1 45 45 45 45 45 45
Default value Group 2 Group 3 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
Item/Display G H I J HL_UM PLAIN CL HH HL_LM PLAIN CL HH HL_US PLAIN CL HH WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T HH WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T HH WARMUP END TIME HH HL_UM HEAVY HH HL_LM HEAVY HH HL_US HEAVY HH HL_UM OHP HH HL_LM OHP HH HL_US OHP HH HL_UM ENVELOPE HH HL_LM ENVELOPE HH HL_US ENVELOPE HH HL_UM GLOSS HH HL_LM GLOSS HH HL_US GLOSS HH HL_UM E-STAR HH HL_US E-STAR HH PRE-JOB HH HL_LM E-STAR HH HL UM HEAVY2 CL HH HL LM HEAVY2 CL HH HL US HEAVY2 CL HH HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH
ContentSetting Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under HH environment Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under HH environment Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) under HH environment Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or below) Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH environment Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is 120C or above) Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH environment Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under HH environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above)
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Group 1 45 45 45
Default value Group 2 Group 3 45 45 45 45 50 45 45
1 - 99
50
L (*1) M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45
AG
HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH
1 - 99
45
AH
HL_US WARMUP_120L HH
1 - 99
45
AI AJ
LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 45
AK
HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH
1 - 99
45
AL
HL_US WARMUP_120H HH
1 - 99
45
AM AN
HI_WU_TIME_HH HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
Item/Display AO HI_WU_END_TIME_HH
ContentSetting Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under HH environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under HH environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above) Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1AN-AP under HH environment
Group 1
Default value Group 2 Group 3 50
AP
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH
1 - 99
50
AQ
HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH
1 - 99
50

AB_A
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(03$'-8670(17++ $ +/B805($'<++ &/26(

% +/B/05($'<++ & +/B865($'<++ ' +/B803/$,1%:++ ( +/B/03/$,1%:++ ) +/B863/$,1%:++ * +/B803/$,1&/++ + +/B/03/$,1&/++ , +/B863/$,1&/++ - :$5083)8021+/B807++ . :$5083)802))+/B/07++ / :$5083(1'7,0(++ 2.

43-22 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/ L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2 is saved.
Item/Display A B C D HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL ContentSetting Upper TH_UM under LL environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex Lower TH_LM under LL environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex Upper TH_US under LL environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex Black-White plain paper under LL environment Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Upper TH_UM color under LL environment Correction value for plain paper duplex Lower TH_LM color under LL environment Correction value for plain paper duplex Upper TH_US color under LL environment Correction value for plain paper duplex Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value Group 2 Group 3 60 60 60 60 50 60 60 50

Correction value Input value -49 1 -25 25 -5 45 0 50 5 55 25 75 49 99
Group 1 60 60 60 50
E F G
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
60 60 60
60 60 60
60 60 60
Item/Display H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL HL_US HEAVY CL DUP LL HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP LL HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP LL HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP LL HEAVY2 BW DUP APP CNT LL HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP LL HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP LL HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP LL HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT LL
ContentSetting Color plain paper under LL environment Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image (*1) Correction value for TH_UM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL environment Correction value for TH_LM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL environment Correction value for TH_US set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1) Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1) Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1) Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set value under LL environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set value under LL environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1)
Group 1 50
Default value Group 2 Group 3 50 50
I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
60 60 60 50 60 60 60 50 60 60 60 50 60 60 60 50

AB_A
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83 $ +/B803/$,1%:'83// &/26(

% +/B/03/$,1%:'83// & +/B863/$,1%:'83// ' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17// ( +/B803/$,1&/'83// ) +/B/03/$,1&/'83// * +/B863/$,1&/'83// + 3/$,1&/'83$33&17// , +/B80+($9<%:'83// - +/B/0+($9<%:'83// . +/B86+($9<%:'83// / +($9<%:'83$33&17// 2.

43-23 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value Group 2 Group 3 45 45 50 45 50 45 50 45 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 50 45 50 45 50

Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH HL_US HEAVY CL DUP HH HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP HH HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP HH HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP HH HEAVY2 BW DUP APP CNT HH HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP HH HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP HH HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP HH HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT HH
ContentSetting Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1) Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for TH_US Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment Correction value for Color plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1) Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1) Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1) Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1) Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1)
Group 1 45 50 45 50 45 50 45 50

AB_A
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83 $ +/B803/$,1%:'83++ &/26(

% +/B/03/$,1%:'83++ & +/B863/$,1%:'83++ ' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17++ ( +/B803/$,1&/'83++ ) +/B/03/$,1&/'83++ * +/B863/$,1&/'83++ + 3/$,1&/'83$33&17++ , +/B80+($9<%:'83++ - +/B/0+($9<%:'83++ . +/B86+($9<%:'83++ / +($9<%:'83$33&17++ 2.

43-24 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 434. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2 is saved. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
Item/Display A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
Content Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under NN environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under NN environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under LL environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under HH environment (when the fusing temperature is less than 120C) Item A, B applying start screen under NN environment Item A, B applying start screen under LL environment Item A, B applying start screen under HH environment Cool down time heavy mode (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the heavy paper mode fusing temperature is returned to the normal temperature.) Cool down time OHP mode (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the OHP mode fusing temperature is returned to the normal temperature.) Cool down time envelope mode (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the envelope mode fusing temperature is returned to the normal temperature.) Thin paper BW-TH_UM
Default value 55
NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
1 - 99
50
LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
1 - 99
60
LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
1 - 99
50
HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
1 - 99
50
HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
1 - 99
50
G (*2) H (*2) I (*2) J (*1) K (*1) L (*1) M
NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
1 - 60 1 - 60 1 - 60 1 - 60
5 10 5 15
COOL_DOWN_OHP
1 - 60
30
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
1 - 60
40
HL UM THIN PAPER BW
100 - 190
150
: '09/Sep
Item/Display Content Thin paper BW-TH_LM Thin paper BW-TH_US Thin paper COL-TH_UM Thin paper COL-TH_LM Thin paper COL-TH_US Thin paper Ready-TH_UM Recycled paper BW-TH_UM Recycled paper BW-TH_LM Recycled paper BW-TH_US Recycled paper COL-TH_UM Recycled paper COL-TH_LM Recycled paper COL-TH_US Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM Setting range 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 100 - 190 Default value 130 160 150 130 160 165 165 130 175 165 130 175 170
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
HL LM THIN PAPER BW HL US THIN PAPER BW HL UM THIN PAPER CL HL LM THIN PAPER CL HL US THIN PAPER CL HL UM THIN PAPER READY HL UM REC PAPER BW HL LM REC PAPER BW HL US REC PAPER BW HL UM REC PAPER CL HL LM REC PAPER CL HL US REC PAPER CL HL UM REC PAPER READY
*1: 1 Count = 1sec Change *2: 1 Count = 1 sheet Change <Code descriptions>
TH_UM TH_LM TH_US Fusing upper thermister main center Fusing lower thermister main Fusing upper thermister sub edge HL_UM HL_LM HL_US

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 )86(57(035(6(7 $ 11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86 &/26(
Heater lamp upper main Heater lamp lower main Heater lamp upper sub

% 11BB)86B'83B+/B/0 & //BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86 ' //BB)86B'83B+/B/0 ( ++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86 ) ++BB)86B'83B+/B/0 * 11BB)86B'83B&17 + //BB)86B'83B&17 , ++BB)86B'83B&17 - &22/B'2:1B+($9< . &22/B'2:1B2+3 / &22/B'2:1B'(9(/23 2.

44
Item/Display MD LD
Content Membrane laser power voltage correction Enable/Disable setting Membrane decrease environment grid voltage correction Enable/Disable setting Membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction Enable/Disable setting Membrane decrease environment discharge light quantity correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density humidity correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density area correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density life correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density print ratio correction Enable/Disable setting
MD EV
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. (The selected item is highlighted.) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
MD DL EV
Setting range Normal (Disable : 0 : NO) Reverse (Enable : 1 : YES)
Default value Disable
NOTE
Enable
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
MD DL
Enable
Disable
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially required.
Item/Display HV Content Normal operation high density process control Enable/Disable setting Normal operation half tone process control Enable/Disable setting Transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting Membrane decrease grid voltage correction Enable/Disable setting Setting range Normal (Disable : 0 : NO) Reverse (Enable : 1 : YES) Default value Enable NOTE
TN_HUM
Enable
TN_AREA
Enable
2
HT
Enable
TN_LIFE
Enable
TC
Enable
TN_COV
Enable
MD VG
Enable
: '09/Sep
Content Toner density process control correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density environment correction Enable/Disable setting Toner density correction unconditional supply Enable/Disable setting Toner forcible consumption mode Enable/Disable setting 1pixel half tone process control correction Enable/Disable setting Auto registration adjustment Enable/Disable setting Auto registration adjustment execution error check Enable/Disable setting Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable setting Toner density correction Enable/Disable setting Half tone process control printer correction feedback Enable/Disable setting PTC environment correction Enable/Disable setting PTC life correction Enable/Disable setting Setting range Normal (Disable : 1 : NO) Reverse (Enable : 0 : YES) Default value Enable NOTE A Setting range 1 - 255 Default value 21
Item/Display TN_PROCON
Item/Display PCS_CL LED ADJ
Content Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value Dark voltage of color Dark voltage of black Belt substrate when the item B adjustment is completed. Belt substrate input max. value Belt substrate input min. value Belt substrate input difference (Item E - Item F) Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F Registration sensor dark voltage F Belt substrate when the item I adjustment is completed. Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R Registration sensor dark voltage R Belt substrate when the item J adjustment is completed. Belt substrate input max. value (F side) Belt substrate input min. value (F side) Belt substrate input difference (Item O - Item P) Belt substrate input max. value (R side) Belt substrate input min. value (R side) Belt substrate input difference (Item R - Item S) Patch light receiving potential F(K) Patch light receiving potential F(C) Patch light receiving potential F(M) Patch light receiving potential F(Y) Patch light receiving potential R(K) Patch light receiving potential R(C) Patch light receiving potential R(M) Patch light receiving potential R(Y)
TN_ENV
Enable
PCS_K LED ADJ
1 - 255
21
TN_DRIP
Enable
C D E
PCS_CL DARK PCS_K DARK PCS_K GRND
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0
TN_SPEND
Disable F G Enable H PCS_K BELT MAX PCS_K BELT MIN PCS_K BELT DIF
PHT
Disable
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
Enable
REG_F LED ADJ
1 - 255
56
DM_PHASE SENSITIVITY
Enable Disable
J K
REG_F DARK REG_F GRND
0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0
PRT_HT
Enable
REG_R LED ADJ
1 - 255
56
PTC_ENV
Enable
PTC_LIFE
Enable
Enable: Correction ON Enable: Correction ON
M N
REG_R DARK REG_R GRND
0 - 255 0 - 256
0 0
O P
REG_F BELT MAX REG_F BELT MIN REG_F BELT DIF
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 02'(6(77,1* +9 0'/' 71B+80 71B352&21 3+7 6(16,7,9,7< +7 0'(9 71B$5($ 71B(19 $5B$872 357B+7 7& 0''/ 71B/,)( 71B'5,3 $5B(5525 37&B(19 0'9* 0''/(9 71B&29 71B63(1' '0B3+$6( 37&B(19 &/26(
R S T
REG_R BELT MAX REG_R BELT MIN REG_R BELT DIF
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0
U
(;(&87(
REG_F PATCH (K) REG_F PATCH (C) REG_F PATCH (M) REG_F PATCH (Y) REG_R PATCH (K) REG_R PATCH (C) REG_R PATCH (M) REG_R PATCH (Y)
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
44-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Section Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is displayed. If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. Process
W X Y Z AA AB
: '09/Sep
Error content PCS_K LED ADJ error The target is not reached by 3 times of retry. PCS_CL LED ADJ error The target is not reached by 3 times of retry. PCS_K GRND error Effective difference between the upper and lower values of the belt substrate circuit, outside the range REG_F LED ADJ error The target is not reached by 3 times of retry. REG_R LED ADJ error The target is not reached by 3 times of retry. REG_F GRND error Effective difference between the upper and lower values of the belt substrate circuit, outside the range REG_R GRND error Effective difference between the upper and lower values of the belt substrate circuit, outside the range Item/Display G BIAS_CL STANDARD DIF BIAS_BK STANDARD DIF BIAS PATCH INTERVAL Y_PAT TARGET ID Content Bias (for color) reference calculation difference Bias (for black) reference calculation difference Patch bias output interval Patch density standard value (yellow) Patch density standard value (magenta) Patch density standard value (cyan) Patch density standard value (black) Patch position substrate light receiving effective range value Setting range 0 - 255 Default value 60
Error name Black sensor adjustment abnormality Color sensor adjustment abnormality Substrate scan abnormality
0 - 255
I J
1 - 255 1 - 255
60 122
Registration sensor F adjustment abnormality Registration sensor R adjustment abnormality Registration substrate F scan abnormality
M_PAT TARGET ID
1 - 255
129
C_PAT TARGET ID
1 - 255
115
K_PAT TARGET ID
1 - 255
Registration substrate R scan abnormality
HV BK_GROUND LIMIT
1 - 255
60

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&21*$,1$'-8670(17 3&6B&//('$'- 3&6B./('$'- 3&6B&/'$5. 3&6B.'$5. 3&6B.*51' 3&6B.%(/70$; 3&6B.%(/70,1 3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B5/('$'- 5(*B)'$5. 5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)*51' 5(*B5*51' 5(*B)%(/70$; 5(*B)%(/70,1 5(*B)%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/7',) 5(*B)3$7&+. 5(*B)3$7&+& 5(*B)3$7&+0 5(*B)3$7&+< (;(&87( &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783 $ 3&6B&/7$5*(7

&/26(

% 3&6B.7$5*(7 & /('B&/287387 ' /('B.287387 ( 3&6$'-670(17/,0,7 ) %(/7*5281'',) * %,$6B&/67$1'$5'',) + %,$6B%.67$1'$5'',) , %,$63$7&+,17(59$/ - <B3$77$5*(7,' . 0B3$77$5*(7,' / &B3$77$5*(7,' 2.

44-4 Purpose Setting 44-6 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed. (Refer to the table below.) In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Item/Display A B C PCS_CL TARGET PCS_K TARGET LED_CL OUTPUT Content Color sensor target set value Black sensor target set value Color sensor light emitting quantity set value Black sensor light emitting quantity set value Sensor adjustment target limit value Effective difference between the belt 1 circuit substrate upper and lower limit values Setting range 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Default value 98 208 21 Result display COMPLETE ERROR INTERRUPTION Details of error display CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR K_HV_ERR C_HV_ERR M_HV_ERR Y_HV _ERR TIMEOUT_ERR Content description Normal complete Abnormal end Forcible interruption Content description Color sensor adjustment abnormality Black sensor adjustment abnormality K high density process control abnormality C high density process control abnormality M high density process control abnormality Y high density process control abnormality Time out
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. Process
Process
LED_K OUTPUT
1 - 255
21
E F
PCS ADJSTMENT LIMIT BELT GROUND DIF
1 - 255 1 - 255
4 1

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
(;(&87(
44-9 Purpose Operation data display Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Section Operation/Procedure Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Mode CPY/PRN Item/Display (*: Correction value) P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** TN HUD AREA TN HUD DATA TC TMP AREA TC TMP DATA TC HUD AREA TC HUD DATA MD HUD AREA MD HUD DATA MD K STEP MD C STEP MD M STEP MD Y STEP MD K DRUM COUNTER MD C DRUM COUNTER MD M DRUM COUNTER MD Y DRUM COUNTER MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** Content High density process control GB/DV data (KCMY) (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level) High density normal (Medium speed display) GB/DV data (KCMY) (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level) High density normal (Low speed display) GB/DV data (KCMY) (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level) Toner control display humidity area Toner control display humidity AD value Transfer display temperature area Transfer display temperature AD value Transfer display humidity area Transfer display humidity AD value Membrane decrease display humidity area Membrane decrease display humidity AD value Drum membrane decrease correction STEP display (KCMY) Display range GB: 230 - 850 DV: 0 - 600 Default value GB: 630 DV: 430
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
N(M) (NORMAL (MIDDLE))
GB: 230 - 850 DV: 0 - 600
GB: 630 DV: 430
N(L) (NORMAL (LOW))
GB: 230 - 850 DV: 0 - 600
GB: 600 DV: 400
OTHER
TN/TC
1 - 14 0 - 1023 1-9 0 - 1023 1-9 0 - 1023 1 - 14 0 - 1023 0-4
9 0 4 0 4 0 9 0 0
DRUM
Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area (KCMY)
0 - 20
VG
Drum membrane decrease grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
0 - 255
LD
Drum membrane decrease laser power voltage correction (KCMY)
0 - 255
HV
High density membrane decrease environment GB correction display (KCMY)
0 - 255
Mode OTHER CP
Item/Display (*: Correction value) MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** DESTINATION MODEL TYPE CRUM DEST_K CRUM DEST_C CRUM DEST_M CRUM DEST_Y PROCON COUNT HV PROCON COUNT HT
Content Drum membrane decrease environment grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
Display range 0 - 255
Default value 0
DL
Drum membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction (%)
0 - 100
50
DL EV
Drum membrane decrease environment discharge light quantity correction (%)
-100 - 100
CRUM
Machine side management CRUM destination (Main unit data) Machine model type CRUM destination (CRUM data)
0-1 -
0 -
CNT
High density process control number of executions Half tone process control number of executions
0 - 99999999 0 - 99999999
0 0

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/01250$// %/$&.B3*%B'9B &<$1B3*%B'9B 0$*(17$B3*%B'9B <(//2:B3*%B'9B %/$&.B0*%B'9B%/$&.B/*%B'9B &<$1B0*%B'9B&<$1B/*%B'9B 0$*(17$B0*%B'9B0$*(17$B/*%B'9B <(//2:B0*%B'9B<(//2:B/*%B'9B &/26(
Mode TARGET (1 page)
Item/Display CARB DATA SEAL ADJ DATA ADK_SL (K)
Content Calibration plate detection level Jig patch seal detection level when executing SIM 44-13 Development characteristics gradient coefficient (High density process control operation) Development characteristics intercept level (High density process control operation 0V) High density process control target density level (K) High density process control target density level (C/M/Y) High density process control nth time patch density level 1 (n=15) Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=1-5) Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=1-5) Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=1-5) BK only Patch data nth time patch 5 (n=1-5) BK only Patch data nth time patch 1 (n=6-10) Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=6-10) Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=6-10) Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=6-10) BK only Patch data nth time patch 5 (n=6-10) BK only
Display range 0 - 255 1 - 255
Default value 108 108
-9.99 9.99
ADK_INT(K)
&3<351 27+(5
-999.9 999.9
44-12 Purpose Operation data display

TARGET (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor (registration sensor). Section Operation/Procedure Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
PATCH 1-5 (Page 1-2)
0.00 255.00 0.00 255.00 0 - 255
TARGET (C/M/Y) n-1
n-2 n-3 n-4
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0
n-5
0 - 255
PATCH 6-10 (Page 1-2)
n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
0 0 0 0
n-5
0 - 255

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$< &$5%'$7$ 6($/$'-'$7$ $'.B6/. $'.B,17. 7$5*(7. 7$5*(7& 7$5*(70 7$5*(7< &/26(
Item/Display TH_LM
Content Fusing lower thermister main A/D value (temperature C) Fusing upper thermister sub A/D value (temperature C) Temperature thermister
TH_US
TEMPRATURE
HUMIDITY
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+
Humidity sensor
TH1_LSU
44-13 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Attach the calibration jig. Press [EXECUTE] key. Calibration is performed, and the data are displayed.
Item/Display A B PCS_CL CARB OUT PCS_CL LED ADJ Content Calibration plate sensor value Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value Setting range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Default value 108 21
LSU thermister 1 A/D value (temperature C)
Display range Temperature: 0 - 255C(1C) AD value: 0-1023 Temperature: 0 - 255C(1C) AD value: 0-1023 Temperature: -40.0 - 60.0C (0.1C) AD value: 0-1023 Humidity: 5.0-90.0% (0.1%), AD value: 0-1023 Temperature: 5.0-60.0C (0.1C) AD value: 0-255

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725 7+B80GHJ;;; 7+B80B$'GHJ;;; 7+B80B$';;; 7+B/0GHJ;;; 7+B86GHJ;;; 7(035$785(GHJ;;; +80,',7<;;; 7+B/68GHJ;; &/26(

44-16
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17 6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3&6B&/&$5%287 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17 3&6B&/'$5. 3&6B&/&$5%287 3&6B&//('$'- 3&6B&//('$'- &/26(

Purpose
Operation data display
&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control data. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. The toner density control data are displayed.
Item/ Display TONER DEN_LT (M) TONER DEN_ST (M) Content The current toner density sensor output value (final value) at the medium speed The current toner density reference value display (including all the correction values) at the medium speed The current toner density sensor output value (final value) at the low speed The current toner density reference value display (including all the correction values) at the low speed Setting range 1 - 255 Default value 129
Developing system
(;(&87( (;(&87(

44-14 Purpose Operation data display Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Section Operation/Procedure The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/Display TH_UM Content Fusing upper thermister main detection temperature (C) Difference AD input value (AD value) Fusing upper thermister main compensation temperature (C) AD value (AD value) Fusing upper thermister main detection sensor AD value (AD value) Display range Temperature: 0 - 255C(1C) AD value: 0-1023 Temperature: 0.0-255.0C (0.2C) AD value: 0-1023 AD value:0-1023
128
Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ LSU
TONER DEN_LT (L) TONER DEN_ST (L)
129
128
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
Item/Display AUTO DEVE (M) Auto development adjustment value (At the medium speed) All the correction reference values (At the medium speed)
Content Sensor output value after completion of SIM25-02 (at the medium speed)
Default value 128
Item/Display AUTO DEVE VO (M) Auto development adjustment control voltage (at the medium speed) All the correction reference control voltages (at the medium speed) Auto development adjustment control voltage (at the low speed) All the correction reference control voltages (at the low speed) Area correction control voltage Humidity correction control voltage Print ratio correction control voltage Process control correction control voltage Life correction value control voltage Sensitivity correction control voltage Environment correction control voltage
Content Sensor control voltage value after completion of SIM25-02 (at the medium speed)
Default value 128
ALL (M)
AUTO DEVE (L)
ALL (L)
Auto development adjustment value (At the low speed) All the correction reference values (At the low speed)
Correction reference value which calculated all the correction values for the auto development adjustment value (at the medium speed) Sensor output value after completion of SIM25-02 (at the low speed)
ALL VO (M)
AUTO DEVE VO (L)
Control voltage reference value which calculated all the correction values for the auto development adjustment value (at the medium speed) Sensor control voltage value after completion of SIM25-02 (at the low speed)
AREA
HUD
PRINT RATE
PROCON
LIFE
SENSITIVITY
Area correction value Humidity correction value Print ratio correction value Process control correction value Life correction value Sensitivity correction value
Correction reference value which calculated all the correction values for the auto development adjustment value (at the low speed) Correction value for the environment area Correction value for change in humidity Correction value for document print ratio Correction value for high density process control result Correction value for the developer life Correction for the toner density sensitivity
ALL VO (L)
-127 127
0 AREA VO
HUD VO
Control voltage reference value which calculated all the correction values for the auto development adjustment value (at the low speed) Control voltage correction value for the environment area Control voltage correction value for change in humidity Control voltage correction value for the document print ratio Control voltage correction value for the high density process control result Control voltage correction value for the developer life Control voltage correction value for the toner density sensor Control voltage correction value for the high humidity environment
-127 127
PRINT RATE VO
PROCON VO 1 - 999 500 LIFE VO
SENSITIVITY VO
1 - 999
500
ENV VO
-127 127
Item/Display AUTO DEVE AREA Area in the auto development adjustment Current area
Content Humidity area display in the automatic developer adjustment Current humidity area display
Default value 8
AREA

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$< 721(5'(1B/70 721(5'(1B670 721(5'(1B/7/ 721(5'(1B67/ &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(&255(&75(68/7 37.37&37037< %$6( ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' 37.37&37037< ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' ,' %$6( &/26(
&
<
1(;7

44-21 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control target. Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key. The half tone process control target is set and the operation data are displayed.
Display COMPLETE ERROR COLOR SENSOR ADJUSTMENT ERROR BLACK SENSOR ADJUSTMENT [YMCK] OTHER Content Normal complete Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment error Black image density sensor sensitivity adjustment error High density process control error [YMCK] Other errors
44-24 Purpose Operation data display Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
Item/Display [EX-LOW] Content Coefficient of the approximation formula of the minimum density Coefficient of the approximation formula of the low density Coefficient of the approximation formula of when connecting the low density and the medium density Coefficient of the approximation formula of the medium density Coefficient of the approximation formula of the high density Each density section connection output ratio Half tone process control reference value Half tone process control correction value Printer half tone process control correction value Printer half tone process control reference dither value Printer auto density adjustment correction value Previous half tone process control value
Process
Process
Category Coefficient
[LOW]
[CONNECT]

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
[MID]
[HIGH]
[CONNECT POINT] Reference value Correction value For printer

(;(&87(
[SENSOR_TARGET] [S_VALUE] [PRINTER_S_VALUE] [PRINTER_BASE_DITHER _VALUE]
44-22 Purpose Operation data display

Previous correction value
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key. The toner patch density level made in the half tone process control operation is displayed.
Item/Display ID_n BASE1 BASE5 Content Patch data display (n=1-16) Belt substrate data (START) Belt substrate data (LAST)
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT _VALUE] [BEFORE S_VALUE]
Process

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$< >(;/2:@$% >/2:@$%& >&211(&7@$% >0,'@$%& >+,*+@$% >&211(&732,17@ &/26(
&
<
1(;7


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. Process
(;(&87(
Item/Display A LOW FIELD LOWER LIMIT Content Low density approximate expression data lower limit value Low density approximate expression data upper limit value Medium density approximate expression data lower limit value Medium density approximate expression data upper limit value Reference point of the highlight correction amount Setting range 0 - 255 Default value K CMY 98 2
44-27 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Section Operation/Procedure Process
LOW FIELD UPPER LIMIT
0 - 255
60
40
1) 2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The correction data of the half tone process control are cleared.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5 &/26(
MID FIELD LOWER LIMIT
0 - 255
90
15
MID FIELD UPPER LIMIT
0 - 255
144
HIGHLIGHT POINT
1-8

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$< $ /2:),(/'/2:(5/,0,7 &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

% /2:),(/'833(5/,0,7 & 0,'),(/'/2:(5/,0,7 ' 0,'),(/'833(5/,0,7 ( +,*+/,*+732,17

&
<
2.
44-26 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key. The half tone process control is performed and the operation data are displayed.
COMPLETE INTERRUPTION CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR [YMCK] CONNECTION_ERR Normal complete Forcible interruption Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment error Black image density sensor sensitivity adjustment error High density process control error [YMCK] Communication abnormality
Process
44-28 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution conditions. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Process
Mode Process control Enable/Disable setting A Item/Display INITIAL YES NO Content When warm-up after clearing the counter of the OPC drum and the developer unit When supplying the power (when clearing shut-off.) Enable Disable Setting range 0-1 0 1 Default value 0
SW ON
TIME
After passing the specified time from leaving READY continuously (Time can be changed by INTERVAL TIME)
HUM_LIMIT
HUM judgment is made when turning ON the power and after passing TIME.
HUM
REV1
YES NO
The temperature and humidity in side the machine are monitored only during a job for every 2hours (set by item N). When the changes in the temperature and the humidity are greater than the specified level (the set value of item O) in comparison with the previous process control. The accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position OPC unit reaches the specified level after turning the power. The accumulated traveling distance of BK position OPC drum unit reaches the specified level from execution of the previous density correction. The accumulated traveling distance of M position OPC drum unit reaches the specified level from execution of the previous density correction. Select of YES/NO of the manual process control key with key operation
Color process control Enable Process control Disable BK process control Enable Pixel count judgment (Judgement is based on the setting value of item K, L.) Color process control Enable Process control Disable BK process control Enable Pixel count judgment (Judgement is based on the setting value of item K, L.) Color process control Enable Process control Disable BK process control Enable Color process control Enable Process control Disable BK process control Enable
0-3
0 1 2 3
0-3
0 1 2 3
0-2
0 1 2
0-2
0 1 2
Enable Inhibit
0-1
0 1
REV2_BK
YES NO
Enable Inhibit
0-1
0 1
REV2_CL
YES NO
Enable Inhibit
0-1
0 1
REFRESH MODE(*1)
YES NO
Key operation display Key operation NO display
0-1
0 1
Mode Process control conditions setting J DAY
Item/Display
Content When the next warm-up if there is no color job after a color job after passing the specified days from execution of the previous color process control Disable of the specified days judgment 1 - 999 days passing
Setting range 0 - 999 0
Default value 1
1999 1 - 999 1 - 999 1-255 (1-255: 1-255h passed) 1 - 24 1-9 1-999 (Entry of 20 corresponds to 100,000mm.) 1-999 (Entry of 20 corresponds to 100,000mm.) 0 - 999 0 10 10 12 2 2 15
K L M N O P
PIX_RATIO_BK PIX_RATIO_CL INTERVAL TIME HUM HOUR HUM_DIF BK_RATIO
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print. Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print. Passing time setting of "TIME"(h: hour) Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of "HUM" (h: hour) Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of the previous process control of "HUM Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum traveling distance when executing the BK process control BK process control is executed without judgment of ratio of the M OPC drum traveling distance. (Addition) 1 - 999(%)
M_RATIO
15
COLOR BORDER
20
BK ONLY
T Registration adjustment setting U
HT_DIF RG_ON_SYNC CL ALL CL/BK
Disable/Enable setting and setting of Enable 5 time the number of repetition of the BK Disable 1-5 times process control when monochrome Inhibit print is continued. Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT process control Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON process control Execution timing setting after turning ON the power Span setting from execution Disable to Enable Span setting of timer execution Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 3
0-6
1999 0 1-5 6
1 - 255 0-2 0 1 2
40 0
V W X Secondary transfer cleaning setting Y Z AA
RG_TEMP_TIMER RG_PERM_TIMER RG_HOUR_TIMER 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3
0 - 240 (MINUTE) 0 - 15 (HOUR) 0-15 (Above)+(HOUR) 1 - 999 1 - 999 1 - 999
60 1 5 200 300 500
*1: When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting menu. When the color balance or the density change is not within the allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually and forcibly. However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This point must be explained to the user clearly.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17 $ ,1,7,$/<(6 &/26(
% 6:21 & 7,0( ' +80B/,0,7 ( +80 ) 5(9<(6 * 5(9B%.<(6 + 5(9B&/<(6 , 5()5(6+02'(12 - '$< . 3,;B5$7,2B%. / 3,;B5$7,2B&/ 2.

44-29 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key.
Item/Display A B C D COPY PRINTER FAX SELF PRINT Content During copy job During print job During FAX print job During self print 0-4 Setting range 0 1 2 3 4 No execution HV only HV PHT HV HT HV PHT HT Default value 4 4 4 4

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +$/)721(6(77,1* $ &23<+93+7+7 &/26(
% 35,17(5+93+7+7 & )$;+93+7+7 ' 6(/)35,17+93+7+7

Process
2.
44-31 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Select item A with [] [] key. Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with 10 key. Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors. Select item B with [] [] key. Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in procedure 4). Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Setting range 1 1-3 Default value 3 (SET VALUE)
Process
HV: High density process control HT: Half tone process control PHT: Not operate
Item/Display A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 degrees
Content Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet print) (1)0 (2)45 (3)90(4)135 (5)180 (6)225 (7)270 (8)315 * The number in () is printed on the output pattern. Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet print) (1)0 (2)90 (3)180 (4)270 * The number in () is printed on the output pattern. Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) Angle step 0 (1) 45 (2) 90 (3) 135 (4) 180 (5) 225 (6) 270 (7) 315 (8) Manual paper feed Main unit 1 stage Main unit 2 stage Option paper feed desk 1 stage Option paper feed desk 2 stage LCC
90deg
90 degrees
SET VALUE B COLOR
SET VALUE Phase adjustment value BKCL Tray selection
3 1-8 1
PAPER
MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC
1 2 3 4 5 6
1-6
3 (CS2)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '580326,7,216(77,1* $ 35,1702'(6(79$/8( &/26(
% &2/25 & 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
: '09/Sep
44-37 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a set target color with the touch panel. Select a target item with [] [] buttons. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing operation, this simulation is used.
Item/Display Black CMY A A B B C C D D E E F F G H I J G K H L I M J N K O L P M Q N R S T U Default value Black CMY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 3 3 1 1 1 1 4 4 3 3 1 1 1 1 4 3 1 1
Current DV Bias voltage
Low speed mode Heavy paper mode Middle speed mode
High speed mode Monochrome mode Time (T) from termination of continuous outputs to start of the next output operation Low speed mode Heavy paper mode
Middle speed mode
High speed mode Monochrome mode
less than 300[v] 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] 450[v] or more less than 300[v] 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] 450[v] or more less than 300[v] 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] 450[v] or more Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] 240 [sec] or more Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] 240 [sec] or more Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] 240 [sec] or more
Variable range 0-5 (*1)
1-12
<Use example> (*1) Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value. Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value. When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1* $ '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B &/26(
44-43 Purpose Data display Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Section Operation/Procedure The identification number and the identification signal level of the developing unit are displayed.
Item/Display A B C D E
2.
Developing system
Content K color development unit identification number C color development unit identification number M color development unit identification number Y color development unit identification number K color developing unit identification number AD value C color developing unit identification number AD value M color developing unit identification number AD value Y color developing unit identification number AD value
% '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B & '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B ' '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B ( '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B ) '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B * '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B + '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B , '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B - '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B . '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B / '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
DVCH KIND K DVCH KIND C DVCH KIND M DVCH KIND Y DVCH_AD_K DVCH_AD_C DVCH_AD_M DVCH_AD_Y
Display range 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255

&
<
F G H
Item/Display
Content Text/Printed Photo (Color tone enhancement) Text/Photograph (Color tone enhancement) Printed Photo (Color tone enhancement) Photograph (Color tone enhancement) Map (Color tone enhancement) Single color Single color (Copy document) 2-color (red/ black) copy 2-color (red/ black) copy (copy document) LOW HIGH

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '(9(/23(581,7$'021,725 '9&+.,1'. '9&+.,1'& '9&+.,1'0 '9&+.,1'< '9&+B$'B. '9&+B$'B& '9&+B$'B0 '9&+B$'B< &/26(
P

46
46-1 Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J AUTO TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP LIGHT TEXT(COPY TO COPY) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) Auto Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map Light document Text (Copy document) Text/Printed Photo (Copy document) Printed Photo (Copy document) Text (Color tone enhancement) Content LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
R S
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) TEXT/PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) PHOTOGRAPH (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) MAP (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT) SINGLE COLOR SINGLE COLOR (COPY TO COPY) TWO COLOR TWO COLOR (COPY TO COPY)
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default value 50 50
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
T U

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@ $ $872 &/26(

% 7(;7 & 7(;735,17('3+272 ' 7(;73+272 ( 35,17('3+272 ) 3+272*5$3+ * 0$3 + /,*+7 , 7(;7&23<72&23< - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2:
+,*+
2.
46-2 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
Item/Display A B C AUTO1 AUTO2 TEXT Auto 1 Auto 2 Text Content LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50
Item/Display D E F G H I J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP TEXT (COPY TO COPY) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) LIGHT
Content Text/Printed Photo Text/ Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map Text (Copy document) Text/Printed Photo (Copy document) Printed Photo (Copy document) Light document LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@ $ $872 &/26(

% 7(;7 & 7(;735,17('3+272 ' 7(;73+272 ( 35,17('3+272 ) 3+272*5$3+ * 0$3

2.
46-5 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. Section Operation/Procedure

1) 2)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@ $ $872
&/26(
Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

% $872 & 7(;7 ' 7(;735,17('3+272 ( 7(;73+272 ) 35,17('3+272 * 3+272*5$3+ + 0$3 , 7(;7&23<72&23< - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< / /,*+7

3)
Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display
2.
Content Automatic/Text Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map
/2:
+,*+
46-4 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display A B C D E F G AUTO TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP Content Auto Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photograph Printed Photo Photograph Map Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
A B C D E F G
AUTO TEXT TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO TEXT/PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH MAP
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@ $ $8727(;7 &/26(

% 7(;7 & 7(;735,17('3+272 ' 7(;73+272 ( 35,17('3+272 ) 3+272*5$3+ * 0$3

2.
46-8 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)

C
Item/Display FAX : LOW
Content RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF copy copy mode exposure adjustment (High density side) RSPF scanner mode exposre adjustment (Low density side) RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (high density)
Default value 48
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
COPY : HIGH
1 - 99
53
SCAN : HIGH
1 - 99
53
FAX : HIGH
1 - 99
53

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(1763) $ &23</2: &/26(
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density area and the high density area. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the target color is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display A B LOW DENSITY POINT HIGH DENSITY POINT Content Low density correction amount High density correction amount Default value 50 50

% 6&$1/2: )$;/2: &23<+,*+ ( 6&$1+,*+ )$;+,*+

2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'( $ /2:'(16,7<32,17 &/26(
46-10 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
TEXT TEXT/PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO MAP LIGHT COPY ORG Text Text/Printed Photo Printed Photo Photograph + Text/Printed Photo Map Light document Copy document Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Default value 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

% +,*+'(16,7<32,17

2.
4) 46-9 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [RSPF] keys on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy mode, and the fax mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display A COPY : LOW Content RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 48
Item/Display POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14
Setting range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755
SCAN : LOW
1 - 99
48
Item/Display O P Q POINT15 POINT16 POINT17
Density level (Point) Point 15 Point 16 Point 17
Setting range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755
Default value 500 500 500
46-19 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents. Section Operation/Procedure Select an item to be set with touch panel. When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is saved.
Item/Display AE_MODE AE_STOP_COPY Content Auto exposure mode Auto B/W exposure Stop (for copy) Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX) Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner) Auto exposure filter setting AE exposure width Set value MODE1, MODE2 REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN ON/OFF REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN SOFT NORMAL SHARP FULL/PART Default value MODE1 STOP

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17 7(;7 0$3 7(;73573+272 /,*+7 35,17('3+272 &23<25* 3+2727(;73+272 &/26(
(;(&87(

AE_STOP_FAX
ON STOP
46-16 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17 Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Setting range 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 373 - 627 Default value 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
AE_STOP_SCAN
AE_FILTER
NORMAL
AE_WIDTH
FULL

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685(02'(6(783%:$( $(B02'( $(B6723B&23< $(B6723B)$; $(B6723B6&$1 $(B),/7(5 $(B:,'7+ 02'( 5($/7,0( 2)) 5($/7,0( 62)7 )8// 02'( 6723 21 6723 1250$/ 3$57 35(6&$1 6+$53 35(6&$1 &/26(

NOTE:
MODE 1 MODE 2 STOP High gamma (high contrast images) Normal gamma The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is scanned, and the output image density is determined according to the scanned density. (The output image density is even for all the surface.) The densities of the document width are scanned sequentially, and the output image density is determined according to the density in each area of document. (The output image density may not be even for all the surface.) The densities of the all surface of document are scanned sequentially, and the output image density is determined according to the average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the surface.) The document density scan area in the monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document width. This is not related to the prescan mode. The document density scan area in the monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
REALTIME
PRESCAN

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3* $ 32,17 &/26(
AE WIDTH FULL

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 (;(&87( 2.
AE WIDTH PART
: '09/Sep 46-23 Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported). Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Enable Inhibit
46-21 Purpose Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment value.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17 Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Setting range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 Default value 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
2)

Item/Display A CMY (0 : ENABLE 1 : DISABLE) 0 Content CMY engine highest density correction mode : Enable 1 CMY engine highest density correction mode : Disable 0 K engine highest density correction mode : Enable 1 K engine highest density correction mode : Disable Scanner target value for CYAN maximum density correction Scanner target value for MAGENTA maximum density correction Scanner target value for YELLOW maximum density correction Scanner target value for BLACK maximum density correction Setting range 0-1 Default value 0
K (0 : ENABLE 1 : DISABLE)
0-1
CYAN MAX TARGET MAGENTA MAX TARGET
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
YELLOW MAX TARGET BLACK MAX TARGET
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ $ 32,17 &/26(
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A and B to "0. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone gap is better. * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items A and B to "1. The tone gap may occur in high density part. NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.

% 32,17
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'( $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

2.
: '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 $ 5(' &/26(
46-24 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Press [EXECUTE] key. The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed, then the adjustment result pattern is printed. 4) Press [OK] key. The half tone correction target registration is processed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(
% *5((1 & %/8( ' &<$1 ( 0$*(17$ ) <(//2:

&
<
2.
46-26 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the default value.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6,1*/(&2/2502'(67$1'$5'5$7(6(783 &/26(
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( 7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@ &/26(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
46-27
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges. 46-25 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
B C BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPT) COLOR TEXT (SLOPE) COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPT) ED TEXT (SLOPE) ED TEXT (INTERCEPT) A
Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display (Copy mode) BLACK TEXT (SLOPE) Content Black character edge gamma skew adjustment Black character edge density adjustment Color character edge gamma skew adjustment Color character edge density adjustment Text/Map mode gamma adjustment (Text/Map mode) Text/Map mode density adjustment (Text/Map mode) Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the target color is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display A B C D E F RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW Setting range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Default value M Y 255 200 0 255 200 0 0 0 255 0 0 255
2 2
C 0 255 255 255 0 0
D E
1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50
1 - 99
50
When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed. When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge is decreased. When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased, the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and vice versa.
46-32 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 $ %/$&.7(;76/23( &/26(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37 & &2/257(;76/23( ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ( ('7(;76/23( ) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
Item/Display A B C D E F COPY : OC COPY : RSPF SCAN : OC SCAN : RSPF FAX : OC FAX : RSPF Content Copy mode (for OC) Copy mode (for RSPF) Scanner mode (for OC) Scanner mode (for RSPF) FAX mode (for OC) FAX mode (for RSPF) Setting range 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 1 - 250 Default value 196 196 196 196 196 196
2.
46-30 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corresponding to the resolution mode with 10 key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A SCAN RESOLUTION SW Content Scan resolution selection (COPY: COLOR) Mode1 Mode2 Setting range 0-1 0 1 Default value 0

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* $ &23<2& &/26(

% &23<563) & 6&$12& ' 6&$1563) ( )$;2& ) )$;563)

2.
Mode
Scan mode
Mode1 Mode2
OC RSPF OC RSPF
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI) 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% [Magnifica[Magnifica[Magnification ratio] tion ratio] tion ratio] 600 600 1200 600 600 1200 300 600 1200 400 600 1200
46-36 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$15(62/87,216(77,1* $ 6&$15(62/87,216: &/26(
3)
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Item/Display A B C D E F RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW Content R output color G output color B output color C output color M output color Y output color Setting range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Default value C M Y 0 255 200 255 0 255 255 200 0 255 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255

2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5('%/$&.&2/25&23<$'-8670(17 $ 5(' &/26(
46-38 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode key. Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Press the black component amount select key.
% *5((1 & %/8( &<$1 0$*(17$ <(//2:

&
<
2.
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (except character and line image) As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part changes.
Item/Display (Copy mode) MANUAL TEXT PRT Select button (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 Content Text print (Manual) Default value (+) LUT1
46-37 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key.
TEXT
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yellow images when copy a color document of red and yellow images in the monochrome mode.
Item/Display A B R/G B/G Content Gray making setting (R/G) Gray making setting (B/G) Default value 21 0
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed photo (Manual)
(+) LUT1
PHOTO
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, it is set to the default value. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
Photographic paper (Manual)
NORMAL
TEXT PHOTO
Text/ Photograph (Manual)
NORMAL

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 $ 5* &/26(
MAP
Map (Manual)
(+) LUT1

% %*

CP ORG/ TEXT PRT
Copy document/ Text printed (Manual) Copy document/ Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
COPY ORG/ TEXT

'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(+) LUT1
COPY ORG/ PHOTO
Copy document/ Printed photo (Manual) Light document (Manual)
(+) LUT1
LIGHT ORIGINAL
(+) LUT1
Item/Display (Copy mode) AUTO AUTO0
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO4
AUTO5
AUTO6
Select button (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2 (-) LUT2 (-) LUT1 NOMAL (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2
Content Auto mode judgment 0
Default value (+) LUT1
Item/Display B C D 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 [DPI] ON
Content 200 x 200 [DPI] half tone OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] half tone ON 200 x 400 [DPI] half tone OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] half tone ON 400 x 400[DPI] half tone OFF 400 x 400[DPI] half tone ON 600 x 600[DPI] half tone OFF 600 x 600[DPI] half tone ON
Setting range 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2
Default value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(+) LUT1
E F
NORMAL
G H I
NORMAL

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17 $ h>'3,@2)) &/26(
(+) LUT1
% h>'3,@2)) & h>'3,@21 ' h>'3,@2)) ( h>'3,@21 ) h>'3,@2)) * h>'3,@21

(+) LUT1
+ h>'3,@2)) , h>'3,@21
2.
(+) LUT1
46-40 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 7(;7357 /87 /87 7(;7 /87 /87 35,17('3+272 /87 /87 3+272 /87 /87 7(;73+272 /87 /87 0$3 /87 /87 0$18$/ $872 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 /87 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/ 120$/
Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display Content Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes) Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
&/26(

EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
46-39 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;32685($'-8670(17)$;$// $ (;32685(/(9(/$// &/26(

Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large numeric value to decrease moire.
Item/Display A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF Content 200 x 100 [DPI] half tone OFF Setting range 0-2 Default value 1
(;(&87( 2.
46-41 Purpose Adjustment/Setup

I J K L M
Item/Display EXPOSURE2 H_TONE EXPOSURE3 H_TONE EXPOSURE4 H_TONE EXPOSURE5 H_TONE EXECUTE MODE AUTO EXP1 EXP2 EXP3 EXP4 EXP5 AUTO H_TONE EXP1 H_TONE EXP2 H_TONE EXP3 H_TONE EXP4 H_ONE EXP5 H_TONE
Content Fine/Exposure 2/ Half tone Fine/Exposure 3/ Half tone Fine/Exposure 4/ Half tone Fine/Exposure 5/ Half tone Print Fine/Auto mode Fine/ Exposure 1 Fine/ Exposure 2 Fine/ Exposure 3 Fine/ Exposure 4 Fine/ Exposure 5 Fine/ Automatic/ halftone Fine/ Exposure 1 /Half tone Fine/ Exposure 2 /Half tone Fine/ Exposure 3 /Half tone Fine/ Exposure 4 /Half tone Fine/ Exposure 5 /Half tone
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Default value 50 50 50 50 1 (AUTO)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display A B C D E F G AUTO EXPOSURE1 EXPOSURE2 EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5 EXECUTE AUTO MODE EXP1 EXP2 EXP3 EXP4 EXP5 Content Auto Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Exposure 3 Exposure 4 Exposure 5 Print Auto mode Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Exposure 3 Exposure 4 Exposure 5 Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 1 (AUTO)
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the document and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, and press [EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/ $ $872 &/26(
10
11
12

(;32685( (;32685( (;32685( (;32685( (;32685( (;(&87(02'($872

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the document and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, and press [EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;),1( $ $872 &/26(
(;(&87(
2.

(;32685( & (;32685( ' (;32685(

46-42 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H AUTO EXPOSURE1 EXPOSURE2 EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5 AUTO H_TONE EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Content Fine/Automatic Fine/Exposure 1 Fine/Exposure 2 Fine/Exposure 3 Fine/Exposure 4 Fine/Exposure 5 Fine/Automatic/ Half tone Fine/Exposure 1/ Half tone Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
( (;32685( ) (;32685( $872+B721( + (;32685(+B721( , (;32685(+B721( - (;32685(+B721( . (;32685(+B721( / (;32685(+B721( (;(&87( 2.
46-43 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M AUTO EXPOSURE1 EXPOSURE2 EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5 AUTO H_TONE EXPOSURE1 H_TONE EXPOSURE2 H_TONE EXPOSURE3 H_TONE EXPOSURE4 H_TONE EXPOSURE5 H_TONE EXECUTE AUTO MODE EXP1 EXP2 EXP3 EXP4 EXP5 AUTO H_TON E EXP1 H_TON E EXP2 H_TON E EXP3 H_TON E EXP4 H_TON E EXP5 H_TON E Content Super Fine/Auto Super Fine/Exposure 1 Super Fine/Exposure 2 Super Fine/Exposure 3 Super Fine/Exposure 4 Super Fine/Exposure 5 Super Fine /Auto/Half tone Super Fine/Exposure 1 /Half tone Super Fine/Exposure 2 /Half tone Super Fine/Exposure 3 /Half tone Super Fine/Exposure 4 /Half tone Super Fine/Exposure 5 /Half tone Print Super Fine mode /Auto Super Fine /Exposure 1 Super Fine /Exposure 2 Super Fine /Exposure 3 Super Fine /Exposure 4 Super Fine /Exposure 5 Super Fine /Auto /Half tone Super Fine /Exposure 1 /Half tone Super Fine /Exposure 2 /Half tone Super Fine /Exposure 3 /Half tone Super Fine /Exposure 4 /Half tone Super Fine /Exposure 5 /Half tone Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 1 (AUTO ) A B C D E F G H I J 8 K L

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1( $ $872 &/26(

(;32685( & (;32685( ' (;32685( ( (;32685( ) (;32685( $872+B721( + (;32685(+B721( , (;32685(+B721( - (;32685(+B721( . (;32685(+B721( / (;32685(+B721( (;(&87( 2.

46-44 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display AUTO EXPOSURE1 EXPOSURE2 EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5 AUTO H_TONE EXPOSURE1 H_TONE EXPOSURE2 H_TONE EXPOSURE3 H_TONE EXPOSURE4 H_TONE EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Content Ultra Fine/Auto Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
10
11
12
Item/Display M EXECUTE MODE AUTO EXP1 EXP2 EXP3 EXP4 EXP5 AUTO H_TONE EXP1 H_TONE EXP2 H_TONE EXP3 H_TONE EXP4 H_TONE EXP5 H_TONE Print mode
Content Ultra Fine/ Auto Ultra Fine/ Exposure 1 Ultra Fine/ Exposure 2 Ultra Fine/ Exposure 3 Ultra Fine/ Exposure 4 Ultra Fine/ Exposure 5 Ultra Fine/ Auto/Half tone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 1/Half tone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 2 /Half tone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 3 /Half tone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 4 /Half tone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 5 /Half tone
Setting range 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7
Default value 1 (AUTO)
Item/Display G H I J K L M AUTO H_TONE EXPOSURE1 H_TONE EXPOSURE2 H_TONE EXPOSURE3 H_TONE EXPOSURE4 H_TONE EXPOSURE5 H_TONE EXECUTE MODE AUTO EXP1 EXP2 EXP3
Content 600dpi/Auto /Half tone 1 600dpi/Exposure 1 /Half tone 600dpi/Exposure 2 /Half tone 600dpi/Exposure 3 /Half tone 600dpi/Exposure 4 /Half tone 600dpi/Exposure 5 /Half tone Print 600dpi/Auto mode 600dpi/ Exposure 1 600dpi/ Exposure 2 600dpi/ Exposure 3 600dpi/ Exposure 4 600dpi/ Exposure 5 600dpi/Auto/ Half tone 600dpi/ Exposure 1 /Half tone 600dpi/ Exposure 2 /Half tone 600dpi/ Exposure 3 /Half tone 600dpi/ Exposure 4 /Half tone 600dpi/ Exposure 5 /Half tone
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 1 (AUTO)
9 EXP4 10 EXP5 AUTO H_TONE EXP1 H_TONE EXP2 H_TONE EXP3 H_TONE EXP4 H_TONE EXP5 H_TONE
11
12

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1( $ $872 &/26(
10
11
12

(;32685( & (;32685( ' (;32685( ( (;32685( ) (;32685( $872+B721( + (;32685(+B721( , (;32685(+B721( - (;32685(+B721( . (;32685(+B721( / (;32685(+B721( (;(&87( 2.


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;'3, $ $872 &/26(

(;32685( & (;32685( ' (;32685(

46-45 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set the original on the original table. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display A B C D E F AUTO EXPOSURE1 EXPOSURE2 EXPOSURE3 EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5 Content 600dpi/Auto 1 600dpi/Exposure 1 600dpi/Exposure 2 600dpi/Exposure 3 600dpi/Exposure 4 600dpi/Exposure 5 Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50
( (;32685( ) (;32685( $872+B721( + (;32685(+B721( , (;32685(+B721( - (;32685(+B721( . (;32685(+B721( / (;32685(+B721( (;(&87( 2.
46-47 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Operation mode COPY (COLOR) (COPY (COLOR mode)) Item/Display A COPY (C) LOW Content Low compres sion (Color) Medium compres sion (Color) High compres sion (Color) Super low compres sion (Color) Low compres sion (Gray) Medium compres sion (Gray) High compres sion (Gray) Super low compres sion (Gray) Medium compres sion mode 1 Low compres sion Medium compres sion mode 2 Medium compres sion Medium compres sion mode 3 High compres sion Setting range 0 Default value 0 (LOW)
Operation mode PUSH SCAN (GRAY) (Scanner (Monochrome half-tone mode))
Item/Display D SCA N(G) (*1) MIDDLE 1
Content Medium compres sion mode 1 Low compres sion Medium compres sion mode 2 Medium compres sion Medium compres sion mode 3 High compres sion
Setting range 0
Default value 0 (MID DLE1)
MIDDLE 2
MIDDLE 3
MIDDLE
HIGH
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode. NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, however, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably reduced.
LOWER

0 0 (LOW)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23< 6&$1 0)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17 $ &23<&/2: &/26(
COPY (GRAY) (COPY (Monochrome half-tone mode))
COPY (G)
LOW
% &23<*/2: & 6&$1&0,''/( ' 6&$1*0,''/(

MIDDLE
HIGH
2.
LOWER
46-51 Purpose
0 0 (MID DLE1)
Adjustment/Setup
PUSH SCAN (COLOR) (Scanner (Color mode))
SCAN (C) (*1)
MIDDLE 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key [PAPER/DITHER]. Select the gamma adjustment of PAPER (heavy paper mode) or DITHER (image process mode). When DITHER (image process mode) is selected, the detailed select menu is displayed. Select an item for the gamma adjustment on that menu. 2) 3) 4) 5) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the touch panel. Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is outputted. When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust the image density.
MIDDLE 2
MIDDLE 3
Item/Display HEAVY DITH1 DITH2 DITH3 DITH4
Content Copier heavy paper gamma Black edge Color edge Color error diffusion Monochrome error diffusion Density level (Point) Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17
Color KCMY K KCMY KCMY K Default value 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
46-52 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key. To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL]. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Press [EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5 +($9<3$3(5 %: %/$&.('*( &2/25('*( &2/25(' &/26(
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17
Setting range 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755 245 - 755

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9< $ 32,17 &/26(
$//
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

% 32,17
46-60 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2)
3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2.
& 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17 . & 0 <
Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter process mode). Press [OK] key.
3)
Use to sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color auto copy mode. This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image shade part.
Item/Display A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL H L AUTO SOFT CENTER HIGH OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Content Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto copy mode Strong emphasis Soft emphasis Auto SOFT CENTER HIGH OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Setting range 1 2 3 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 Default value 3 (Auto) Remarks Applied to the auto copy mode only.
AUTOMODE FILTER LEVEL COLOR COPY : CMY COLOR COPY : K SINGLE COLOR : CMY
Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto copy mode Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in sigle color copy mode
2 (CENTER)
Applied to the auto copy mode only. Available for the high density image except text and line image
1 (ON)
D E
1 (ON) 1 (ON) When it is set to ON, the soft filter is applied and the smoothness in the dark image area is improved. (Roughness is reduced.)
F G
2 COLOR COPY : CMY 2 COLOR COPY : K
OFF ON OFF ON
Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to C/M/Y images of the 2-color copy mode Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to K images of the 2-color copy mode
OFF ON OFF ON
0 1 0 1
1 (ON) 1 (ON)
Item/Display H I J B/W COPY COLOR PUSH : RGB B/W PUSH OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Content Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color mode Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan monochrome mode OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Setting range 0 1 0 1 0 1
Default value 1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1 (ON)
Remarks

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17 $ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872 &/26(
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5 & &2/25&23<&0<21 ' &2/25&23<.21 ( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21 ) &2/25&23<&0<21 * &2/25&23<.21 + %:&23<21 , &2/25386+5*%21 - %:386+21

2.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17 $ 6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@

&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recognition level. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [OK] key.
% 6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@ & 6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@ ' 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@ ( 6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@ ) 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@ * 6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@ + 6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@ , 6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@

NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required. When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents.
Item/Display A SEGMENT: SWITCH [TXT ON SCR] SEGMENT: SWITCH [LINE SCR] SEGMENT: SWITCH [SMALL SCR] SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK TXT 1] SEGMENT: ADJUST [CL TXT 1] SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK TXT 2 , CL TXT 2] SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK/CL] Content Detection ON/OFF: Text on dot etection ON/OFF: line screen Detection ON/OFF: Dot in a small area Detection level adjustment: Black text 1 Detection level adjustment: Color text 1 Detection level adjustment: Black text 2, Color text 2 Detection level adjustment: Chroma/Achroma judgment Detection level adjustment: Text on background Detection level adjustment: Dot Setting range 0-1 Default value 0
2.
46-62 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the auto exposure mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [OK] key.
B C
0-1 0-1
0 0
1-5
3)
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
1-5 3
1-5
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents.
Item/Display Content ACS judgment reference area adjustment SIM display item: Text/Image judgment priority level select SIM display item: Text/Blank judgment priority level select Setting range 0-1 Default value 1
1-5
SW_ACS
B 1-5 3 C 1-5 3
TEXT_IMAGE
0-6
SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON BG] SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR]
TEXT_BLANK
0-4
Item/Display D AE_AREA_LV
Content SIM display item: Color AE judgment target area adjustment value AE background detection division result adjustment: For color copy AE background detection division result adjustment: For monochrome copy AE background detection division result adjustment: For color scan AE background detection division result adjustment: For monochrome scan SIM display item: Color AE background density threshold value SIM display item: Color AE background density threshold value AE mode ON/ ON OFF switch : OFF For color copy AE mode ON/ ON OFF switch : OFF For monochrome copy AE mode ON/ ON OFF switch : OFF For color scan AE mode ON/ ON OFF switch : OFF For monochrome scan
Setting range 0-6
Default value 3
Item/Display A COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO COLOR COPY : TEXT COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO COLOR COPY : MAP COLOR COPY : LIGHT COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY) COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO COLOR PUSH : TEXT COLOR PUSH : PRINTED PHOTO COLOR PUSH : PHOTOGRAPH COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PHOTO COLOR PUSH : MAP
Content Text print (color copy) Text (color copy) Printed photo (color copy) Photograph (color copy) Text/Photograph (color copy) Map (color copy) Light document (color density) Copy document, Character print (color copy) Copy document, Character (color copy) Copy document, Printed photo (color copy) Text print (color PUSH) Text (color PUSH) Printed photo (color PUSH) Photograph (color PUSH) Text/Photograph (color PUSH) Map color PUSH)
Setting range 1-9
Default value 3
AE_LV_CC
0-8
B C
1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9
3 5 7 3 5 6 5
AE_LV_MC
0-8
D E
AE_LV_CS
0-8
F G
AE_LV_MS
0-8
AE_JUDGE _LV_L AE_JUDGE _LV_C AE _ONOFF _CC AE _ONOFF _MC AE _ONOFF _CS AE _ONOFF _MS ON OFF ON OFF
0-4
1-9
0 - 10
1-9
0-1
0 1 0 1
0 (ON)
1-9
0-1
0 (ON)
L M
1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9
3 5 5 3 5
ON OFF ON OFF
0-1
0 1 0 1
0 (ON)
N O
0-1
0 (ON) P

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 09,(:-8'*(0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17 $ 6:B$&6 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 %*5(029($'-8670(17 $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &/26(
% 7(;7B,0$*( & 7(;7B%/$1. ' $(B$5($B/9 ( $(B/9B&& ) $(B/9B0& * $(B/9B&6 + $(B/9B06 , $(B-8'*(B/9B/ - $(B-8'*(B/9B& . $(B212))B&&21 / $(B212))B0&21 2.
% &2/25&23<7(;7 & &2/25&23<35,17('3+272 ' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+ ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272 ) &2/25&23<0$3 * &2/25&23</,*+7 + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23< - &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23< . &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272 / &2/25386+7(;7 2.

46-63 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [OK] key.
46-74 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 continuously. To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment pattern is printed. Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. Press [OK] key, and the half tone correction target is registered.
D
Item/Display SPF (SUB)
Content RSPF document front surface magnification ratio (Sub scan) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio (Main scan) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio (Sub scan)
Default value 50
SPFB (MAIN)
1 - 99
50
SPFB (SUB)
1 - 99
50
7)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 $ &&'0$,1 &/26(
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment operations in the both modes are completed all the way. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not effective.

% &&'68% & 63)0$,1 ' 63)68% ( 63)%0$,1 ) 63)%68%

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(
2.
48-5 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Section Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
Scanner section
1) 2) 3)
Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
48
48-1 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corresponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Item/Display A CCD (MAIN) Content SCAN main scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio (Main scan) Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is specified, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform this adjustment. When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction, change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
Item/Display A B C D E MR (HI) MR(MID) MR(LO) SPF(HI) SPF(MID) Content Scanner motor (High speed) Scanner motor (Reference speed) Scanner motor (Low speed) Document feed (SPF) motor (High speed) Document feed (SPF) motor (Reference speed) Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50 50 50

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0272563(('$'-8670(17 $ 05+, &/26(

% 050,' & 05/2 ' 63)+,

CCD (SUB)
1 - 99
50
( 63)0,'
SPF (MAIN)
1 - 99
50
2.
48-6 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO] [HEAVY] keys on the touch panel. Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
Item/Display A RRM Content Resist motor correction value Developing K motor correction value Fusing motor correction value Mode Select Color Mono chrome Heavy paper Color Mono chrome Heavy paper Color Mono chrome Heavy paper Color Heavy paper COLOR MONO HEAVY COLOR MONO HEAVY COLOR MONO HEAVY COLOR HEAVY 1 - 99 1 - 99 37 1 - 99 Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
49
49-1 Purpose Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Save the firmware to the USB memory. Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the operation panel section.) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. Select a target firmware. Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The selected firmware is updated. When the operation normally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Item/Display CONFIG ICU (MAIN) ICU (BOOTM) ICU (BOOTS) LANGUAGE GRAPHIC SLIST PCU (BOOT) PCU (MAIN) DESK (BOOT) DESK (MAIN) A4LCC (BOOT) A4LCC (MAIN) FIN (BOOT) FIN (MAIN) 1KFIN (BOOT) 1KFIN (MAIN) 1KPUNCH (BOOT) 1KPUNCH (MAIN) SCU (BOOT) SCU (MAIN) FAX (BOOT) FAX(MAIN) FAX OPTION(BOOT) FAX OPTION(MAIN) ESCP_FONT PDL_FONT ANIMATION IMAGE_DATA COLOR PROFILE WEB HELP UNICODE Content Configuration data ICU Main section former half ICU Boot section main ICU Boot section sub Language support data program (General term) Graphic data for L-LCD SLIST data for L-LCD PCU Boot section PCU Main section Desk unit BOOT section Desk unit MAIN section Side LCC (A4) Boot section Side LCC (A4) main section Inner finisher BOOT section Inner finisher MAIN section 1K finisher Boot section 1K finisher Main section Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher SCU Boot section SCU Main section FAX1 Boot section FAX1 Main section FAX2 Boot section (Japan only) FAX2 Main section (Japan only) ESC/P font PDL font Animation data MFP ASIC data Color profile WEB help UNICODE table
47 46
DVM_K
FSM
46 46
DVM_CL
E F E F G
PFM POM FUSER SETTING RRM START RRM END
Developing CL motor correction value Paper transport motor correction value. Paper exit motor correction value Fusing speed select timing RRM speed increasing start timing RRM speed increasing end timing
COLOR COLOR HEAVY HEAVY HEAVY
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 255 1 - 255
50 50 50 0 30
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required. When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image quality trouble may occur.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17 $ 550 &/26(
List of error displays in case of abnormal end

Item/Display CONF ICUM ICUBM ICUBS LANG GRAPH SLIST PCUB PCUM DESKB DESKM Content Configuration data ICU Main section former half ICU Boot section main ICU Boot section sub Language support data program (General term) Graphic data for L-LCD SLIST data for L-LCD PCU Boot section PCU Main section Desk unit BOOT section Desk unit MAIN section

% '90B. & )60 ' '90B&/ ( 3)0 ) 320

&2/25
0212
+($9<
2.
Item/Display LCC4B LCC4M FINB FINM FIN1B FIN1M 1PUNB 1PUNM SCUB SCUM FAXB FAXM FXOPB FXOPM ESCP PDL ANIME IMGDT CORP WEBHP UNICD
Content Side LCC (A4) Boot section Side LCC (A4) main section Inner finisher BOOT section Inner finisher MAIN section 1K finisher Boot section 1K finisher Main section Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher SCU Boot section SCU Main section FAX1 Boot section FAX1 Main section FAX2 Boot section (Japan only) FAX2 Main section (Japan only) ESC/P font PDL font Animation data Image ASIC data Color profile WEB help UNICODE table

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (0$18$/83'$7(XVEEG ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 &/26(

(Folder select display 1)
50
50-1 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjustment Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default. RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 &/26(

SIDE: Side image loss adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A Lead edge adjustment value RRCA Content Document lead edge reference position (OC) Standar Resist d Tray motor ON Desk timing LCC adjust- Manual ment paper feed ADU Lead edge image loss area setting Side image loss area adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment Rear edge void area adjustment FRONT/REAR void area adjustment OC document offcenter adjustment Setting range 0 - 99 Default value 50
49-3 Purpose Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the HDD. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. 2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The display is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) The current version and the update version are displayed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes active from gray out. 4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is updated. When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
H I J K C D E
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 50 50 50
F G
RRCB-ADU LEAD SIDE DENA DENB FRONT/ REAR
1 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
50 30 20 30 30 20
Offcenter adjustment Magnifica tion ratio correction
OFSET_OC
1 - 99
50
SCAN _SPEED _OC
SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99
50
Item/Display N O P Q R S T Sub scanning direction print area correction value DENB-MFT DENB-CS1 DENB-CS2 DENB-CS3 DENB-CS4 DENB-LCC DENB-ADU
Content Manual feed correction value Tray 1 correction value Tray 2 correction value Tray 3 correction value Tray 4 correction value LCC correction value ADU correction value
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50
50-2 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-1). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0. Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%. Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjustment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both adjustment values of L1 and L2. L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm scale. L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead edge.
50
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step) * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When the value is increased, the timing is delayed. B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) * When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the value is increased, the timing is advanced. G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ step) * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted. * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. (0.1mm/step) I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ step) * When the value is increased, the void is increased. J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ step) * When the value is increased, the void is increased. K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) 4)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ 55&$ &/26(
L1
Paper lead edge
L2
400% enlargement copy
Fig. 1
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
Item/Display A Actual measurem ent value L1 Description Distance from the image lead edge to the scale of 10mm. (Platen 400%, 0.1mm increment) Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge (0.1mm increment) Lead edge image loss amount setting (When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.) Side edge image loss amount setting (When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.) Setting range 0 - 999 Default value -
5)

% 55&%&6 & 55&%&6 ' 55&%/&& ( 55&%0)7 ) 55&%$'8 * /($' + 6,'( , '(1$ - '(1% . )52175($5

B
2.
L2
0 - 999
Image loss area setting value
LEAD
0 - 99
30
SIDE
0 - 99
20
Item/Display E Void area adjustment DENA
Description Lead edge void area adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.) Rear edge void area adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.) FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.)
Default value 30
Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B. The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**). All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
DENB
1 - 99
30
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/& $ /

&/26(

% / & /($' ' 6,'( ( '(1$ ) '(1% * )52175($5
FRONT/ REAR
1 - 99
20

(;(&87(
50-5 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is printed. 4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is in the standard adjustment value range. Standard reference value: 3.02.0mm When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
Item/Display A DEN-C Content Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE) Rear edge void area adjustment Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 30 NOTE Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm. Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm. Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased. Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of DEN-B
DEN-B
1 - 99
30
FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99
20
DENB-MFT
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS1
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS2
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS3
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS4
1 - 99
50
Item/Display I DENB-LCC
Content LCC rear edge void aria adjustment correction value ADU rear edge void aria adjustment correction value Number of print Tray Manual selection paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Duplex Yes print No selection
Default value 50
NOTE
DENB-ADU
1 - 99
50
K L
MULTI COUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO
1 - 999 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1
1 2 (CS1)
Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
DUPLEX
0-1
1 (NO)
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 $ '(1& &/26(
Item/Display D Image loss amount setting SIDE1 Image loss amount setting SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SIDE1) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1) LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2) OFSET_SPF1
Content Front surface side image loss amount setting Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting SPF front surface document offcenter adjustment SPF back surface document offcenter adjustment RSPF document front surface magnification ratio (Sub scan) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio (Sub scan)
Default value 20
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20

% '(1% & )52175($5 ' '(1%0)7 ( '(1%&6 ) '(1%&6 * '(1%&6 + '(1%&6 , '(1%/&& - '(1%$'8 . 08/7,&2817 / 3$3(5&6 (;(&87( 2.
0 - 99
20

0 - 99
30
1 - 99
50
OFSET_SPF2
1 - 99
50
SCAN_SPEED_SPF1
1 - 99
50
50-6 Purpose Adjustment

L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A SIDE1 Content Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD) Back surface document scan position adjustment (CCD) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
1 - 99
50
RSPF
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing is delayed. Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. Item E - H: When appearing the shadow image on the rear edge part, increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow image. All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63) &/26(
$ 6,'(
SIDE2
1 - 99
50

% 6,'( & /($'B('*(6,'( ' )5217B5($56,'( ( 75$,/B('*(6,'( ) /($'B('*(6,'( * )5217B5($56,'(

Image loss amount setting SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
0 - 99
20
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'( , 2)6(7B63) - 2)6(7B63) . 6&$1B63(('B63) / 6&$1B63(('B63) 2.
50-7 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0. Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the RSPF duplex mode. Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual measurement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm. (Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm) L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) RSPF
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display Content Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm unit) from the front surface image lead edge to the scale of 10mm. Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm unit) from the back surface image lead edge to the scale of 10mm. Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting Front surface side image loss amount setting Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting Setting range 0 - 999 Default value -
L4
L5
0 - 999
C D E F G H
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1) FRONT_REAR (SIDE1) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1) LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
0 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 99
20 20 30 20 20 30
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)&$/& $ / &/26(
% / & /($'B('*(6,'( ' )5217B5($56,'( ( 75$,/B('*(6,'( ) /($'B('*(6,'( * )5217B5($56,'( + 75$,/B('*(6,'(

Distance "a"
(;(&87(
50-10 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3)
Item/Display A B C D E F G BK-MAG MAIN-MFT MAIN-CS1 MAIN-CS2 MAIN-CS3 MAIN-CS4 MAIN-LCC Content Main scan print magnification ratio BK Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) Print off center adjustment value (Large capacity tray)
Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default value 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 NOTE Adjustment Item List
Setting range 60 - 140 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Item/Display H MAIN-ADU
Content Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) (NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are not properly adjusted, this adjustment cannot be executed properly. Resist motor ON Manual paper feed timing adjustment Standard cassette DESK LCC ADU Number of print Tray selection Manual paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Duplex print Yes selection No
Default value 50
NOTE Adjustment Item List
I J K L M N O
SUB-MFT SUB-CS12 SUB-CS34 SUB-LCC SUB-ADU MULTI COUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC DUPLEX YES NO
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 999 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0-1 0 1
50 50 50 50 50 1 2 (CS1)
Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
1 (NO)
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased. Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to the rear frame side. All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 &/26(
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7 & 0$,1&6 ' 0$,1&6 ( 0$,1&6 ) 0$,1&6 * 0$,1/&& + 0$,1$'8 , 68%0)7 - 68%&6 . 68%&6 / 68%/&& (;(&87( 2.


6,08/$7,2112 7(67 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 $ 2&

&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

% 63)6,'( & 63)6,'(

2.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. 1step = 0.1mm
Item/Display A B C OC SPF(SIDE1) SPF(SIDE2) Content Document table image offcenter adjustment SPF front surface image offcenter adjustment SPF back surface image offcenter adjustment Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 Default value 50 50 50
50-20 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A B C D E F H CYAN (FRONT) CYAN (REAR) MAGENTA (FRONT) MAGENTA (REAR) YELLOW (FRONT) YELLOW (REAR) PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO Content Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) (R side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) (R side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) (R side) Tray selection Setting range 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 Manual paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Select Not select Default value 100 100 100 100 100 100 3 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting NOTE Adjustment Item List
DUPLEX
Duplex print selection

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21 $ &<$1)5217 &/26(

% &<$15($5 & 0$*(17$)5217 ' 0$*(17$5($5 ( <(//2:)5217 ) <(//2:5($5 * 08/7,&2817 + 3$3(5&6 , '83/(;12
50-21 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1)
(;(&87( 2.

Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting range 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 - 199 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 Manual paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Yes No Default value 100 100 100 1 2 NOTE Adjustment Item List Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
2) 3)
Item/Display A B C D E CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW MULTICOUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO Content
Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow) Number of print Tray selection
DUPLEX
Duplex print selection

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21 $ &<$1 &/26(
50-22 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target adjustment item with [REGIST] or [DRUM POS] or [ALL] key.
The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction) and the OPC drum phase adjustment are automatically performed. The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction) is automatically performed. The OPC drum phase adjustment (automatic adjustment) is automatically performed.

% 0$*(17$ & <(//2: ' 08/7,&2817 ( 3$3(5&6 ) '83/(;12

(;(&87(
2.
ALL
REGIST
DRUM POS
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjustment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Item/Display ALL Image registration adjustment/ OPC drum phase adjustment REGIST (Auto image registration adjustment) MAIN F C M Y MAIN R C M Y SUB C M Y SKEW C M Y Content Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) Display 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 1.0 199.0 -99.9 99.9 -99.9 99.9 -99.9 99.9 Default value 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of numerical value. If the value is minus, L is displayed to left side of numerical value. When the value is -4 +4, "(OK)" is place at the back of the value. For the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed. *1 Same item as SIM4431. NOTE
DRUM POS (Auto OPC drum phase adjustment)
PHASE
Phase adjustment value BK CL
Angle step 0(1) 45(2) 90(3) 135(4) 180(5) 225(6) 270(7) 315(8)
1-8
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value. When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value. When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value. At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
<Error displays in case of abnormal end >

Error code Error display SUSPENDED SUSPENDED Error content Door open end CA end OFF end Description Door open during operation CA button pressed during operation Unconfirmed operation during operation (Power OFF) BK or ALL Color toner EMPTY detection Other condition Sub scanning adjustment error
Error code 31
Error display SUB MAGENTA FRONT 31 SUB MAGENTA FRONT 32
Error content Pitch error sub scanning color (Magenta) F Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Magenta) F Result value error sub scanning color (Magenta) F Number of lines error sub scanning color (Magenta) R Pitch error sub scanning color (Magenta) R Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Magenta) R Result value error sub scanning color (Magenta) R Number of lines error sub scanning color (Yellow) F Pitch error sub scanning color (Yellow) F Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Yellow) F Result value error sub scanning color (Yellow) F Number of lines error sub scanning color (Yellow) R Pitch error sub scanning color (Yellow) R Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Yellow) R Result value error sub scanning color (Yellow) R
Description The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range.
Forcible end error
32
33
Basic error
TONNER EMPTY 01 BEFORE BEHAVIOR 02 SENSOR CALIBRATIO N 04 TIME OVER 05
Toner Empty
SUB MAGENTA FRONT 33 SUB MAGENTA REAR 35 SUB MAGENTA REAR 36 SUB MAGENTA REAR 37
Other condition Calibration error Time error
35
7 Sub scanning adjustment error 10
PROCESS CONTROL 07 SUB BLACK FRONT 10
11
SUB BLACK FRONT 11 SUB BLACK REAR 15
15
16
SUB BLACK REAR 16 SUB CYAN FRONT 20
20
21
SUB CYAN FRONT 21 SUB CYAN FRONT 22
22
23
SUB CYAN FRONT 23
25
SUB CYAN REAR 25
26
SUB CYAN REAR 26 SUB CYAN REAR 27
27
28
SUB CYAN REAR 28
30
SUB MAGENTA FRONT 30
Process control error Number of line error sub scanning color (Black) F Pitch error sub scanning color (Black) F Number of line error sub scanning color (Black) R Pitch error sub scanning color (Black) R Number of line error sub scanning color (Cyan) F Pitch error sub scanning color (Cyan) F Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Cyan) F Result value error sub scanning color (Cyan) F Number of lines error sub scanning color (Cyan) R Pitch error sub scanning color (Cyan) R Adjustment value number error sub scanning color (Cyan) R Result value error sub scanning color (Cyan) R Number of lines error sub scanning color (Magenta) F
The target is not reached by 3 times of retry of F or R No data are obtained for 90sec from data acquisition Process control error detection The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The pitch data are not within the specified range. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value.
36
37
38
SUB MAGENTA REAR 38 SUB YELLOW FRONT 40 SUB YELLOW FRONT 41 SUB YELLOW FRONT 42
40
41
42
43
SUB YELLOW FRONT 43 SUB YELLOW REAR 45 SUB YELLOW REAR 46 SUB YELLOW REAR 47
45
46
47
48
SUB YELLOW REAR 48
Main scanning adjustme nt error
Error code 50
Error display MAIN BLACK FRONT 50
Error content Number of lines error main scanning color (Black) F Pitch error main scanning color (Black) F Number of lines error main scanning color (Black) R Pitch error main scanning color (Black) R Number of lines error main scanning color (Cyan) F Pitch error main scanning color (Cyan) F Adjustment value number error main scanning color (Cyan) F Result value error main scanning color (Cyan) F Number of lines error main scanning color (Cyan) R Pitch error main scanning color (Cyan) R Adjustment value error main scanning color (Cyan) R Result value error main scanning color (Cyan) R Number of lines error main scanning color (Magenta) F Pitch error main scanning color (Magenta) F Adjustment value number error main scanning color (Magenta) F Result value error main scanning color (Magenta) F Number of lines error main scanning color (Magenta) R Pitch error main scanning color (Magenta) R
Description The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The pitch data are not within the specified range. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value. Main scanning adjustme nt error
Error code 77
Error display MAIN MAGENTA REAR 77
Error content Adjustment value error main scanning color (Magenta) R Result value error main scanning color (Magenta) R Number of lines error main scanning color (Yellow) F Pitch error main scanning color (Yellow) F Adjustment value error main scanning color (Yellow) F Result value error main scanning color (Yellow) F Number of lines error main scanning color (Yellow) R Pitch error main scanning color (Yellow) R Adjustment value error main scanning color (Yellow) R Result value error main scanning color (Yellow) R Other errors
Description The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value.
51
MAIN BLACK FRONT 51 MAIN BLACK REAR 55
78
55
MAIN MAGENTA REAR 78 MAIN YELLOW FRONT 80
80
56
MAIN BLACK REAR 56 MAIN CYAN FRONT 60
60
81
MAIN YELLOW FRONT 81 MAIN YELLOW FRONT 82
The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value.
61
MAIN CYAN FRONT 61 MAIN CYAN FRONT 62
82
62
83
MAIN YELLOW FRONT 83 MAIN YELLOW REAR 85
63
MAIN CYAN FRONT 63
85
65
MAIN CYAN REAR 65
86
66
MAIN CYAN REAR 66 MAIN CYAN REAR 67
MAIN YELLOW REAR 86 MAIN YELLOW REAR 87
The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. Other errors
87
67
68
MAIN CYAN REAR 68
88
MAIN YELLOW REAR 88 OTHER 99
70
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT 70
Others
99

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
71
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT 71 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT 72
The pitch data are not within the allowable range. The calculation result value is not within the allowable range. The variation in the calculation result value is above the allowable range. The pitch data number are not the specified value.
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(: &/1* 0/1* </1* 3+$6(
72
73
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT 73 MAIN MAGENTA REAR 75
5(*,67
'580326
$//
(;(&87(

75
76
MAIN MAGENTA REAR 76
The pitch data are not within the allowable range.
50-24 Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22. Section Operation/Procedure NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and is not necessary for the market.
Item classific ation Registration adjustment status check Display REG_EXE_CNT Item content Number of executions of the registration adjustment (Auto execution) Number of success of the registration adjustment (Auto execution) Registration adjustment registration counter Calculated correction amount in the main scan direction F in the auto registration adjustment Calculated correction amount in the main scan direction R in the auto registration adjustment Calculated correction amount in the sub scan direction in the automatic registration adjustment Registration value correction amount from the previous time, main scan F Registration value correction amount from the previous time, main scan R Registration value correction amount from the previous time, sub scan Setting range 0 - 99999999 Related SIM 50-22
Item classific ation Phase adjustment status check
Display PHASE_ADJ
Item content Phase adjustment (1: This time value, 2: Previous time value) Phase state (1: This time value, 2: Previous time value) Phase deflection level (before weighting) Phase deflection level (after weighting) (1: This time value, 2: Previous time value) Registration sensor current light emitting value F Registration sensor current light emitting value R Registration sensor current light receiving value F Registration sensor current light receiving value R Registration sensor dark potential F Registration sensor dark potential R Sampling start value Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling start value Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling start value Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling start value Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling start value Main scan F (Rising) Sampling start value Main scan F (Falling) Sampling start value Main scan R (Rising) Sampling start value Main scan R (Falling) Sampling reference pitch Sub scan F (Rising)
Setting range 1-8
Related SIM 50-22
PHASE_STATE
1-8
50-22
PHASE_LEVEL
0-99.9 (0.1 unit)
50-22
PHASE _WEIGHT
0-99.9 (0.1 unit)
50-22
REG_SUC_CNT
0 - 99999999
50-22
REG_CNT
0 - 99999999
Sensor calibration status check
REG_LED (F)
1 - 255
44-02, 70-11, 50-22 44-02, 70-11, 50-22 44-02, 70-11, 50-22 44-02, 70-11, 50-22 44-02, 70-11, 50-22 44-02, 70-11, 50-22 50-22
REG_LED (R)
1 - 255
REG_M_F (VALUE)
1.0 - 199.0 (0.1 unit)
50-22 REG_V (F)
0 - 255
REG_V (R) 1.0 - 199.0 (0.1 unit) 50-22 REG_DARK (F)
0 - 255
REG_M_R (VALUE)
0 - 255
REG_DARK (R) 1.0 - 199.0 (0.1 unit) 50-22
0 - 255
REG_SUB (VALUE)
Sampling status check (1)
START_SUB (F)_U START_SUB (F)_D START_SUB (R)_U START_SUB (R)_D START_MAIN (F)_U
REG_M_F (DIF)
-199.0 199.0 (0.1 unit)
50-20, 22
REG_M_R (DIF)
-199.0 199.0 (0.1 unit)
50-20, 22
START_MAIN (F)_D START_MAIN (R)_U
REG_SUB (DIF)
-199.0 199.0 (0.1 unit)
50-21, 22
START_MAIN (R)_D
-300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -300.00 300.00 (0.01 unit) -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
STD_PITCH _SUB (F)_U
50-22
Item classific ation Sampling status check (1)
Display STD_PITCH _SUB (F)_D
Item content Sampling reference pitch Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling reference pitch Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling reference pitch Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling reference pitch Main scan F (Rising) Sampling reference pitch Main scan F (Falling) Sampling reference pitch Main scan R (Rising) Sampling reference pitch Main scan R (Falling) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Main scan F (Rising) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Main scan F (Falling) Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Main scan R (Rising)
Setting range -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
Related SIM 50-22
Display TOTAL_PITCH _MAIN (R)_D
Item content Sampling reference pitch all-color average value Main scan R (Falling) Sampling linearity Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling linearity Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling linearity Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling linearity Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling linearity Main scan F (Rising) Sampling linearity Main scan F (Falling) Sampling linearity Main scan R (Rising) Sampling linearity Main scan R (Falling) Sampling pitch calculation value Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling pitch calculation value Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling pitch calculation value Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling pitch calculation value Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling pitch calculation value Main scan F (Rising) Sampling pitch calculation value Main scan F (Falling) Sampling pitch calculation value Main scan R (Rising) Sampling pitch calculation value Main scan R (Falling) Sampling linearity after correction
Setting range -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
Related SIM 50-22
STD_PITCH _SUB (R)_U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22 Sampling status check (2) LINEAR_SUB _F_U LINEAR_SUB _F_D 50-22 LINEAR_SUB _R_U LINEAR_SUB _R_D
STD_PITCH _SUB (R)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
STD_PITCH _MAIN (F)_U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
STD_PITCH _MAIN (F)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -100.00100.00 (0.01unit) -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
STD_PITCH _MAIN (R)_U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
LINEAR_MAIN _F_U LINEAR_MAIN _F_D
50-22
50-22
STD_PITCH _MAIN (R)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22 LINEAR_MAIN _R_U 50-22 LINEAR_MAIN _R_D
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _SUB (F)_U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _SUB (F)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_SUB_F _U
50-22
PITCH_SUB_F _D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _SUB (R)_U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_SUB_R _U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _SUB (R)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_SUB_R _D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_F _U -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit) 50-22
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _MAIN (F)_U
PITCH_MAIN_F _D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _MAIN (F)_D
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_R _U
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_R _D -50.00-50.00 (0.01unit) 50-22 Sampling status check (4) ADJ_LINEAR
-50.00-50.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
TOTAL_PITCH _MAIN (R)_U
-100.00 100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
Display LINEAR_AVE _S_F_U
Item content Sampling linearity average value Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling linearity average value Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling linearity average value Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling linearity average value Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling linearity average value Main scan F (Rising) Sampling linearity average value Main scan F (Falling) Sampling linearity average value Main scan R (Rising) Sampling linearity average value Main scan R (Falling) Sampling noise removal line number Sub scan F (Rising) Sampling noise removal line number Sub scan F (Falling) Sampling noise removal line number Sub scan R (Rising) Sampling noise removal line number Sub scan R (Falling) Sampling noise removal line number Main scan F (Rising) Sampling noise removal line number Main scan F (Falling) Sampling noise removal line number Main scan R (Rising) Sampling noise removal line number Main scan R (Falling)
Setting range -100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
Related SIM 50-22
Display VALID_LINE _MAX_S_F_U
Item content Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Sub scanning F (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Sub scanning F (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Sub scanning R (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Sub scanning R (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Main scanning F (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Main scanning F (Falling)
Setting range 1-17(1unit)
Related SIM 50-22
LINEAR_AVE _S_F_D
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
LINEAR_AVE _S_R_U
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22 VALID_LINE _MAX_S_F_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22
LINEAR_AVE _S_R_D
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22
LINEAR_AVE _M_F_U
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22 VALID_LINE _MAX_S_R_U 50-22
1-17(1unit)
50-22
LINEAR_AVE _M_F_D
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
LINEAR_AVE _M_R_U
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
50-22 VALID_LINE _MAX_S_R_D 50-22
1-17(1unit)
50-22
LINEAR_AVE _M_R_D
-100.00100.00 (0.01unit)
NOISE_LINE _S_F_U
1-17(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _S_F_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22
VALID_LINE _MAX_M_F_U
1-16(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _S_R_U
1-17(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _S_R_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22 VALID_LINE _MAX_M_F_D
1-16(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _M_F_U
1-17(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _M_F_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _M_R_U
1-17(1unit)
50-22
NOISE_LINE _M_R_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22
Display VALID_LINE _MAX_M_R_U
Item content Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Main scanning R (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MAX Main scanning R (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Sub scanning F (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Sub scanning F (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Sub scanning R (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Sub scanning R (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Main scanning F (Rising)
Related SIM 50-22
Display VALID_LINE _MIN_M_F_D
Item content Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Main scanning F (Falling) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Main scanning R (Rising) Adjacent data linearity difference in the effective line after removing the sampling noise Line No. at MIN Main scanning R (Falling) Temperature correction value in the previous print Main scan writing Temperature correction value in the previous print Main scan magnification ratio Temperature correction value in the previous print Sub scan Temperature in the previous print (Thermister 1) Temperature in the previous print (Thermister 2) Reference temperature (Thermister 1) F Reference temperature (Thermister 1) R Reference temperature (Thermister 2) F Reference temperature (Thermister 2) R Error record status check
Related SIM 50-22
VALID_LINE _MAX_M_R_D
1-16(1unit)
50-22
VALID_LINE _MIN_M_R_U
1-16(1unit)
50-22
VALID_LINE _MIN_M_R_D 1-17(1unit) 50-22
1-16(1unit)
50-22
VALID_LINE _MIN_S_F_U
VALID_LINE _MIN_S_F_D
1-17(1unit)
50-22
Tempera -ture correction value check
TEMP_ADJ_M1
-99.9-99.9 (0.1unit)
TEMP_ADJ_M2
-99.9-99.9 (0.1unit)
VALID_LINE _MIN_S_R_U
1-17(1unit)
50-22 TEMP_ADJ _SUB
-99.9-99.9 (0.1unit)
Tempera -ture check 1-17(1unit) 50-22
TEMP_BACK _TH1
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
VALID_LINE _MIN_S_R_D
TEMP_BACK _TH2
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
TEMP_TH1_F _HISTORY
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
50-20, 21, 22
VALID_LINE _MIN_M_F_U
1-16(1unit)
50-22
TEMP_TH1_R _HISTORY
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
50-20, 21, 22
TEMP_TH2_F _HISTORY
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
50-20, 21, 22
TEMP_TH2_R_ HISTORY
5.0-60.0 (0.1C)
50-20, 21, 22
Error record status check
ERROR HISTORY
50-22

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $8725(*,675$7,21'$7$',63/$< 5(*B(;(B&17 5(*B68&B&17 5(*B&17 &/26(
Item/Display FAX send G Image loss amount setting SPF SIDE2 LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
Content Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting OC lead edge image loss amount setting OC side image loss amount setting OC rear edge image loss amount setting Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting Front surface side image loss amount setting Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
Default value 20 (2mm)
FRONT _REAR (SPF_SIDE2)
0 - 100
20 (2mm)
&
<
%$&.
1(;7

TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
0 - 100
30 (3mm)

When image send mode (Except for FAX and copy) A Image loss amount setting OC LEAD_EDGE (OC)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] key. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display FAX send A Image loss amount setting OC LEAD_EDGE (OC) Content OC lead edge image loss amount setting OC side image loss amount setting OC rear edge image loss amount setting Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting Front surface side image loss amount setting Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting Setting range 0 - 100 Default value 30 (3mm)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
FRONT _REAR(OC)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
Image loss amount setting SPF SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
FRONT _REAR (OC)
0 - 100
20 (2mm)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
0 - 100
20 (2mm)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
Image loss amount setting SPF SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
0 - 100
20 (2mm) G Image loss amount setting SPF SIDE2 LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
0 - 100
20 (2mm) H
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
0 - 100
30 (3mm) I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
0 - 100
0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. 1step = 0.1mm

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8( $ /($'B('*(2& &/26(
(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel. Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1(Front surface) or SIDE 2(Back surface) or ALL(Both modes). Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern print. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Set the adjustment pattern on the RSPF. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back surface. 7) Press [OK] key. (4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center (Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel. Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjustment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes). Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print. (Two or more trays can be selected.) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the procedure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pattern printed with each paper. 7) Press [OK] key. RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned. REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again. RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 2&$'63)$'5(68/7 %.0$*$'6(78335,17$''$7$ &/26(

% )5217B5($52& & 75$,/B('*(2& ' /($'B('*(63)B6,'( ( )5217B5($563)B6,'( ) 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'( * /($'B('*(63)B6,'( + )5217B5($563)B6,'( , 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(

)$;
6&$11(5
2.
50-28 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio. Section Operation/Procedure The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with SIM50-28. * ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) * ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) * ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment * ADJ 16 scan image off-center adjustment * ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) * ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Item/Display OC ADJ Content Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode) Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment Adjustment result display Adjustment operation data display
BK-MAG ADJ SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel. Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern print. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. Press [OK] key. Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel. Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern print. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. Press [OK] key. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 101

(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
51
51-1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 75$16&5,37,217,0,1*6(783 $ 7&217,0,1* &/26(
Item/Display A B TC2 ON TIMING TC2 OFF TIMING
Content Secondary transfer voltage ON timing setting Secondary transfer voltage OFF timing setting
Default value 40 60

% 7&2))7,0,1*
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF timing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.

2.
51-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or [ENGINE] keys. Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
Mode SIDE1 A
Display/Item NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
Content RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH) RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW) RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH) RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW) RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/LOW) RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/LOW) -
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
1 - 99
50
NORMAL_THIN _HIGH
1 - 99
50
NORMAL_THIN _LOW
1 - 99
50
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
1 - 99
50
RANDOM_THIN _LOW
1 - 99
50
Mode SIDE2 A
Display/Item NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
Content RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH) RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW) RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH) RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) A4LCC/deflection adjustment value -
Default value 50
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
1 - 99
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2
1 - 99
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2
1 - 99
50
ENGINE
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W
TRAY1(S) TRAY1(L) TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) TRAY2(S) TRAY2(L) TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) MANUAL OHP MANUAL ENV ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK(S) DESK(L) DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) A4LCC
LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above LT size (215mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above -
1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is decreased.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17 $ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+ &/26(

% 1250$/B3/$,1B/2: & 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+ ' 1250$/B7+,1B/2: ( 5$1'20B3/$,1B/2: ) 5$1'20B7+,1B/2:

6,'(
6,'(
(1*,1(
2.
: '09/Sep
53
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/

&/26( $ $'B0$;
53-6 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. Press [EXECUTE] key. The maximum width detection level is recognized. Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. Press [EXECUTE] key. The A4R width detection level is recognized. Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. Press [EXECUTE] key. The A5R width detection level is recognized. Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. Press [EXECUTE] key. The minimum width detection level is recognized. When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
1 2 3 4 TRAYVOLMAX TRAYVOLA4R TRAYVOLA5R TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume maximum value Tray volume A4R size adjustment value Tray volume A5R size adjustment value Tray size volume minimum value

% $'B3 & $'B3 ' $'B0,1

2.
53-8 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position. Section Operation/Procedure Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key. <AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto adjustment) 1) 2) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document table. Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the adjustment value is saved.)
Item/Display MEASUREMENT DISTANCE RRCA Content Document lead edge measurement distance Document lead edge reference position Setting range 0-255 (0.1mm unit) 0 - 99 Default value 50

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)75$<$'-8670(17 75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
<MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment> 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A
(;(&87(
Content RSPF mode document scan position adjustment (Scanner stop position adjustment)
ADJUST VALUE
Default value 25
53-7 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A B C D AD_MAX AD_P1 AD_P2 AD_MIN Max. width position A4R width position A5R width position Min. width position Setting range 0 - 1023 0 - 1023 0 - 1023 0 - 1023 Default value 72 499 805 955
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop position in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by 0.1mm.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17 $872 0$18$/ &/26(

55
55-1 Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially required.)
56
56-1 Purpose Backup Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.) Section Operation/Procedure 1)

Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW) Section Operation/Procedure
Select a target content of data transfer. Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(62)76:6(77,1* 6:1R '$7$ 6:1R
&/26(
2)
ALL HDD HDD ALL EEPROM HDD HDD EEPROM SRAM HDD
(;(&87(
HDD SRAM
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW) Section Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(562)76:6(77,1* 6:1R '$7$ 6:1R &/26(
All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. The HDD contents are transferred to all the memories. Transfer from EEPROM to HDD Transfer from HDD to EEPROM Data transfer from SRAM to HDD. (Including the FAX memory) When the FAX memory or an option memory (memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. Transfer from HDD to SRAM (including the FAX memory) When the FAX memory or an option memory (memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the FAX memory are also transferred to HDD.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &23<'$7$ $//+'' +''$// ((3520+'' +''((3520 65$0+'' +''65$0 (1$%/( ',6$%/( ',6$%/( ',6$%/( ',6$%/( ',6$%/( &/26(
(;(&87(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

56-2 Purpose Data backup Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. <IMPORT> From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD <EXPORT> From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW) Section Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 0)362)76:6(77,1* 6:1R '$7$ 6:1R &/26(
(;(&87(
(Machine with the DSK installed) 1) 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. <IMPORT> From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD <EXPORT> From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE 3) 4) 5) Enter the password with 10 key. Press [SET] key. Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. <Data list outside the backup targets> (EEPROM/SRAM)
PWB Type Controller Content Machine serial No. Product key information Various counter Trouble history Machine serial No. Various counter Machine adjustment execute history Trouble history Various counter Trouble history NOTE
56-3 Purpose Data backup Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. <IMPORT> From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD <EXPORT> From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$ '2&),/(;3257 '2&),/,03257 &/26(
Copy counter/FAX send counter etc.
PCU
Maintenance counter
SCU
Maintenance counter
(HDD)

Classification Japanese FEP Job end list
Content User dictionary Job end list display data (The image send series include the preserved job list.) Job log Print history information JAM history information Trouble history information Same position continuous jam count value Charging information Life information E-manual
NOTE
56-4 Purpose Data backup Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
Read from WEB is enable.
Log New N/A
Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
Operation manual

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$ +''(;3257 ((352065$0(;3257 +'',03257 ((352065$0,03257 &/26(
(;3257-2%/2*'$7$ -2%/2*(;3257

60
60-1 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM). Section Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Start the test.
Result display OK NG NG (NOT SLOT4) NONE DISABLE SLOT SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7 SLOT8 Description Success Fail Fail When fail SLOT4 (Standard) is not installed and SLOT3 (Option) is installed. Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) Error at SLOT2 Description System memory (expansion) System memory (standard) Local memory (image memory) (MFP expansion) Local memory (image memory) (MFP standard) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used.
60-2 Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key.
NOTE: Set to the default value.

Item/Display A SETTING ENABLE DISABLE Content SDRAM setting change flag DDR setting of Onboard SPD DDR setting of B or later ROW address width COLUMN address width Setting range 0-1 0 Default value 0
ENABLE
NUMBER OF ROW NUMBER OF COLUMN

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6'5$05($':5,7(7(67 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
TWR SETTING VALUE TRAS SETTING VALUE TRC SETTING VALUE
(;(&87(
TRCD SETTING VALUE TRP SETTING VALUE TFRC SETTING VALUE
11BIT 12BIT 13BIT 8BIT 9BIT 10BIT 11BIT 12BIT 2CLOCK 3CLOCK 4CLOCK 5CLOCK 4CLOCK 5CLOCK 6CLOCK 7CLOCK 6CLOCK 7CLOCK 8CLOCK 9CLOCK 10CLOCK 2CLOCK 3CLOCK 4CLOCK 5CLOCK 2CLOCK 3CLOCK 4CLOCK 5CLOCK 7CLOCK 8CLOCK 20CLOCK CL=2 CL=2.5 CL=3 NONE 128M BYTE 256M BYTE
0-2
0-4
TWR set value
0-3
TRAS set value
0-3
TRC set value
0-4
TRCD set value
0-3
TRP set value
0-3
TFRC set value
013
CAS LATENC Y TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ON BOARD DDR
CAS latency
0-2
Onboard DDR total capacity
0-2
0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 1 3 0 1 2 0 1 2
Item/Display L NUMBER OF ON BOARDDDR CS-BANK NONE 1CHIP SELECT 2CHIP SELECT
Content Onboard DDR bunk number
Setting range 0-2 0 1 2
Default value 1
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are increased, the print density is increased and the line width of line images are increased. <26/31 ppm models>
Mode COPY Item/Display A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) LASER POWER LOW (K1) LASER POWER LOW (K2) LASER POWER LOW (C1) LASER POWER LOW (C2) LASER POWER LOW (M1) LASER POWER LOW (M2) LASER POWER LOW (Y1) LASER POWER LOW (Y2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Content Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW1) Setting range 0255 Default value 110 Destination linkage

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6'5$06(77,1* $ 6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(
% 180%(52)52:%,7 & 180%(52)&2/801%,7 ' 7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. ( 75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. ) 75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. * 75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. + 7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. , 7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. - &$6/$7(1&<&/ . 727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7( / 180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7 2.

0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
61
G F
0255
110
0255
110
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed. LSU
0255
110
0255
110
I Display LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG LSU TESTRESULT NG: K LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Content Polygon mirror rotation abnormality Laser abnormality (K) Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
0255
110
0255
110

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /687(67 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 &/26(
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
(;(&87(

0255
110
61-3 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] , [PR600/ FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel. Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
Mode COPY
Item/Display R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) LASER POWER LOW (BW1) LASER POWER LOW (BW2) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) LASER DUTY LOW (K) LASER DUTY LOW (C) LASER DUTY LOW(M) LASER DUTY LOW(Y) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) LASER DUTY LOW (BW) LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1)
Content Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW2) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y1)
Setting range 0255
Default value 110
Destination linkage
Mode PR600/ FAX
Item/Display H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) LASER POWER LOW (K1) LASER POWER LOW (K2) LASER POWER LOW (C1) LASER POWER LOW (C2) LASER POWER LOW (M1) LASER POWER LOW (M2) LASER POWER LOW (Y1) LASER POWER LOW (Y2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) LASER POWER LOW (BW1) LASER POWER LOW (BW2) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y)
Content Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW2) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y)
Setting range 0255
Default value 110
Destination linkage
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
110
0255
0255
110
0255 0255 0255 0255 0255
0255
110
{ P
0255
110
AA
{ Q
AB
0255
110
AC
0255
110
AD
0255 0255
0255
110
PR600/ FAX
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
110
0255
0255
110
0255
110
Mode PR600/ FAX
Item/Display Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) LASER DUTY LOW (C) LASER DUTY LOW (M) LASER DUTY LOW (Y) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) LASER DUTY LOW (BW) LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) LASER POWER LOW (K1) LASER POWER LOW (K2) LASER POWER LOW (C1) LASER POWER LOW (C2) LASER POWER LOW (M1) LASER POWER LOW (M2)
Content Laser DUTY select low speed (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ M2)
Setting range 0255 0255 0255 0255 0255
Default value 0
Destination linkage {
Mode PR1200
Item/Display O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) LASER POWER LOW (Y2) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) LASER POWER LOW (BW1) LASER POWER LOW (BW2) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) LASER DUTY LOW (K) LASER DUTY LOW (C) LASER DUTY LOW (M) LASER DUTY LOW (Y) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) LASER DUTY LOW (BW)
Content Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW2) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW)
Setting range 0255
Default value 110
Destination linkage
{ P
0255
110
AA
{ Q
AB
0255
110
AC
0255
110
AD
0255 0255
0255
110
PR1200
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
120
0255
0255
110
0255
0255
110
0255 0255 0255 0255 0255
0255
110
AA 0255 110 AB 0255 110 AC
0255
110
AD
0255
0255
120

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /$6(532:(5$8726(783 &/26(
0255
120
$ /$6(532:(50,''/(.

% /$6(532:(50,''/(. & /$6(532:(50,''/(& ' /$6(532:(50,''/(&

0255
110
( /$6(532:(50,''/(0 ) /$6(532:(50,''/(0 * /$6(532:(50,''/(< + /$6(532:(50,''/(< , /$6(532:(5/2:.
0255
110
&23<
- /$6(532:(5/2:. . /$6(532:(5/2:& / /$6(532:(5/2:& 35)$; 35 2.
2 2
: '09/Sep
Setting range 0255 Default value 110 Destination linkage
<23 ppm models>

Mode COPY Item/Display A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y) LASER POWER LOW (K) LASER POWER LOW (C) LASER POWER LOW (M) LASER POWER LOW (Y) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW) LASER POWER LOW (BW) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) LASER DUTY LOW (K) LASER DUTY LOW (C) LASER DUTY LOW (M) LASER DUTY LOW (Y) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Content Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) Setting range 0255 Default value 110 Destination linkage Mode PR/FAX Item/Display A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K) LASER POWER MIDDLE (C) LASER POWER MIDDLE (M) LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y) LASER POWER LOW (K) LASER POWER LOW (C) LASER POWER LOW (M) LASER POWER LOW (Y) LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW) LASER POWER LOW (BW) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) LASER DUTY LOW (K) LASER DUTY LOW (C) LASER DUTY LOW (M) LASER DUTY LOW (Y) LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Content Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ K) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ C) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ M) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ Y) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/ BW) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/ BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW)
B 0255 120 C 0255 110 D 0255 110 E 0255 0255 0255 0255 0255 110 F 120 G 110 H 110 I 110 J 0255 110 K 0255 0 { L 0255 0 { M 0255 0 { N 0255 0 { O 0255 0255 0255 0255 0255 0 { P 0 { Q 0 { R 0 { S 0 { T 0255 0 {
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
0255 0255 0255 0255 0255
110
120
110
110
110
0255
110
0255
0255
0255
0255
0255 0255 0255 0255 0255
0255
2 2
: '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +'')250$7 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /$6(532:(5$8726(783 $ /$6(532:(50,''/(. &/26(

% /$6(532:(50,''/(& & /$6(532:(50,''/(0 ' /$6(532:(50,''/(<

&23<
35)$;
2.

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Select a target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the print conditions setting value with 10 key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
Item/Display A B MULTICOUNT PAPER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC Content Print quantity (1-999) Tray 1 Manual paper selection feed 2 Tray 1 3 Tray 2 4 Tray 3 5 Tray 4 6 LCC Default value 1 3 (CS2)
62-2 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +''5:7(673$57 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 /68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17 $ 08/7,&2817 &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
% 3$3(5&6

62-3 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). Section
(;(&87( 2.
Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Read/write operations are performed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +''5:7(67$// &/26(
62
62-1 Purpose Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Used to execute the hard disk format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
62-6 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select the self diag area. Press [EXECUTE] key. The self diag operation is performed. NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
SHORT S.T EXTENDED S.T Partial area diag All area diag
62-8 Purpose Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Used to execute the hard disk format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. * When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) NG" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($ &/26(
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. Normal completion "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed. Abnormal end "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed. * If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding section.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 60$572))/,1(7(67 6+25767 (;7(1'('67 (1$%/( ',6$%/(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
&/26(

(;(&87(
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data. Operation/Procedure 1) 62-7 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and the result is printed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 -2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$
Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Used to delete the job log data.
2)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

&/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 60$57(5525/2*35,17287 35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
&/26(
62-11 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1)

(;(&87(
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. Used to delete the document filing data.
2)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 113

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 '2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 +'')250$70$18$/$5($21/<

&/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-12 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system data storage area is cleared.
A 0 1 Enable Disable (Default)
63
63-1 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction result. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch panel.
Content Gain adjustment value (odd number) Gain adjustment value (Even number) Offset value (odd number) Offset value (even number) Reference plate sampling average value (ODD) Reference plate sampling average value (EVEN) Target value Black output level Error code (0, 1-14) (for debug) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 No error Loop number over The target value is under the specified value. The gain set value is negative. END is not asserted. (Gain adjustment) (reserve) Underflow Black shading error Other error END is not asserted. (White shading) END is not asserted. (Black shading) END is not asserted. (Light quantity correction) END is not asserted. (Scan) Register check error. (When booting/Before gain) Register check error. (Before light quantity correction) NOTE
Scanner
Item/ Display GAIN ODD

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 $872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/( $ <(612 &/26(
GAIN EVEN

OFFSET ODD OFFSET EVEN SMP AVE ODD SMP AVE EVEN TARGET VALUE BLACK LEVEL ERROR CODE
2.
62-13 Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The operation manual data are deleted. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Item/ Display RSPF WHITE LEVEL 1ST RSPF WHITE LEVEL 2ND
Content First scan RSPF white reference level Second scan RSPF white reference level
NOTE
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17 2&

&/26(
&&&555 000***

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6+$',1*'$7$',63/$< *$,12'' *$,1(9(1 2))6(72'' 2))6(7(9(1 603$9(2'' 603$9((9(1 7$5*(79$/8( %/$&./(9(/ (5525&2'( 563):+,7(/(9(/67 563):+,7(/(9(/1' &/26(
<<<%%%
(;(&87( 2&


Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Operation/Procedure 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table. Press [OC] key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch of the SIT chart is scanned. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. 4) Select a data display mode.
SIT chart scan data Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart scan data Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT chart scan data
63-2 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Used to perform shading. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. Adjustment 2) 3) Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
THROUGH GAMMA COPY GAMMA SCANNER GAMMA

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6+$',1*(;(&87,21 35(66>(;(&87(@726+$',1*67$57 &/26(
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&( 2& &/26(
&&&555 000***
(;(&87(

<<<%%%
63-3 Purpose Adjustment 63-5 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Press [SIDE A(OC)] key. Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the default.
% * 5 (;(&87( 2&
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the document table. Press [OK] key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is performed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key. Scanner
2) 3)
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783 6,'($2& &/26(
E F G H I J K L M N O BASE
Point E target value Point F target value Point G target value Point H target value Point I target value Point J target value Point K target value Point L target value Point M target value Point N target value Point O target value Background sampling value
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&( %&'() *+,-. &/26(
63-6 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with SIM46-21 on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. 63-8 Purpose

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(&+$575($',1* 6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@ &/26(
.
012
&
<
6(783

Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance adjustment is set to the default. The service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
(;(&87(

63-7 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with SIM46-21 on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. Press [OK] key. The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the scanned adjustment pattern sheet. The registered color balance and the density are displayed. Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color balance is manually adjusted.
B C D Point B target value Point C target value Point D target value
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
&/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(17 7$5*(77%/ '() '() '() &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Item/Display Target color balance DEF1 Content The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. Default value DEF 1

DEF2
64
64-1 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key. Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed. Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
DEF3
Item/Display PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) MULTI COUNT EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19)
B C D E F
Content Specification of the print pattern (* For details, refer to the description below.) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) Used to specify the print gradation. Number of print Exposure mode specification
Setting range 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29) 1-255 (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255) 0-255 (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255) 1-255 (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255) 1 - 999 1-8 1 (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 1
Default value 1
1 254 255 1 8 (STANDARD DITHER)
PAPER
H I
DUPLEX PAPER TYPE
THROUGH CHAR/PIC CHAR/PRPIC CHAR PRINT PIC PRINT PAPER MAP STANDARD DITHER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO PLAIN
Tray selection
Duplex print selection Paper type
No process (through) Text/Printed Photo Text/ Photograph Text Printed Photo Photograph Map Dither without correction Manual paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Yes No Standard paper
2 (CS1)
0-1 1-4
1 (NO) 1 (PLAIN)
: '09/Sep
<Print pattern of Item A>

Pattern No. 1 2 9 Content Grid pattern Dot print Each color 10% area (A4/A4E) density print 8-color belt print 4-color dot print (sub scan) 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) All background (half tone) 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) 256 gradations pattern (For text dither) Pattern generating section LSU-ASIC NOTE
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6(/)35,17&2/256(59,&( $ 35,173$77(51

&/26(
Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
% '27'27,)$ & '27'27,)$ ' '(16,7<),;(',)$ ( 08/7,&2817 ) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5 * 3$3(5&6 + '83/(;12 , 3$3(57<3(3/$,1

10 11 15
MFP ASIC
16
When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY. 16 gradations print The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
17
18
Half tone (MFP ASIC rear process)
19
20 21 22 29
4-point dot print (main scan) Slant line Dot print 1200dpi
LSU-ASIC
When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY. When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY. 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback is made, and the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print) Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed. -
64-2 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key. Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Except 23 ppm machine
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) MULTI COUNT EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19)
B C D E F
Content Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to the description below.) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) Used to specify the print gradation. Number of print Exposure mode specification
Setting range 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29) 1-255 (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255) 0-255 (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255) 1-255 (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255) 1 - 999 1-8 1 (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 1 2 3 4
Default value 1
1 254 255 1 8 (STANDARD DITHER)
PAPER
H I
DUPLEX PAPER TYPE
THROUGH CHAR/PIC CHAR/PRPIC CHAR PRINT PIC PRINT PAPER MAP STANDARD DITHER MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC YES NO PLAIN HEAVY OHP ENVELOPE
Tray selection
Duplex print selection Paper type
No process (through) Text/Printed Photo Text/ Photograph Text Printed Photo Photograph Map Dither without correction Manual paper feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Yes No Standard paper Heavy paper OHP Envelope
2 (CS1)
0-1 1-4
1 (NO) 1 (PLAIN)
: '09/Sep

Pattern No. 1 2 9 Content Grid pattern Dot print Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print 8-color belt print 4-color dot print (sub scan) 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) All background (half tone) 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) 256 gradations pattern (For text dither) 4-point dot print (main scan) Slant line Dot print 1200dpi Pattern generating section LSU-ASIC -

NOTE
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6(/)35,17%:6(59,&( $ 35,173$77(51 &/26(
% '27'27,)$ & '27'27,)$ ' '(16,7<),;(',)$ ( 08/7,&2817 ) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5 * 3$3(5&6 + '83/(;12

10 11
15
MFP ASIC
16
Print of each color is made for every 1/4 of the sub scanning paper size. When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY. 16 gradations print The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
(;(&87(
2.
17 18
Half tone (MFP ASIC after process)
64-4 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key.
19
20 21 22 29
LSU-ASIC
Except 23 ppm machine
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. 2) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.
Setting range 1-6 Default value 3 (26/31 ppm model) 6 (23 ppm model) 128 1 2 (CS1)
Item/Display PRINT PATTERN
Content Specification of the print pattern (* For details, refer to the description below.) Used to specify the print gradation. Number of print Paper feed tray Manual paper feed selection Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Halftone Low line number High line number Image quality Standard setting Fine image quality Ultra fine text Specification of Straight dither correction Calibration Paper type Standard paper Heavy paper
B C D
DENSITY MULTI COUNT PAPER
E F
HALFTONE QUALITY
G H
DITHER PAPER TYPE
MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC LOW HIGH STANDARD HIGHQUALITY FINE STRAIGHT CALIB PLAIN HEAVY
1 - 255 1 - 999 1-6
0-1 0-2
1-2 0-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 0 1 2 1 2 0 1
0 (LOW) 1 (HIGHQUALITY) 2 (CALIB) 0

Pattern No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Content 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) 256 gradations pattern (B/W) 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous) Half tone pattern (COLOR) Half tone pattern (B/W) background, Mesh print
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(56(/)35,17 $ 35,173$77(51 &/26(
% '(16,7< & 08/7,&2817 ' 3$3(5&6 ( +$/)721(/2: ) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7< * ',7+(5&$/,% + 3$3(57<3(3/$,1

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-5 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key. Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display PRINT PATTERN Content Specification of the print pattern (* For details, refer to the description below.) Specification of Straight dither correction Calibration Number of print Paper feed tray Manual paper feed selection Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Halftone For Photo For text Image quality Standard setting (600dpi, 1bit) Fine image quality (600dpi, 4bit) Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) Rendering indent Perceptual Color metric Saturation Output profile Standard For Photo image RGB source SRGB profile Gamma 1.6 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.0 TONER SAVE mode Gray K only compensation KCMY Toner save mode set. not set. Paper type Standard paper Heavy paper Setting range 1-3 Default value 3
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
B C D
DITHER MULTI COUNT PAPER
STRAIGHT CALIB MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC LOW(IMAGE) HIGH(TEXT) STANDARD HIGHQUALITY FINE
1-2 1 - 999 1-6
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 0 1 2
2 1 2 (CS1)
E F
HALFTONE QUALITY
0-1 0-2
0 (LOW) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
INTENT
H I
OUTPUT PROFILE RGB SOURCE PROFILE
J K L
GRAY COMPENSATION TONER SAVE MODE PAPER TYPE
PERCEPTUAL COLORIMETRIC SATURATION SHARP STANDARD SRGB GAMMA1.6 GAMMA1.8 GAMMA2.0 TONER SAVE K KCMY ON OFF PLAIN HEAVY
0-2
0-1 0-4
0-1 0-1 0-1
0 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 (PERCEPTUAL) 0 (SHARP) 1 (Gamma1.6)
0 (K) 1 (OFF) 0 (PLAIN)

Pattern No. 1 2 3

Content COLOR B/W Continuous COLOR,B/W
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(56(/)35,173&/ $ 35,173$77(51 &/26(
% ',7+(5&$/,% & 08/7,&2817 ' 3$3(5&6 ( +$/)721(/2: ) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7< * ,17(173(5&(378$/ + 287387352),/(6+$53 , 5*%6285&(352),/(65*% - *5$<&203(16$7,21. . 721(56$9(02'(2))

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-6 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key. Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.
A B C D Item/Display PRINT PATTERN DITHER MULTI COUNT PAPER STRAIGHT CALIB MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 LCC LOW(IMAGE) HIGH(TEXT) STANDARD HIGHQUALITY FINE G INTENT PERCEPTUAL COLORIMETRIC SATURATION SHARP STANDARD SRGB GAMMA1.6 GAMMA1.8 GAMMA2.0 TONER SAVE K KCMY OFF SWOP EURO JAPAN COLOR PLAIN HEAVY Content Specification of the print pattern (* For details, refer to the description below.) Specification of Straight dither correction Calibration Number of print Paper feed tray Manual paper feed selection Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Halftone Photograph For text Image quality Standard setting (600dpi, 1bit) Fine image quality (600dpi, 4bit) Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) Rendering indent Perceptual Color metric Saturation Output profile Standard For Photo image RGB source SRGB profile Gamma 1.6 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.0 Gamma 0.6 Gray K only compensation KCMY Ink simulation OFF SWOP EURO JAPAN COLOR Paper type Standard paper Heavy paper Setting range 1-2 1-2 1 - 999 1-6 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 0 1 2 0-2 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 (PERCEPTUAL) 0 (SHARP) 1 (GAMMA1.6) Default value 1 2 1 2 (CS1)
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
E F
HALFTONE QUALITY
0-1 0-2
0 (LOW) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
H I
OUTPUT PROFILE RGB SOURCE PROFILE
0-1 0-5
J K
GRAY COMPENSATION CMY INK SIMULATION
0-1 0-3
0 (K) 0 (OFF)
PAPER TYPE
0-1
0 (PLAIN)

Pattern No. 1 2
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
Content COLOR B/W
35,17(56(/)35,1736 $ 35,173$77(51
% ',7+(5&$/,% & 08/7,&2817 ' 3$3(5&6 ( +$/)721(/2: ) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7< * ,17(173(5&(378$/ + 287387352),/(6+$53 , 5*%6285&(352),/(65*% - *5$<&203(16$7,21. . &0<,1.6,08/$7,212)) / 3$3(57<3(3/$,1

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-7 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. Set the print conditions with 10 key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.
Item/Display A B COPIES PROC YES ADJ Content Number of print 0 The half tone process control correction value is reflected. 1 The half tone process control correction value is not reflected. Setting range 1 - 999 0-1 Default value 1 1 Writing No Yes
65-2 Purpose Operation check/test Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Section Operation/Procedure Touch the touch panel. The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of the touched position is displayed in real time.
NO

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(3$7&+35,1702'( $ &23,(6 &/26(

;<

% 352&$'-12

(;(&87(
2.
65-5 Purpose Operation check/test Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key input. Section Operation/Procedure Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on the screen. If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. <Check target key>
8.5 Inch LCD model JOB STATUS SYSTEM SETTINGS HOME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUDIT CLEAR 8.1 Inch LCD model DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND COPY JOB STATUS FUNCTION SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
65
65-1 Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Section Operation/Procedure Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the screen. When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to the simulation sub number entry menu. In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. Operation panel section
8.5 Inch LCD model 0 PROGRAM CLEAR STOP CLEAR ALL/RESET START (COLOR) START (MONO)
8.1 Inch LCD model 8 9 AUDIT CLEAR 0 PROGRAM CLEAR STOP CLEAR ALL/RESET START (COLOR) START (MONO)
67-24 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Press [EXECUTE] key. The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and the adjustment result is printed. 4) Press [OK] key. The half tone correction target registration is processed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 )257+,6$'-8670(17 &/26(
Printer

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&. 3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(< &/26(
67
67-17 Purpose Function (Purpose) Printer reset Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the NIC setting.) Printer
6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( 7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
(;(&87(

&/26(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5 &/26(
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
67-25 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Section Operation/Procedure 1)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Printer
Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the touch panel. Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
2) 3)
4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment value.
Item/Display A POINT1 Setting range 1 - 99 Default value 50
Item/Display B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17
Setting range 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 99
Default value 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)357(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'7$5*(77%/ '() '() '() &/26(

67-27 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table. Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. Press [OK] key. The service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern sheet patch images. The registered color balance and the density are displayed. Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. Printer

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
67-26 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Item/Display Target value table select DEF1 Content The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual printer mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and print is made. Default value DEF 1
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color balance is manually adjusted.
B C D E F G H I J K L M N O BASE Point B target value Point C target value Point D target value Point E target value Point F target value Point G target value Point H target value Point I target value Point J target value Point K target value Point L target value Point M target value Point N target value Point O target value Background sampling value
Printer
DEF2

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( %&'() *+,-. /012 &/26(
DEF3
&
<
6(783

67-28 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment is set to the default. The service color balance target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target. Printer
67-31 Purpose Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are cleared. (The printer color balance correction is canceled.)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5 &/26(
Data clear Printer
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&( &/26(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
67-33 Purpose
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Section Printer Operation/Procedure
67-30 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of sending the machine calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC. (For GDI printer) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key.
Item/Display A (0: YES 1: NO) 0 Content Sending the calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC is disabled. Sending the calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC is enabled. Setting range 0-1 Default value 1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the touch panel. Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17 Content Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Setting range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Default value 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128
Printer

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &$/,%5$7,21'$7$5(/($6($'-8670(17 $ <(612 &/26(

2.
Display SCREEN1 SCREEN2 SCREEN3 SCREEN4 SCREEN5 SCREEN6 SCREEN7 SCREEN8 SCREEN9
Content 600dpi 1bit Photo 600dpi 1 bit Graphics 600dpi 4 bit Photo 600dpi 4 bit Graphics 1200dpi 1 bit Photo 1200dpi 1 bit Graphics B/W 600dpi 1 bit B/W 600dpi 4 bit B/W 1200dpi 1 bit
Display SCREEN10 HEAVY PAPER
Content Toner Save B/W Printer paper kind manual gamma correction (Heavy paper)

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1 $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1 $ 32,17 &/26(

% 32,17 & 32,17 ' 32,17 ( 32,17 ) 32,17 * 32,17 + 32,17 , 32,17 - 32,17 . 32,17 / 32,17

&
<
(;(&87(
2.
67-34 Purpose
(;(&87( 2.
Adjustment/Setup
&
<
67-33 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for GDI) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the touch panel. Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key. Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Item/Display A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q POINT1 POINT2 POINT3 POINT4 POINT5 POINT6 POINT7 POINT8 POINT9 POINT10 POINT11 POINT12 POINT13 POINT14 POINT15 POINT16 POINT17 Content Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Point 9 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Setting range 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Content 600dpi 1bit Photo 600dpi 1bit Graphics 1200dpi 1bit Photo 1200dpi 1bit Graphics B/W 600dpi 1bit B/W 1200dpi 1bit Default value 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section tone gap) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 1 Enable Disable
Printer
Printer
2)

Item/Display A CMY (0: ENABLE 1: DISABLE) 0 Content CMY engine highest density correction mode : Enable 1 CMY engine highest density correction mode : Disable 0 K engine highest density correction mode : Enable 1 K engine highest density correction mode : Disable Scanner target value for CYAN maximum density correction Scanner target value for MAGENTA maximum density correction Scanner target value for YELLOW maximum density correction Scanner target value for BLACK maximum density correction Setting range 0-1 Default value 0
K (0: ENABLE 1: DISABLE)
0-1
CYAN MAX TARGET MAGENTA MAX TARGET YELLOW MAX TARGET BLACK MAX TARGET
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
Display SCREEN1 SCREEN2 SCREEN3 SCREEN4 SCREEN5 SCREEN6
When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items A and B to "0." The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone gap is reduced. To increase the density in the high density section further, set items A and B to "1. The tone gap may occur in high density part. NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5 $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( &/26(

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(53&/ +($9<3$3(5 '3,B%,7 '3,B%,7 %: &/26(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/( & &<$10$;7$5*(7 ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

$//
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

2.
67-36 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Press [OK] key. Printer
67-52 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (GDI) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel. Press [ALL] key to select all the modes. Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is reset to the default.
Item/Display 1200DPI_1BIT 600DPI_1BIT B/W Content SCREEN3(1200dpi 1bit Photo) SCREEN4(1200dpi 1bit Graphic) SCREEN1(600dpi 1bit Photo) SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphic) SCREEN5(B/W 600dpi 1bit) SCREEN6(B/W 1200dpi 1bit)
Printer
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the low density are images are weakly reproduced. When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17 $ $3$7&+,1387 &/26(
Screen

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5*', '3,B%,7 '3,B%,7 %: &/26(
2.
67-52 Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel. Press [ALL] key to select all the modes. Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is reset to the default.
Item/Display HEAVYPAPER 1200DPI_1BIT 600DPI_1BIT B/W Content Heavy paper screen SCREEN5(1200dpi 1bit Photo) SCREEN6(1200dpi 1bit Graphics) SCREEN1(600dpi 1bit Photo) SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphics) SCREEN7(B/W 600dpi 1bit) SCREEN8(B/W 600dpi 4bit) SCREEN9(B/W 1200dpi 1bit) SCREEN10(Toner Save B/W)
Printer
$//
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

Screen
67-70 Purpose Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear Section Operation/Procedure 1) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [YES] key. MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 65$00(025<&/($5 &/26(
MFP PWB
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
MX-3100N [8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
C. Self diag operation Service Manual

(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
The machine always monitors its own state. When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and displays the trouble message. A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is nearly expired or is expired. When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or may not be stopped. The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by the LCD and lamp. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation. Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.
1.
Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the machine to minimize the damage.
A. Function and purpose

1) 2) 3) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, improving the repair efficiency.) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)
4)
Monitors the machine conditions. Detects/analyzes the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the user. (Paper jam,consumable part life expiration, etc.) Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.) Warning to the user, not a machine trouble (Preliminary warning of life expiration of a consumable part, etc.) Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is stopped. -
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Service Others Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
Class 2
Trouble Others
The content is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
A consumable part has reached its lifetime

ZFT YES
No OP
Trouble Troubleshoot the cause.
Replace or supply the consumable part.
Repair
Cancel the selfdiagnostic message with the diagnostics (test commands).
Reset
Standby state
MX-3100N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1
D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
a. Breakdown mode list There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode Kind of trouble Judgment block MFP Trouble code Copy scan (including interruption) { Scan push { Scan pull { ScanTo HDD { FAX Send U1 FAX print U1 Print { List print { FAST Notification to host U1
FAX board trouble HDD trouble HDD-ASIC self test trouble SCU communication trouble PCU communication trouble Power controler trouble Backup battery voltage fall Controller fan motor trouble Connection trouble (MFP detection) Serial number discrepancy Vendor machine error Memory error (included not installed the expansion RAM) HDD registration data sum error Image memory trouble, decode error Personal counter installation trouble Laser trouble Connection trouble (PCU detection) PCU section troubles (motor, fusing, etc.)
F6 (1 line) E7 (03, 04)
E7 (80) A0 (02) E7 (90) A0 (01) L8 (20) U1 (01) L4 (30) E7 (60, 61, 65) A0 (10 - 12, 20) U2 (30) U7 (50, 51) U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, 23, 24) U2 (50) E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, 09) PC (--) PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), L6 (10) E7 (50) A0 (21) F1 (50) C1 (10, 14), C4 (excluding 10), E7 (21, 22, 23), F2 (22, 40, 64, 70, 74), H2, H3, H4, H5, H7, L4 (excluding 30), L8 (01, 02), U2 (90, 91), F3 (12) F3 (22) U6 (01) U6 (02) U6 (09,20,21,22,51) U6 (00,10,50) F1(08,10) F1 (21,31,41,43,45,47) F1 (00,03,11,15,19,20,32, 33,34,36,37,38,39) EE (EL, EU, EC)
{ { { { { {
*10
{ { { {
*10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble Paper feed tray 2 trouble Paper feed tray 3 trouble Paper feed tray 4 trouble Paper feed tray 5 trouble Paper feed tray other troubles Staple trouble Saddle stitch section trouble After-process trouble
U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U 11 U4 U4 U4
{ { { { { { U4 U4 U4
{ { { { { { U4 U4 U4
{ { { { { { U4 U4 U4
{ { { { { { U4 U4 U4
U3 *10 U3 *10 U3 *10 U3 *10 U3 *10 U 11 *10 U4 *10 U4 *10 U4 *10 {
U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U 11 U4 U4 U4
U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U 11 U4 U4 U4
{ { { { { { { { {
Other troubles
Operatable mode Kind of trouble Judgment block PCU Trouble code Copy scan (including interruption) *11 Scan push *11 Scan pull *11 ScanTo HDD *11 FAX Send *11 FAX print *11 Print *11 List print *11 FAST Notification to host {
General PCU color system trouble
Process control trouble (PCU detection) PCU section error Connection trouble (SCU detection) SCU color system troubles (SCU detection) Anti copy system EEPROM faction Scanner section troubles (mirror motor, lens, copy lamp) CCD troubles (shading, etc.) SCU
E7 (21 - 23), F2 (23 - 25, 41 - 43, 65 - 67, 71 - 73, 75 - 77) F2 (39, 58, 45, 49 - 53, 78) C4 (10) A0 (22) UC (02) UC (20) U2 (80, 81) L1,L3
{ *12 { *16 U9
{ { *16 U9
{ { *16 U9
{ { *16 U9
{ { *16 U9
{ { *16 { { { {
{ { *16 { { { {
{ { *16 { { { {
{ { *16 { { { {
E7 (10, 11, 14)
{ : Operation enabled, : Operation disabled U 1 : The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line. U 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray. U 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. U 9 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode. * 10 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred. U 11 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK. * 11 : When the color mode is inhibited in "Color mode inhibit" setting of the system setting, the operation is performed in the monochrome mode. * 12 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble) * 16 : Print is enabled. Displays "Call for service. CODE: **-**". * Trouble mode process Machine operation enabled under some conditions. A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message. When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled. * For U3, 4, 11 perform the following procedures. When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key) When trouble is detected other than during the JOB operating, the trouble display is not made and the JOB that relates to the trouble part cannot be selected. Troubles which disable the machine operations The trouble display is always made. * Writing to the trouble memory Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35. (Sim.26-35) 0: ONCE; If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default) 1: ANY; Though same as the previous one, it is saved.
(2)
Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event manager (Power ON sequence) H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, PF trouble check Trouble check is made in each block when initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. H3, H4, H5 U1 U2 PF U6-09 Saved in the PCU Saved in the MFP. Saved in each block. Saved in the MFP. Saved in the PCU
Each block When the power is turned on, check is made in each block.
Communication of trouble status [Trouble code] [Trouble status]
sim task (Trouble cancel sequence) When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode inhibition) cancel SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel SIM 17: PF trouble cancel (To the corresponding block) Trouble cancel command Trouble cancel status is communicated.
Trouble cancel (The trouble memory is initialized.)
2.
Trouble code list

Trouble code content Main charger trouble (BK) Main charger trouble (Color) PTC trouble PTC heater open trouble PTC heater short trouble PTC no control MFP image data error HDD trouble HDD-ASIC error Standard memory/expansion memory read/write error (MFP PWB) Image data decode error MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) Standard memory size/Expansion memory size error (MFP PWB) Shading error (Black correction) Shading error (White correction) CCD-ASIC error LSU laser detection error (K) LSU laser detection error (C) LSU laser detection error (M) LSU laser detection error (Y) LSU-PCU connection error LSU ASIC frequency error Engine connection trouble PWB information sum error (Engine detection) Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP-PCU PWB communication error Trouble detection PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP SCU SCU SCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP Mecha nism Option Electri city { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { FAX Supply
Trouble code Main Sub code code C1 10 14 C4 00 02 03 10 E7 01 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 14 20 21 22 23 28 29 50 55 60 61 65 80 90
Trouble code Main Sub code code EE EC EL EU F1 00 03 08 10 11 15 19 20 21 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 41 43 45 47 50 F2 22 23 24 25 39 40 41 42 43 45 49 50 51 58 64 65 66 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 F3 H2 12 22 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 00 01 02 30 01
Trouble code content Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - 178) Automatic toner density adjustment error (Overtoner) Automatic toner density adjustment error (Undertoner) Finisher - PCU PWB communication error Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble Stapler shift trouble Staple operation trouble Finisher grip operation trouble Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble Finisher alignment operation trouble F Finisher alignment operation trouble R Finisher fan trouble Saddle paper folding trouble Finisher - Punch unit communication error Punch unit shift operation trouble Punch operation trouble Punch paper edge detection error Finisher data backup RAM error Punch data backup RAM error Punch paper dust sensor error Saddle paper positioning operation trouble Saddle alignment operation trouble Saddle staple trouble Saddle paper transport motor trouble Main unit - Finisher combination error Discharge lamp trouble (K) Discharge lamp trouble (C) Discharge lamp trouble (M) Discharge lamp trouble (Y) Process thermister trouble Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK) Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN) Toner density sensor trouble (MAGENTA) Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW) Color image density sensor trouble LSU thermister trouble K drum phase sensor trouble CL drum phase sensor trouble Process humidity sensor trouble Toner supply operation trouble (BK) Toner supply operation trouble (C) Toner supply operation trouble (M) Toner supply operation trouble (Y) Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK) Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN) Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA) Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW) Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK) Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN) Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA) Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW) Registration image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality) Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble Thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) Thermister open trouble (TH_LM) Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US) Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) Thermister input circuit trouble (TH_UM) 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam
Trouble detection PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU
Mecha nism
Option
Electri city { { {
FAX
Supply
{ { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { {
H3
H4
H5
: '09/Sep
Trouble detection PCU PCU PCU SCU SCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU MFP PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP SCU SCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU MFP MFP SCU SCU MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP MFP PCU SCU Mecha nism { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Electri city
Trouble code Main Sub code code H7 10 11 12 L1 00 L3 00 L4 02 04 05 06 11 16 30 31 32 35 50 56 58 L6 10 L8 01 02 20 PC U1 01 U2 00 05 10 11 22 23 24 30 50 80 81 90 91 U6 00 01 02 09 10 20 21 22 50 51 U7 50 51 UC 02 20 A0 01 02 10 11 12 15 20 21 22
Trouble code content Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2). Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM) Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US) Scanner feed trouble Scanner return trouble Paper feed motor trouble Developing motor trouble (BLACK) Developing motor trouble (COLOR) Transfer unit lift trouble Shift motor trouble Fusing pressure release trouble MFP fan motor trouble Paper exit cooling fan trouble Power source cooling fan trouble Fusing cooling fan trouble Process fan trouble Rear cooling fan trouble Ozone exhaust fan trouble Polygon motor trouble Full wave signal detection error Full wave signal error MFP PWB - Mother board communication error Personal counter not detected Battery trouble MFP EEPROM read/write error HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency HDD user authentication data check sum error SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error Desk paper feeding tray 1 lift trouble Desk paper feeding tray 2 lift trouble LCC lift trouble Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU PWB - LCC communication error LCC paper transport motor trouble LCC 24V power trouble Desk - Main unit combination trouble LCC - Main unit combination trouble MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error Vendor machine error CPT - ASIC error DOCC ASIC error PCU PWB ROM error SCU PWB ROM error MFP PWB ROM error Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) Conflict DSK Boot version MFP firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency PCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency SCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency
Option
FAX
Supply
3.
Details of trouble code

Main charger trouble (BK)
PCU The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly. There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Breakage of the high voltage harness. MC/DV PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB. connector. /Replace. Replace the MC/DV PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
C4-02
PTC heater open trouble

PCU The PTC unit is not installed, or the eater line conduction trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the PTC unit. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness. NOTE: When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot be made because of no replacement part: To use the machine continuously, make the setting to ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be operated tentatively. Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1". This setting disables the PTC output, the heater control, and the error detection. After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
C1-10
Trouble content Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
C1-14
Main charger trouble (Color)

PCU The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed properly. There is an abnormality in the main charger. Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Breakage of the high voltage harness. MC/DV PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. /Replace. Replace the MC/DV PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
C4-03
PTC heater short trouble

PCU PTC unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the PTC unit. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness. NOTE: When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot be made because of no replacement part: To use the machine continuously, make the setting to ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be operated tentatively. Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1". This setting disables the PTC output, the heater control, and the error detection. After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
C4-00
PTC trouble
PCU The PTC unit is not properly installed. PTC unit trouble. Secondary transfer PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the PTC unit. Replace the secondary transfer PWB. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness. NOTE: When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot be made because of no replacement part: To use the machine continuously, make the setting to ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be operated tentatively. Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1". This setting disables the PTC output, the heater control, and the error detection. After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
C4-10
PTC no control
PCU The engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1". The PTC control is not executed. (The PTC does not operate.) When the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1", the PTC output, the heater control, and the error detection are disabled. When this setting is made in case of a PTC unit trouble, the PTC function is disabled regardless of the PTC trouble and printing operation can be performed. Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0". (The mode returns to the normal PTC control mode.)
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-01
MFP image data error

MFP Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB. MFP PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness of the MFP PWB. Replace the MFP PWB.
Trouble content Detail Cause Check & Remedy
E7-03
HDD trouble
MFP Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP PWB and HDD. HDD (error file management area) data abnormality (FAT breakage). MFP PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness of the MFP PWB and HDD. Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the HDD. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFP PWB.
E7-09
Standard memory size/Expansion memory size error (MFP PWB)

MFP A DIMM which is not 1GB is inserted into the default slot. DIMM trouble. Insufficient memory size. Replace the DIMM.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-10
Shading error (Black correction)

SCU Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the scanner lamp is turned OFF. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. CCD unit abnormality. SCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check the CCD unit. Check the SCU PWB.
E7-04
HDD-ASIC error
MFP HDD-ASIC trouble. An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when booting. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-05
Standard memory/expansion memory read/write error (MFP PWB)

Memory access is disabled. MFP Improper insertion of the memory. Garbled memory data. The memory capacity is not the specified level. Check insertion of the memory. Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the expansion memory. Replace the MFP PWB.
E7-11
Shading error (White correction)

SCU Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan level when the scanner lamp is turned ON. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Scanner lamp lighting trouble. CCD unit abnormality. SCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp unit. Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate. Check the CCD unit. Check the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-06
Image data decode error

MFP Compressed image data abnormality. HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed. Image data compression/transfer data garble. MFP PWB trouble. If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job, check the FAX PWB. Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-14
CCD-ASIC error
SCU SCU PWB trouble. Check the SCU PWB. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
E7-08
MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB)

MFP A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the MFP memory slot. (Support memory: ROW=13bit, Column=10bit) DIMM trouble. Check the installed DIMM. Replace the DIMM.
E7-20
LSU laser detection error (K)

PCU Optical axis shift. Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble. BD PWB trouble. Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD PWB and the LSU cnt PWB. Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the LSU. Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-21
LSU laser detection error (C)

PCU Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble. Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU cnt PWB. Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the LSU. Replace the LSU.
E7-50
Engine connection trouble

PCU A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported by the machine specifications is detected in the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble. LSU trouble. Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary. Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-22
LSU laser detection error (M)

E7-55
PWB information sum error (Engine detection)

PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error PCU PCU EEPROM sum check error. PCU EEPROM trouble. PCU EEPROM contact trouble. Malfunction due to noises Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU EEPROM.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-23
LSU laser detection error (Y)

E7-60
Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware
MFP A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB. MFP PWB trouble. The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the machine specifications is connected. Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-28
LSU-PCU connection error

PCU Communication error between the CPU in the PCU PWB and the control ASIC. Improper connection of the communication connector between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB). Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB) PCU PWB or LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB). Replace the LSU cnt PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-61
Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB
MFP Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB. MFP PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Check the combination between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB. Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-65
MFP EEPROM sum check error

MFP MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown. Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device. Malfunction due to noises. Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
E7-29
LSU ASIC frequency error

PCU Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC. LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB. Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
E7-80
MFP-SCU PWB communication error

MFP SCU PWB connector connection trouble. SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. SCU PWB mother board connection trouble. SCU PWB trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Replace the mother board. Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB, and the mother board. Check the earth line. Replace the SCU PWB. Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the mother board.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Undertoner)

Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is 51 or less. PCU Toner density sensor trouble. Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble, or developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-00 E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error

MFP PCU PWB connector connection trouble. PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. PCU PWB motherboard connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Replace the mother board. Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB, and the mother board. Check the earth line. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the mother board.
Finisher - PCU PWB communication error

PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Check the connector and the harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-03
Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble

PCU Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit roller lift motor. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 178)
Trouble content Detail Cause The sampling level in the automatic toner density adjustment is outside of 128 10. PCU Toner density sensor trouble. Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-08 EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Overtoner)

Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 or above. PCU Toner density sensor trouble. Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble, or developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Stapler shift trouble

PCU Stapler shift motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift motor. Replace the stapler shift motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-10
Staple operation trouble

PCU Staple motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor. Replace the staple motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-21
Finisher fan trouble

PCU Finisher fan motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor. Check connection between the finisher control PWB and the fan. Replace the fan. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-11
Finisher grip operation trouble

PCU Grip motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Grip arm trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor. Replace the grip motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the grip arm. Replace the home position sensor.
F1-31
Saddle paper folding trouble

PCU Saddle paper folding motor trouble. Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper folding. Replace the saddle paper folding motor. Check and repair the saddle paper folding mechanism. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-15
Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble

Lift motor trouble. PCU Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit tray lift motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-32
Finisher - Punch unit communication error

PCU Connector/harness connection trouble or disconnection between the finisher and the punch unit. Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Malfunction due to noises. The punch unit is in the adjustment mode. Check the connector and the harness between the finisher and the punch unit. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB. Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
F1-19
Finisher alignment operation trouble F

PCU Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Motor speed abnormality. Overcurrent to the motor. Finisher control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor F. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper alignment motor F.
Check & Remedy
F1-33
Punch unit shift operation trouble

PCU Punch shift motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shifting. Replace the punch shift motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy
F1-20
Finisher alignment operation trouble R

PCU Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Motor speed abnormality. Overcurrent to the motor. Finisher control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor R. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper alignment motor R.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-34
Punch operation trouble

PCU Punch motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Check the punch operation. Replace the punch motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-41
Saddle paper positioning operation trouble

Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in the saddle section. PCU Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper positioning motor. Replace the saddle paper folding positioning guide drive motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-36
Punch paper edge detection error

PCU Punch paper edge sensor trouble. Harness disconnection. Finisher control PWB trouble. Punch control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Replace the punch paper edge sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the punch control PWB.
F1-43
Saddle alignment operation trouble

PCU Saddle alignment motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper alignment motor. Replace the saddle alignment motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-37
Finisher data backup RAM error

PCU Finisher control PWB trouble. Malfunction due to noises Replace the finisher control PWB. Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
F1-45
Saddle staple trouble

Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the saddle section. PCU Saddle staple motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle staple motor. Replace the saddle staple motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-38
Punch data backup RAM error

PCU Punch control PWB trouble. Malfunction due to noises Replace the punch control PWB. Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Check & Remedy
F1-39
Punch paper dust sensor error

PCU Punch dust sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Punch unit control PWB trouble. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the punch dust sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the punch unit control PWB.
F1-47
Saddle paper transport motor trouble

Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the finisher saddle transport section. PCU Saddle paper transport motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Fuse blown (24V line). Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper transport motor. Replace the saddle paper transport motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the fuse.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-50
Main unit - Finisher combination error

PCU The finisher which is not supported by the main unit model is installed. Finisher control PWB trouble. Install a proper finisher. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F2-39
Process thermister trouble

PCU Process thermister trouble. Process thermister harness connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Replace the process thermister. Check connection of the harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-22
Discharge lamp trouble (K)

A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the discharge lamp. PCU Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K) and the PCU PWB. Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K). Check the harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-40
Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)

PCU Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample level 25 or less, or 231 or above) Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble Replace the toner density sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-23
Discharge lamp trouble (C)

A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the discharge lamp. PCU Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C) and the PCU PWB. Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C). Check the harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-41
Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN)

Trouble content
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-24
Discharge lamp trouble (M)

A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the discharge lamp. PCU Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (M) and the PCU PWB. Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M). Check the harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
F2-42
Toner density (MAGENTA)
sensor
trouble
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-25
Discharge lamp trouble (Y)

A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the discharge lamp. PCU Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y) and the PCU PWB. Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Check the harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-43
Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW)

PCU Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample level 25 or less, or 231 or above). Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner density sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-50
K drum phase sensor trouble

PCU Drum phase sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Drum drive section trouble. PCU PWB trouble Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.". Replace the drum phase sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Repair the drum drive section. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-51 F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble

PCU Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment trouble. Color image density sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Image density sensor dirt. Calibration plate dirt. Calibration plate solenoid trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the color image density sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Clean the image density sensor. Replace the calibration plate. Replace the calibration plate solenoid. Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM44-2 to adjust the process control sensor sensitivity.
CL drum phase sensor trouble

PCU Drum phase sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Drum drive section trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.". Replace the drum phase sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Repair the drum drive section. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-58
Process humidity sensor trouble

PCU Process humidity sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the process humidity sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-49
LSU thermister trouble

PCU The LSU detection temperature is outside of -28C 78C. LSU thermister trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble LSU control PWB trouble. Replace the LSU thermister. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the LSU control PWB. Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy
F2-64
Toner supply operation trouble (BK)

PCU Toner motor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble. Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Toner cartridge trouble. Developing unit trouble. Replace the toner motor. Replace the toner density sensor. Connector/harness trouble. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the developing unit.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-65
Toner supply operation trouble (C)

PCU Toner motor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble. Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble Toner cartridge trouble. Developing unit trouble. Replace the toner motor. Replace the toner density sensor. Connector/harness trouble. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the developing unit.
F2-71
Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN)

PCU An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-72
Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA)

F2-66
Toner supply operation trouble (M)

Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-73
Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW)

F2-67
Toner supply operation trouble (Y)

Check & Remedy
F2-74
Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)

PCU Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector/harness trouble. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB. Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-70
Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK)

PCU An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB trouble Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-75
Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)

Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-76
Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA)

F3-22
Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble

LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. PCU LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. CLUD2 sensor trouble. Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Check the harness and the connector of LUD2. Replace the lift-up unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-77
Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW)

H2-00
Thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD2)

PCU Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F2-78
Registration image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
PCU Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor sensitivity adjustment trouble). PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Transfer belt dirt, scratch. Replace the image density (registration) sensor. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Clean or replace the transfer belt.
H2-01
Thermister open trouble (TH_LM)

PCU Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
H2-02
Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US)

PCU Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
F3-12
Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble

PCU LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time. CLUD1 sensor trouble Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Check connection of the harness and the connector of LUD1. Replace the lift-up unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
H2-03
Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1)

PCU Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
H3-00
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)

PCU The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Power unit trouble. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the power unit.
H4-00
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)

PCU The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay. Thermister trouble. Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
H3-01
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)

PCU The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble.Harness and connector connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the power unit.
H4-01
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)

PCU The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay. Thermister trouble. Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy
H3-02
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)

Check & Remedy PCU The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Thermister trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Power unit trouble. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the power unit.
Check & Remedy
H4-02
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)

PCU The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay. Thermister trouble. Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H5-01
5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam

PCU A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper remains.) POD1 sensor trouble. Fusing unit installation trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Replace the POD1 sensor. Check the installing position of the fusing unit. Replace the fusing unit. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
H7-10
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2).

PCU The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from stopping a job due to fall in the fusing temperature. Thermister trouble. Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble. Replace the thermister. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.
H4-30
Thermister input circuit trouble (TH_UM)

PCU The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the specified value (50 counts in AD value) within the specified time from turning ON the HL_UM. Thermister trouble. Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble Replace the thermister. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
H7-11
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM)

Check & Remedy
H7-12
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US)

L4-02
Paper feed motor trouble

PCU The lock signal Is not detected within 1 sec when turning ON the paper feed motor when warming up, canceling a jam. Paper feed motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed motor. Replace the paper feed motor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-04
Developing motor trouble (BLACK)

PCU The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the developing motor. Developing motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Developing unit trouble. Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing motor. Replace the developing motor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing motor. Replace the developing unit.
L1-00
Scanner feed trouble

Check & Remedy SCU Scanner feed is not completed within the specified time. Scanner unit trouble. SCU PWB trouble Scanner control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Scanner home position sensor trouble. Scanner motor trouble. Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Replace the scanner unit. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the scanner motor.
Check & Remedy
L4-05
Developing motor trouble (COLOR)

PCU The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the developing motor. Developing motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Developing unit trouble. Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing motor. Replace the developing motor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing motor. Replace the developing unit.
L3-00
Scanner return trouble

Check & Remedy SCU Scanner return is not completed within the specified time. Scanner unit trouble. SCU PWB trouble Scanner control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Scanner home position sensor trouble. Scanner motor trouble. Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Replace the scanner unit. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the scanner motor.
Check & Remedy
L4-06
Transfer unit lift trouble

When separating the primary transfer belt unit, change in the separation position sensor characteristics is not detected within the specified time. PCU Transfer unit position sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble. Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the transfer unit. Install the primary transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer unit position sensor. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the transfer unit separation clutch.
L4-30
MFP fan motor trouble

MFP Fan motor trouble. MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Replace the fan motor. Replace the MFP PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-31
Paper exit cooling fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation. Paper exit cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan. Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB.
L4-11
Shift motor trouble

PCU No change in the shifter home position sensor signal is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. Shift motor trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Shifter home position sensor trouble. Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation. Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter home position sensor. Replace the shift motor. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the shifter home position sensor.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-32
Power source cooling fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the power cooling fan operation. Power cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan. Replace the power cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Check/replace the connector or the harness.
L4-16
Fusing pressure release trouble

Check & Remedy PCU No change in the fusing pressure release sensor signal is detected within the specified time after turning ON the fusing pressure release motor. Fusing pressure release sensor trouble. Fusing pressure release motor trouble. Fusing pressure release level F, R trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the fusing pressure release sensor. Replace the fusing pressure release motor. Replace the fusing pressure release lever F, R. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
L4-35
Fusing cooling fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation. Fusing cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan. Replace the fusing cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-50
Process fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the process fan operation. Process fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the power. Replace the process fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
L8-01
Full wave signal detection error

PCU No full wave signal is detected. PCU PWB trouble Power unit trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L8-02
Full wave signal error

PCU An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is detected. (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or 45Hz or less.)PCU PWB trouble. Power unit trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Power frequency, waveform abnormality. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Check the power waveform.
L4-56
Rear cooling fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the rear cooling fan operation. Rear cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the power. Replace the rear cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-58
Ozone exhaust fan trouble

PCU The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation. Ozone exhaust fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the power. Replace the ozone exhaust fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
L8-20
MFP PWB - Mother board communication error

MFP Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Replace the mother board. Check connection between the mother board and the MFPC PWB. Check the earth line of the main unit. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the mother board.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
PC-L6-10 Polygon motor trouble

PCU The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 7 sec after starting rotation of the polygon motor. Polygon motor trouble. LSU control PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon motor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the LSU. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Personal counter not detected

MFP The personal counter is not installed. The personal counter is not detected. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
U1-01
Battery trouble
Backup SRAM battery voltage fall. MFP 1) Battery life 2) Battery circuit abnormality Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.0V or above.
Trouble content Detail Case 1 Cause Check & Remedy
U2-00
MFP EEPROM read/write error

MFP MFP PWB EEPROM trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM. Replace the MFP PWB. Check the power environment.
U2-23
MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error

MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error. MFP The check sum value for individual data of the communication table and the sender registration does not match. MFP PWB SRAM trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related to the content of check sum error. Since the registered contents are deleted, register the deleted contents again. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy
U2-05
HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency

MFP The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that before turning OFF the power is installed. HDD trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. If there is backup data (export data by device cloning), import it.
Check & Remedy
U2-24
Check & Remedy
MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
MFP MFP PWB SRAM trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
U2-10
MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error

MFP SRAM user index information (user authentication basic data) check sum error. MFP PWB SRAM trouble. Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Transfer the user index information data in the HDD to the SRAM. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Trouble content Detail Cause
U2-30
MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency

MFP Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB. When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. MFP PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted on the new PWB. Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
U2-11
MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error

Check & Remedy MFP MFP PWB EEPROM trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy
U2-50
HDD user authentication data check sum error

MFP HDD trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Initialize the data (one-touch, group, program, etc.) related to the check sum error by turning OFF/ON the power. Since the registered contents are deleted, register the deleted contents again. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFP PWB.
U2-22
MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error

MFP The identifier which controls the communication management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX soft switch is not detected correctly. MFP PWB SRAM trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Since the data of the communication management table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted data again individually. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U2-80
SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error

SCU SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. SCU PWB trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble. Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the SCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data and the adjustment values. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U6-00
PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error

PCU Error when testing the communication line after turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Connector, harness connection trouble. Desk control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble Strong external noises. Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line. Replace the desk control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U2-81
SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error U6-01

SCU SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. SCU PWB trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble. Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the SCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data and the adjustment values. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble

PCU DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time when lift-up operation. DLUD1 sensor trouble. Desk control PWB trouble. Lift unit trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble Replace the DLDU1 sensor. Replace the desk control PWB. Replace the lift unit. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U2-90
PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error

PCU PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. PCU PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble. Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the PCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data and the adjustment values. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U6-02
Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble

PCU DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time when lift-up operation. DLUD2 sensor trouble. Desk control PWB trouble. Lift unit trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble Replace the DLDU2 sensor. Replace the desk control PWB. Replace the lift unit. Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
U2-91
PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

PCU PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. PCU PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble. Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the PCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data and the adjustment values. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U6-09
LCC lift trouble

PCU No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is detected within the specified time after outputting the lift motor ON signal. The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the lift motor is stopped. Lift motor rotation sensor trouble. LCC control PWB trouble Lift mechanism trouble. Lift motor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the sensor and the lift motor. Replace the lift motor rotation sensor. Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the lift mechanism. Replace the lift motor. Harness and connector connection trouble. Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
U6-21
LCC paper transport motor trouble

PCU No change in the paper transport motor rotation sensor signal is detected within the specified time after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal. The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal varies though the paper transport motor is stopped. Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble. LCC control PWB trouble. Mechanism trouble. Paper transport motor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper transport motor. Replace the paper transport motor. Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the mechanism. Replace the paper transport motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U6-10
Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble

PCU Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm abnormality, overcurrent to the motor). Desk control PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk transport motor. Replace the desk control PWB. Replace the desk paper feed motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
U6-22
LCC 24V power trouble

PCU The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit to the LCC. Connector, harness connection trouble. LCC control PWB trouble. Power source unit trouble. Check the connector and the harness in the power line. Replace the power unit. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U6-50
Desk - Main unit combination trouble

PCU Improper combination between the main unit and the desk. Desk control PWB trouble. Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode. Replace the desk control PWB.
U6-20
PCU PWB - LCC communication error

PCU Error when testing the communication line after turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. LCC control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Strong external noises. Improper combination between the main unit and the LCC. Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line. Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy
U6-51
LCC - Main unit combination trouble

PCU Improper combination between the main unit and the LCC. LCC control PWB trouble. Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
: '09/Sep
U7-50
MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error

Communication error between the MFP and the serial vendor. MFP Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications (SIMI26-3). Vendor machine trouble. MFP PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Strong external noises. Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line. Change the specifications of the vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the MFP PWB.
A0-02
SCU PWB ROM error

MFP The firmware version-up is not completed properly by interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc. ROM trouble. Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure again. ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
A0-10
MFP PWB ROM error

MFP Firmware combination error between the MFP and the image ROM (color correction ROM). Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the image ROM (color correction ROM).
U7-51
Vendor machine error

MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor) Serial vendor machine trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the vendor. (XX is the detail code.) Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line.
A0-11
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU)

MFP Firmware combination error between the MFP and the PCU. Check the combination between the MFP and the PCU.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error

Trouble content Detail Cause Check & Remedy SCU SCU PWB trouble (CPT-ASIC trouble) Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-12
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU)

MFP Firmware combination error between the MFP and the SCU. Check the combination between the MFP and the SCU.
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error

Trouble content Detail Cause Check & Remedy SCU SCU PWB trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-15
Conflict DSK boot version

MFP Firmware combination error between the DSK and the Boot. Check the combination between the DSK and the Boot.
A0-01
PCU PWB ROM error

MFP The firmware version-up is not completed properly by interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc. ROM trouble. Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure again. ROM trouble.
A0-20
MFP firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency

MFP Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and the EEPROM data version. Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy
A0-21
PCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency

PCU Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and the EEPROM data version. Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-22
SCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency

SCU Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and the EEPROM data version. Check the combination of the firmware.
MX-3100N
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
Service Manual
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean S: Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate Color items
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Section
Part name
When calling
60 k
120 k
180 k
240 k
300 k
360 k
420 k
480 k
540 k
600 k
660 k
photoconductor section
Drum MC unit Toner reception seal Side seal F/R Cleaner blade MC cleaner rubber Toner filter DV blade DV side seal F/R Developer (Y) Developer (M) Developer (C) Bias pin/Connector
Supply Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts Supply
{ -
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
(P/G No.: [24]-14) (P/G No.: [2]-68) (P/G No.: [22]-37) (P/G No.: [22]-22) (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
Developing section
Toner supply section
Toner cartridges
Mechanical parts Supply
User replacement for every toner empty.
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.)
Section
Part name
When calling
100 k
200 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
600 k
700 k
800 k
900 k
1000 k
1100 k
photoconductor section
Waste toner box Drum MC unit Toner reception seal Side seal F/R Cleaner blade MC cleaner rubber Toner filter DV blade DV side seal F/R Developer Bias pin/Connector
Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts Supply
{ -
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14) (P/G No.: [2]-68) (P/G No.: [22]-37) (P/G No.: [22]-22) (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
Developing section
Toner supply section
Toner cartridges
Mechanical parts Supply
Section
Part name
When calling
100 k
200 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
600 k
700 k
800 k
900 k
1000 k
1100 k
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [2]-35) (P/G No.: [25]-18) (P/G No.: [27]-13) (P/G No.: [26]-1)
LSU section Transfer section
Dust-proof glass Belt cleaning base Primary transfer cleaner blade Primary transfer belt drive gear Primary transfer belt
Mechanical parts Mechanical parts
{ -
{ S
{ S S S S
{ S
{ S S S S
{ S
{ S S S S
{ S
{ S S S S
{ S
{ S S S S
{ S
MX-3100N MAINTENANCE 9 1
Section
Part name
When calling
100 k
200 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
600 k
700 k
800 k
900 k
1000 k
1100 k
Transfer section
Primary transfer belt drive roller Belt CL brush Primary transfer belt follower roller Primary transfer belt tension roller PTC opposed roller Primary transfer roller PTC unit Secondary transfer idle gear Secondary transfer belt follower roller Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer belt drive roller Secondary transfer idle shaft Secondary transfer roller Pro-reg sensor Transfer cleaner seal F/R Primary transfer toner reception seal Secondary transfer backup blade Paper guides Non-contact thermistor Upper thermistor Lower thermistor Upper separation pawl/pawl spring Lower separation pawl/pawl spring Upper heat roller gear Upper heat roller bearing Upper heat roller Lower heat roller bearing Lower heat roller Gears Fusing cleaning roller Fusing cleaning roller bearing Discharge brush Ozone filter Paper exit filter Left cabinet filter Pickup roller Paper feed roller Separation roller Torque limiter Transport rollers Sensors Transport paper guides PS follower roller PS paper dust removal cleaner Transport rollers Sensors Transport paper guides
Mechanical parts
{ { S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
{ { { { { S S { { S S S S S S S S S S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
S { S { { S { { S S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
{ { S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
{ { { { { S S S { S { { S { { S S S S S S S S S S S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
{ { S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
S { S { { S { { S S S S S { { { { { { { S { {
{ { S S S S { { { { { { { S { { (P/G No.: [30]-6) (P/G No.: [30]-21)
(P/G No.: [27]-9, [28]-42) (P/G No.: [20]-502) (P/G No.: [29]-6)
Fuser section
Mechanical parts
{ { { {
(P/G No.: [32]-37) (P/G No.: [32]-46) (P/G No.: [33]-20) (P/G No.: [32]-11, [32]-12) (P/G No.: [33]-100, [33]-101) (P/G No.: [32]-30) (P/G No.: [32]-31) (P/G No.: [32]-32) (P/G No.: [33]-14) (P/G No.: [33]-15)
Filter section Paper feed section
Mechanical parts Mechanical parts
(P/G No.: [47]-40) (P/G No.: [37]-100)
Paper transport section
Mechanical parts
(P/G No.: [26]-58)
Section
Part name
When calling
100 k
200 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
600 k
700 k
800 k
900 k
1000 k
1100 k
Duplex/ Paper exit section
Drive section
Scanner section
RSPF section
Discharge brush Transport rollers Sensors Gears Transport paper guides Gears (Grease) Shaft earth sections (Conduction grease) Belts Sensors Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ CCD Table glass/SPF glass Scanner lamp Rails Drive belt/drive wire Sensors Paper feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller Torque limiter Discharge brush Transport rollers Sensors Belts Gears
Mechanical parts
{ { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
{ { { { { { { { {
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
2.
Details
A. Photoconductor section
When calling Supply Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts { 60 k S S S S 120 k S S S S 180 k S S S S 240 k S S S S 300 k S S S S 360 k S S S S 420 k S S S S 480 k S S S S 540 k S S S S 600 k S S S S 660 k S S S S Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [24]-2)
No.
Part name
2 3 4 5 6 7
Drum MC unit Toner reception seal Side seal F/R Cleaner blade MC cleaner rubber
(P/G No.: [24]-14) (P/G No.: [2]-68)
Monochrome items
When calling Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts Supply Mechanical parts { 100 k S S S S 200 k S S S S 300 k S S S S 400 k S S S S 500 k S S S S 600 k S S S S 700 k S S S S 800 k S S S S 900 k S S S S 1000 k S S S S 1100 k S S S S Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.)
No.
Part name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Waste toner box Drum MC unit Toner reception seal Side seal F/R Cleaner blade MC cleaner rubber
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14) (P/G No.: [2]-68)
5 2 4 5
1)
Open the front cover.
5)
Remove the MC cleaner rubber from the MC cleaner rod. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome).
2)
Remove the waste toner box. Maintenance: Check at every 100K. (Replace as necessary.)
* Be careful to prevent against dirt of the MC cleaner rubber. (Prevent adhesion of the oils or the toner etc.) 6) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. * When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
A B
3) Remove the MC cleaner rod.
7)
PET
Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1position for each color)
4)
Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit. Maintenance: Clean at every call.
8)
Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
PE
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit. If the improvement effect is not obtained, clean again. If the improvement effect is not obtained by cleaning again, replace the MC cleaner rubber to those spare. MX-3100N MAINTENANCE 9 5
9)
Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly, and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove.
* Hold the both ends, rotate twice by hands in the direction shown in the figure. (For adapting the drum to the cleaning blade.)
10) Remove the screws and remove the fixing shaft.
12) Remove the C-ring, lift the hook, and push the drum shaft. Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side until it is caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front section. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). 13) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
1 2
1
* When replacing, apply stearic acid powder to the OPC drum.
* Don't touch the OPC drum surface. (excluding the area of within 1cm from the both ends) * Even if it wrapped with black paper, don't apply a hard pressure. * Apply the stearic acid powder to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). NOTE: Attach the cover so that there is no float on the opposite side of the pawl.
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached surface, and fit with the reference.
00.3mm
00.3mm
00.3mm
00.3mm
17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the DCH lens.
15) Remove the toner receiving seal. Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached surface, and fit with the reference.
Reference line
Reference line
16) Remove the side seal F/R. Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
B. Developing section
When calling Supply 60 k S S S S S S 120 k S S S S S S 180 k S S S S S S 240 k S S S S S S 300 k S S S S S S 360 k S S S S S S 420 k S S S S S S 480 k S S S S S S 540 k S S S S S S Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [22]-37) (P/G No.: [22]-22) (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
No.
Part name
600k
660k
1 2 3 4
Toner filter DV blade DV side seal F/R Developer (Y) Developer (M) Developer (C) Bias pin/Connector
Mechanical parts
S S S S S S
S S S S S S
Monochrome items
When calling Supply 100 k S S S S 200 k S S S S 300 k S S S S 400 k S S S S 500 k S S S S 600 k S S S S 700 k S S S S 800 k S S S S 900 k S S S S 1000 k S S S S 1100 k S S S S Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [22]-37) (P/G No.: [22]-22) (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
No.
Part name
1 2 3 4 5
Toner filter DV blade DV side seal F/R Developer Bias pin/Connector
Mechanical parts
3 4 1
5 5 3
1)
Remove the front cabinet.
5)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. 6) Remove the screws.
3)
Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. * When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A). 7) Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow direction (B).
A B
A B A
4)
8)
Take out the developer.
9)
Remove the cover and the toner filter. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome).
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached surface, and fit with the reference so that the DV side seals F and R are inserted between the DV cover R(A) and the DV blade (B).
00.3mm
0 0.5mm
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
10) Remove the DV blade. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome).
A
12) Insert the new developer. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome).
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached surface, and fit with the reference.
00.3mm 00.3mm
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R. Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K (monochrome). NOTE: When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop developer on the drive section (marked with { ). NOTE: Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this, note the following items. * metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface when transporting developer or removing foreign material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller. * Remove developer in the development unit as well as developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct] Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored bar.)
Magnet roller rear side cored bar
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
C. Toner supply section

Color items
When calling Supply 60 k 120 k 180 k 240 k 300 k 360 k 420 k 480 k 540 k 600 k 660 k Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.)
No.
Part name
Toner cartridges
Monochrome items
When calling Supply 100 k 200 k 300 k 400 k 500 k 600 k 700 k 800 k 900 k 1000 k 1100 k Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.)
No.
Part name
Toner cartridges
1)
2)
Lift the lock lever, and pull the toner cartridge out slowly and horizontally. Maintenance: Replacement is made by the user at every toner empty.
D. LSU section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean S: Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts { -
100 k { S
200 k { S
300 k { S
400 k { S
500 k { S
600 k { S
700 k { S
800 k { S
900 k { S
1000 k { S
1100 k { S
1 2
Dust-proof glass Cleaning base
1)
5)
Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod. Maintenance: Replace at every 100K.
2)
Remove the waste toner box.
3)
Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
4)
Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port and move it forward and backward 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof glass. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
PET
PET
E. Transfer section
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [25]-18) (P/G No.: [27]-13) (P/G No.: [26]-1)
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts -
100 k {
200 k S S S { { { { { S S {
300 k S { S { { S {
400 k S S S { { { { { S S {
500 k {
600 k S S S { { { { { S S S { S { { S {
700 k {
800 k S S S { { { { { S S {
900 k S { S { { S {
1000 k S S S { { { { { S S {
1100 k {
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Primary transfer cleaner blade Primary transfer belt drive gear Primary transfer belt Primary transfer belt drive roller Belt CL brush Primary transfer belt follower roller Primary transfer belt tension roller PTC opposed roller Primary transfer roller PTC unit Secondary transfer idle gear Secondary transfer belt follower roller Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer belt drive roller Secondary transfer idle shaft Secondary transfer roller Pro-reg sensor Transfer cleaner seal F/R Primary transfer toner reception seal Secondary transfer backup blade
(P/G No.: [27]-9, [28]-42) (P/G No.: [20]-502) (P/G No.: [29]-6)
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
18 7 1 3 2
18
6 8 9 9 9 5 9 4 8 13 14 20 12 16 11
15 17
10
17
1)
5)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum positioning unit.
NOTE: Failure to complete this step may damage the primary transfer belt.
A B
2)
6)
Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer unit.
3)
Open the right door.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position. 7) 4) Loosen the blue screw. Remove the screws, and remove the maintenance cover.
8)
Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it.
11) Remove the parts.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.
9)
Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner blade. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
10) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt drive gear. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
: '09/Sep 15) Clean the belt CL brush. Maintenance: Clean at every 200K.
13) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side and put the transfer unit straight. Remove the primary transfer belt. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
16) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the primary transfer belt tension roller (B). Maintenance: Clean at every 200K. [Installing method] Make the primary transfer belt into triangle. Attach the primary transfer belt to the transfer frame.
2
Lot number (Front surface of the belt)
A
17) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the primary transfer roller. NOTE: When installing, be careful not to bring the primary transfer belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and the gears. Use care not to touch the primary transfer belt surface with bare hand.
2
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
When installing, put the unit so that the lot number specified on the front surface of the belt is on the rear side. 14) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 200K.
18) After replacing the primary transfer belt, apply Kynar. NOTE: Do not touch the primary transfer belt with bare hands. Be careful not to scratch or fold it. a) Place the primary transfer unit on a flat surface with the top surface upward, and apply Kynar (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to all the top surface of the belt.
21) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary trasnfer idle gear (A). Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
NOTE: When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface, use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and not to attach a foreign material. NOTE: When installing the cleaner unit, rotate the primary transfer belt so that the section where Kynar was applied comes to the blade edge section, and install it. b) After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of background copy on A3 paper.
22) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
19) Remove the PTC unit. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. * When replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC counter.
23) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
2
20) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
24) Remove the secondary transfer belt. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
1 3
1 2
25) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the secondary transfer idle shaft. Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
26) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the secondary transfer roller. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
27) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
F. Fuser section
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [32]-37) (P/G No.: [32]-46) (P/G No.: [33]-20) (P/G No.: [32]-11, [32]-12) (P/G No.: [33]-100, [33]-101) (P/G No.: [32]-30) (P/G No.: [32]-31) (P/G No.: [32]-32) (P/G No.: [33]-14) (P/G No.: [33]-15)
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts {
100 k { S S
200 k { S S S S S S S S S S S
300 k { S S S
500 k { S S
600 k { S S S S S S S S S S S S
700 k { S S
900 k { S S S
1100 k { S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Paper guides Non-contact thermistor Upper thermistor Lower thermistor Upper separation pawl/pawl spring Lower separation pawl/pawl spring Upper heat roller gear Upper heat roller bearing Upper heat roller Lower heat roller bearing Lower heat roller Gears Fusing cleaning roller Fusing cleaning roller bearing Discharge brush
5 2 5 5 3
6 8 1 6 9 6 4 15 6 7
8 10 14
11 13 10 14
1)
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the non-contact thermistor. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
2)
Remove the blue screw. Release the lock, and remove the fusing unit.
6)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the upper thermistor. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
2 2 1 1
3)
Clean the paper guide. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K. 7) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
4)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover. 8) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the Lower thermistor. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
: '09/Sep Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide. 13) Open the paper guide.
9)
10) Remove the screws, and remove the stay.
14) Remove the fusing cleaning roller and the fusing cleaning roller bearing. Maintenance: Replace at every 100K. NOTE: When installing or removing, be careful not to scratch the heat roller.
11) Remove the upper separation pawl and the pawl spring. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
NOTE: Make sure to install the CL roller in correct position when reassemble the Fusing unit after the maintenance, otherwise the performance of the CL roller will be insufficient and may cause cleaning failure. [Correct position and wrong position of the CL roller] <Correct> The CL roller is on the lower heat roller.
12) Check the discharge brush. Maintenance: Check at every 100K. <Wrong> The CL roller is under the lower heat roller. * Normal cleaning performance may not be acquired in this state.
15) Remove the lower separation pawl and the pawl spring. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
19) Remove the screws and remove the lamp holder. Remove the upper heater lamp. NOTE: When attaching, fit the convex section of the upper heater lamp with the hole in the cover.
16) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. 20) Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp.
17) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. 21) Remove the screws and the clamp. Remove the screws and the lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp. NOTE: When installing, wire so that the harness of the lower heat lamp not come in contact with the boss (A).
18) Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.
22) Remove the screws to open the fusing unit.
26) Remove the lower heat roller unit.
23) Remove the upper heat roller unit. 27) Remove the stopper from the lower heat roller, and remove the lower heat roller bearing. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
24) Remove the stopper from the upper heat roller, and remove the upper heat roller gear and the upper heat roller bearing. Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. 28) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the lower heat roller. Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
25) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the upper heat roller. Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
G. Filter section
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide. Block/Item No. (Only the replacement parts are described.) (P/G No.: [47]-40) (P/G No.: [37]-100)
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts
100 k S S {
200 k S S {
300 k S S {
400 k S S {
500 k S S {
600 k S S {
700 k S S {
800 k S S {
900 k S S {
1000 k S S {
1100 k S S {
1 2 3
Ozone filter Paper exit filter Left cabinet filter
2 2
H. Paper feed section

No.
Part name
100 k { { { { {
200 k { { { { {
300 k { { { { {
400 k { { { { {
500 k { { { { {
600 k { { { { {
700 k { { { { {
800 k { { { { {
900 k { { { { {
1000 k { { { { {
1100 k { { { { {
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pickup roller Paper feed roller Separation roller Torque limiter Transport rollers Sensors Transport paper guides
2 5
1 4 6 6
1 5 6
2 1 6 2
6 4 6 5 3 5 3 6 4
1)
Remove the pickup cover.
5)
Remove the paper guide.
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller (B). Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
6)
Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller (b). Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
b
A
3)
Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
7)
Remove the separation roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
4)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
I. Paper transport section

No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts { {
100 k { S { {
200 k { S { {
300 k { S { {
400 k { S { {
500 k { S { {
600 k { S { {
700 k { S { {
800 k { S { {
900 k { S { {
1000 k { S { {
1100 k { S { {
1 2 3 4 5
PS follower roller PS paper dust removal cleaner Transport rollers Sensors Transport paper guides
3 1 4
4 3
J. Duplex/Paper exit section

No.
Part name
100 k { {
200 k { {
300 k { {
400 k { {
500 k { {
600 k { {
700 k { {
800 k { {
900 k { {
1000 k { {
1100 k { {
1 2 3 4 5
Discharge brush Transport rollers Sensors Gears Transport paper guides
3 1
3 3
3 2 1 2
1 1 2 3 3 2 3 3
2 3
K. Drive section
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts
100 k
200 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
600 k
700 k
800 k
900 k
1000 k
1100 k
1 2 3 4
Gears (Grease) Shaft earth sections (Conduction grease) Belts Sensors
1 (FLOIL G313S) 2 (FLOIL GE-676)
1 (HANARL FL955R)
L. Scanner section
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts { { {
100 k { { {
200 k { { {
300 k { { {
400 k { { {
500 k { { {
600 k { { {
700 k { { {
800 k { { {
900 k { { {
1000 k { { {
1100 k { { {
1 2 3 4 5 6
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ CCD Table glass/SPF glass Scanner lamp Rails Drive belt/drive wire Sensors
2 4
4 2
6 5 6 5
1 5 1 1
M. RSPF section
No.
Part name
When calling Mechanical parts { { { {
100 k { { { {
200 k { { { {
300 k { { { {
400 k { { { {
500 k { { { {
600 k { { { {
700 k { { { {
800 k { { { {
900 k { { { {
1000 k { { { {
1100 k { { { {
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Paper feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller Torque limiter Discharge brush Transport rollers Sensors Belts Gears
8 2 4 7 6
7 6
7 6 3 6 7 5 7
1)
Open the paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the paper guide.
3)
Remove the holder guide, and remove the paper feed roller and the pickup roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
4)
Remove the cover and remove the separation roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
3.
Other related items
d. Drum cartridge system counters

Code DK Content The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches 100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the drum (K) reaches 840K. The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the drum (C) reaches 840K. The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the drum (M) reaches 840K. The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the drum (Y) reaches 840K. Print job Enable/ Disable Enable
A. Maintenance timing display

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the messages and the counters is shown blow.
(1)
(Maintenance timing) (Frameless)

DC Print job Enable/ Disable Enable
a. Maintenance counter
Code TA Content When the maintenance counter (total) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM2638 is print stop). When the maintenance counter (total) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing). When The maintenance counters (color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is print stop). When The maintenance counters (color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing). WhenThe maintenance counters (both of total and color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is print stop). When The maintenance counters (both of total and color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing).
Enable
DM
Enable
DY
Enable
CA
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the drum) clear). e. Developer cartridge system counters
Code Content The developer print counter (K) reaches 100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the developer (K) reaches 840K. The developer print counter (C) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the developer (C) reaches 840K. The developer print counter (M) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the developer (M) reaches 840K. The developer print counter (Y) reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the developer (Y) reaches 840K. Print job Enable/ Disable Enable
AA
Enable VK
VC
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear). b. Transfer unit system counters
Code TK1 TK2 Content The primary transfer unit print counter reaches 200,000 sheets. The secondary transfer unit print counter reaches 300,000 sheets. Print job Enable/ Disable Enable Enable
VM
Enable
VY
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
(2)
[Maintenance timing] (Framed)
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit, days of use of the transfer unit) clear). c. Fusing unit counter
Code FK1 Content The fusing unit print counter reaches 200,000 sheets. Print job Enable/ Disable Enable
a. Maintenance counter
Code TA Content The maintenance counters (total) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable. The maintenance counters (color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable. The maintenance counters (both of total and color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable. Print job Enable/ Disable Disable
CA
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use of the fusing unit) clear).
AA
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
(3)
[Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)

Content Waste toner full Print job Enable/ Disable Disable
Code -
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by opening/close of the front door.
MX-3100N [10] FIRMWARE UPDATE
Service Manual
MAIN BODY
*Firmware types
1.
Outline
Flash ROM1 ALL ICU (PROG1)
A. Cases where update is required

ROM update is required in the following cases: 1) 2) 3) 4) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine. When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair to the machine. When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be repaired.
IMG-ASIC SCU PCU FAX1 1K FINISHER INNER FINISHER LCC A4 DESK PUNCH
ICU (PROG2)
B. Notes for update

(1) Relationship between each ROM and update
OPTION
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware

There are following methods of update of the firmware. 1) 2) 3) 4) Firmware update using media Firmware update using FTP Firmware update using Web page Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown)
CONTENTS The following All the contents ANIME BOOT MAIN CONFIG ESCP FONT UNI CODE XIO FONT PROFILE SPDL LANG GRPH WEB HELP MAIN IMG DATA ROM SCU (MAIN) PCU (MAIN) FAX1 (MAIN) FINISHER_1K (MAIN) FINISHER_INNER (MAIN) LCC_A4 (MAIN) DESK (MAIN) PUNCH (MAIN)
2.
Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media

For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu
Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu
+
USB memory
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.sfu
The machine detects the media and executes the program automatically.
*1: Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand. The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-3100N FIRMWARE UPDATE 10 1
(1)
1) 2)
Firmware update procedure from the USB memory

Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware into the main unit. Enter the SIM49-01. Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to the update screen.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 &/26(
5)
The firmware update executes by SIM49-01.
Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO] becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected firemware.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7( &21),* ,&80$,1 ,&8%2270 ,&8%2276 /$1*8$*( *5$3+,& 6/,67 3&8%227 3&80$,1 '(6.%227 '(6.0$,1 $/&&%227 $// &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(

),50:$5(83'$7( 6 (
* The number of key changes according to the number of the sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. * If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE STORED ON [OK]" is displayed on the screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen appears. 3) Current version number and the version number to be updated will be shown for each firmware respectively.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7( &21),* ,&80$,1 ,&8%2270 ,&8%2276 /$1*8$*( *5$3+,& 6/,67 3&8%227 3&80$,1 '(6.%227 '(6.0$,1 $/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 $5(<28685(" &/26(
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6 &$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not displayed. 6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7( &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+ &/26(
2.
<(6
12
(;(&87(

Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power. Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded successfully. 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 &/26(
4)
Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears. If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and cannot be pressed.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 ),50:$5(83'$7( &21),* ,&80$,1 ,&8%2270 ,&8%2276 /$1*8$*( *5$3+,& 6/,67 3&8%227 3&80$,1 '(6.%227 '(6.0$,1 $/&&%227 $// &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 &855(1783'$7('72 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7( (55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+ ,&803&86&8
2.
* Press the selected key again to release the selection. * Press [ALL] key to select all items.
* When the power supply is turned off due to a black out etc. while updating or when the update terminated abnormally, a part of the main program stored in HDD may be damaged and may not booted normally. In this case, the emergency update described later must be executed.
B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1
10.36.112.83
Machine 3
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP Client 10.36.101.52

C. Firmware update using the Web page
An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update the firmware. 1) 2) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears. Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the [Browse] key and select the firmware for the update. 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
10.36.112.83
/:0
"Close the browser and open again to display latest information." will be displayed. 5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3)
After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." appears.
D. Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown)

The HDD of this machine stores the main program along with the sophisticated variations. When, therefore, the HDD breaks down, or when the HDD must be replaced with another HDD, or when the main program is damaged by turning OFF the power during the firmware updating, the firmware (main program) must be rewritten into the HDD by the following procedures. It is called the emergency update. [Conditions where the emergency update is required] The emergency update is required in the following cases: 1) "Main Program Error" is displayed on the panel. It means that the data are destroyed and that replacement of the HDD is not required. The problem can be settled by execution of the emergency update only. 2) "HDD Trouble (E7-03)" is displayed on the panel. It means a HDD breakdown. The HDD must be replaced with a new one, and the emergency update must be executed. * When U2-05 (HDD/EEPROM/SRAM abnormality) or U2-50 (HDD data abnormality related to IMS) occurs, execute SIM16 only, and there is no need to execute the emergency update. [Environment necessary for the emergency update] 1) 2) The MFP with the HDD where the firmware is rewritten The USB memory which stores the firmware for the emergency upgrade. File name: emupdate_p2.sfu * The firmware must be stored in the root folder of the USB memory. [Emergency update procedures] 1) 2) Insert the USB memory which stores the firmware for the emergency update into the USB port. Turn on the main power. The firmware for the emergency update in the USB memory is automatically recognized to start reading the USB memory. It takes about 1 minute, and the booting animation is displayed during this period. 3) Check to confirm that "EmergencyUpdateMode" is displayed on the panel. After that, the process is automatically executed.
5)
Check the update result. When writing the program both to the HDD and to the Flash ROM is normally completed, the following message is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode Update Succeeded
If writing to either of the HDD or the Flash ROM is failed, the following message is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode Update Failed
In this case, if Update Failed is displayed, it may the HDD has been broken down probably. Replace the HDD with a new one, and execute the emergency update again. 6) 7) 8) 9) Turn OFF the main power. Remove the USB memory from the USB port. Turn ON the main power. Check the system operates normally.
[Note] It takes about 6 minutes for the emergency update. Never turn OFF the main power until the emergency update is completed. When the emergency update is completed, be sure to remove the USB memory for the emergency update. The machine does not boot normally with the USB memory inserted.
EmergencyUpdateMode
4)
Check the procedure. When the process is going on normally, the following message is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode Updating ....10%
1.
MX-3100N
PTC UNIT RSPF UNIT

SPPD1 SGS 1TNFD FUFM RCFM SPPD2 SCOV SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2 STMPS (OPTION) SPLS1 SOCD
PTC_HEATER
2TC
PTC_HV
DERIVERY UNIT
DSW_F
WTNM
POD1
Block diagram
TONER_K UNIT
SPRM SPPD5 SPWS DVCRUM_K DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y There is a standards setting model Only Japan SPFC RSPF PWB SRRC
TONEIR_C UNT
TONER_M UNIT
TONER_Y UNIT
SPPD3 SPED
POD2
POFM_F
1TUD_K
1TUD_CL
OPTION
FAX1
TFD2
POFM_R
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
HPOS
OSM
HLPCD
SCANNER UNIT
TM-DRV PWB DHPD_K KEYBORD KEYBORD CARD READER TNM_K 1TURC TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y
Option Option
AUDITOR PNC
PRM
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
POM
FUM
ADUM_L
Option
FUSER UNIT
DVM_K CL RRM
DHPD_CL DVM_CL
USB CONV PWB USB CONV PWB USB CN PWB
ORS_LED
TH1_FU CL INVERTER PWB DL_K USB HUB PWB CCD PWB DL_C DL_M DL_Y
HL1_U OCSW SCNC PWB ORS-PD TOUCH PANEL LVDS PWB MIM INVERTER PWB MHP S OPE PWB LCD
OPERATION UNIT
TH2_FU
HL2_L
DV_K UNIT
TCS_K MOTHERHUB PWB TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y
DV_C UNIT
DV_M UNIT
DV_Y UNIT
TH3_FU
HL3_U
REGIST SENSOR UNIT
HL4_U
REGS_F
or
DVTYP_K DVTYP_C DVTYP_M DVTYP_Y
MOTHER PWB
PS UNIT
REGS_R
PPD1 DSW_R ITC MOTHER PCU PWB CSS1 PSFM MFPFM HDD MFPC PWB CSS2 MC OZFM PSFM2
POWER SW PWB
PCSS
PPD2
RIGHT DOOR UNIT
MX-3100N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1

OPTION
CCFM FAX2 CLUM1 CLUM2
APPD1
POD3
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT
LSU UNIT
Service Manual
APPD2
TFD3
PAPER FEED 1 UNIT PAPER FEED 2 UNIT
LD PWB
LSUSS
RD I/F PWB CPUC1 CPUC2 CPFD1 CPFD2 HL PWB
OPTION
COINVENDER
LD_K PWB
DSW_ADU
LD_C PWB CPFC CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2 DESK LCC FIN INNER FIN 1K LSU CNT PWB DH_DESK DCPS DH_DESK LD_Y PWB TH1_LSU LD_M PWB
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
MPWD CPED1 PFM CPED2
MPLD1
MPED CSPD1 CSPD2
MPUC
MPFD DSW_C DRIVER MAIN PWB
MTOP1
MPF S AC PWB MSW
DHSW PGM
BD_K PWB
TH/HUD_M
MTOP2
MPGS
WH PWB
AC IN OPTION
Standards : Only Japan
DH1
(1)
SATA2 HDD
USB HOST TYPE-A CN (FRONT)
LCD Pannel LVDS
SCANNER Control System (SCU)
SATA CN
Compact Flash SATA-IDE Bridge
USB Device TYPE-B CN
USB HOST TYPE-A CN (REAR) SYSTEM Memory DDR2 DIMM SLOT SPD
USB2.0 Device Controller SATA Interface 0 USB2.0 Host Controller SATA Interface 1
B. MFP CONTROLLER PWB
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
DIP SWITCH
USB SWITCH
DDR/ DDR2 IF
HDD ASIC
RTC RTC Controller PCI-Express Interface (4Lane) UART Interface (x10)
SDRAM Cont roller
SDRAM 64Mbx2
PCU
LAN JACK RJ45 GbE MAC

PCIExpress Interface (4lane) I2C 1 Cont roller I2C 2 Cont roller Local-Bus Interface LCDC
Giga BitEther PHY
GMII
SOC MPC8533E
FPDLINK Transmitt er
Local Bus Controller PCIExpress Interface (4lane) Programmable Interrupt Controller
D-SUB9 RS232C
RS232C LEVEL CON.
FAX (1st)
256Kbit EEPROM
FPDLINK Receiver
Board to Board Connector
I2C1 Controller
I2C2 Controller
UART
FPDLINK Transmitt er
LVDS Receiver
LSU Controller (LSUC)
CPLD
PCIExpress Interface SCAN LSU

ACRE
5V FAN
FAN Controller
PCI Express Clock Generater

Local Bus
MFP ASIC
ROM
FLASH
Video In Out
DDR/DDR2 Memory Controlller
SRAM 4Mbit
FAX (2nd) CN
PROGROM & OPT FLASH DIMM
I2C
Local Memory DDR2 DIMM SLOT
PIC Micon.
MFPC
Mother
(2)
SATA2 HDD
USB HOST TYPE-A CN (FRONT)
LCD Pannel SCANNER Control LVDS SystemSCU)
: '09/Sep
MX-2301N
SATA CN
Compact Flash SATA- IDE Bridge
USB Device TYPE-B CN
USB HOST TYPE-A CN (REAR) SYSTEM Memory DDR2 DIMM SLOT SPD
USB2.0 Device Controller SATA Interface USB2.0 Host Controller SATA Interface
DIP SWITCH
USB Switch
LAN JACK RJ45

RTC RTC Controller
BitEther PHY GbE MAC

PCIExpress Interface (4lane)
I2C 1 Controller I2C 2 Controller
GMII
PCI-Express Interface (4Lane) UART Interface (10
DDR/ DDR2 IF
HDD ASIC
SDRAM Controller
PCU
SOC
Local-Bus Interface LCDC
D-SUB9
LEVEL CON.
MPC8533E
FPDLINK Transmitter
Local Bus Controller
PCIExpress Interface (4lane)
FAX (1st)
Boad to Board Connector
I2C1 Controller
FPDLINK Receiver
UART

Programable Interrupt Controller
256Kb EEPROM
I2C2 Controller
FPDLINK Transmitter
LVDS Receiver
LSU Controller LSUC)
CPLD
PCIExpress Interface SCAN LSU
5V FAN
FAN Controller
ACRE
PCI Express Clock Generater

Local Bus
MFP ASIC
ROM
FLASH
Video In Out
DDR/DDR2 Memory Controlller
SRAM 4M
FAX (2nd) CN
BOOTPROGR OM Mem. BOOTPROGR OM Mem. BOOTPROGR OM Mem. BOOTPROGR OM Mem. BOOTPROGR OM Mem.
PROGRAM & OPT FLASH DIMM
I2C
Local Memory DDR2 DIMM SLOT
PIC Micon.
MFPC
Mother
C. PCU PWB
DC Motor Control DV Motor BK(DVM_K) DV Motor CL(DVM_CL) I2C Bus HV MC / TC unit IC30 EEPROM (64kbit) Fuser unit HL control HL_UM/LM/US/UW FLASH ROM (16Mbit)
DC Motor Control Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
IC46 or IC47 RESET IC

AddressBus[20:0]
Not Mount
3-wired serial
X1 Xtal 19.6608MHz IC31 SRAM (1Mbit)
IC44 Spread Spectrum
DataBus[15:0]
Stepping Motor control Pout Motor(POM) / ADU Motor(ADUML) / Shifter Motor(OSM) / Resist Motor(RRM) / PSF Motor(PFM) / Fuser Motor(FUM) / Toner Motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)
FAN Motor Control PS FAN (PSFM) / Ozone FAN (OZFM) / PoutFAN (POFM_F/POFM_R) Drum Lamp (DL_K/C/M/Y)
DC Power Supply
CLOCK
FW I2C Bus CRUM CRUM_K/C/M/Y
IC28 PMC ASIC PWM
Sensor Input POD1/ HLPCD APPD1 / APPD2 / 1TUD_K / 1TUD_CL Drum Lamp Open Detect DLOPEN_Y/M/C/K HV Error Detect MC_BK_ERR /CL /PTC_ERR
Sensor Input Coin Vendor (Optional) CV_CLCOPY / CV_COPY
IC39 CPU H8S/2373 IC35 I/O GA
IC34 I/O ASIC
Load control Output
To MFPC Via Mother I2C Bus
UART
MPGS / CPUC1 / CPUC2/ PCSS / CPFC / LSUSS1 MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC
PTC HEATER Load Control Output Coin vendor (Optional) IC10 D/A Conv (TCS/REGS cont) IC22 / IC24 / IC25 MUX HC151x3

Sensor Input CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 / CPED1 / MPFD / TFD2 / 1TNFD / WENDD / W INID Motor Lock Detect POFM_LD1-2 / FAN_LD2-3 / DVM_CL_LD / DVM_K_LD /CPFM_LD / FUM_LD /OZFM_LD Fuser Thermistor open detect THOPEN_UM / LM / US PTC Heater Open Detect PTCHT_OPEN Option detect RES_DSK_in / RES_LCC_in / RES_INS_in Fuse open detect (OEM model only) TNCRU_C/M/Y/K RD I/F PWB MUX HC151 Sensor Input PPD2 Sensor Input MPFD / DSW_ADU / TFD3 / MPLD / MTOP1 / MTOP2 / MPED IC21 Analog MUX Analog Input Temp/Hum sensor(TH_M/HUD_M) LSU Thermistor(TH1_LSU) DV detector(DVTYP_C/M/Y/K) Multi-bypass tray width sensor(MPWD) Analog Input Fuser Themistor(TH_UM/LM/US) Toner Detector(TCS_K/C/M/Y) Process Cont.CL sensor(PCS_CL) Process Cont.BK & Resist sensor(REGS_F/R)
To LSU Via Mother
UART
Sensor Input CPFD1 / CPFD2 / HPOS / PPD1 / DHPD_CL / DHPD_K / POD3 / POD2 / DSW_F / DSW_R / DSW_C / CLUD1 / CLUD2 / CSPD1 / CSPD2 /
Optional
FAN Motor Process Cooling Fan (PCSFM/PCSFM2)
LCC
UART
Syncronous Motor Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
FINISHER
UART
DESK
UART
DC Motor Lift Up Motor (CLUM1 / CLUM2)
D. SCANNER CONTROL PWB

3.3V 1.8V CCD-F (Machine side) 10V
3line color CCD TCD2716ADG
Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr
Image data
AFE
AFE_CS
BUFFER AD_CLK
SCNcnt
line buf
Oscillator
16 (8Mx16bit)
line buf 16 (8Mx16bit)
BUFFER
RGB Rx FPD Link AFE_CSTG

35bit
clk
SS
32bit bus
SCN ASIC
mother
SH, 1, others
Oscillator
Timing generator
5V/.33V
10V/5V/3V 3.3VPD Two serial systems 1.5V
Image data
LVDS IC Tx 28bit
CS3 12 10V 12 5V 5 3.3V

CTRL_A10V CTRL_A5V CTRL_A3.3V
IPD/IDOCC
CS4 1.2V 3.3VPD
Mirror .Moto
MOTOR DRIVER
CopyLamp MHPsensor
RSPF unit
MOTOR DRIVER HC151 CPU H8S/2373
BUSBUF powdown
CS2
SRAM
CS0
F-ROM (DIMM)
SEL_A/B/C Sensors
E2PROM
uart, others
CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT) or LVDS PWB (8.1 inch mono)
IO ASIC
LCDs detection PNL_SEL0 PNL_SEL1 PNL_SEL2 PNL_SEL3
HC151
LCD_SKT LCDs detection Touch panel
CCFT_CPU
INV PWB
/CCFT Vcc REG nLCD_DISP (ON/OFF) Rx 28bit
8.5 inch LCD
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
Original size sensor

NINFO_LED NPWRSW POW_LED WU_LED NWU_KEY 5V2 Buzzer LED matrix /BZR
PDSEL0 PDSEL1 PDSEL2 PD 5V2
LED drive circuit
TxD0 P.D. O.C. P.U. TxD[1] O.C. P.U. CTS[1] Schmit Inv. P.U. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D. RTS[1] P.D. O.C. P.D. Schmit Inv.
P.U. RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
RxD0 Schmit Inv.
nPCU_TxD
I/O port
PCU_DSR
I/O port
PCU_DTR
TxD1 P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. P.U. TxD RxD P.U.
P.U. RxD
SCN Cnt
nTxD_SCN Schmit Inv. TxD SCK P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv. P.U. nRxD_SCN Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
RTS_SCN
TRANS_DAT
TxD[2] P.D.
RxD1
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. P.U. P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. P.D.
LSU ASIC
O.C.
E. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
RxD[2]
SCK1
SCK_LSU
LSU
A[4:0]
Schmit Inv.
CPU H8S/23 73
O.C. P.U.
P.D. CTS_SCN CTS[2] Schmit Inv.
TxD2 P.D. O.C. P.U. P.U. TxD O.C. P.U. CPU I/ O M30843FWGP O.C. P.U. O.C. P.U. I/ O O.C. P.U. RxD P.U. O.C. P.U. O.C. P.U. TxD O.C. P.U. I/O P.U. P.U. O.C. P.U. P.U. O.C. P.U. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv.
P.U. RxD
P.U.
D[15:8]
I/O ASIC PD65892GC

O.C
TxD_FIN
CPU H8S/2373
RxD2
RxD_FIN
P.U. nTxD_PIC Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D. nRxD_PIC
DTR_FIN
TxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN
RxD[PIC]
FINISHER (Optional)
PIC
Schmit Inv. P.U. CLR_PIC O.C P.U. REQ_PIC O.C. REQ[PIC] O.C Schmit Inv. CLR[PIC]
TxD3
O.C P.U.
TxD_DSK
RxD3
RxD_DSK
CPU H8/3684
DTR_DSK O.C. P.U. I/O P.U. P.U. O.C.
HDD ASIC
DSR_DSK O.C. P.U. RxD O.C. P.U. P.U. TxD O.C. P.U. I/O P.U. P.U. O.C. P.U. P.U. O.C.

DESK (Optional) Mother
O.C. P.U.
TxD4
TxD_LCC
MFPC
RxD4
RxD_LCC
CPU H8/3687
TxD_FAX(D) TxD_FAX(D)+ TxD_FAX(D)RxD_FAX(D) RxD_FAX(D)+ RxD_FAX(D)TxD_FAX(CS)+ TxD_FAX(CS)RxD_FAX(CS) RxD_FAX(CS)+ RxD_FAX(CS)LVDS TxD_FAX(CS)
DTR_LCC O.C. P.U. I/O P.U. P.U. O.C.
TxD[3] RxD[3] TxD[4] RxD[4]
DSR_LCC O.C. O.C.
LCC (Optional)
A[4:0]
I/O GA TxD PIC RxD CPU SH7706
New ASIC
P.U. DTR_FAX(D) Schmit Inv. P.D. O.C Schmit Inv. P.U. P.U. O.C. Schmit Inv. DTR_FAX(CS) P.U. O.C. P.D. DSR_FAX(CS) P.D. P.D. DSR_FAX(D)
RTS[3] CTS[3] RTS[4] CTS[4]
D[15:8]
EPM240T100C5N
PCU
2nd FAX (same as 1st) (Optional)
1st FAX (for FG Model)
O.C
Schmit Inv.
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301 T5AH/250V Voltage Generation + 5Vo + 5VL
AC PWB
D101 F101
no-mounting
A1
~
12A/125V
+
N/F
F102 T1AH/250V
VR1
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN
F1
L A3 VR3
15A 250V
F. AC power line diagram (120V)
N T2.0AH/250V F3 Z101
FW Generating Circuit
F103 T8AH/250V
nomounting
VR2 WH-L WH-N
Voltage Generation +24V1 +24V2 +24V3 +24V4 +24V5 +12V +5Vn +3.3V
L1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION HL PWB

L2
option
INT24V1
RY1
/HL_PR
WH-SW
OPTION
10W
WH PWB OPTION
CCD
WH-N SCN
7W
SCN unit OPTION
WH-L
RY1
NC TD1 T1 T2 SSR1 1 2 6 GND 6 HLOUT_UM 10W MAIN UNIT 4 GT 1 T2 TD2 G 4 SSR2 1 2 GND 6 HLOUT_US T1 T2 TD3 G 4 SSR3 1 2 GND 6 HLOUT_LM T1 T2 TD4 G 4 SSR4 1 2 GND HLOUT_UW

MAIN UNIT OPTION
10W DESK
GND
NO
24V2
DESK OPTION
drawer
HL_SUB THERMOSTAT TS_LM
HL_LOW
HL_UW
10W LCC
LCC OPTION
THERMOSTAT TS_US
HL_MAIN 10W or 14W LSU
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
LSU OPTION
FUSING UNIT
DC POWER SUPPLY Reactor 10mH 3A

T3.15AH/250V D101 F101 Voltage Generation + 5Vo + 5VL F301
AC PWB
no-mounting
~
T6.3AH/250V
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
MAIN POWER SW
A2
AC IN
F1
L A3 VR3 F102 T3.15AH/250V
T10AH/250V
F2
N Z101 F3 T2.0AH/250V VR2 WH-L WH-N T2.0AH/250V nomounting F4 FW Generating Circuit F103 T5AH/250V Voltage Generation +24V1 +24V2 +24V3 +24V4 +24V5 +12V +5Vn +3.3V
G. AC power line diagram (200V)
T10AH/250V
L1 RY1 INT24V1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION HL PWB

L2 /HL_PR
WH-SW
OPTION
10W CCD
WH PWB OPTION SCN unit OPTION
WH-N SCN
7W
WH-L
RY1
NC TD1 T1 GT 4 SSR1 1 2 6 GND 6 HLOUT_UM T2 10W MAIN UNIT 1 T2 TD2 G 4 SSR2 1 2 GND 6 HLOUT_US T1 T2 TD3 G 4 SSR3 1 2 GND 6 HLOUT_LM T1 T2 TD4 G 4 SSR4 1 2 GND HLOUT_UW

MAIN UNIT OPTION
10W DESK
GND
NO
24V2
DESK OPTION
drawer
HL_SUB THERMOSTAT TS_LM
HL_LOW
A1
HL_UW
10W LCC
LCC OPTION
THERMOSTAT TS_US
HL_MAIN 10W or 14W LSU
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
LSU OPTION
FUSING UNIT
1 1
INT24V1 P-GND INT24V1 24V3 5VN 5VNPD P-GND TM DRIVER PWB 24V2 OSM INT24V1 INT24V1 24V1 5VN RDSW P-GND PSFM DRIVER MAIN PWB FDSW FET D-GND INT24V2 INT24V1 P-GND INT24V2 P-GND DVM_CL INT24V2 P-GND INT24V2 24V2 P-GND INT24V2 AC PWB MC PWB INT24V2 P-GND PFM 1stTC PWB 2ndTC PWB DVM_BK P-GND INT24V2 RD I/F PWB 5VN 5VN 5VNPD D-GND N_HL(SUB) N_HL(WARM) N_HL(LOW) N_HL(MAIN) HL PWB PSM FUM POM ADULM 5VNPD PCU PWB HL_PR HL(MAIN) HL(SUB) HL(WARM) HL(LOW) TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y PRM 24V3 L
: '08 Oct 15
CPFM
INT24V2 P-GND
F201
3.3V D-GND 5VN D-GND 12V 24V1
F203 24V3 P-GND P-GND FW D-GND 5V_LD
FUSE
H. DC power line diagram (120V)
FUSE
24V3 P-GND P-GND FW
24V2 INT24V2 /INT_CNT INT24V1 P-GND
P-GND INT24V1 /INT_CNT INT24V2 24V2
F202
24V2
FUSE
INT24V1 HDD LSUSS_B 5V_LD 5V_LD LD_BK LSU PWB D-GND 24V3 P-GND PM 24V P-GND CCD PWB A10V A5V A3.3V D-GND INVERTOR PWB LD_C LD_M LD_Y 5V_LD INT24V1 LSUSS_C option LVDS PWB 3.3V D-GND 5VN 5VO 3.3V D-GND KEY OP PWB 5VN D-GND ORS PD PWB
12V 5VN D-GND D-GND 5V_LD
24V3 P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND D-GND 24V3 P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND D-GND MOTHER PWB

3.3V D-GND 5VN 5VL 5VL 5VO D-GND 12V 24V3 P-GND 24V3 P-GND 12V 5VN 3.3V D-GND 5VO 24V3 P-GND 12V 5VN 3.3V D-GND 5VO 24V P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND FAX D-GND FINISHER USB I/F PWB SCAN CNT PWB 24V5 P-GND 5VN D-GND LCC D-GND USB CONVERSION PWB 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND option DESK
3.3V D-GND 5VN 5VL 5VL 5VO D-GND 12V 24V3 P-GND
24V_EXT P-GND 3.3V_EXT D-GND
LCD PWB
24V 5VL 5VO 3.3V D-GND
24V P-GND
CL INVERTOR PWB
CL
MFPC PWB
24V1
ORS LED PWB
24V P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND
F205
FUSE
24V5 P-GND 5VN
24V_EXT P-GND 5V_EXT AVCC 5VPD D-GND 5V D-GND
24V_EXT P-GND 5V_EXT AVCC 5VPD D-GND
RSPF UN option CARD READER option
D-GND
F204
FUSE
24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND
PSU
D-GND
1 1
INT24V1 P-GND INT24V1 24V3 24V3 5VN 5VNPD P-GND PRM TM DRIVER PWB 24V2 OSM INT24V1 24V1 RDSW P-GND 5VNPD DRIVER MAIN PWB FDSW FET D-GND INT24V2 INT24V1 P-GND INT24V2 P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK INT24V2 P-GND INT24V2 2ndTC PWB P-GND INT24V2 AC PWB MC PWB INT24V2 P-GND PFM 1stTC PWB P-GND INT24V2 RD I/F PWB 5VN N_HL(SUB) N_HL(WARM) N_HL(LOW) 5VN 5VNPD D-GND N_HL(MAIN) HL PWB PSFM PSM FUM POM ADULM PCU PWB HL_PR HL(MAIN) HL(SUB) HL(WARM) HL(LOW) 5VN INT24V1 TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y L
: '08 Oct 15
CPFM
INT24V2 P-GND
F201
F203
FUSE
FUSE
24V3 P-GND P-GND FW
24V3 P-GND P-GND FW
I. DC power line diagram (230V)
D-GND 5V_LD
24V2 INT24V2 /INT_CNT INT24V1 P-GND
P-GND INT24V1 /INT_CNT INT24V2 24V2
F202
24V2
24V2
FUSE
INT24V1 HDD LSUSS_B 5V_LD LD_BK LSU PWB D-GND 24V3 P-GND PM 24V P-GND A10V A5V A3.3V D-GND CCD PWB INVERTOR PWB LD_C LD_M LD_Y 5V_LD INT24V1 LSUSS_C option LVDS PWB 3.3V D-GND 5V_LD 5VN 5VO 3.3V D-GND KEY OP PWB 5VN D-GND ORS PD PWB
12V 5VN D-GND D-GND
5V_LD
24V3 P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND D-GND MOTHER PWB

24V3 P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND D-GND 24V3 P-GND 12V 5VN 3.3V D-GND 5VO 24V3 P-GND 12V 5VN 3.3V D-GND 5VO 24V P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND FAX 5VO D-GND FINISHER USB HUB PWB SCAN CNT PWB 24V5 P-GND 5VN D-GND LCC D-GND D-GND 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND option DESK USB CONVERSION PWB OPTION D-GND USB I/F PWB 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND
24V_EXT P-GND 3.3V_EXT D-GND
LCD PWB
24V 5VL 5VO 3.3V D-GND
24V P-GND
CL INVERTOR PWB
CL
MFPC PWB
24V1
ORS LED PWB
24V P-GND 5VN 3.3V D-GND
F205
FUSE
24V5 P-GND 5VN
24V_EXT P-GND 5V_EXT AVCC 5VPD D-GND 5V D-GND
24V_EXT P-GND 5V_EXT AVCC 5VPD D-GND
RSPF UN option CARD READER option
D-GND
F204
FUSE
24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND
PSU
D-GND
2.
(AC CORD)
AC PWB
(DC main harness PA2)
CN2(B5P-VH-B) D-GND 1 D-GND 2 5VO 3 5VL 4 5VL 5 MSW CN1( B2P3 - VH-B) 3 L_DC 2 NC 1 N _D C CN3(B03P-VH-B) 3. 3V 1 3. 3V 2 D-GND 3 CN6(B03B-PASK-1) DCCNT1 1 NC 2 DCCNT2 3
A. Power supply section
CN1(B03P-VL ) 1 L_I N 2 NC 3 N _I N CN 6( B2P3-VH - R) 1 N _WH 2 NC 3 L_WH
(MSW harness) MSW- Nout 1 PS-250(RED) MSW- Lout 1 PS-250 (RED) MSW- Li n 1 PS-25 0 MSW- Ni n 1 PS- 250
CN10 1 D-GND 2 D-GND 3 5VL 4 5VL 5 5VO 6 3.3V 7 5VN 8 12V 9 24V3 10 P-GND B10P-VH
Actual wiring chart
(AC-HL harness PA2) (AC-DC harness)
CN5(B03P-VL-E) 1 L_HL 2 NC N _HL 3
HL PWB
TO LCC (11-23) TO INSERTOR (11-24)
CN1 L_HL 1 NC 2 N_HL 3 B03P-VL(WH)
CN2(B03P-VL-K) MSW- Nout 1 NC 2 MSW- Lout 3 CN3 ( B03P- VL- R) MSW - Li n 1 NC 2 MSW - Ni n 3 CN4 ( B3P4-VH-R) L_DC 1 NC 2 NC 3 N _DC 4 CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) 24V2 1 NC 2 NC 3 D-GND 4 3 5VNPD 2 D-GND 1 INT5V B05B-PH-K-S
MOTHER PWB
CN15 4 n DCCNT1 5 n DCCNT2
(AC-WH harness (1))

TO LCC (11-23)
CN4(B6P-VH-B) 5VN 1 5VN 2 5VN 3 5VN 4 D-GND 5 D-GND 6
PS-187 L_WH
WH _SW
N AM E 5V L 5V O 5V N 24V 1 24V 2 24V 3 24V4 24V5 MFP FAX OTHER ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE ,D LC C ESK FI N I SH ER
L_WH
DC PWB
CN4 INT5V 1 D-GND 3 5 5VNPD B26B-PHDSS
PS-187
CN5(B04P- VH-B) 12V 1 12V 2 NC 3 NC 4 CN7(B8P-VH-B) FW 1 P-GND 2 P-GND 3

TO 11-11
PCU PWB
CN1 WH-L 1 2 NC WH-N 3 B2P3-VH-R

SCANNER UNIT
TO INSERTOR (11-24) TO LCC (11-23)
WH PWB
(SCN-WH harness (2)) EL2PIN P R 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) WH-L(SCAN) 1 1
P 2 1
P-GND NC(P-GND) P-GND P-GND NC(P-GND)
4 5 6 7 8
CN2 WH-N(SCAN) NC WH-L(SCAN)
(AC-HL harness PA2) R EL 2 PIN WH-N(SCAN) 2 WH-L(SCAN) 1
WH
1 2 3 B2P3VH-BL
TO 11-11
CN2 1 24V1 2 P-GND 3 24V2 4 P-GND 5 24V3 6 D-GND 7 12V 8 D-GND 9 5VN 11 3.3V 12 FW 10 NC(D-GND) B12B- XL
CN3 WH-N(DESK1) NC WH-L(DESK1) B2P3-VH
1 2 3
WH
JPN:OPTION EX100V:OPTION EX120V:OPTION EX200V:OPTION
CN8(B7P-VH-B) NC(24V1) 1 24V 1 2 24V 2 3 24V 3 4 24V 3 5 24V 4 6 24V 5 7
TO LCC (11-23) TO INSERTOR (11-25)
PSFM2 PSFM
OZFM
SMR-3 2 3 1
SMP-3 2 3 1
CN5 23 P-GND 22 PSFM2_LD 21 PSFM2_V
CN4 WH_N(LSU)
J PN:STANDARD EX100V:OPTION EX12 0V: OPTION EX200V:OPTION
WH_N(DESK/LCC)
NC
To 11-23
SMP-3 3 2 1
SMR-3 3 2 1
15 13 11
P-GND PSFM_LD PSFM_V
WH_L(DESK/LCC)
WH_L(LSU)
1 2 3 4 5
B4P(5-3)-VH
(Ozone fan)
1 2 3 4 SMP-4
1 2 3 4 SMR-4
12 14 16 18
0ZFM_V /0ZFM_CNT P-GND OZFM_LD
CN5 WH_CNT 1 NC 2 24V3 3 B03B-PH-K-R
19 WH_CNT 20 24V3 B24B-PHDSS
DSW-R 24V1 24V(RDSW) PS-187-2V 1 2
(Upper main harness PA2)
INTCNT
B. Front section
DSW-F
(HL I/F harness PA2)

1 2 1 2
24V(RDSW) PS-187 24V(FDSW) SPS-51T-187
EL2P 24V(RDSW) 24V(FDSW)
TO 11-23 (DC main harness PA2)
CN16 24V1 1 2 24V(RDSW) 3 24V(RDSW) 4 24V(FDSW) B4P-VH CN3 1 5VNPD 2 P-GND 3 INT24V1 5 I NT24V2 6 P- GND INT24V1in 4 7 /INT_CNT B7P-VH-B
AC PWB
CN8 3 24V2 B7P-VH-B
I NT24V2 P- GND INT24V1in N,C / IN T_CNT 24V2 24V2 B7P-VH-B
1 2 3 4 5 7 6
DCPS
CN2 24V2 3 B12B-XL
PRM
TM-DRV PWB
CN13 20 22 24 26 PRM_A PRM_B PRM_/A PRM_/B
(Fusing pressure release motor)
P 5 4 3 2 1
SM-5pin_N 24V3 PRM_A PRM_B PRM_/A PRM_/B
R 5 4 3 2 1
P 1 3 5 7 9 S 1 3 5 7 9
DF1B-24DE 24V3 PRM_A PRM_B PRM_/A PRM_/B
CN6 1 24V3 PRM_A 8 PRM_B 4 PRM_/A 6 PRM_/B 2 B10B-PNDZS
CN6 PRM_A 9 PRM_B 5 PRM_/A 7 PRM_/B 3 B10B- PNDZS
(Fusing pressure
11 13 15 15
HLPCD release detection) 1 5VN 2 HLPCD 3 D-GND GP1A73 179228-3 5VN HLPCD D-GND 11 13
28 30 32
5VN HLPCD D-GND
PCU PWB
TMN (Waste toner motor)

17 19 WTNM_1 WTNM_2 17 19
P 1 2
SL2PIN WTNM_1 WTNM_2
R 1 2
11 13
WTNM_1 WTNM_2
(Waste toner

21 23 1TNFD D-GND 21 23
1TNFD full detection) 1 1TNFD 2 D-GND 6-179228-2
7 9
1TNFD D-GND
Machine cooling fan (80 FAN)
1 2 3 P
/RCFM_V RCFM_LD P-GND SM-3PIN
1 2 3 R
/RCFM_V 25 23 RCFM_LD 5 P-GND B32B-PHDSS
(SCN-Mother harness P2)

P
CARD READER (OPTION)
R 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
SM6P /C_CARD /C_SEL /C_CLOCK /C_DATA 5V D-GND
14 16 18 20 22 24
/C_CARD /C_SEL /C_CLOCK /C_DATA 5V D-GND
14 16 18 20 22 24
R 1 2 3 4 5 6
SM-6pin /C_CARD /C_SEL /C_CLOCK /C_DATA 5V D-GND
P 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
/C_CARD /C_SEL /C_CLOCK /C_DATA 5V D-GND
SCNcnt PWB
300W R 6 300W (AWG18) 4 (AWG16) 1 (AWG18) 2 (AWG18) 5 (AWG16) 3 (AWG18) N-HL(LOW) 3 300W L-HL(SUB) 5 810W N-HL(SUB) 2 510W B03P-VL(BK) N-HL(MAIN) 1 480W L-HL(UM) N-HL(UM) N-HL(US) L-HL(MAIN) 4 780W
YL
HL UW
BK 780W (AWG16)
(Fusing harness PA2) WH 300W (AWG18)

P Drawer RWZ 6 N-HL(UW)
D1.25-M3
D1.25-M3
VL-3pin 2 2 1 1
TS MAIN
HL PWB
WH 480W (AWG18) 510W WH (AWG18) CN2 3 1 2
C. Fusing unit section
480W 510W
HL MAIN
HL SUB
(TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2) YL-2pin 1 1 2 2 P R
D1.25-M3
D1.25-M3
TS SUB
WH 300W (AWG18) CN3 2 3 1
3 R
BK 810W (AWG16) (TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2)
(TS-HL_LOW connecting harness P2)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N-HL(UW) L-HL(US) N-HL(LM)
D1.25-M3
CN4 /HL_PR HL_OUT_UW HL_OUT_LM HL_OUT_US HL_OUT_UM D-GND INT24V1 B07B-PASK-S
YL
TS LOW
B03P-VL(RD)
D1.25-M3
300W
HL LOW
R 1 2 3
YL
RTH(MAIN)
(Fusing harness PA2) (HL I/F harness PA2)
Non-contact
R 1 2
BK WH BL
P 1 2 3
SM-3pin(BK) TH_UM_IN TH_UMCS_IN D-GND
RTH(SUB)
Contact
R 1 2
TH_UMCS_IN
P 1 2
SM-2pin TH_US_IN D-GND
CN13 INT24V1 D-GND HL_OUT_UW HL_OUT_LM HL_OUT_US HL_OUT_UM /HL_PR B32B-PHDSS
4 6 8 10 12 14 16
RTH(LOW)
RCZR 9PIN
P 1 2
SM-2pin TH_LM_IN D-GND
Contact
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-9 B-8 B-7 B-6 B-5 B-4 B-3 B-2 B-1
TH_UM_IN D-GND TH_US_IN D-GND TH_LM_IN D-GND POFM_CNT D-GND
P 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
DF1B-20DE N,C TH_UM_IN D-GND TH_US_IN D-GND TH_LM_IN D-GND POFM_CNT D-GND TH_UMCS_IN
E 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
CN12 TH_UM_IN 8 D-GND 6 TH_US_IN 4 D-GND 2 TH_LM_IN 9 D-GND 7 POFM_CNT 5 D-GND 3 TH_UMCS_IN 1 B30B-PHDSS

A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 RCZR 10PIN A-10 A-9 A-8 A-7 A-6 A-5 A-4 A-3 A-2 A-1 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
Fuser unit I/F Drawer
PCU PWB
Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement
Fuser unit I/F
Drawer
A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
1
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9
2 4 5 6
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9
6
View from Body side (Main body side)
View from Fuser unit side (Fusing side)
Separation electrode UN_K (PTC heater harness CJ)

1 2 3 4 P 1TUD_K D-GND 5VNPD PTC_HEAT SM-4pin 1 2 3 4 R
1TUD_K
CN12 27 1TUD_K 28 D-GND 29 5VNPD PTC_HEAT 30 B30B-PHDSS
Transfer separation sensor BK
1TUD_K 1 D-GND 2 5VNPD 3 GP1S73 179228-3
Heater electrode
PTC B2P-VH
D. High voltage section
PTC UN
SRA-21T-3
PTC electrode
(PTC-shield harness P2) PTC PS-110(WH)
SRA-21T-4 2-TC PS-187
2nd TC PWB
2-TC PS-187(BLUE)
(Secondary transfer separation harness)
INT24V2 D-GND /TC_DATA /TC_CLK /TC_LD /HV_REM PTC_ERR /PTC_CLK B8B-PASK
CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN14 INT24V2 2 4 D-GND 6 /TC_DATA 8 /TC_CLK /TC_LD 10 5 /HV_REM PTC_ERR 7 /PTC_CLK 9 B30B-PHDSS
MC-K PS-187 GB-K BS-K GB-C BS-C GB-M BS-M GB-Y BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y (SPRING) GB-Y (SPRING) BS-M (SPRING) GB-M (SPRING) BS-C B8B-PASK (SPRING) GB-C (SPRING) BS-K (SPRING)
(MC-BK harness)
MC-K PS-250(RED) GB-K INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR
CN1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(Paper feed main harness PA2)
CN6 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17
INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR B32B-PHDSS
(MC interface harness)
(MC interface harness)
MC PWB
MC-C PS-187 MC-M PS-187 MC-M PS-187 MC-Y PS-187
MC-Y PS-250
(MC harness PA2)

MC-CL PS-250 B9B-PASK
INT24V2 D-GND 1TC-REV 1TC-Y-CC 1TC-M-CC 1TC-C-CC 1TC-K-CC HV_REM N,C
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PCU PWB

(Paper feed main harness PA2) (1TC output harness PA2)
1TC-K FPS-187 1TC-C FPS-187 1TC-M FPS-187 1TC-Y FPS-187
1TC-K SPS-01T-187 1TC-C SPS-01T-187 1TC-M SPS-01T-187 1TC-Y SPS-01T-187
1st TC PWB
CN1 N,C HV_REM 1TC-K-CC 1TC-C-CC 1TC-M-CC 1TC-Y-CC 1TC-REV P-GND INT24V2 B9B-PASK
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
separation 1TUD_CL (Transfer sensor CL)
1TUD_CL 1 D-GND 2 5VNPD 3 GP1S73 179228-3 Separation electrode UNCL
(Transfer belt separation harness PA2)
P 1 2 3
SM-3Pin 1TUD_CL D-GND 5VNPD
R 1 2 3
CN13 1TUD_CL 31 D-GND 29 27 5VNPD B32B-PHDSS
(Process drive harness PA2)

1 9 11 5 1 2 3 4 D-GND 1 2 3 4
CN15 5VN /CRM_K_DT /CRM_K_CK

5VN /CRM_K_DT /CRM_K_CK
(CRUM harness PA2)
E. Main drive unit section
DVM_K (DV motor-BK) 1 INT24V2 2 P-GND /DVMK_CK 4 /DVMK_D 5 DVMK_LD 7 NC 3 NC 6 B07B-PASK-S CN11 1 INT24V2 3 P-GND 5 /DVMK_CK 7 /DVMK_D 9 DVMK_LD D-GND 5VN /CRM_C_DT /CRM_C_CK D-GND 5 6 7 8 2 4 6 8 10 5VN /CRM_M_DT /CRM_M_CK D-GND INT24V2 P-GND /DVMC_CK /DVMC_D DVMC_LD 3 13 15 7 5 6 7 8 5VN /CRM_C_DT /CRM_C_CK D-GND
CRUM(BLACK) 5VN 2 4 /CRM_K_DT 3 /CRM_K_CK D-GND 1 TSR-04V-K CRUM(CYAN) 2 5VN 4 /CRM_C_DT 3 /CRM_C_CK D-GND 1 TSR-04V-K
DVM_CL (DV motor-CL) INT24V2 1 P-GND 2 /DVMC_CK 4 /DVMC_D 5 DVMC_LD 7 NC 3 NC 6 B07B-PASK-S
1TURC
11 12 24V3 1TURC
(Transfer separation clutch)
R 1 2
SM-2Pin 24V3 1TURC
P 1 2
2 10 12 6
9 10 11 12
5VN /CRM_M_DT /CRM_M_CK D-GND
9 10 11 12
CRUM(MAGENTA) 2 5VN 4 /CRM_M_DT 3 /CRM_M_CK 1 D-GND TSR-04V-K
13 14 15 D-GND 5VNPD 5VN /CRM_Y_DT /CRM_Y_CK 16 DHPD_CL 17 D-GND 18 5VNPD B18B-PHDSS 4 14 16 8 D-GND B16B-PHDSS
DHPD_K
(Phase detection BK) DHPD_K (Process drive harness PA2) DHPD_K 1 D-GND 2 5VNPD 3 (Phase detection cL) GP1S73 179228-3 DHPD_CL DHPD_CL 1 D-GND 2 5VNPD 3 179228-3 GP1S73
13 14 15 16 P
5VN /CRM_Y_DT /CRM_Y_CK D-GND SM-18Pin
13 14 15 16 R
CRUM(YELLOW) 5VN 2 4 /CRM_Y_DT 3 /CRM_Y_CK 1 D-GND TSR-04V-K
1 2 3 4 5 6
TNM_K
PCU PWB
CN14 24V3 TNM_Y_/B TNM_Y_B TNM_Y_/A TNM_Y_A P-GND TNM_K_/B TNM_K_B TNM_K_/A TNM_K_A
1 2 3 4 5 6
TNM_C
22 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 P-GND P-GND 12 TNM_M_A 14 TNM_M_/A 16 TNM_M_B 18 TNM_M_/B 20 TNM_C_A 24 26 TNM_C_/A TNM_C_B 28 TNM_C_/B 30 B30B-PHDSS
CN3 24V3 12 TNM_Y_/B 1 TNM_Y_B 3 5 TNM_Y_/A 7 TNM_Y_A P-GND 9 TMK_/B 17 TMK_B 15 TMK_/A 13 TMK_A 11 19 P-GND P-GND 2 TMM_A 10 TMM_/A 8 TMM_B 6 4 TMM_/B TMC_A 20 18 TMC_/A 16 TMC_B 14 TMC_/B B20B-PNDZS
1 2 3 4 5 6
TNM_M
TM-DRV PWB
CN5 +24V +24V TMK_A TMK_/A TMK_B TMK_/B CN4 +24V +24V TMC_A TMC_/A TMC_B TMC_/B CN2 +24V +24V TMM_A TMM_/A TMM_B TMM_/B CN1 +24V +24V TMY_A TMY_/A TMY_B TMY_/B
1 2 3 4 5 6
TNM_Y
DV un
(Discharge lamp BK)
DL_BK (DV interface harness)
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 9 D-GND 2
(DL/DV main harness)
CN10 3 D-GND /DL_BK 1
BLACK
10 /DL_BK 1
(DV harness PA2)
1 D-GND NC 2 /DL_BK 3 53254-0310 5VN TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK D-GND DVTYP_K TNCRU_K 5VN QR/P8-8P (SPRING)
F. DL & DV section
TCS_K (Toner control sensor BK) 24V3 2 TCS_K 3 D-GND 4 TSG_BK 1 51021-0400 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P TO 11-3 8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 5VN TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK D-GND DVTYP_K TNCRU_K 5VN 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10 5 7 11 9 13 15 17 19 5VN TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK D-GND DVTYP_K TNCRU_K 5VN
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 (BIAS harness A) C (BIAS harness B) BS-K SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110

DL_C (Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness)
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H D-GND 2 9 23 21 D-GND /DL_C 10 /DL_C 1
CYAN
(DV harness PA2)
1 D-GND NC 2 /DL_C 3 53254-0310 8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 5VN TCS_C D-GND TSG_C D-GND DVTYP_C TNCRU_C 5VN 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10 25 27 31 29 33 35 37 39
(Toner control sensor CYAN)
TCS_C 24V3 TCS_C D-GND TSG_C 51021-0400
2 3 4 1
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 (BIAS harness A) C (BIAS harness B) BS-C SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110 5VN TCS_C D-GND TSG_C D-GND DVTYP_C TNCRU_C 5VN QR/P8-8P (SPRING) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 9 D-GND 2 10 /DL_M 1
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P TO 11-3
5VN TCS_C D-GND TSG_C D-GND DVTYP_C TNCRU_C 5VN
PCU PWB
4 2 D-GND /DL_M
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA)
MAGENTA
(DV harness PA2)
D-GND 1 2 NC /DL_M 3 53254-0310

(DV interface harness)
TCS_M
(Toner control sensor MAGENTA)

5VN TCS_M D-GND TSG_M D-GND DVTYP_M TNCRU_M 5VN QR/P8-8P (SPRING) 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P TO 11-3 8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 5VN TCS_M D-GND TSG_M D-GND DVTYP_M TNCRU_M 5VN 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) (DV interface harness)
24V3 TCS_M D-GND TSG_M 51021-0400
2 3 4 1
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C (BIAS harness A) (BIAS harness B) BS-M SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
6 8 12 10 14 16 18 20
5VN TCS_M D-GND TSG_M D-GND DVTYP_M TNCRU_M 5VN
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 2 D-GND 9 10 /DL_Y 1
24 22
D-GND /DL_Y
YELLOW
(DV harness PA2)
1 D-GND NC 2 /DL_Y 3 53254-0310
TCS_Y
(Toner control sensor YELLOW)
24V3 TCS_Y D-GND TSG_Y 51021-0400
2 3 4 1
8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1
5VN TCS_Y D-GND TSG_Y D-GND DVTYP_Y TNCRU_Y 5VN
3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10 5VN TCS_Y D-GND TSG_Y D-GND DVTYP_Y TNCRU_Y 5VN QR/P8-8P (SPRING) 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P TO 11-3
26 28 32 30 34 36 38 40
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C (BIAS harness A) (BIAS harness B) BS-Y SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
B40B-PADSS-1
(1)
(LSU-BD harness PA)

4 3 2 1 DT_K1+ DT_K1CN3 3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND S06B-XASK-1 2 1 4 3 5 6 +5V +5V CN1 50 48 5V_LD 5V_LD CN7 1 2
G. LSU section
(LSU-LD harness P2)
BD PWB D-GND n BD D-GND 5VN B4B-PH-K-S
LSU TH1 D-GND LSUTH1 NC NC B4B-PH-K-S 4 3 2 1
CN1 1 D-GND 2 n BD 3 D-GND 4 5VN 5 D-GND 6 LSUTH1 7 NC B7B-PH-K-S
(MOTHER-LSU harness PA2)

CN4 1 8 5 7 2 4 3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND
(Polygon motor harness PA)

CN2 6
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
DT_K1+ DT_K1GND n SH_K1 GND n SH_K2 GND n LDERR_K DT_K2+ DT_K2GND VREF_K1 VREF_K2 n ENB_K 14 12 10 9 7 5 3 17 8 6 4 15 13 11 D-GND /SH_K1 D-GND /SH_K2 D-GND /LDERR_K DT_K2+ DT_K2D-GND VREF_K1 VREF_K2 /ENB_K
11 9 13 4 6 8 10 12 5 3 7 16 14 18
POLYGON MOTOR /BREAK 1 POLYCLK 2 /LOCK 3 /START 4 5 P-GND 24V1 6 B6B-PH-K-S /BREAK POLYCLK 5 /LOCK 4 /START 3 P-GND 2 24V1 1 B6B-PH-K-S /SH_C1 CN4 5VLD D-GND /SCK_LSU D-GND /TRANS_DAT D-GND /RST_DAT
LSU_ASIC_RST
LD PWB
D-GND /ENB_C
n SH_YMC1 GND n SH_YMC2 GND DT_C1+ DT_C1GND n LDERR_C VREF_C1 VREF_C2 DT_C2+ DT_C2GND n ENB_YMC D-GND /SH_C2 D-GND DT_C1+ DT_C1D-GND /LDERR_C VREF_C1 VREF_C2 DT_C2+ DT_C2-
40 42 44 46 23 21 25 20 24 22 17 15 19 38 49 47 45 43 50 48 46 41 39 37 44 42 40 35
LSU PWB
/TRANS_RST JOBEND_INT TH_LSU /PCU_TRG VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_C_P VSYNC_C_N VSYNC_M_N VSYNC_M_P VSYNC_Y_P VSYNC_Y_N S20B-PHDSS 38 36 34 33 31 29 32 30 28 DT_M1+ DT_M1D-GND /LDERR_M VREF_M1 VREF_M2 DT_M2+ DT_M2D-GND
1 2 4 3 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6 5VLD 12 D-GND 14 /SCK_LSU 15 D-GND /TRANS_DAT 13 18 D-GND 16 /RST_DAT 10 LSU_ASIC_RST /TRANS_RST 11 JOBEND_INT 17 20 TH_LSU 19 /PCU_TRG VSYNC_K_N 28 VSYNC_K_P 27 VSYNC_C_P 26 VSYNC_C_N 25 VSYNC_M_N 24 VSYNC_M_P 23 VSYNC_Y_P 22 VSYNC_Y_N 21 B28B-PHDSS

DT_M1+ DT_M1GND n LDERR_M VREF_M1 VREF_M2 DT_M2+ DT_M2GND 47 45 49 32 36 34 41 39 43 DT_Y1+ DT_Y1GND n LDERR_Y VREF_Y1 VREF_Y2 DT_Y2+ DT_Y2GND 35 33 37 26 30 28 29 27 31 26 24 22 27 25 23 20 18 16 DT_Y1+ DT_Y1D-GND /LDERR_Y VREF_Y1 VREF_Y2 DT_Y2+ DT_Y2D-GND R P 1 1 2 2 SM-2Pin
MOTHER PWB
(MOTHER-LSU connecting (LSUSS-BK harness PA2) harness PA2)
CN19 INT24V1 NC /LSUSS_B
1 2 3
P R 1 1 2 2 SM-2Pin
LSUSSBK
19 LDCHK_1 21 LDCHK_2 501190-5017 LDCHK_1 1 LDCHK_2 2 501571-5007 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
PCU PWB
CCFM_V CCFM_LD P-GND CCFM_CNT B7B-PH-K-S
4 7 6 5
P R 1 1 2 2 3 3 SM-3Pin
CCFM
FG
FG
CN5 CH0_N CH0_P D-GND D-GND CH1_N CH1_P CH2_N CH2_P D-GND D-GND CLCLK_N CLCLK_P CH3_N CH3_P D-GND D-GND CH4_N CH4_P ECLK_LSU_N ECLK_LSU_P D-GND D-GND HSYNC_LSU_P HSYNC_LSU_N S24B-PHDSS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CN5 CH0_N 23 CH0_P 24 22 D-GND 21 D-GND CH1_N 19 CH1_P 20 CH2_N 17 CH2_P 18 16 D-GND 15 D-GND 13 CLCLK_N 14 CLCLK_P CH3_N 11 CH3_P 12 10 D-GND D-GND 9 CH4_N 7 CH4_P 8 5 ECLK_LSU_N 6 ECLK_LSU_P 4 D-GND 3 D-GND 1 HSYNC_LSU_P HSYNC_LSU_N 2 B24B-PHDSS
(2)
: '09/Sep
MX-2301N
(LSU-BD harness PA) BD PWB D-GND n BD D-GND 5VN B4B-PH-K-S 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 5 6 CN1 1 D-GND n BD 2 3 D-GND 4 5VN 5 D-GND LSUTH1 6 NC 7 B7B-PH-K-S CN3 3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND S06B-XASK-1 CN4 1 3 5 7 2 4
MOTHER-LSU harness PA2 3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND
LSU TH1 D-GND LSUTH1 NC NC B4B-PH-K-S 4 3 2 1 (Polygon motor harness PA) CN4 5VLD D-GND nSCK_LSU D-GND nTRANS_DAT D-GND nRST_DAT
LSU_ASIC_RST
POLYGON MOTOR 1 /BREAK POLYCLK 2 /LOCK 3 4 /START 5 P-GND 24V1 6 B6B-PH-K-S (LSU LD harness P2L)
CN2 6 /BREAK 5 POLYCLK 4 /LOCK /START 3 2 P-GND 1 24V1 B6B-PH-K-S
LSU PWB
DT_C1(C)+ DT_C1(C)D-GND DT_C2(Y)+ DT_C2(Y)D-GND /ENB_C /ENB_K

LDCHK_2(N,C) LDCHK_1(N,C)
nTRANS_RST JOBEND_INT TH_LSU nPCU_TRG VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_C_P VSYNC_C_N VSYNC_M_N VSYNC_M_P VSYNC_Y_P VSYNC_Y_N S20B-PHDSS
1 2 4 3 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6 5VLD 12 D-GND 14 nSCK_LSU 15 D-GND 13 nTRANS_DAT 18 D-GND 16 nRST_DAT 10 LSU_ASIC_RST 11 nTRANS_RST 17 JOBEND_INT 20 TH_LSU 19 nPCU_TRG 28 VSYNC_K_N 27 VSYNC_K_P 26 VSYNC_C_P 25 VSYNC_C_N 24 VSYNC_M_N 23 VSYNC_M_P 22 VSYNC_Y_P 21 VSYNC_Y_N B28B-PHDSS
MOTHER PWB
LD PWB
(MOTHER-LSU connecting harness PA2) (LSUSS-BK harness PA2) P R R P 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 SM-2Pin SM-2Pin
CN19 INT24V1 NC /LSUSS_B
1 2 3
LSUSSBK
PCU PWB
P R 1 1 2 2 3 3 SM-3Pin
DT_K1(K)+ DT_K1(K)D-GND DT_K2(M)+ DT_K2(M)D-GND 5V_LDD VREF_K1 VREF_C1 VREF_M1 VREF_Y1 /LDERR_Y /LDERR_M /LDERR_C /LDERR_K /SH_C2(Y) D-GND /SH_C1(C) D-GND /SH_K2(M) D-GND /SH_K1(K) D-GND 5V_LD S32B-PHDSS SRA-21T-3
CN1 21 23 25 5 7 3 18 24 27 29 31 15 17 19 1 26 20 12 8 10 14 22 28 6 4 16 13 11 9 30 32 2
CN7 1 DT_C1(C)+ 3 DT_C1(C)5 D-GND 7 DT_C2(Y)+ 9 DT_C2(Y)11 D-GND 13 /ENB_C 15 /ENB_K 17 LDCHK_2(N,C) 19 LDCHK_1(N,C) 21 DT_K1(K)+ 23 DT_K1(K)25 D-GND 27 DT_K2(M)+ 29 DT_K2(M)31 D-GND 33 5V_LDD 2 VREF_K1 4 VREF_C1 6 VREF_M1 8 VREF_Y1 10 /LDERR_Y 12 /LDERR_M 14 /LDERR_C 16 /LDERR_K 18 /SH_C2(Y) 20 D-GND 22 /SH_C1(C) 24 D-GND 26 /SH_K2(M) 28 D-GND 30 /SH_K1(K) 32 D-GND 34 5V_LD S34B-PHDSS SRA-21T-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CN5 CH0_N 23 CH0_P 24 D-GND 22 21 D-GND CH1_N 19 CH1_P 20 17 CH2_N 18 CH2_P 16 D-GND 15 D-GND 13 CLCLK_N CLCLK_P 14 CH3_N 11 CH3_P 12 D-GND 10 D-GND 9 CH4_N 7 CH4_P 8 ECLK_LSU_N 5 6 ECLK_LSU_P 4 D-GND 3 D-GND 1 HSYNC_LSU_P 2 HSYNC_LSU_N B24B-PHDSS
CCFM_V CCFM_LD P-GND CCFM_CNT B7B-PH-K-S
4 7 6 5
CCFM
FG
FG
CLUD1 (CS1 lift-up detection)
5VNPD 1 CLUD1 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3 7 8 9 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 5VN DSW_C D-GND 31 30 29 13 15 17 4 5 6 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 5VN DSW_C D-GND
(Paper remaining detection for CS1)
(Paper feed UN harness CS1 PA2)

10 11 12 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 9 8 7 13 15 17 31 30 29 12 11 10 6 5 4 7 9 11 7 9 11
PHNR-12-H + BU12P-TR-P-H 5VNPD 3 CLUD1 2 1 D-GND
(Cassette SW harness PA2)
P 1 3 5
DF1B-32DE 5VNPD CLUD1 D-GND
S 1 3 5
CN9 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 31 30 29
5VNPD CLUD1 D-GND 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 5VN DSW_C D-GND
present detection for CPED1 (Paper CS1)
H. Paper feed unit section
CS1 PAPER FEED UN
CPFD1 (CS1 paper entry detection)
5VNPD 1 CPED1 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3
5VN 1 CPFD1 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3 1 2 3 CSPD1 1 5VNPD CSPD1 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3 19 21 23 5VNPD CSPD1 D-GND 19 21 23 CSS1
(CS1 cassette installation detection)
DSW_C
(Right lower door open/close detection)
5VN 1 DSW_C 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3
19 21 23
5VNPD CSPD1 D-GND
CSS1 1 D-GND 2 NC 3 NC 4 PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S 25 27 CSS1 D-GND 25 27
25 27
CSS1 D-GND
PCU PWB
2 4 6 5VNPD CLUD2 D-GND 2 4 6 2 4 6 5VNPD CLUD2 D-GND
CLUD2 (CS2 lift-up detection)
5VNPD 1 CLUD2 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3 4 5 6 5VNPD CPED2 D-GND 6 5 4 9 8 7 5VN CPFD2 D-GND
(Paper remaining detection for CS2)
(Paper feed UN harness CS2 PA2)

7 8 9
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H 5VNPD 3 CLUD2 2 D-GND 1
CPED2
(Paper present detection for CS2)

8 10 12 14 16 18 5VNPD CPED2 D-GND 5VN CPFD2 D-GND 8 10 12 14 16 18 1 2 3 CSPD2 5VNPD 1 2 CSPD2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3 CSS2
(CS2 cassette installation detection)
CS2 PAPER FEED UN
8 10 12 14 16 18
5VNPD CPED2 D-GND 5VN CPFD2 D-GND
CPFD2 (CS2 paper entry detection)
5VNPD 1 CPED2 2 3 D-GND GP1A73 179228-3
1 5VN CPFD2 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3
20 22 24
5VNPD CSPD2 D-GND
20 22 24
20 22 24
5VNPD CSPD2 D-GND
CSS2 1 D-GND 2 NC 3 NC 4 PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S
26 28
CSS2 D-GND
26 28
26 CSS2 28 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
(Paper feed motor) CPFM INT24V2 1 P-GND 2 /CPFM_GAIN 3 /CPFM_CK 4 /CPFM_D 5 CPFM_LD 6 NC 7 B07B-PASK-S (Paper feed main harness PA2)
CN6 32 INT24V2 30 P-GND 28 /CPFM_GAIN 26 /CPFM_CK /CPFM_D 24 22 CPFM_LD B32B-PHDSS
(Paper feed drive harness PA2)
CPFC
I. Paper feed drive unit section
(Vertical transport clutch)
R 1 2
SM-2Pin /CPFC 24V3
P 1 2
PCU PWB
(CS1 paper feed clutch)
CPLC1
R 1 2
SM-2Pin /CPUC1 24V3
P 1 2
(CS2 paper feed clutch)
CPLC2
R 1 2
SM-2Pin /CPUC2 24V3
P 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 R /CPFC 24V3 /CPUC1 24V3 /CPUC2 24V3 P-GND /CLUM1 P-GND /CLUM2 SM-10Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P
CN5 1 /CPFC 2 24V3 3 /CPUC1 4 24V3 5 /CPUC2 6 24V3 7 P-GND 8 /CLUM1 9 P-GND 10 /CLUM2 B24B-PHDSS
CLUM1 (CS1 lift-up motor) P-GND 1 /CLUM1 2 B2P-PH-K-S
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor) P-GND 1 /CLUM2 2 B2P-PH-K-S
ADULM (ADU lower motor)

INT24V1 INT24V1 ADUMLB/ ADUMLB ADUMLA ADUMLA/ PHR-6
R Frame

2 5 6 3 1 4
CN2 INT24V1 7 INT24V1 8 ADUMLB/ 9 ADUMLB 10 ADUMLA 11 ADUMLA/ 12 B12B-PASK-1
PFM
(PS front motor) INT24V1 2 INT24V1 5 PFMB/ 6 PFMB 3 PFMA 1 PFMA/ 4 PHR-6 Paper feed drive
C N 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
INT24V1 INT24V1 PFMB/ PFMB PFMA PFMA/
DRIVER MAIN PWB
RRM (PS motor)

INT24V1 INT24V1 RRMB/ RRMB RRMA RRMA/ B6P-PH-K-R Process drive 1 6 3 5 4 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
INT24V1 INT24V1 RRMB/ RRMB RRMA RRMA/ N,C B13B-PASK-1
RESI SENSOR F 5VNPD 1 D-GND 2 4 REGS_F /REGS_F_LED 3 PCS_F 5 OMRON 179228-5
(Process control sensor UN harness PA2)
J. PS unit & process control unit section
PROCON SENSOR UN
CN6 1 5VNPD 3 D-GND 5 REGS_F 7 /REGS_F_LED
RESI SENSOR R PCS_R 5 5VNPD 1 D-GND 2 REGS_R 4 /REGS_R_LED 3 OMRON 179228-5
9 2 4 6 8 11 13
PCS_CL 5VNPD D-GND REGS_R /REGS_R_LED /PCSS 24V3
PCU PWB
PCSS(Process control
shutter solenoid)
2 1 R
/PCSS 24V3 SM2P
2 1 P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 R
5VNPD D-GND REGS_F /REGS_F_LED 5VNPD D-GND NC PCS_CL NC 5VNPD D-GND REGS_R /REGS_R_LED /PCSS 24V3 NC NC NC SM18P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PROCON SENSOR UN

(PS UN harness PA2)
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H 4 5VNPD 3 5 PPD1 2 6 D-GND 1 3 5VNPD 4 2 PPD2 5 1 D-GND 6 PS UN
PPD1 (PS front sensor) 5VNPD 1 PPD1 2 D-GND 3 GP1A73 179228-3
PS UN
(PS sensor) PPD2 5VNPD 1 PPD2 2 D-GND 3 GP2A200 179228-3
10 5VNPD 12 PPD1 14 D-GND 16 5VNPD 18 PPD2 20 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
(Right door harness PA2)

FG SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 FG
TFD3 (Right paper full detection) 6 5 4 TFD3 D-GND 5VLED1 POD3 D-GND 5VLED4 POD3 3 4 5 D-GND 2 6 1 5VLED4 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 4 5 6 TFD3 D-GND 5VLED1 1 2 3
(Right paper exit UN harness)
(Right paper exit, reverse PG interface harness)
CN2 1 2 3
POD3 (Right paper exit detection)
TFD3 1 D-GND 2 5VLED1 3 GP1S73 179228-3
K. Right door unit section
POD3 1 D-GND 2 5VLED4 3 GP1S73 179228-3
DSW_ADU
(ADU open/close detection)
DSW_ADU 1 D-GND 2 5VLED2 3 GP1S73 179228-3 15 31 30 14 28 13 24V3 /MPGS /MPFS 24V3 /MPUC 24V3
(ADU open/close detection interface harness)
4 1 3 D-GND 2 2 DSW_ADU 3 1 5VLED2 4 PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H 15 31 30 14 28 13
CN1 5VN 1 D-GND 2 SIN3 3 SELIN1 4 SELIN2 5 SELIN3 6 APPD1 7 APPD2 8 APPD3 9 POD3 10 11 MPFD 5VNPD 16 MPWD 13 14 TH_M 15 HUD_M S16B-PHDSS-B
9 25 32 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 10 7 23 8
24V3 NC F-GND 5VN D-GND SIN3 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 APPD1 APPD2 APPD3 POD3 MPFD 5VNPD MPWD TH_M HUD_M
9 25 32 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 10 7 23 8
CN7 1 5VN 13 D-GND 2 SIN3 16 SELIN1 3 SELIN2 15 SELIN3 APPD1 4 18 APPD2 NC(APPD3) 5 17 POD3 6 MPFD 10 5VNPD 7 MPWD 19 TH_M 8 HUD_M
APPD1(ADU transport detection 1)
1 APPD1 D-GND 2 5VLED5 3 GP1S73 179228-3
(ADU transport 1 interface harness)
3 APPD1 1 D-GND 2 2 1 5VLED5 3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
7 DSW_ADU D-GND 8 9 5VLED2 10 APPD1 11 D-GND 12 5VLED5 13 APPD3 GND 14 15 5VLED 16 NC S16B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB

1 2 R /MPUC 24V3 SM2PIN 1 2 P
9 24V3 14 /MPGS 22 /MPFS 24V3 11 20 /MPUC 12 24V3 B22B-PHDSS
APPD2 (Right door harness P2)
(ADU transport detection 2)
APPD2 1 D-GND 2 5VLED10 3 GP1S73 179228-3

(Right door harness P2) (Manual feed tray harness (1))
CN3(1/2) 4 APPD2 5 D-GND 6 5VLED10
11 12 16 22 24 26 27 29 P
NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC QR/P4 32PIN
11 12 16 22 24 26 27 29 S
MPLD
(Manual feed paper length detection 1)
(Manual feed tray harness (2))
PCU PWB
MPUC
(Manual feed paper feed clutch) (Multi upper UN harness P2) (Right door harness P2)
MPLD 1 D-GND 2 5VLED12 3 GP1S73 179228-3 16 13 18 MPLD MPLD2 5VLED12 5 6 19 20 5VN MPWD 5VN MPWD 10 9
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H 3 MPLD 12 1 MPLD2 14 4 5VLED12 11
R 1 2 PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 8 24V3 1 7 /MPFS 2 6 MPED 3 5 4 2 3 D-GND 5VLED7 /MPGS 5VLED6 4 5 7 6
SM2P 24V3 /MPFS
P 1 2
(Manual feed paper empty detection)
MPFS
(Manual feed pick-up clutch)

CN3(2/2) NC (GND) 11 NC (5VLED) 12 NC (GND) 17 NC (GND) 21 NC (GND) 23 NC (GND) 26 NC (GND) 30 NC 32 MPED 7 7 MTOP2 5VLED13 7 6 5 27 25 24 MTOP1 5VLED9 8 22 8 9 10 MTOP2 5VLED13 MTOP1 5VLED9 MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 D-GND 5VLED7 NC (FAX_D) NC (GND) 5VLED6 8 9 1 2 3 11 12 13 14 2 5VN HUD_M D-GND TH_M 5VLED4 4 3 2 1 13 28 5VN HUD_M 29 14 D-GND 31 TH_M 15 5VLED4 S32B-PHDSS-B
MPWD
(Manual feed paper width detection)
5VN 3 MPWD 2 D-GND 1 VR_PWB PHNR-03-H
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H 1 NC 9 2 N C 8 3 7 NC MPLD 6 4 5 5 D-GND 4 6 5VLED12 3 5VN 7 2 8 MPWD 9 D-GND 1
MTOP1
(Manual feed tray non-expansion detection)
feed tray MTOP2 (Manual expansion detection) MTOP2 1 D-GND 2 5VLED13 3 GP1S73 179228-3
MPED 1 MPED 2 D-GND 3 5VLED7 179228-3 GP1S73 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H 4 /MPGS 2 1 5VLED6 5 5 24V3 1 2 D-GND 4 3 MPFD 3
(Manual feed paper entry detection)
6 4 2 5 3 1
1 MTOP1 D-GND 2 3 5VLED9 GP1S73 179228-3
24V3 24V3 24V3 D-GND D-GND D-GND
MPFD MPFD 1 D-GND 2 5VLED6 3 GP1S73 179228-3 DF11-6DP-SP2
TH&HUD Temperature humidity sensor 1 5VN 2 HUD_M 3 D-GND TH_M 4 ZHR-4
8 6 7 2 4 5 3 1
MPGS
(Manual feed gate solenoid)
P 1 2
SM2P 24V3 /MPGS
R 1 2
DF11-8DP-SP1
(Multi lower UN harness)
P 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
DF1B-26p N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C
S 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
(Paper exit UN harness PA2)

6 7 11 8 9 6 7 11 8 9 POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD1 POFM_LD2
L. Paper out unit section
POFM 1
R 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SM4PIN POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD1
CN12 16 POFM_V 17 /POFM_CNT P-GND 20 18 POFM_LD1 POFM_LD2 19
POFM 2 OSM
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
1 2 3 4 R
POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD2 SM4PIN
1 2 3 4
R 5 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 24V2 /OSM_XB /OSM_XA /OSM_B /OSM_A 1 2 3 4 5 13 TFD2 13
SM-6Pin 24V2 /OSM_XB /OSM_XA /OSM_B /OSM_A NC
P 5 1 2 3 4 6
11 12 13 14 15
24V2 /OSM_/B /OSM_/A /OSM_B /OSM_A
TFD2
(Paper exit paper full detection)
22
TFD2
14
(Paper exit detection)
5VNPD TFD2 D-GND GP1A71 POD2 15 HPOS
3 2 1 PHR-3
14
23
POD2
POD2
PCU PWB
15 24 HPOS
HPOS
(SHIFTER HP)
5VNPD 1 POD2 2 D-GND 3 LG248NL 179228-3 16 17 12

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
POD1 D-GND 5VNPD 10 18 19 NC NC NC
16 17 12 10 18 19
6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 7 8
3 2 1 4
5VNPD 1 HPOS 2 D-GND 3 LG248NL 179228-3

(Fusing rear detection)
POD1
/POFM_V /POFM_V /POFM_V /POFM_V P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT
25 POD1 26 D-GND 21 5VNPD B30B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1 POD1 2 D-GND 3 LG248NL 179228-3 DF11-4DP-SP1 SSJC6-4 SSJC6-6
D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD
FUFM
(Fusing cooling fan (40FAN))
P 1 2 3
SM-3Pin FUFM_/V FUFM_LD P-GND
R 1 2 3
CN13 1 FUFM_/V 15 FUFM_LD 19 P-GND B32B-PHDSS
FUM
(Fusing motor)
(Paper exit UN harness PA2)
FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ PHR-6-R

(Paper exit motor)
1 2 3 4 5 6
R 1 2 3 4 5 6
SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/
P 1 2 3 4 5 6
R 1 2 3 4 5 6
SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/
P 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN1 FUMB 4 5 FUMA INT24V1 1 2 INT24V1 3 FUMB/ 6 FUMA/ B6B-PASK-1
POM
POMA INT24V1 POMB POMA/ INT24V1 POMB/ SRA-21T-3 FG
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 7 POMA 8 INT24V1 9 POMB 10 POMA/ 11 INT24V1 12 POMB/ SRA-21T-3 FG
7 8 9 10 11 12
POMA INT24V1 POMB POMA/ INT24V1 POMB/
7 8 9 10 11 12
PHR-6
CN2 5 POMA INT24V1 1 4 POMB 6 POMA/ 2 INT24V1 3 POMB/ B12B-PASK-1
DRIVER MAIN PWB
(PCU-MOTHER connecting FFC PA2)
M. PCU PWB-other PWB
MOTHER PWB
CN1 D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND /MPFC_RES PCU_RES PCU_TXD D-GND PCU_RXD PCU_DTR /FAX_LED PCU_DSR D-GND /POF TRANS_RST LSU_RST SCK D-GND D-GND TRANS_DAT JOBEND_INT RSV_DAT /PCU_TRG TH1_LSU D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND 28FMZ-BT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
CN18 28 D-GND 27 D-GND 26 D-GND 25 D-GND /MPFC_RES 24 PCU_RES 23 22 PCU_TXD D-GND 21 20 PCU_RXD PCU_DTR 19 /FAX_LED 18 PCU_DSR 17 16 D-GND /POF 15 TRANS_RST 14 13 LSU_RST SCK 12 11 D-GND D-GND 10 TRANS_DAT 9 8 JOBEND_INT 7 RSV_DAT /PCU_TRG 6 5 TH1_LSU 4 D-GND D-GND 3 2 D-GND 1 D-GND 28FMZ-BT
PCU PWB
CN4
ADUMLCNT

DRIVER MAIN PWB
1 ADUML_/A 3 ADUML_A 5 ADUML_B 7 ADUML_/B 9 POMCNT 11 POM_/A 13 POM_A 15 POM_B 17 POM_/B 19 RRMCNT 21 RRM_/A 23 RRM_A 25 D-GND 2 FUMCNT 4 FUM_/A 6 FUM_A 8 FUM_B 10 FUM_/B 12 RRM_B 14 RRM_/B 16 PFMCNT 18 PFM_/A 20 22 PFM_A PFM_/B 24 PFM_B 26 B26B-PNDZS
CN8 1 ADUMLCNT 3 ADUML_/A 5 ADUML_A ADUML_B 7 ADUML_/B 9 POMCNT 11 POM_/A 13 POM_A 15 POM_B 17 POM_/B 19 RRMCNT 21 RRM_/A 23 RRM_A 25 D-GND 2 FUMCNT 4 FUM_/A 6 FUM_A 8 FUM_B 10 FUM_/B 12 RRM_B 14 RRM_/B 16 PFMCNT 18 PFM_/A 20 PFM_A 22 PFM_/B 24 PFM_B 26 B26B-PHDSS
CN5 INT24V1 P-GND 5VNPD B3P-VH
1 2 3
CN3 3 INT24V1 2 P-GND 1 5VNPD B7P-VH
(1)
N. DESK & LCC
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
DESK CONTROL PWB

CN4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 D-GND TXD_DSK RXD_DSK /DTR_DSK /DSR_DSK RES_DSK /TRC_DSK
CN-F 24V4 1 P-GND 2 5VN 3 D-GND 4 D-GND 5 TXD_DSK 6 RXD_DSK 7 /DTR_DSK 8 DSR_DSK 9 RES_DSK 10 /TRC_DSK 11 NC 12 B12B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND TXD_DSK RXD_DSK /DTR_DSK DSR_DSK RES_DSK /TRC_DSK SM 11PIN
WH
1 2 WH_L(DESK) WH_N(DESK) 1 2 F.G. 1 3 2 P WH_L(DESK) 1 WH_N(DESK) 3 F-GND 2 EL 3PIN R SRA-21T-4 F.G.
(DESK OPTION)
LCC CONTROL PWB
20 21 22 23 24
TXD_LCC RXD_LCC /DTR_LCC /DSR_LCC RES_LCC
CN-A NC 4 TXD_LCC 7 RXD_LCC 8 /DTR_LCC 9 /DSR_LCC 10 RES_LCC 11 NC 3 5VN 5 D-GND 6 24V4 1 P-GND 2 /TRC_LCC 12 B12B-PHDSS-B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P F.G. F.G.

NC 1 NC 2 TXD_LCC 3 RXD_LCC 4 /DTR_LCC 5 /DSR_LCC 6 RES_LCC 7 F-GND 8 5VN 9 D-GND 10 24V4 11 12 P-GND 13 /TRC_LCC NC 14 NC 15 EL 15PIN R SRA-21T-4 1 2 WH_L(LCC) WH_N(LCC) 1 2 4 12 5 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 P WH_L(LCC) WH_N(LCC) F-GND NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC EL 12PIN 4 12 5 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 R F.G. SRA-21T-4 1 2 P WH_L(LSU) WH_N(LSU) EL 2PIN 1 2 R
25 D-GND 26 /TRC_LCC B26B-PHDSS
PCU PWB
WH
CN8 (FROM - P1) 6 24V4 B7P-VH
F.G.
CN7 (FROM - P1) 7 P-GND B8P-VH CN4 (FROM - P1) 5VN 3 6 D-GND B6P-VH
(LCC OPTION)
DC PWB
WH
(LSU-WH harness)
1 2 3 R
WH_L(LSU) NC WH_N(LSU) EL 3PIN
1 2 3 P
(LSU OPTION)
(WH-DESK_LCC harness II)
CN4 1 WH_N(LSU) WH_N(DESK/LCC) 2 3 NC WH_L(DESK/LCC) 4 5 WH_L(LSU) B4P(5-3)-VH
WH PWB
(2) MX-2301N
: '09/Sep
(DC main harness P2LT)
CN4 13 D-GND 14 TXD_DSK 15 RXD_DSK 16 /DTR_DSK 17 /DSR_DSK 18 RES_DSK 19 /TRC_DSK
DESK CONTROL PWB
CN-F 24V4 1 P-GND 2 5VN 3 D-GND 4 D-GND 5 TXD_DSK 6 RXD_DSK 7 /DTR_DSK 8 DSR_DSK 9 RES_DSK 10 /TRC_DSK 11 NC 12 B12B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 R 24V4 P-GND 5VN D-GND D-GND TXD_DSK RXD_DSK /DTR_DSK DSR_DSK RES_DSK /TRC_DSK SM 11PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P
WH
1 2 F.G. WH_L(DESK) WH_N(DESK) 1 2 1 3 2 P WH_L(DESK) 1 WH_N(DESK) 3 F-GND 2 EL 3PIN R SRA-21T-4 F.G.
(DESK OPTION)
20 21 22 23 24
TXD_LCC RXD_LCC /DTR_LCC /DSR_LCC RES_LCC
25 D-GND 26 /TRC_LCC B26B-PHDSS
PCU PWB

1 2 P WH_L(LSU) WH_N(LSU) EL 2PIN 1 2 R (LSU-WH harness) 1 2 3 R WH_L(LSU) NC WH_N(LSU) EL 3PIN 1 2 3 P
(DC main harness P2LT)
CN8 (FROM P1) 24V4 6 B7P-VH CN7 (FROM P1) 7 P-GND B8P-VH CN4 (FROM P1) 3 5VN 6 D-GND B6P-VH
DC PWB
WH
(LSU OPTION)
(WH-DK_LSU harness P2LT)
CN4 1 WH_N(LSU) WH_N(DESK/LCC) 2 3 NC WH_L(DESK/LCC) 4 5 WH_L(LSU) B4P(5-3)-VH
WH PWB
O. Finisher & coin vendor
TO COIN VENDOR (OPTION)
CN17 1 24V3 2 P-GND 3 /CV_COPY 4 /CV_COUNT /CV_START 5 6 /CV_CA 7 /CV_CLCOPY 8 /CV_COLOR1 9 /CV_STAPLE 10 /CV_COLOR0 11 /CV_DUPLEX 12 5VN 13 /CV_SIZE0 14 /CV_SIZE1 15 /CV_SIZE2 16 /CV_SIZE3 B16B-PNDZS
FINISHER
INSERTOR
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)
CN4 7 TXD_INS 8 RXD_INS /DTR_INS 9 10 /DSR_INS 11 RES_INS 12 D-GND B26B-PHDSS TXD_INS RXD_INS /DTR_INS /DSR_INS RES_INS NC 5VN D-GND NC F-GND 24V5 P-GND EL 12PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R SRA-21T-4 F.G.

CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TXD_FIN RXD_FIN /DTR_FIN /DSR_FIN RES_FIN 24V3 5VN D-GND P-GND F-GND 24V5 P-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P CN TXD_FIN RXD_FIN /DTR_FIN /DSR_FIN RES_FIN 24V3 5VN D-GND P-GND F-GND 24V5 P-GND
PCU PWB
CN8 (FROM - P1) 7 24V5 B7P-VH-B CN7 (FROM - P1) 6 P-GND B8P-VH-B (FROM - P1) CN4 4 5VN B6P-VH-B
DC PWB
P. Scanner section 1/3

(CCD-F_FFC) 41 GND AFE_RDD 40 AFE_WRD 39 38 AFE_SCLK AFE_CS 37 /RES_CCDAD 36 GND 35 3.3V 34 3.3V 33 3.3V 32 3.3V 31 30 3.3V 3.3V 29 GND 28 5V 27 5V 26 5V 25 24 GND 23 10V 22 10V GND 21 20 RA19 RA+ 18 GND 17 RB16 RB+ 15 GND 14 RC13 RC+ 12 GND 11 CLK10 CLK+ 9 GND RD8 RD+ 7 6 GND 5 RERE+ 4 GND 3 2 AFE_CSTG GND 1 FI-RE41S-VF 1 GND 2 AFE_RDD 3 AFE_WRD AFE_SCLK 4 AFE_CS 5 6 /RES_CCDAD GND 7 8 3.3V 3.3V 9 10 3.3V 3.3V 11 3.3V 12 3.3V 13 GND 14 5V 15 5V 16 17 5V GND 18 10V 19 10V 20 GND 21 RA22 RA+ 23 GND 24 25 RBRB+ 26 GND 27 RC28 29 RC+ GND 30 CLK31 CLK+ 32 GND 33 RD34 RD+ 35 GND 36 37 RE38 RE+ 39 GND 40 AFE_CSTG 41 GND FI-RE41S-VF CN2 1 2 3 5VEXT D-GND OCSW EHR-3 OCSW ORS LED PWB
5VEXT 1 D-GND 2 OCSW 3 24VEXT 4 /SIZE_LED1 5 /SIZE_LED2 6 B6P-PH-H-S F.G. SRA-21T-4
(Document detection emitting side harness)
CN10
24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 /SIZE_LED 2
CCD PWB
CN4
MiM_A 1 MiM_B 2 3 MiM_/A MiM_/B 4 B4P-PH-H-S

(SCN-LAMP_FFC)
P-GND 5 4 P-GND 3 CL 24VPD 2 1 24VPD 5597-05CPB7F
P-GND 5 4 P-GND 3 CL 2 24VPD 1 24VPD 5597-05APB
2 1
CN9
1 MHPS D-GND 2 5V 3 BM03B-GHS-TBT
(MHPS harness)
3 2 1
MHPS D-GND 5V EHR-3
CN13
GND PD 5V_EXT PDSEL0 PDSEL1 PDSEL2
29 28 27 26 25 24
(OPE harness P2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCANCLKOUT- 10 SCANCLKOUT+ 11 D-GND 12 SCANDATA3 - 13 SCANDATA3 + 14 D-GND 15 B15P-PH-K-S 5V2 1 D-GND 2 nINFO_LED 4 5 nWU_LED 6 nPOW_LED 7 nWU_KEY
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
SCANDATA0 SCANDATA0 + D-GND SCANDATA1 SCANDATA1 + D-GND SCANDATA2 SCANDATA2 + D-GND
3.3VPD 9 1 SCANDATA0 2 SCANDATA0 + D-GND 3 4 SCANDATA1 6 SCANDATA1 + D-GND 5 8 SCANDATA2 10 SCANDATA2 + 7 D-GND 12 SCANCLKOUT14 SCANCLKOUT+ D-GND 11 16 SCANDATA3 15 SCANDATA3 + 13 D-GND B16B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN6
CN11
GND 6 5 PD 4 5V_EXT 1 PDSEL0 PDSEL1 2 PDSEL2 3 B6P-PH-H-S
1 2 3 4 5 6
5V2 4 D-GND 6 12 nINFO_LED WU_LED 8 POW_LED 10 nWU_KEY 14 501190-2029
CN4
GND 5 CCFT 4 +24V 3 2 +24V GND 1 BM05B-GHS-TBT /YL(Y1) 4 XH(X1) 3 2 YH(Y2) /XL(X2) 1 52271-0469
(INVERTER harness P2)
5 GND CCFT 4 +24V 3 +24V 2 GND 1 B5B-PAS K TOUCH PANEL
CR2 MOTHER PWB
D-GND D-GND nPWRSW
3 9 8
7 8 9
7 8 9
D-GND 1 D-GND 2 3 nPWRSW B3P-PH-H-S
PO SW PWB
CN3
CN1
8.5-LVDS PWB
10 D-GND LCD_DATA3 + 11 LCD_DATA3 - 12 15 D-GND 13 LCD_CLK+ 14 LCD_CLKD-GND 16 LCD_DATA2+ 17 LCD_DATA2 - 18 21 D-GND LCD_DATA1+ 19 LCD_DATA1 - 20 22 D-GND LCD_DATA0+ 23 LCD_DATA0 - 24 B24B-PHDSS-B CN14
10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 DF1B-24Pin 23 GND 22 GND GND 21 20 GND 19 GND GND 18 3.3V 17 3.3V_EXT 16 5V_EXT 15 24V_EXT 14 24V_EXT 13 12 /YL(Y1) XH(X1) 11 YH(Y2) 10 /XL(X2) 9 SC_TEMP 8 VCONT 7 6 /CCFT PNL_SEL0 5 PNL_SEL1 4 PNL_SEL2 3 PNL_SEL3 2 1 DISP 501190-5029
(OP harness P2)
(LCD FFC P2) +3.3V NC +3.3V +3.3V UD/LR ENAB F-GND Vsync D-GND Hsync D-GND B5 B4 B3 D-GND B2 B1 B0 D-GND G5 G4 G3 D-GND G2 G1 G0 D-GND R5 R4 R3 D-GND R2 R1 R0 NC D-GND D-GND CK D-GND D-GND 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +3.3V NC +3.3V +3.3V NC ENAB F-GND Vsync D-GND Hsync D-GND B5 B4 B3 D-GND B2 B1 B0 D-GND G5 G4 G3 D-GND G2 G1 G0 D-GND R5 R4 R3 D-GND R2 R1 R0 NC D-GND D-GND CK D-GND D-GND
10 6 8 16 12 14 22 18 20 28 24 26 34 30 32
D-GND LCD_DATA3 + LCD_DATA3 D-GND LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLKD-GND LCD_DATA2 + LCD_DATA2 D-GND LCD_DATA1 + LCD_DATA1 D-GND LCD_DATA0 + LCD_DATA0 -
(OP harness P2)
nPOF_SCN RXD_SCN LCD_SEL3 nCTS_SCN LCD_SEL1 TXD_SCN LCD_SEL0 nRTS_SCN LCD_SEL2 nRES_SCN nLCD_DISP
nRES_MFPC_SCN
NC D-GND B14B-PHDSS-B
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 nPOF_SCN 13 RXD_SCN 12 LCD_SEL3 11 nCTS_SCN 10 LCD_SEL1 9 TXD_SCN 8 LCD_SEL0 7 nRTS_SCN LCD_SEL2 6 5 nRES_SCN 4 nLCD_DISP 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN 2 NC 1 D-GND B14B-PHDSS-B
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
D-GND 6 +3.3V 5 +5VN 4 +12V 3 +24V2 2 1 P-GND B6P-VH
6 D-GND 5 +3.3V 4 +5VN 2 +12V 1 +24V2 3 P-GND B6P-VH
GND 1 GND 2 GND 7 29 GND 39 GND 40 GND 25 3.3V 19 3.3V_EXT 23 5V_EXT 3 24V_EXT 5 24V_EXT 37 /YL(Y1) 35 XH(X1) 33 YH(Y2) /XL(X2) 31 27 SC_TEMP VCONT 21 17 /CCFT 15 PNL_SEL0 13 PNL_SEL1 11 PNL_SEL2 9 PNL_SEL3 36 DISP 501571-4029
CN14
CN12
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)
8.5 LCD UN
CN3
INVERTER PWB
50 49 48 47 39 38 37 SEG0LEDBPR 36 35 SEG1LEDCRR SEG2D0 34 33 /F0D1 /F1D2 32 /F2G0 31 /F3G1 30 501190-5029 GND GND 5V_EXT GND 3.3V_EXT /BZR /KEYIN
1 GND GND 2 17 5V_EXT 20 GND 18 3.3V_EXT 16 /BZR /KEYIN 19 15 SEG0LEDBPR 13 SEG1LEDCRR 11 SEG2D0 9 /F0D1 /F1D2 7 /F2G0 5 /F3G1 3
CN1
ORS-PD PWB
MHPS
BACK LIGHT
CN12
8.5inch OPE SYSTEM

/CCFT 2 +CCFT 1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
MIRROR MOTOR
CL INVERTOR PWB
CN5
CL
Q. Scanner section 2/3

41 40 39 38 37 /RES_CCDAD 36 GND 35 3.3V 34 3.3V 33 3.3V 32 3.3V 31 3.3V 30 29 3.3V 28 GND 27 5V 5V 26 5V 25 GND 24 10V 23 10V 22 GND 21 RA20 RA+ 19 GND 18 RB17 16 RB+ 15 GND RC14 RC+ 13 GND 12 CLK11 CLK+ 10 GND 9 8 RDRD+ 7 GND 6 RE5 RE+ 4 GND 3 AFE_CSTG 2 1 GND FI-RE41S-VF G N D AFE_RDD AFE_WRD AFE_SCLK AFE_CS GND 1 AFE_RDD 2 AFE_WRD 3 4 AFE_SCLK 5 AFE_CS 6 /RES_CCDAD 7 GND 8 3.3V 9 3.3V 3.3V 10 3.3V 11 3.3V 12 13 3.3V 14 GND 15 5V 16 5V 17 5V 18 GND 19 10V 20 10V 21 GND 22 RA23 RA+ 24 GND 25 RB26 RB+ 27 GND 28 RC29 RC+ 30 GND 31 CLK32 CLK+ 33 GND 34 RD35 RD+ GND 36 RE37 38 RE+ GND 39 40 AFE_CSTG 41 GND FI-RE41S-VF CN2 (CCD-F_FFC) 1 2 3 5VEXT D-GND OCSW EHR-3 OCSW ORS LED PWB
1 5VEXT D-GND 2 3 OCSW 4 24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 5 /SIZE_LED2 6 B6P-PH-K-S F.G. SRA-21T-4
(Document detection emitting side harness)
CN10
24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 /SIZE_LED2
CCD PWB
1 MiM_A 2 MiM_B MiM_/A 3 4 MiM_/B B4P-PH-K-S

(SCN-LAMP_FFC)
5 P-GND 4 P-GND CL 3 2 24VPD 1 24VPD 5597-05CPB7F
5 P-GND 4 P-GND 3 CL 2 24VPD 24VPD 1 5597-05APB
2 1
CN9
MHPS 1 D-GND 2 5V 3 BM03B-GHS-TBT
3 2 1
MHPS D-GND 5V EHR-3
C N13
(OPE harness P2)

GND PD 5V_EXT PDSEL0 PDSEL1 PDSEL2 29 28 27 26 25 24 6 GND PD 5 5V_EXT 4 PDSEL0 1 PDSEL1 2 3 PDSEL2 B6P-PH-H-S ORS-PD PWB
SEG0LEDBPR SEG1LEDCRR
4 5V2 D-GND 6 12 nINFO_LED 8 WU_LED POW_LED 10 14 nWU_KEY 501190-2029
CN4
24V_EXT 3 D-GND 2 /CCFT 1 S3B-PH-SM4-TB 1 /YL(Y1) XH(X1) 2 YH(Y2) 3 /XL(X2) 4 52271-0469
(INVERTER harness P2)
24V_EXT 1 D-GND 2 /CCFT 3 S3B-PH-K-S TOUCH PANEL
CR2 MOTHER PWB
D-GND D-GND nPWRSW
3 9 8
7 8 9
7 8 9
1 D-GND 2 D-GND 3 nPWRSW B3P-PH-H-S
B24B-PHDSS-B D-GND 6 +3.3V 5 +5VN 4 +12V 3 2 +24V2 P-GND 1 B6P - VH 6 D-GND 5 +3.3V +5VN 4 +12V 2 +24V2 1 3 P-GND B6P-VH 14 nPOF_SCN RXD_SCN 13 12 LCD_SEL3 11 nCTS_SCN 10 LCD_SEL1 TXD_SCN 9 LCD_SEL0 8 nRTS_SCN 7 LCD_SEL2 6 5 nRES_SCN 4 nLCD_DISP 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN 2 NC 1 D-GND B14B-PHDSS-B GND 23 GND 22 GND 21 20 GND GND 19 18 GND 3.3V 17 3.3V_EXT 16 5V_EXT 15 24V_EXT 14 24V_EXT 13 12 /YL(Y1) XH(X1) 11 YH(Y2) 10 9 /XL(X2) SC_TEMP 8 7 VCONT /CCFT 6 PNL_SEL0 5 PNL_SEL1 4 PNL_SEL2 3 PNL_SEL3 2 DISP 1 501190-5029 CN14 CN3
(OPE harness P2)
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 NC 2 D-GND 1 B14B-PHDSS-B nPOF_SCN RXD_SCN LCD_SEL3 nCTS_SCN LCD_SEL1 TXD_SCN LCD_SEL0 nRTS_SCN LCD_SEL2 nRES_SCN nLCD_DISP
GND 1 GND 2 7 GND 29 GND GND 39 40 GND 25 3.3V 19 3.3V_EXT 23 5V_EXT 3 24V_EXT 5 24V_EXT 37 /YL(Y1) 35 XH(X1) 33 YH(Y2) 31 /XL(X2) SC_TEMP 27 21 VCONT 17 /CCFT 15 PNL_SEL0 13 PNL_SEL1 11 PNL_SEL2 9 PNL_SEL3 DISP 36 501571-4009
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN 3
CN12
8.1-LVDS PWB
10 11 12 15 13 14 16 17 18 21 19 20 22 23 24
10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 DF1B-24Pin
10 6 8 16 12 14 22 18 20 28 24 26 34 30 32
CN1
(OPE harness P2)
PO SW PWB
CN3
(LCD FFC P2) VO 1 LP 2 D-GND 3 CP 4 D-GND 5 3.3V_EXT 6 7 M 8 D0 D1 9 D-GND 10 D2 11 12 D3 13 D-GND DISP 14 VEE 15 52030-2629 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 VO LP D-GND CP D-GND 3.3V_EXT M D0 D1 D-GND D2 D3 D-GND DISP VEE
8.1 LCD UN
LCD INVERTOR PWB
SEG2D0 /F0D1 /F1D2 /F2G0 /F3G1
CR2 8.1 MFP-OPE PWB
SCA NDATA0 SCANDATA0 + D-GND SCANDATA1 SCANDATA1 + D-GND SCANDATA2 SCANDATA2 + D-GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCANCLKOUT- 10 SCANCLKOUT+ 11 D-GND 12 SCANDATA3 - 13 SCANDATA3 + 14 D-GND 15 B15P-PH-K-S 5V2 1 2 D-GND 4 nINFO_LED 5 nWU_LED 6 nPOW_LED 7 nWU_KEY
9 3.3VPD 1 SCANDATA0 2 SCANDATA0 + 3 D-GND 4 SCANDATA1 6 SCANDATA1 + D-GND 5 8 SCANDATA2 10 SCANDATA2 + 7 D-GND 12 SCANCLKOUT14 SCANCLKOUT+ D-GND 11 16 SCANDATA3 15 SCANDATA3 + 13 D-GND B16B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN4
CN11
50 GND GND 49 5V_EXT 48 GND 47 3.3V_EXT 39 38 /BZR 37 /KEYIN SEG0LEDBPR 36 SEG1LEDCRR 35 SEG2D0 34 33 /F0D1 /F1D2 32 /F2G0 31 /F3G1 30 501190-5029 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 17 20 18 16 19 15 13 11 9 7 5 3
GND GND 5V_EXT GND 3.3V_EXT /BZR /KEYIN
CN 1
MHPS
(MHPS harness)
BACK LIGHT
CN1
8.1inch OPE SYSTEM

2 /CCFT +CCFT 1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
CN4
MIRROR MOTOR
CL INVERTOR PWB
CN5
CL
(2) MX-2301N
(Main unit - RSPF interface harness PA2)
(1) MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
: '09/Sep
R. Scanner section 3/3
TO R-SPF
TO RSPF
CN15 SPPD1 1 SPPD2 2 SPFMCK 3 SPFMM1 4 SPFMM2 5 SPFMO1 6 SPFMO2 7 SPRMA 8 9 SPRMA/ 10 SPRMB 11 SPRMB/ 12 SPRMO1 13 SGS STMPS 14 15 SRRC SPFC 16 17 SPWS 18 SELA_ 19 SELB_ SELC_ 20 SSELO 21 SPPD4 22 SPFFAN 23 SPPD3 24 25 SPPD5 5VPD 26 GND 27 28 NC B28B-PHDSS-B
P 3 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 XAD 34PIN SPPD1 SPPD2 SPFMCK SPFMM1 SPFMM2 SPFMO1 SPFMO2 SPRMA SPRMA/ SPRMB SPRMB/ SPRMO1 SGS STMPS SRRC SPFC SPWS SELA_ SELB_ SELC_ SSELO SPPD4 SPFFAN SPPD3 SPPD5 5VPD D-GND R 3 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 CN15 SPPD1 1 SPPD2 2 SPFMCK 3 SPFMM1 4 SPFMM2 5 SPFMO1 6 SPFMO2 7 SPRMA 8 9 SPRMA/ 10 SPRMB 11 SPRMB/ 12 SPRMO1 13 SGS STMPS 14 SRRC 15 SPFC 16 SPWS 17 SELA_ 18 SELB_ 19 SELC_ 20 21 SSELO 22 SPPD4 SPFFAN 23 SPPD3 24 25 SPPD5 5VPD 26 GND 27 NC 28 B28B-PHDSS-B 1 2 8 7 5V_EXT 7 P-GND P-GND AVCC 1 2 8

5 6 34 24VPD 24VPD D-GND 5 6 34
CN16 GND 1 GND 2 3 3.3V 3.3V 4 5 5V 6 12V 7 24V 8 24V 9 24V 10 GND B10B-PH-K-S
C N 16 1 GND 2 GND 3 3.3V 4 3.3V 5V 5 6 12V 24V 7 8 24V 24V 9 GND 10 B10B-PH-K-S
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CR2 SCNCNT PWB
TO AUDITER
TO AUDITER
CN6 n A_PNC 1 n A_COPY 2 n A_CA 3 n A_READY 4 n A_AUD 5 5V 6 D-GND 7 24V 8 NC 9 n A_TC 10 24V 11 PNC-a 12 13 D-GND B13P-PH-K-S (PNC harness)
CN6 n A_PNC 1 n A_COPY 2 n A_CA 3 n A_READY 4 5 n A_AUD 5V 6 7 D-GND 24V 8 NC 9 10 n A_TC 24V 11 PNC-a 12 D-GND 13 B13P-PH-K-S
(PNC harness)
S. FAX section
SPEAKER
(BOARD TO BOARD)
CN2 1 2 SPSP+ S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN)
(SCN-Mother harness JP P2)
MJ1 ( JAPAN) 1 2 3 4 5 6
L1 L2 -
MJ-62J-RD315
TO LINE
(EX) 1 2 3 4 5 6
T2 R1 T1 R2 -
MOTHER PWB
MJ-64J-RD315
TO EX TEL
MJ2 1 2 3 4 5 6
L1 L2 -
D-GND1 3.3V1 3.3V2 CNCT_FAX nFAXCS_CTS 5V +5V-1 FLVPP nFAXCS_CTS D-GND D-GND2 D-GND 5V FAX_WUPFAXCS_RXD_P FAX_WUP+5V-2 D-GND3 D-GND D-GND4 FAXCS_TXD_P FLVPP 5VS +5V2 FAXD_TXD_N +24V 3.3V3 3.3V4 D-GND5 P-GND BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
CN3 30 29 28 26 27 25 24 22 23 21 20 19 17 18 15 13 16 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 4 3 2 1
CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
D-GND D-GND 3.3V 3.3V 24V nFAXCS_CTS 5V nFAXCS_RTS FLVPP nFAXCS_CTS D-GND nFAXD_RTS D-GND 5V FAXCS_RXD_N FAXCS_RXD_P FAX_WUPFAXD_RXD_P FAXD_RXD_N D-GND FAXCS_TXD_N FAXCS_TXD_P nRES_FAX 5VS FAXD_TXD_P FAXD_TXD_N nNCT_FAX 3.3V 3.3V D-GND P-GND B31B-CSRK

MDM_ABITCLK MDM_ASPCLK
MJ-62J-RD315
24V AG 24V AG 150VON CION MSGMUTE HS1HS2CIEXHSSON1 SON2 ECON MRON TELID CI2NC TELID2 NC DG 3.3V DG 5VS DG SI3_RESSPK MDM_ATXD MDM_ARXD
FAX MAIN PWB
TO HANDSET (JAPAN ONLY)
CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 RGDTMDM_CLK AFERESBBITCLK BSPCLK BRXD BTXD HDMUTERHST X 24- 40R - 10ST- H1 TX25- 40P- 8ST- H1
TX+ RX+ RXTXDG RHS-
TEL LIU PWB
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
CN7 1 24V 2 AG 3 24V 4 AG 5 150VON 6 CION 7 MSGMUTE 8 HS19 HS210 CI11 EXHS12 SON1 13 SON2 14 ECON 15 MRON 16 TELID 17 CI218 NC 19 TELID2 20 NC 21 DG 22 3.3V 23 DG 24 5VS 25 DG 26 SI3_RES27 SPK 28 MDM_ATXD 29 MDM_ARXD 30 MDM_ABITCLK 31 MDM_ASPCLK 32 RGDT33 MDM_CLK 34 AFERES35 BBITCLK 36 BSPCLK 37 BRXD 38 BTXD 39 HDMUTE40 RHS-
SM-4pin
(HDD SATA cable P2)
PWR_CPUFAN PWM_CPUFAN
CPU FAN
P-GND
PWR_CPUFAN PWM_CPUFAN LOCK_CPUFAN
R 1 2 3 4 P 1 2 3 4 QR/P4 8P
(HDD power interface harness P2)
P-GND
LOCK_CPUFAN
P 7 6 3 2
S 7 6 3 2
CN17 1 PWR_CPUFAN 3 PWM_CPUFAN 5 P-GND 7 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 PWR_HDDFAN 4 PWM_HDDFAN 6 P-GND 8 LOCK_HDDFAN B10B-PHDSS-B
T. MFP board section
HDD
MFP PWB
CN19
LCD_DATA0-
1 5 4 8
12V D-GND 5V D-GND
1 5 4 8
(HDD power interface harness P2)
SATA POWER 12V 12V 12V GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V GND GND GND 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V CN16 1 12V 3 D-GND 2 5VN 4 D-GND B4P-VH
FAX1D_CTS
FAX1CS_TXD FAX1CS_RXD FAX1CS_RTS FAX1CS_CTS
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(HDD SATA cable P2)
MOTHER PWB
(HDD SATA cable P2)
FAX1D_CTS
FAX1CS_TXD
SATA SIGNAL GND GND

LCD_DATA0+ LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+ LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
CN4
USB_DN USB_DP
USB_VBUS
USB_RTN_P_in USB_RTN_N_in
SATA_TXP SATA_TXP SATA_TXN
FAX1CS_RXD FAX1CS_RTS FAX1CS_CTS
SATA_TXN
CH3_N CH3_P CH4_N CH4_P

RES_FAX1
NCNCT_FAX1
GND
SATA_RXN SATA_RXP
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
LCD_DATA3LCD_DATA3+
nLDC_DISP(OC) LCDC_REFCLKin 3.3VECO _MFP_out
GND
SATA_RXN
PICVPPON
RES_FAX1
SATA_RXP
RXD_SCN
NCTS_SCN
NCNCT_FAX1
GND
NWU_FAX2
RTS_LCDsub
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND CN5
6SAT07P-328B-B5
NWU_FAX2
TXD_SCN
NRTS_SCN NRES_SCN NRES_PCU
(TYPE-A)
SCANDATA3+ SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+ SCANCLKOUT-
USB2.0
3.3V_FAX 3.3V_FAX 3.3V_FAX
CTS_LCDsub
1 2 3 4
UAR27-4K5J00
5V DD+ GND CN6

SCANDATA2+ SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+ SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+ SCANDATA0-
RXD_PCU
NCTS_PCU
12V GND GND 5V

5V0_FAX
USB_FR_SEL
1 2 3 4
TXD_PCU
NRTS_PCU
NPOF_MFPC
3.3V_ECO RTS_LCD 3.3V_FAX 3.3V_FAX 3.3V_FAX CTS_LCD 5V0_FAX

USB_SEL_SW
(TYPE-B)
UBR23-4K2200
USB2.0
CN9
1 2 3 4 5V DD+ GND
NREQ_PIC NCLR_PIC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SI-51005-F
TXD_PIC RXD_PIC PWM0

FAN_CNCT
LAN
NRST_PIC RES_MFP PWM1

NREQ_PIC_INT
TRP1+ TRP1TRP2+ TRP2TRP3+ TRP3TRP4+ TRP4CN17
FAX1D_TXD FAX1D_RXD FAX1D_RTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
CH0_N CH0_P CH1_N CH1_P CH2_N CH2_P CLK_N CLK_P LCDSEL2 LCDSEL3 DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND NC 24V_FAX
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 BOARD TO BOARD
61 USB_DN_out 91 62 USB_DP_out 92 63 USB_VBUS_out 93 64 USB_RTN_P_in 94 ECLK_LSU_N 65 USB_RTN_N_in 95 ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON 96 HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN 97 HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98 VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99 VSYNC_K_P 70 NRTS_SCN 100 VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101 VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102 VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103 VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104 VSYNC_Y_P 75 TXD_PCU 105 VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106 LCDSEL0 77 NPOF_MFPC 107 LCDSEL1 78 NREQ_PIC 108 +5VL 79 NCLR_PIC 109 +5VL 80 TXD_PIC 110 +5VL 81 RXD_PIC 111 +5VL 112 82 PWM0 +5VL 83 FAN_CNCT 113 +5VL 84 NRST_PIC 114 +5VL 85 RES_MFP 115 +5VL 86 PWM1 116 +5VL 87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117 +5VL 88 FAX1D_TXD 118 TXD_LCDsub 89 FAX1D_RXD 119 RXD_LCDsub 90 FAX1D_RTS 120 TX25-120P-LT-H1E
CN2 1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N 2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P 3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N 4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P 5 LCD_DATA2- 35 ECLK_LSU_N 6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P 7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N 10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P 41 VSYNC_C_P 11 nLDC_DISP 12 LCD_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N 13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N 14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P 16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N 17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0 18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1 19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL 20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL 21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL 22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL 53 +5VL 23 CH0_N 54 +5VL 24 CH0_P CH1_N 55 +5VL 25 CH1_P 56 +5VL 26 57 +5VL 27 CH2_N 58 +5VL 28 CH2_P 59 TXD_LCD 29 CLK_N 60 RXD_LCD 30 CLK_P TX25-120P-LT-H1E
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
LCDSEL2 LCDSEL3 DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND NC 24V_FAX
RS232C
CN19
P-GND D-GND 3.3V 3.3V nNCT_FAX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DBR30-091F100
CD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS R I
31 30 29 28 27 FAXD_TXD_N 26 FAXD_TXD_P 25 24 5V nRES_FAX 23 22 FAXCS_TXD_P 21 FAXCS_TXD_N 20 D-GND 19 FAXD_RXD_N 18 FAXD_RXD_P FAX_WUP- 17 16 FAXCS_RXD_P FAXCS_RXD_N 15 14 5V 13 D-GND nFAXD_RTS 12 11 D-GND 10 nFAXCS_CTS 9 FLVPP 8 nFAXCS_RTS 7 5V 6 nFAXCS_CTS 5 24V 4 3.3V 3 3.3V 2 D-GND 1 D-GND B31B-CSRK
2nd FAX UN (OPTION)
NM MODEL
OTHER
U. USB section
(SCN - mother harness P2)

VBUS DD+ GND GND USB I/F PWB VBUS1 D1D1+ GND GND
(8.5 OPE harness P2)
CN
LR 2 3 4 5 6 BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN19 VBUS D2D2+ DGND DGND VBUS D3D3+ DGND DGND CN BLUE
LIGHTBLUE
CN13 VBUS FP_DFP_D+ DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PA-6pi n VBUS DD+ GND SHIELD
P 2 3 4 5 6
CN 5 4 3 2 1
TO USB I/F
BM10B-GHS-TBT
MOTHER PWB
LR 1 2 3 4 5
PA-5pin VBUS DD+ GND SHIELD
(8.5 OPE harness P2) (Keyboard interface harness P2) (Keyboard harness P2) P LR PA-6pin P LR P 1 1 1 1 VBUS 1 2 2 2 2 D2 D+ 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 GND 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 SHIELD 5 6 FG 6 PA-5pin
BROWN GRAY GRAY
VBUS DD+ GND GND
Soldering USB converter PWB
(HUB interface harness P2) SRA-21T-3 (SCN mother harness P2)
CN4 4 3 2 1 BM04B-GHS-TBT DOWN VBUS1 D1D1+ GND SHIELD1 VBUS2 D2D2+ GND SHIELD2 BM10B-GHS-TBT CN3 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
VBUS DGND FP_D+ FP_DDGND RE_D+ RE_DDGND DGND 5V 5V CN5 6 5 4 3 2 1 BM06B-GHS-TBT CN1 3 GND 2 5V 1 5V B3B-PH-SM4-TB DOWN VBUS DD+ GND SHIELD SHIELD
CN11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DOWN VBUS DD+ GND
SRA-21T-3
B11B-PH-K-S

CN2 5 4 3 2 1 UP VBUS DD+ GND GND
TO KEYBOARD
FRONT UP REAR DOWN
USB HUB PWB
BM05B-GHS-TBT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
KEYBOARD NM MODEL:STANDARD KEYBOARD : OPTION OTHER:OPTON
SCN-CNT PWB
Transport interface harness P2 Transport harness P2
HF main unit - RSPF interface harness P2
RSPF DRIVER PWB
PHR-10
179228-3(BLACK) (SPF paper entry 2 sensor) SPPD2 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD2 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18
V. RSPF section
(NC)
CN16 GND 1 GND 2 3.3V 3 3.3V 4 5V 5 12V 6 24V 7 24V 8 24V 9 GND 10 B10B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
(NC) (NC)
179228-3(BLACK) (SPF scan front sensor) SPPD3 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD3 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18
RSPF connecting harness P2
CN G PHR-13 +5VPD 1 SPPD2 2 GND 3 +5VPD 4 SPPD3 5 GND 6 SOCD 7 GND 8 +5VPD_SOCD 9 +5VPD 10 SPPD5 11 GND 12 (NC) 13 (NC) B13B-PH-K-S
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC 1 +5VPD 1 2 SPPD2 2 3 GND 3 +5VPD 4 4 SPPD3 5 5 GND 6 6 SOCD 7 7 GND 8 8 +5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD 10 10 SPPD5 11 11 GND 12 12
179228-3 (SPF open/close sensor) SOCD 1 SOCD 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SOCD VHPGP1S73P+-18 179228-3(BLACK) (SPF reverse rear sensor) SPPD5 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD5 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N 1 +24VPD_SRRC 1 2 SRRC/ 2
SRRC
(SPF resist roller clutch) 179228-3 (SPF document empty sensor) SPED 1 SPED 2 GND 3 +5V_SPED VHPGP1S73P+-18
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S SPED 1 1 2 GND 2 3 +5V_SPED 3 4 +5VPD 4 5 SPPD1 5 6 GND 6 7 +24VPD 7 8 8 +24VPD_SW
CN15 SPPD1 1 SPPD2 2 SPFMCK 3 SPFMM1 4 SPFMM2 5 SPFMO1 6 SPFMO2 7 SPRMA 8 SPRMA/ 9 SPRMB 10 SPRMB/ 11 SPRMO1 12 SGS 13 STMPS 14 SRRC 15 SPFC 16 SPWS 17 SELA 18 SELB 19 SELC 20 SSELO 21 SPPD4 22 SPFFAN 23 SPPD3 24 SPPD5 25 5VPD 26 GND 27 (NC) 28 B28B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) CN E PHR-11 +24VPD_SRRC 1 SRRC/ 2 3 SPED GND 4 +5V_SPED 5 +5VPD 6 SPPD1 7 GND 8 +24VPD 9 GND 10 (NC) +24VPD_SW 11 B11B-PH-K-S
(NC) PHDR-28VS-1 PHDR-34VS-1
XADR-34V/XADRP-34V 1 1 GND 2 2 GND 3 3 SPPD1 4 4 SPPD2 5 5 +24VPD 6 6 +24VPD 7 7 +5V 8 8 AVCC 9 9 SPFMCK 10 10 SPFMM1 11 SPFMM2 11 12 12 SPFMO1 13 13 SPFMO2 14 14 SPRMA 15 15 SPRMA/ 16 16 SPRMB 17 17 SPRMB/ 18 18 SPRMO1 19 19 SGS 20 20 STMPS 21 21 SRRC 22 22 SPFC 23 23 SPWS 24 24 SELA 25 25 SELB 26 26 SELC 27 27 SSELO 28 28 SPPD4 29 29 SPFFAN 30 30 SPPD3 31 31 SPPD5 32 32 5VPD 33 33 GND 34 34 GND CN A 1 GND 2 GND 3 SPPD1 4 SPPD2 5 +24VPD 6 +24VPD 7 +5V 8 AVCC 9 SPFMCK 10 SPFMM1 11 SPFMM2 12 SPFMO1 13 SPFMO2 14 SPRMA 15 SPRMA/ 16 SPRMB 17 SPRMB/ 18 SPRMO1 19 SGS 20 STMPS 21 SRRC 22 SPFC 23 SPWS 24 SELA 25 SELB 26 SELC 27 SSELO 28 SPPD4 29 SPFFAN 30 SPPD3 31 SPPD5 32 5VPD 33 GND 34 GND B34-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
Paper feed harness P2
179228-3(BLACK) (SPF paper entry sensor) SPPD1 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD1 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18 PS-187-2V SCOV (SPF cover SW) 1 +24VPD 2 +24VPD_SW
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-3
PHR-7-R
STMPS
(Stamp solenoid)
179228-4 / 292254-4 / 179228-4 1 GND 1 2 STMPU 2 3 3 STMPS/ 4 4 +24VPD_STMPS
SGS
(NC) PHR-3
(SPF document paper exit gate solenoid)
CN C 1 +24VPD_SGS 2 (NC) 3 SGS/ B3B-PH-K-S
CN B GND 1 STMPU 2 STMPS/ 3 +24VPD_STMPS 4 +5VPD 5 SPPD4 6 GND 7 B7B-PH-K-R

Base tray harness P2
(SPF reverse gate front sensor) 179228-3(BLACK) SPPD4 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD4 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-3
SPFM
(SPF transport motor)
PHR-6
CN F 1 2 3 4 5 6 B6B-PH-K-S SPFMA/ +24VPD SPFMA SPFMB +24VPD SPFMB/
179228-3 (SPF document SPLS1 length short sensor) 1 SPLS1 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SPLS1 VHPGP1S73P+-18 179228-3 (SPF document SPLS2 length long sensor) 1 SPLS2 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SPLS2 VHPGP1S73P+-18
SPRM
(SPF paper feed reverse motor)
PHR-6
CN H 1 2 3 4 5 6 B6B-PH-K-R
SPRMA/ +24VPD SPRMA SPRMB +24VPD SPRMB/
CN D PHR-12 SPLS1 1 GND 2 +5VPD_SPLS1 3 SPLS2 4 GND 5 +5VPD_SPLS2 6 AVCC 7 SPWS 8 GND 9 SPFC/ 10 (NC) GND 11 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 12 B12B-PH-K-S
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC 1 1 AVCC 2 2 SPWS 3 3 GND
SPWS
(SPF document width sensor)
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B 1 1 SPFC/ +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2 2
SPFC
Document tray harness P2
(SPF paper feed clutch)
3.
Signal list
Name [Type] Waste toner full detection switch [Mechanical switch] Transfer belt separation CL detection Transfer belt separation BK detection Primary transfer separation clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] ADU motor lower [Stepping motor] ADU motor lower current select ADU transport path detection 1 [Transmission type] ADU transport path detection 2 [Transmission type] Process suction fan motor lock detection Process suction fan motor LCD backlight [CCFT cool cathode ray tube] Scanner lamp Function/Operation Detects waste toner. Detects the transfer belt separation CL. Detects the transfer belt separation BK. Controls the primary transfer separation mode. Drives the right door section. Connector level "L" "H" Empty Full Separated Separated Separated Contact Contact Contact Connec tor No. CN13 CN13 CN12 CN11 7 31 27 12 Pin No. PWB name PCU PCU PCU PCU NOTE
Signal name 1TNFD 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K 1TURC
ADUM_L
CN8
3, 5, 7, 9 1 4
PCU
Drives with the 4-phase signal.
ADUM_L_C APPD1
Selects the ADU motor lower current. Detects paper pass in the ADU upper stream section. Detects paper pass in the ADU medium stream section. Detects the process suction fan motor lock. Cools the process. LCD backlight Radiates lights to the document for the CCD to scan the document images. Detects the tray 1 upper limit.
Large current Pass
Small current
CN8 CN7
PCU PCU
APPD2
Pass
CN7
18
PCU
CCFM_LD CCFM_V CCFT CL
Stop ON ON
Lock detection Drive OFF OFF
CN19 CN19 CN13 CN5
7 4 6 3
PCU PCU SCU SCU
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1 CLUM2 CPED1 CPED2 CPFC
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) [Transmission type] Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) [Transmission type] Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) [DC brush motor] Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) [DC brush motor] Tray 1 paper empty detection [Transmission type] Tray 2 paper empty detection [Transmission type] Tray vertical transport clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) [Transmission type] Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) [Transmission type] Paper feed motor [Brushless motor] Paper feed motor lock detection Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] Tray 1 remaining paper quantity detection Tray 2 remaining paper quantity detection Tray 1 detection Tray 2 detection CL phase detection BK phase detection
Upper limit
CN9
PCU
Detects the tray 2 upper limit.
Upper limit
CN9
PCU
Drives the paper tray lift plate. Drives the paper tray lift plate. Detects paper empty in the tray 1. Detects paper empty in the tray 2. Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section. Detects paper pass in the tray 1. Detects paper pass in the tray 2. Drives the paper feed section. Detects the paper feed motor lock. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section. Detects the remaining paper quantity in the tray 1. Detects the remaining paper quantity in the tray 2. Detects the tray 1. Detects the tray 2. Detects the CL phase. Detects the BL phase.
Stop Stop YES YES ON
Drive Drive NO NO OFF
CN5 CN5 CN9 CN9 CN5
8 10 9 10 1
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU
CPFD1
Pass
CN9
15
PCU
CPFD2
Pass
CN9
16
PCU
CPFM_D CPFM_LD CPUC1
Drive ON
Stop Lock detection OFF
CN6 CN6 CN5
24 22 3
PCU PCU PCU
CPUC2
ON
OFF
CN5
PCU
CSPD1
Remaining quantity Remaining quantity YES YES
CN9
21
PCU
CSPD2
CN9
22
PCU
Detects during lifting up. Detects during lifting up.
CSS1 CSS2 DHPD_CL DHPD_K
NO NO Reference Reference
CN9 CN9 CN11 CN11
25 26 16 13
PCU PCU PCU PCU
Signal name DL_BK DL_C DL_M DL_Y DSW_ADU
Name [Type] Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharge lamp Y [LED] ADU transport open/close detection [Transmission type] Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/ close detection Front door open/close switch [Micro switch] Right door open/close switch [Micro switch] Development drive motor (CL) [Brushless motor] Development drive motor (CL) lock detection Development drive motor (K) [Brushless motor] Development drive motor (K) lock detection Fusing fan motor
Function/Operation Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum. Detects open/close of the ADU cover. Detects open/close of the tray 1, 2 transport cover. Detects open/close of the front door, and fusing, motor, LSU laser power line. Detects open/close of the right door, and fusing, motor, LSU laser power line. Drives the development section, the color OPC drum, and the transfer section. Detects the development drive motor (CL) lock. Drives the development section, the black OPC drum, and the transfer section. Detects the development drive motor (K) lock. Cools motor related to the fusing section and paper exit section. Detects the fusing fan motor lock. Drives the fusing unit.
Connector level "L" "H" OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Open ON ON ON Close
Connec tor No. CN10 CN10 CN10 CN10 CN2 1
Pin No.
PWB name PCU PCU PCU PCU RD I/F
NOTE
21 2 22 7
DSW_C DSW_F
Open Open
Close Close
CN9 CN16
30 4
PCU PCU
DSW_R
Open
Close
CN16
PCU
DVM_CL_D
Drive
Stop
CN11
PCU
DVM_CL_LD DVM_K_D
Drive
Lock detection Stop
CN11 CN11
10 7
PCU PCU
DVM_K_LD FUFM_V
OFF
Lock detection ON
CN11 CN13
9 1
PCU PCU
FUFM_LD FUM
Fusing fan motor lock detection Fusing drive motor [Stepping motor] Fusing drive motor current select Heater lamp lower main Heater lamp upper main Heater lamp upper sub Heater lamp upper assist Fusing pressure detection sensor [Transmission sensor] Shifter home position detection Humidity detection LSU shutter solenoid High voltage BK error detection
Lock detection
CN13 CN8
15 6, 8, 10, 12 4 10 14 12 8 30 24 8 3 17
PCU PCU Drives with the 4-phase signal.
FUM_CNT HLOUT_LM HLOUT_UM HLOUT_US HLOUT_UW HLPCD HPOS HUD_M LSUSS_B MC_BK_ERR
Selects the fusing drive motor current. Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp lower main. Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp upper main. Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp upper sub. Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp upper assist. Detects a change in the fusing pressure. Detects the shifter home position. Detects the humidity. Controls open/close of the LSU shutter. Detects an abnormal output of high voltage BK.
Large current OFF OFF OFF OFF Pressure release Open Error detection
Small current ON ON ON ON Pressure applying Home position Close
CN8 CN13 CN13 CN13 CN13 CN13 CN12 CN7 CN19 CN6
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU Judged when a high voltage is outputted. Analog detection
MC_CL_ERR MHPS MIM MPED
High voltage CL error Scanner home position sensor [Transmission type] Scanner motor [Stepping motor] Manual feed paper empty detection [Transmission type] Manual feed paper entry detection [Transmission type] Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) [Electromagnetic solenoid]
Detects an abnormal output of high voltage CL. Detects the scanner home position. Scanner (reading) section Detects paper empty in the manual paper feed tray. Detects paper empty in the manual paper feed tray. Controls the paper pickup solenoid (manual paper feed) [Electromagnetic solenoid]
Error detection YES
Home position NO
CN6 CN9 CN4 CN3
19 1 1, 2, 3, 4 7
PCU SCU SCU RD I/F Manual paper feed unit
MPFD MPFS
Pass Pickup
CN7 CN7
6 22
PCU PCU
Signal name MPGS
Name [Type] Manual feed gate solenoid [Electromagnetic solenoid] Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] Manual paper feed tray paper width detector [Volume resistance] Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection 1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection 2 Original cover SW [Transmission type] Shift motor [Stepping motor]
Function/Operation Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid. Detects the paper length in the manual paper feed tray. Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section. Detects the paper width in the manual paper feed tray. Detects the pull-out position of the manual paper feed tray. (Retraction position) Detects the pull-out position of the manual paper feed tray. (Pull-out position) Detects open/close of the document cover (document size detection trigger). Offsets the paper.
Connector level "L" "H" ON OFF
Connec tor No. CN7
Pin No. 14
PWB name PCU
NOTE
MPLD
Detection
CN3
16
RD I/F
Manual paper feed unit
MPUC
ON
OFF
CN7
20
PCU
MPWD
CN7
PCU
Analog detection Manual paper feed unit Manual paper feed unit
MTOP1
Storing position Pull-out position Open
CN3
25
RD I/F
MTOP2
CN3
22
RD I/F
OCSW
Close
CN10
SCU
OSM
CN12
12, 13, 14,15 14 18 12 9 11
PCU
OZFM_CNT OZFM_LD OZFM_V PCS_CL PCSS
OZFM speed control Ozone fan motor lock detection Ozone fan motor Process control sensor [Reflection type] Process control shutter solenoid [Electromagnetic solenoid] Transport motor [Stepping motor]
Controls the OZFM speed. Detects the ozone fan motor lock. Discharges the ozone. Detects the toner patch density. Controls ON/OFF of the process control and the registration shutter. Transports between the registration roller and the paper feed section. Transports between the registration roller and the right door section. Selects the transport motor current. Detects the paper exit from fusing. Detects the discharged paper. Detects paper exit to the right tray. Controls the speed of the paper exit cooling fan motor. Cools the fusing unit. Detects the POFM lock. Detects the POFM lock. Cools the fusing unit. Drives the paper exit roller.
Stop Open
Lock detection Drive Close
CN5 CN5 CN5 CN6 CN6
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU
Drives with the 4-phase signal. Pulse (Duty) drive
Analog detection
PFM
CN8
20, 22, 24, 26
PCU
Drives with the 4-phase signal.
PFM_CNT POD1 POD2 POD3 POFM_CNT POFM_F POFM_LD1 POFM_LD2 POFM_R POM
Transport motor current select Fusing rear detection [Transmission type] Paper exit detection [Transmission type] Right tray paper exit detection Paper exit cooling fan motor speed control Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) POFM lock detection POFM lock detection Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Paper exit drive motor [Stepping motor] Paper exit drive motor current select Registration front detection [Transmission type] Registration detection Fusing pressure release motor [Stepping motor] Power cooling fan motor 1 lock detection Power cooling fan motor 2 lock detection Power cooling fan motor 1
Large current Pass Pass Stop Stop
Small current Pass Drive Lock detection Lock detection Drive
CN8 CN12 CN12 CN7 CN12 CN12 CN12 CN12 CN12 CN8
18 25 23 17 17 16 18 19 16 13, 15, 17, 19 11 12 18 20, 22, 24, 26 13 22 11
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU Drives with the 4-phase signal. Pulse (Duty) drive
POM_CNT PPD1 PPD2 PRM
Selects the paper exit drive motor current. Detects paper in front of the registration roller. Detects paper at the rear of the registration roller. Changes the fusing pressure.
Large current Pass Pass
Small current
CN8 CN6 CN6 CN13
PCU PCU PCU PCU Drives with the 4-phase signal.
PSCF_LD PSFM2_LD PSFM_V
Detects the power cooling fan motor 1 lock. Detects the power cooling fan motor 2 lock. Cools the power unit.
Stop
Lock detection Lock detection Drive
CN5 CN5 CN5
PCU PCU PCU
Signal name PSFM_V2 PTC_ERR PTC_HEAT PWM PWRSW RCFM_LD
Name [Type] Power cooling fan motor 2 PTC high voltage error detection PTC heater MFP cooling fan Operation panel power switch [Push switch] Machine rear section cooling fan motor lock detection Machine rear section cooling fan motor Registrations sensor (Front) [Reflection type] Registration sensor LED (Front) [LED] Registration sensor (Rear) [Reflection type] Registrations sensor LED (Rear) [LED] Registration motor [Stepping motor] Registration motor current select Toner density sensor [Magnetic sensor] Toner density sensor [Magnetic sensor] Toner density sensor [Magnetic sensor] Toner density sensor [Magnetic sensor] Paper exit full detection [Transmission type] Right tray paper exit full detection LSU UN thermister Lower main thermister Temperature detection Upper main thermister Upper main thermister Upper sub thermister Toner motor C [Stepping motor] Toner motor K [Stepping motor] Toner motor M [Stepping motor] Toner motor Y [Stepping motor] Dehumidifying heater control Waste toner drive motor [Synchronous motor]
Function/Operation Cools the power unit. Detects the output abnormality of the PTC high voltage. Turns ON/OFF of the PTC heater. Cools the controller. Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power. Detects the cooling fan motor lock in the machine rear section. Cools the machine rear section. Detects registration shift. Registration sensor LED light emitting Detects registration shift. Registration sensor LED light emitting Drives and turns ON the registration roller. Selects the registration motor current. Detects the toner density (C). Detects the toner density (K). Detects the toner density (M). Detects the toner density (Y). Detects the face-down paper exit tray full. Detects the paper exit full in the right tray. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature. Detects the temperature. Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit. Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit. Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit. Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit. Turns ON/OFF the dehumidifying heater. Stirs waste toner.
Connector level "L" "H" Stop Drive Error detection OFF ON OFF ON ON (PWM control) OFF Lock detection Drive
Connec tor No. CN5 CN14 CN12 CN19 CN12 CN13
Pin No. 21 7 30 82 8 23
PWB name PCU PCU PCU MFPC MOTHER PCU
NOTE
RCFM_V REGS_F REGS_F_LED REGS_R REGS_R_LED RRM
Stop
CN13 CN6 CN6 CN6 CN6 CN8
25 5 7 6 8 14, 16, 23, 25 21 27 7 8 28 22 1 5 9 19 8 1 4 24, 26, 28, 30 21, 23, 25, 27 14, 16, 18, 20 11, 13, 15, 17 19 11, 13
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU Analog detection Analog output Analog detection Analog output Drives with the 4-phase signal.
RRM_CNT TCS_C TCS_K TCS_M TCS_Y TFD2 TFD3 TH1_LSU TH_LM_IN TH_M TH_UM_IN TH_UMCS_IN TH_US_IN TNM_C
Large current Full Full
Small current
CN8 CN10 CN10 CN10 CN10 CN12 CN2 CN18 CN12 CN7 CN12 CN12 CN12 CN14
PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU RD I/F PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU PCU Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection Drives with the 4-phase signal. Drives with the 4-phase signal. Drives with the 4-phase signal. Drives with the 4-phase signal. Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection Analog detection
TNM_K
CN14
PCU
TNM_M
CN14
PCU
TNM_Y
CN14
PCU
WH_CNT WTNM
OFF
ON
CN5 CN13
PCU PCU Drives with the 2-phase signal.
MX-3100N
[12] OTHERS
1.
(1)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Service Manual Item

X Bypass Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection Paper Type Registration Auto Tray Switching Custom Size Registration
System settings
When User Authentication is not Enabled
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Touch the [Admin Password] key. Touch the [Password] text box and enter the administrator password. Touch the [OK] key. Displays the system setting key on the touch panel.
A. Login method
Factory default setting Plain, Auto-Inch 8-1/2" x 14" Enabled Custom 1: X=17", Y=11" Custom 2: X=17", Y=11" Custom 3: X=17", Y=11" User 1 -
* To logout, touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the screen. Also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings. (If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
(2)
When User Authentication is Enabled
a. When user authentication is by login name and password (and e-mail address) 1) 2) 3) Touch the login name key. Touch the [Admin Login] key. Touch the [Password] key. Enter the administrator password in the administrator password entry screen. 4) 1) 2) Touch the [OK] key. Touch the [Admin Login] key. Touch the [Password] key. Enter the administrator password in the administrator password entry screen. 3) Touch the [OK] key. * To logout, press the [LOGOUT] ([*]) key. (Except when entering a fax number.) (If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.) b. Login by user number
Address Control Address Book Custom Index Program Fax Data Receive/Forward I-Fax Settings*4 X Reception Start X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen X Forward Received Data Printer Condition Settings Printer Default Settings X Copies X Orientation X Default Paper Size X Default Output Tray
Enabled -
X Default Paper Type X Initial Resolution Setting X Disable Blank Page Print X Line Thickness X 2-Sided Print X Color Mode X N-Up Print X Fit To Page X Output
B. System setting list

(1) System setting (general) list
Item Total Count Job Count Device Count Default Settings Clock X Clock Adjust Specify Time Zone Date & Time Settings Synchronize with Internet Time Server X Daylight Saving Time Setting X Date Format Keyboard Select List Print (User) All Custom Setting List Printer Test Page Sending Address List Document Filing Folder List Paper Tray Settings Tray Settings X Tray 1 X Tray 2 X Tray 3*1 X Tray 4*2 X Tray 5*3 Factory default setting
Print per Unit X Quick File PCL Settings X PCL Symbol Set Setting X PCL Font Setting X PCL Line Feed Code X Wide A4 PostScript Setting*5 X Print PS Errors X Binary Processing Document Filing Control USB-Device Check User Control*6 Modify User Information
1 Portrait 8-1/2" x 11" Varies depending on the machine configuration Plain Paper 600dpi (High Quality) Disabled 5 1-Sided Auto 1-Up Enabled Varies depending on the machine configuration Enabled Disabled PC-8 Internal Font, 0: Courier 0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF Disabled Disabled Disabled -
Disable Disable [MM/DD/YYYY], [/], [Last], [12-Hour] English (US) -
*1: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed. *2: When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed. *3: When a large capacity tray is installed. *4: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. *5: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed. *6: When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user does not have the authority to configure the system settings (administrator) (excluding factory default users).
Plain, 8-1/2" x11" Plain, 8-1/2" x11" Plain, Auto-Inch Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
MX-3100N OTHERS 12 1
: '09/Sep
(2)
System setting (administrator) list

Item Factory default setting
Item Customize 3 X Data Entry*5 (Same as Scan) Home Screen Settings*2 Preview Setting X Default Preview Display Image Send -
Factory default setting
User Control User Authentication Setting X User Authentication X Authentication Method Setting
X Device Account Mode Setting Other Settings X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs
Disabled Authenticate a User by Login Name and Password Disabled Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is Reached 12 Disabled Disabled Disabled -
X The Number of User Name Displayed Setting on Operation Panel X A Warning when Login Fails X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User X Automatically print stored jobs after login X Default Network Authentication Server Setting X Count Setting after Login X User Information Print User List Page Limit Group List Authority Group List Favorite Operation Group List*1 X Favorite Operation Group Registration*1 X Home Screen List*1 User Count Energy Save Toner Save Mode X Print X Copy Auto Power Shut-Off Auto Power Shut-Off Timer
Doc. Filing X Received Date Image Check Setting X Default List/Thumbnail Display Remote Operation Settings X Remote Software Operation Operational Authority View Password Entry Screen X Operation from Specified PC Operational Authority Hostname or IP Address of PC View Password Entry Screen X Operation by User who Has Password Operational Authority View Password Entry Screen Device Control Other Settings X Original Feeding Mode X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*6 X Auto Paper Selection Setting X Tandem Connection Setting IP Address of Slave Machine Port Number Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabling of Slave Machine Mode X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode X Registration Adjustment X Optimization of a Hard Disk X Clear All Job Log Data Original Size Detector Setting X Original Detection Size Combination X Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabling of Devices X Disabling of Document Feeder X Disabling of Duplex X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 X Disabling of Tray Setting X Disabling of Finisher*9 X Disabling of Offset X Disabling of Stapler*9 X Disabling of Punch*10 X Disabling of Color Mode*11 Fusing Control Settings Copy Function Settings Initial Status Settings X Color Mode X Paper Tray
Reception Date: Twice Memory Box: Twice Twice Disabled List
Prohibited Display in Both PC and MFP Prohibited Display in Both PC and MFP Prohibited Display in Both PC and MFP
All Disabled 0.0 mm Plain Paper 0.0.0.0 50001 Disabled Disabled 3 Inch-1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 16 - 24 lbs. (60 - 90g/m2)
Preheat Mode Setting Operation Settings Other Settings X Keys Touch Sound Key Touch Sound at Initial Point X Auto Clear Setting Cancel Auto Clear Timer X Message Time Setting X MFP Display Language Setting X Disabling of Job Priority Operation X Disabling of Bypass Printing X Key Operation Setting Disable Auto Key Repeat X Disabling of Clock Adjustment X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode X Initial Original Count Setting MFP Display Pattern Setting Customize Key Setting*2 X Copy Customize 1 Customize 2 Customize 3 X Scan Customize 1 Customize 2 Customize 3 X Internet Fax*3 (Same as Scan) X Fax*4 (Same as Scan) X USB Memory Scan Customize 1 Customize 2
Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 min. (23/26 ppm model) 10 min. (31 ppm model) 1 min.
Middle Disabled 60 sec. Disabled 6 sec. American English Disabled Disabled 0.0 sec. Disabled Disabled Disabled All disabled Pattern 1
File Quick File Address Review File Quick File
X Exposure Type X Copy Ratio X 2-Sided Copy X Output Other Settings X Copy Exposure Adjustment Color Black & White
Full Color Varies depending on the machine configuration Auto 100% 1-Side to 1-Side -
5 5
Item X Rotation Copy Setting X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies X Initial Margin Shift Setting Side 1 Side 2 X Erase Width Adjustment Edge Clearance Width Center Clearance Width X Card Shot Settings Original Size Fit to Page X Automatic Saddle Stitch*6 X Initial Tab Copy Setting X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Color Adjustments X Initial Color Balance Setting X Auto Color Calibration Network Settings IPv4 Settings IPv6 Settings Enable TCP/IP Enable NetWare Enable EtherTalk Enable NetBEUI Reset the NIC Ping Command Printer Settings Default Settings X Prohibit Notice Page Printing X Prohibit Test Page Printing X A4/Letter Size Auto Change X Print Density Level Color Black & White X CMYK Exposure Adjustment X Bypass Tray Settings Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select X Job Spool Queuing Interface Settings X Hexadecimal Dump Mode X I/O Timeout X Enable USB Port X USB Port Emulation Switching X Enable Network Port X Network Port Emulation Switching X Port Switching Method Auto Color Calibration Image Send Settings Operation Settings X Other Settings Default Display Settings Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen
Factory default setting Enabled 999 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8" Disabled Enabled 1/2" Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Factory default state DHCP Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled -
Item Address Book Default Selection Initial Resolution Setting Scan
Factory default setting Tab Switch: ABC, Address Type: All Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled 200 X 200 dpi Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled 200 X 100 dpi Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled Standard Auto Text Disabled Disabled Middle 12 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled 1/2" 1/2 All disabled All disabled All disabled All disabled All disabled Disabled
Internet Fax*3
Fax*4
Enabled Disabled Disabled 3 3 0 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 60 sec. Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Switch at End of Job -
Scan (fax when fax is installed) Disabled Enabled
Default Exposure Settings Original Image Type Moire Reduction Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting Scan Complete Sound Setting The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting Disable Switching of Display Order Hold Setting for Received Data Print Default Verification Stamp Erase Width Adjustment Edge Clearance Width Center Clearance Width X Settings to Disable Registration Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*12 Disable Registration of Program Disable Registration of Memory Box Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*12 Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool*12 X Settings to Disable Transmission Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disable Selection From Address Book Disable Direct Entry Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 X Own Name and Destination Set Sender Data Registration Sender Name Sender Fax Number I-Fax Own Address Registration of Own Name Select Scan Settings X Other Settings Default Sender Set Default Color Mode Settings Black & White Color Mode Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode Initial File Format Setting File Type Black & White Color/Grayscale Specified Pages per File Number of Pages Compression Mode at Broadcasting Black & White
Disabled All disabled All disabled Disabled Disabled
Mono 2 Auto, Grayscale Disabled
PDF MMR (G4) Medium Disabled Disabled MH (G3)
Item Color/Grayscale Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail) Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder) Bcc Setting Enable Bcc Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen Disable Scan Function USB Memory Scan PC Scan Pre-Setting Mail Signature X Default Address Setting I-Fax Settings*3 X I-Fax Default Settings Auto Wake Up Print Compression Setting Speaker Volume Setting Receive Signal Communication Error Signal Original Print on Transaction Report Transaction Report Print Select Setting Single Sending Broadcasting Receiving Activity Report Print Select Setting Auto Print at Memory Full Print Daily at Designated Time Body Text Print Select Setting Pre-Setting Mail Signature X I-Fax Send Settings I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting Number of Resend Times at Reception Error Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Rotation Sending Setting Printing Page Number at Receiver Recall in Case of Line Busy Recall in Case of Communication Error X I-Fax Receive Settings Auto Receive Reduce Setting Duplex Reception Setting Set Address for Data Forwarding Direct SMTP Add Hostname or IP Address Too Hostname or IP Address Receiving Date & Time Print A3 RX Reduce POP3 Communication Timeout Setting Reception Check Interval Setting I-Fax Output Setting
Factory default setting Medium Unlimited Unlimited
Item Delete quick files at power up (protected files excluded) X Default Color Mode Settings Color Black & White X Default Exposure Settings Original Image Type Moire Reduction X Initial Resolution Settings X Color Data Compression Ratio Setting X Scan Complete Sound Setting X Default Output Tray *13
Factory default setting Enabled
Disabled Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Enabled MH (G3) Middle Middle Print Out Error Report Only Print Out Error Report Only Print Out All Report No Printed Report Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 hour 2 Unlimited All Enabled Enabled Times: 2, Interval 3 min. Times: 2, Interval 3 min. Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 60 sec. 5 min. Varies depending on the machine configuration All Invalid
X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Setting Document Filing Settings Other Settings X Default Mode Settings X Sort Method Setting X Administrator Authority Setting Delete File Delete Folder Change Password X Delete All Quick Files Delete
Sharing Mode Date Disabled Disabled Disabled -
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting X Batch Print Settings Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. X Erase Width Adjustment Edge Clearance Width Center Clearance Width X Card Shot Settings Original Size Fit to Page Document Output Options X Print Copy Print Scan Send Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Scan to HDD X Scan Send Copy Scan Send Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Scan to HDD X Internet Fax Send*3 Copy Scan Send Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Scan to HDD X Fax Send*4 Copy Scan Send Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Scan to HDD List Print (Administrator) Administrator Settings List Image Sending Activity Report Data Receive/Forward List Web Settings List*12 Metadata Set List*5 Security Settings SSL Settings X Server Port HTTPS IPP-SSL Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page Access X Client Port HTTPS FTPS SMTP-SSL POP3-SSL LDAP-SSL
Auto Mono 2 Auto Text Disabled 600 x 600 dpi Medium Middle Varies depending on the machine configuration Disabled Enabled Enabled
1/2" 1/2" X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8" Disabled
Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled -
Disabled Disabled Disabled
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Item Level of Encryption IPsec Settings IEEE802.1X Setting Enable/Disable Settings Printer Condition Settings X Disable Blank Page Print User Control X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Operation Settings X Cancel Auto Clear Timer X Disabling of Job Priority Operation X Disabling of Bypass Printing X Disable Auto Key Repeat X Disabling of Clock Adjustment X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Device Control X Disabling of Document Feeder X Disabling of Duplex X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 X Disabling of Tray Setting X Disabling of Finisher*9 X Disabling of Offset X Disabling of Stapler*9 X Disabling of Punch*10 X Disabling of Color Mode*11 X Disabling of Master Machine Mode X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Copy Function Settings X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Printer Settings X Prohibit Notice Page Printing X Prohibit Test Page Printing X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select Image Send Settings X Other Disabling Disable Switching of Display Order Disable Scan Function PC Scan USB Memory Scan X Settings to Disable Registration Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*12 Disable Registration of Program Disable Registration of Memory Box Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*12 Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*12 X Settings to Disable Transmission Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disable Selection from Address Book Disable Direct Entry Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 Document Filing Settings X Disable Stamp for Reprinting X Batch Print Settings Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Change Administrator Password
Factory default setting Low Disabled Disabled
Item Serial Number PS3 Expansion Kit Internet Fax Expansion Kit E-mail Alert and Status Application Integration Module Application Communication Module External Account Module XPS Expansion Kit Data Backup Storage Backup Device Cloning Initialize and/or Store Settings Restore Factory Defaults Store Current Configuration Restore Configuration Sharp OSA Settings External Account Setting*15 X External Account Control X Enable Authentication by External Server USB Device Settings*16 X External Keyboard Level of Encryption X USB Memory Level of Encryption -
Factory default setting
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
Disabled Disabled Internal driver None Internal driver None
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in the Web pages *2: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system settings in the Web pages. *3: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. *4: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed. *5: When the application integration module is installed. *6: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed. *7: When a large capacity tray is installed. *8: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed. *9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. *10: When a punch module is installed. *11: When a color-related problem has occurred. *12: When network connection is enabled. *13: When the exit tray unit is installed. *14: It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed. *15: When the external account module is installed. *16: When the external account module or application communication module is installed.
Disabled Disabled Disabled All disabled All disabled All disabled All disabled All disabled Disabled
2.
Paper JAM code

Code content No jam. Also used to cancel a jam. Parameter no matching Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached JAM) CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached JAM) CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
A. PCU JAM cause

Code NO_JAM_CAUSE NO_MATCH STOP_JAM TRAY1 CPFD1_S1 CPFD1_N2 CPFD1_N3 CPFD1_N4 CPFD1_S2 CPFD1_S3 CPFD1_S4 TRAY2 CPFD2_N3 CPFD2_N4
Disabled All disabled All disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled See "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Safety Guide.
Product Key*4
Code CPFD2_S2 CPFD2_S3 CPFD2_S4 PPD1_N1 PPD1_N2 PPD1_N3 PPD1_N4 PPD1_NM PPD1_NL PPD1_NA PPD1_S1 PPD1_S2 PPD1_S3 PPD1_S4 PPD1_SM PPD1_SL PPD1_SA PPD2_N1 PPD2_N2 PPD2_N3 PPD2_N4 PPD2_NM PPD2_NL PPD2_NA PPD2_S1 PPD2_S2 PPD2_S3 PPD2_S4 PPD2_SM PPD2_SL PPD2_SA PPD2_PRI PPD2_DRUM POD1_N POD1_S POD1_FUS POD2_N POD2_S POD3_N POD3_S APPD1_N APPD1_S APPD2_N APPD2_S TRAY3 DPFD1_N4 DPFD1_S3 DPFD1_S4 DPFD2_S4 TRAY4 MFT MPFD_S LCC LPFD_SL SIZE_ILG MTR_ILG PDPPD1_N PDPPD1_S PDPPD2_N PDPPD2_S FPPD1_N FPPD1_S FPPD2_N FPPD2_S FPDD_S FSTPLJ FPNCHJ FDOP
Code content CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout) PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection) POD1 not-reached JAM POD1 remaining JAM POD1 JAM (Detection of twining to fusing) POD2 not-reached JAM POD2 remaining JAM POD3 not-reached JAM POD3 remaining JAM APPD1 not-reached JAM APPD1 remaining JAM APPD2 not-reached JAM APPD2 remaining JAM Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached) MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached) LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper) Size illegal JAM Motor driver trouble JAM Paper pass inlet port not-reached JAM Paper pass inlet port remaining JAM Paper pass outlet port not-reached JAM Paper pass outlet port remaining JAM Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM Saddle section not-reached JAM Saddle section remaining JAM Bundle exit remaining JAM Staple JAM Punch JAM Finisher door open JAM
Code FIN_TIME FIN_PAOF FPATPD_S FPPD3_N FPPD3_S CPFD2_DESK PPD1_LCC PPD2_FIN FSSMJ FPDMJ FSDMJ FGMJ FSPTMJ
Code content Finisher paper fast delivery JAM Paper spec data reception overflow Saddle transport remaining JAM Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM Saddle paper exit remaining JAM CPFD2 JAM (Desk communication abnormality detection) PPD1 JAM (LCC communication abnormality detection) PPD2 JAM (Finisher communication abnormality detection) Stapler shift motor JAM Paper exit motor JAM Saddle motor JAM Gripper motor JAM Saddle paper transport motor JAM
B. SCU JAM cause

Code NO_JAM_CAUSE NO_MATCH STOP_JAM SPPD1_N SPPD1_S SPPD2_N SPPD2_S SPPD3_N SPPD3_S SPPD4_N SPPD4_S SPPD5_N SPPD5_S SPRDMD_S SPSD_SCN SPPD2_NR SPPD2_SR ICU_REQ P_SHORT Code content No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling. Parameter no matching Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) SPPD1 not-reached JAM SPPD1 remaining JAM SPPD2 not-reached JAM SPPD2 remaining JAM SPPD3 not-reached JAM SPPD3 remaining JAM SPPD4 not-reached JAM SPPD4 remaining JAM SPPD5 not-reached JAM SPPD5 remaining JAM SPRDMD remaining JAM Exposure start notification timer end SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM ICU factor stop JAM Short size JAM
3.
Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)

2 2
: '09/Sep
B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD. If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up. The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD. Contents of this chapter HDD storage data and backup Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD HDD replacement and firmware installation (version up) Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
(1)
HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot. If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD. a. HDD storage data list
No. 1 2 Data kind e-Manual Address book Before installation (When shipping from the factory) Available Not available After installation (After use by users) Available Available Enable/ Disable of data backup Disable Enable Backup means *1 Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Not available Not available Perform with WEB PAGE. Not available Not available Perform with WEB PAGE. Not available Enable/ Disable of data reinstall Enable Enable Data reinstall procedures SIM49-3 Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Reinstall operator Service Service
Image send series registration data (Senders information, meta data, etc.) User authentication
Not available
Available
Enable
Enable
Service
Not available
Available
Enable
Enable
Service
5 6 7 8 9 10
Japanese FEP dictionary (Learning) Chinese FEP dictionary (Learning) JOB LOG JOB completion list New N/A (FSS) information Input profile (Printer) (Registration from user WEB page) Output profile (Printer) (Registration from Service WEB page) User font (Added) User macro Document filing Main program
Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available
Available Available Available Available Available Available
Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Perform with WEB PAGE. Perform with WEB PAGE. Perform with WEB PAGE. Perform with WEB PAGE. Perform with WEB PAGE. Emergency update procedures of the firmware Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup
Service or User Service
11
Not available
Available
Disable
Enable
12 13 14 15
Not available Not available Not available Available
Available Available Available Available
Disable Disable Enable Disable
Not available Not available Perform with WEB PAGE. Not available
Enable Enable Enable Enable
Service or User
Service
16
Some of system setting data
Not available
Available
Enable
Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup
Enable
Service
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using SIM49-3 and USB memory.
2 2
: '09/Sep
(2)
Replacement procedures when HDD data can be backed up
3)
Then the following message is displayed to indicate that a HDD trouble occurred.
a. Work contents and procedures

When a new HDD (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD used, or when a HDD which (used in the same is normal but a program model) is used * error occurs in it is used. Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (Servicing) Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB memory.) (Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data) Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or servicing) Back up the data to PC with Web page. (Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14 (Document filing data, JOB LOG data, Input profile) Replace the HDD. Reinstall the firmware Use SIM49-1 to reinstall (program) in the boot mode. the firmware (program). Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex machine. Formatting is automatically performed. To step 7 The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. Cancel with SIM16. Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format automatically formatted, there the HDD. is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM. Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.) Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD. Import the data backed up in Step 1. Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to import. (Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data) Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step 2. Import enable data: Document filing data, Input profile, Output profile, User font, Use macro (The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be imported.)
Version Check IcM:HDD Trouble

When the above messages are displayed, the HDD is broken down. Turn OFF the main power and replace the HDD with a new one. b. Work contents and procedures
When a new HDD (blank HDD, service part) is used, or when a HDD which is normal but a program error occurs in it is used. Reinstall the firmware (program) in the boot mode. Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine. Formatting is automatically performed. To step 4 When a used HDD (used in the same model) is used * Use SIM49-1 to reinstall the firmware (program). Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine. The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. Cancel with SIM16. Use Sim62-1 to format the HDD.
Procedures
Step 1
Procedures
Step 2
Step 1 Step 2
Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Step 3
Step 4
Step 6
Step 7
Step 5
Step 8
Step 6
Since a blank HDD is automatically formatted, there is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM. Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.) Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory shipping.
Step 9 Step 10
(4)
HDD replacement and firmware installation (version up)
a. Operations and displays after HDD replacement When a new HDD without the main program in it or a normal HDD with abnormal main program data in it is installed to the machine and the main power is turned ON, the following operations and displays are made. 1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is displayed.
Step 11
Main Program Error!!
(3)
Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the following message is displayed.
a. Display when HDD breakdown When the machine is booted with the HDD broken down, the following operation and the display are made. 1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is displayed.
Emergency Prog Init Please wait

3) The machine enters the boot mode which indicates that there is an error in the main program.
Main Program Error!!
2)
The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the following message is displayed.
Version Check IcM:UNUSUAL
Emergency Prog Init Please wait
2 2
: '09/Sep
b. Operations in the boot mode When the machine is booted in the boot mode, the firmware version check, the firmware install, and the version-up operation can be performed. When a HDD is installed to the machine and the above operation is performed, the firmware must be installed. * In the boot mode, the following keys are used for operation. Note that the functions of the keys in the boot mode differ from those in the normal mode. b-1. Key functions and operations in the boot mode 8.5 Inch LCD model
UP key DOWN key
JOB STATUS
PRINT READY DATA IMAGE SEND LINE DATA
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
LOGOUT
MENU key OK key

Key name in the normal mode Start key (Monochrome) Home key Job status key System setting key Key name in the boot mode [OK] key [MENU] key [UP] key [DOWN] key Function Performs the selected item or function. Selects a menu. Selects an item. Selects an item.
8.1 Inch LCD model
UP key
DOWN key
DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND COPY JOB STATUS
PRINT READY DATA LINE DATA
SYSTEM SETTINGS
LOGOUT
MENU key
Key name in the normal mode Start key (Monochrome) Job status key Document filling key Image send key Key name in the boot mode [OK] key [MENU] key [UP] key [DOWN] key Function Performs the selected item or function. Selects a menu. Selects an item. Selects an item.
OK key
b-2. Functions in the boot mode The following two functions are available in the boot mode.
Function Firmware version check function Firmware install (update) function Content Displays the firmware version of the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, and the FAC PWB. Installs (revises) the firmware by transmitting data from the PC which is connected to the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and other options with the USB memory or the USB cable.
2 2
: '09/Sep 6) Check the result of install (update) of the firmware. Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to check the results of install (update) of all the firmware programs.
IcuM Firm Update Result : OK Firm Update IcuM Result : Not Update Firm Update IcuM Result : NG
b-3. Selection of functions in the boot mode There are two functions available in the boot mode. These modes can be selected by pressing MENU key and BACK key.
Version Check conf:xxxxxxxx
Screen Display of Firmware Update Results OK: Update success NG: Update failed
MENU key
MENU key
Not Update: The update process is not executed. Cause of Update process not executed: The option unit for the target firmware is not connected. 7) Turn OFF the power to terminate the boot mode.
Firm Update From USB Memory

c. Firmware install and version-up procedures in the boot mode 1) Boot the machine in the boot mode. When the Version Check display is indicated, press [MENU] key, and the machine enters the Firm Update mode.
(5)
1)
Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD storage Operation Manual data
Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy. (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also are copied.) NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD. The file size is different. The time stamp is different. The file exists only in the USB memory.
Firm Update From USB Memory

2) Insert the USB memory which includes the update firmware file (SFU file) into the USB port of the machine, and press [OK] key.
Firm Update > 0100P200.sfu

SFU file display 3) Select the firmware file (SFU file) of the target. Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to select the target file. When [OK] key is pressed with the directory name displayed, the control can enter the lower level directory. (However, onestep lower level) When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower level directory, the control can return to the upper level directory. 4) Press [OK] key. The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. (It takes about 1 minute.) 2)
Enter the SIM49-3 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 7(67 (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@ ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ',5!0$18$/ ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 &/26(
Firm Update Reading Data

Display of reading file data 5) After completion of reading, the firmware is installed (updated). (It takes about 5 - 6 minutes.) 3)

Insert the USB memory into the machine. When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
Firm IcuM
Update
4)
Display of firmware install (Update) process * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is currently installed (updated) is displayed sequentially. * The screen may flash instantaneously during the install (update) process. This is a normal operation. 6) 5)
Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.) The current version and the update version are displayed. Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are changed from gray-out to active display. When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual is installed. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
MX-3100N [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
(2) Rear cabinet Service Manual

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
1.
Disassembly and assembly
A. Cabinet
2
j i m a n r e l
(3)
p h g b q d f o
Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet

1)
c
Parts a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r Front cabinet Rear cabinet Left cabinet rear lower Left cabinet Upper cabinet right Upper cabinet left Upper cabinet rear cover Upper cabinet rear Front cabinet upper Operation panel base plate Right cabinet front Right connection cabinet Right cabinet rear cover Right cabinet rear Paper exit cover Paper exit tray cabinet Left cabinet rear Frame cover
2)
Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
C B 2 A 1 4 3
(1)
1)
Front cabinet
Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1
(4)
1)
Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left

Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and the table glass (C).
(6)
1)
Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate

Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the front cabinet upper.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and the upper cabinet left (B).
B
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base plate.
(7) (5)
1)
Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/Right cabinet rear cover/Right cabinet rear
Remove the front cabinet upper. Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear

Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
1) 2)
A 1
1 2 B 2
2)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A). Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet (B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk connection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear (F).
(9)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Frame cover
Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning unit. Remove the front cabinet. Remove the front cabinet upper. Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
6 A 3 F E 5 C
D 4
(8)
1)
Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left cabinet rear

Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and remove the screw. Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B). Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
1 A C 4 3 2 2
1.
NM MODEL
OTHER VBUS1 D1D1+ GND GND CN
LR 2 3 4 5 6
P 2 3 4 5 6
CN 5 4 3 2 1
VBUS DD+ GND GND
LCD
CN19 VBUS D2D2+ DGND DGND VBUS D3D3+ DGND DGND
TOUCH PANEL
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BM05B-GHS-TBT
USB I/F PWB
/CCFT 2 +CCFT 1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
INVERTER PWB
BACK LIGHT
CN13
BM10B-GHS-TBT
ORS-PD PWB
29 28 27 26 25 24
5 GND 4 CCFT 3 +24V 2 +24V GND 1 B5B-PAS K
CN11
A. 8.5 inch operation panel
MX-3100N [B] OPERATION PANEL
Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
CN6
CN1
CN4 GND 5 CCFT 4 +24V 3 +24V 2 GND 1 BM05B-GHS-TBT CN3 /YL(Y1) 4 XH(X1) 3 YH(Y2) 2 /XL(X2) 1 52271-0469
GND 50 GND 49 5V_EXT 48 GND 47 3.3V_EXT 39 /BZR 38 /KEYIN 37 SEG0LEDBPR 36 35 SEG1LEDCRR SEG2D0 34 /F0D1 33 32 /F1D2 /F2G0 31 /F3G1 30 501190-5029 1 GND GND 2 17 5V_EXT 20 GND 18 3.3V_EXT 16 /BZR /KEYIN 19 15 SEG0LEDBPR 13 SEG1LEDCRR 11 SEG2D0 9 /F0D1 /F1D2 7 5 /F2G0 /F3G1 3
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
CN12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCANCLKOUT- 10 SCANCLKOUT+ 11 D-GND 12 SCANDATA3 - 13 SCANDATA3 + 14 15 D-GND B15P-PH-K-S 5V2 1 D-GND 2 nINFO_LED 4 nWU_LED 5 nPOW_LED 6 nWU_KEY 7 5V2 4 D-GND 6 12 nINFO_LED WU_LED 8 POW_LED 10 nWU_KEY 14 501190-2029
9 3.3VPD 1 SCANDATA0 2 SCANDATA0 + D-GND 3 4 SCANDATA1 6 SCANDATA1 + D-GND 5 8 SCANDATA2 10 SCANDATA2 + 7 D-GND 12 SCANCLKOUT14 SCANCLKOUT+ D-GND 11 16 SCANDATA3 15 SCANDATA3 + 13 D-GND B16B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
PO SW PWB
D-GND D-GND nPWRSW
3 9 8
7 8 9
7 8 9
CN1
6 3
CR2 MOTHER PWB

10 6 8 16 12 14 22 18 20 28 24 26 34 30 32 D-GND LCD_DATA3 + LCD_DATA3 D-GND LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLKD-GND LCD_DATA2 + LCD_DATA2 D-GND LCD_DATA1 + LCD_DATA1 D-GND LCD_DATA0 + LCD_DATA0 -
MX-3100N OPERATION PANEL B 1

PWRSW
8.5-LVDS PWB
10 D-GND LCD_DATA3 + 11 LCD_DATA3 - 12 15 D-GND 13 LCD_CLK+ 14 LCD_CLKD-GND 16 LCD_DATA2 + 17 LCD_DATA2 - 18 D-GND 21 LCD_DATA1 + 19 LCD_DATA1 - 20 22 D-GND LCD_DATA0 + 23 LCD_DATA0 - 24 B24B-PHDSS-B
10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 DF1B-24Pin
CN3
Service Manual
CN14
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
6 D-GND +3.3V 5 +5VN 4 +12V 3 +24V2 2 1 P-GND B6P-VH
D-GND 6 +3.3V 5 4 +5VN +12V 2 1 +24V2 3 P-GND B6P-VH
OCSW
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN14
1 2 3 5VEXT D-GND OCSW 24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 /SIZE_LED 2
CN12
nRES_MFPC_SCN
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 nPOF_SCN RXD_SCN 13 12 LCD_SEL3 11 nCTS_SCN 10 LCD_SEL1 TXD_SCN 9 LCD_SEL0 8 nRTS_SCN 7 LCD_SEL2 6 5 nRES_SCN 4 nLCD_DISP 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN 2 NC 1 D-GND B14B-PHDSS-B
GND 23 GND 22 GND 21 20 GND GND 19 GND 18 17 3.3V 3.3V_EXT 16 5V_EXT 15 24V_EXT 14 24V_EXT 13 12 /YL(Y1) XH(X1) 11 YH(Y2) 10 /XL(X2) 9 SC_TEMP 8 VCONT 7 6 /CCFT PNL_SEL0 5 PNL_SEL1 4 PNL_SEL2 3 PNL_SEL3 2 DISP 1 501190-5029 GND 1 GND 2 GND 7 29 GND 39 GND 40 GND 25 3.3V 19 3.3V_EXT 23 5V_EXT 3 24V_EXT 24V_EXT 5 37 /YL(Y1) 35 XH(X1) 33 YH(Y2) /XL(X2) 31 SC_TEMP 27 VCONT 21 /CCFT 17 15 PNL_SEL0 13 PNL_SEL1 11 PNL_SEL2 9 PNL_SEL3 36 DISP 501571-4029
+3.3V NC +3.3V +3.3V UD/LR ENAB F-GND Vsync D-GND Hsync D-GND B5 B4 B3 D-GND B2 B1 B0 D-GND G5 G4 G3 D-GND G2 G1 G0 D-GND R5 R4 R3 D-GND R2 R1 R0 NC D-GND D-GND CK D-GND D-GND
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +3.3V NC +3.3V +3.3V NC ENAB F-GND Vsync D-GND Hsync D-GND B5 B4 B3 D-GND B2 B1 B0 D-GND G5 G4 G3 D-GND G2 G1 G0 D-GND R5 R4 R3 D-GND R2 R1 R0 NC D-GND D-GND CK D-GND D-GND
CN10 F.G. SRA-21T-4
1 5VEXT D-GND 2 3 OCSW 4 24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 5 /SIZE_LED2 6 B6P-PH-H-S
Signal OCSW PWRSW No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Name Original cover SW Operaton panel power supply switch Name MFP OPE-P PWB LVDS PWB Document detection light receiving PWB Document detection light emitting PWB LCD INV PWB USB connector PWB
Function/Operation Document size detection timing switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source. Function/Operation Detects the pressed key on the operation panel. Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD. Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size. Emits light for detection of the document size. Emits the document size detection LED lights. For USB connecting
NM MODEL
OTHER VBUS1 D1D1+ GND GND CN
LR 2 3 4 5 6
P 2 3 4 5 6
CN 5 4 3 2 1
VBUS DD+ GND GND
LCD
BM05B-GHS-TBT USB I/F PWB
2 /CCFT +CCFT 1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
CN19 VBUS D2D2+ DGND DGND VBUS D3D3+ DGND DGND
TOUCH PANEL
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
INVERTER PWB
BACK LIGHT
CN13
BM10B-GHS-TBT
29 28 27 26 25 24
CN4 24V_EXT 3 D-GND 2 /CCFT 1 S3B-PH-SM4-TB 1 24V_EXT 2 D-GND /CCFT 3 S3B-PH-K-S
ORS-PD PWB
CN11
B. 8.1 inch operation panel
CN6 CN1
1 GND GND 2 17 5V_EXT 20 GND 18 3.3V_EXT 16 /BZR 19 /KEYIN 15 SEG0LEDBPR 13 SEG1LEDCRR 11 SEG2D0 9 /F0D1 /F1D2 7 5 /F2G0 /F3G1 3
50 GND GND 49 5V_EXT 48 GND 47 3.3V_EXT 39 /BZR 38 /KEYIN 37 SEG0LEDBPR 36 35 SEG1LEDCRR SEG2D0 34 33 /F0D1 /F1D2 32 /F2G0 31 /F3G1 30 501190-5029
CN3 /YL(Y1) 1 XH(X1) 2 3 YH(Y2) /XL(X2) 4 52271-0469
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
CN12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCANCLKOUT- 10 SCANCLKOUT+ 11 D-GND 12 SCANDATA3 - 13 SCANDATA3 + 14 15 D-GND B15P-PH-K-S 5V2 1 D-GND 2 nINFO_LED 4 nWU_LED 5 nPOW_LED 6 nWU_KEY 7 5V2 4 D-GND 6 12 nINFO_LED WU_LED 8 POW_LED 10 nWU_KEY 14 501190-2029
9 3.3VPD 1 SCANDATA0 2 SCANDATA0 + D-GND 3 4 SCANDATA1 6 SCANDATA1 + D-GND 5 8 SCANDATA2 10 SCANDATA2 + 7 D-GND 12 SCANCLKOUT14 SCANCLKOUT+ D-GND 11 16 SCANDATA3 15 SCANDATA3 + 13 D-GND B16B-PHDSS-B 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
PO SW PWB
D-GND D-GND nPWRSW
3 9 8
7 8 9
7 8 9
CN1
6 3
CR2 MOTHER PWB

10 6 8 16 12 14 22 18 20 28 24 26 34 30 32 D-GND LCD_DATA3 + LCD_DATA3 D-GND LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLKD-GND LCD_DATA2 + LCD_DATA2 D-GND LCD_DATA1 + LCD_DATA1 D-GND LCD_DATA0 + LCD_DATA0 52030-2629

V0 LP D-GND CP D-GND 3.3V_EXT M D0 D1 D-GND D2 D3 D-GND DISP VEE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 V0 LP D-GND CP D-GND 3.3V_EXT M D0 D1 D-GND D2 D3 D-GND DISP VEE
10 D-GND LCD_DATA3 + 11 LCD_DATA3 - 12 15 D-GND 13 LCD_CLK+ 14 LCD_CLKD-GND 16 LCD_DATA2 + 17 LCD_DATA2 - 18 21 D-GND LCD_DATA1 + 19 LCD_DATA1 - 20 22 D-GND LCD_DATA0 + 23 LCD_DATA0 - 24 B24B-PHDSS-B
10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 DF1B-24Pin
CN3
PWRSW
8.1-LVDS PWB
CN14
1 2 3 5VEXT D-GND OCSW 24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 /SIZE_LED 2
6 D-GND +3.3V 5 +5VN 4 +12V 3 +24V2 2 P-GND 1 B6P-VH
D-GND 6 5 +3.3V 4 +5VN 2 +12V 1 +24V2 3 P-GND B6P-VH
OCSW
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN14 F.G. SRA-21T-4
CN12
nRES_MFPC_SCN
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 nPOF_SCN RXD_SCN 13 12 LCD_SEL3 11 nCTS_SCN 10 LCD_SEL1 TXD_SCN 9 LCD_SEL0 8 nRTS_SCN 7 LCD_SEL2 6 5 nRES_SCN 4 nLCD_DISP 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN 2 NC 1 D-GND B14B-PHDSS-B
GND 23 22 GND GND 21 GND 20 19 GND 18 GND 17 3.3V 3.3V_EXT 16 5V_EXT 15 24V_EXT 14 24V_EXT 13 12 /YL(Y1) XH(X1) 11 YH(Y2) 10 /XL(X2) 9 SC_TEMP 8 VCONT 7 6 /CCFT PNL_SEL0 5 PNL_SEL1 4 PNL_SEL2 3 PNL_SEL3 2 DISP 1 501190-5029 GND 1 GND 2 GND 7 29 GND 39 GND 40 GND 25 3.3V 19 3.3V_EXT 23 5V_EXT 3 24V_EXT 24V_EXT 5 37 /YL(Y1) 35 XH(X1) 33 YH(Y2) /XL(X2) 31 27 SC_TEMP VCONT 21 17 /CCFT 15 PNL_SEL0 13 PNL_SEL1 11 PNL_SEL2 9 PNL_SEL3 36 DISP 501571-4009
CN10
1 5VEXT D-GND 2 3 OCSW 4 24VEXT /SIZE_LED1 5 /SIZE_LED2 6 B6P-PH-H-S
: '08 Oct 15
Name Original cover SW Operaton panel power supply switch Function/Operation Document size detection timing switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
Signal OCSW PWRSW
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Name MFP OPE-P PWB LVDS PWB Document detection light receiving PWB Document detection light emitting PWB LCD INV PWB USB connector PWB
Function/Operation Detects the pressed key on the operation panel. Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD. Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size. Emits light for detection of the document size. Emits the document size detection LED lights. For USB connecting
2.
Operational descriptions
3.
A. Outline
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, ansd the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and to displat the status. The LCD is provided in two types: 8.5 inch color LCD and 8.1 inch monochorme LCD. They differ in the operations. They are connected with the document detection light receiving PWB for detection of the documetn size. They receive light from the document deteciton light emitting PWB attahced to the rear frame side, detecting the document size. The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power. The USB connecter can be connected with the USB memory, the USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and he USB hub, sending these electronic data to the mother PWB. The MX-2600N and the MX-3100N are provided with the keyboard (standard for North America, option for other than SEN) under the operation panel unit, allowing text input.
A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
e g f a b d
Parts a b c d e f g LCD INV PWB POWER SW PWB MFP OPE-P PWB USB connector PWB LVDS PWB LCD module Touch panel
1) 2)
Remove the operation panel base plate. Remove the screw, and disconnect each connector (4 positions).
1
*3
*1 *4 *1
*1 *2
*1: Don't pull the lead wire. The connector can be locked. Hold the housing section of connector, pull out it. *2: There is a locking section on the reverse side. Use care for that. *3: Slowly pull the lead wire and disconnect the connector. *4: Pull out the connector from the mylar sheet.
: '08 Oct 15 Remove the screw, and remove the earth harness from the main unit. Place the operation panel upside down.
3)
1
(3)
1) 2)
LVDS PWB
Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS shield sheet.
(1)
1) 2)
LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB.
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth wire. Remove the LVDS PWB. * When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
3)
Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and remove the earth sheet and the MFP OPE-P PWB.
(4)
1) 2) 3)
LCD module
Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the LVDS shield sheet. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the Mylar.
(2)
1) 2)
USB connector PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB connector PWB.
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the Mylar.
5)
Remove the LCD module.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the LCD unit.
(5)
1) 2)
Touch panel
Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS shield sheet. 5) Remove the touch panel.
: '08 Oct 15
B. 8.1 inch operation panel unit
(1)
1) 2)
POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the screw, and remove the POWER SW PWB.
e f d g a c
Parts a b c d e f g POWER SW PWB MFP OPE-P PWB USB connector PWB LCD INV PWB LVDS PWB LCD module Touch panel
3)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the MFP OPE-P PWB.
1)
1
Remove the operation panel base plate. Remove the screw, and disconnect each connector (4 positions).
2)
(2)
*3
1) 2)
USB connector PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB connector PWB.
*1 *1
*1 *2
*1: Don't pull the lead wire. The connector can be locked. Hold the housing section of connector, pull out it. *2: There is a locking section on the reverse side. Use care for that. *3: Slowly pull the lead wire and disconnect the connector. 3) Place the operation panel upside down.
(3)
1) 2)
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the LCD INV PWB (A) and the LVDS PWB (B). * When the LCD INV PWB and the LVDS PWB are removed, the earth wire for the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
(5)
1) 2)
Touch panel
Remove the operation panel unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the LCD unit.
3)
Remove the touch panel.
(4)
1) 2)
LCD module
Remove the operation panel unit. Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the LCD module.
C. Keyboard unit
b
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the keytop unit.
4)
Remove the screw, and slide and remove the operation base plate.
Parts a b c Keyboard USB conversion PWB USB hub PWB
5)
Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector. Remove the keyboard.
(1)
1) 2)
Keyboard/USB conversion PWB

Remove the operation panel unit. Pull out the keytop unit. Remove the black sheet, and disconnect the connector.
6)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB conversion PWB.
(2)
1) 2)
USB hub PWB

Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector. Remove the USB hub PWB.
MX-3100N [C] RSPF SECTION
Service Manual
1.

CN H SPRMA/ 1 +24VPD 2 SPRMA 3 SPRMB 4 +24VPD 5 SPRMB/ 6 B6B-PH-K-R CN E +24VPD_SRRC 1 SRRC/ 2 3 SPED GND 4 +5V_SPED 5 +5VPD 6 SPPD1 7 GND 8 +24VPD 9 GND 10 (NC) +24VPD_SW 11 B11B-PH-K-S
A. Paper feed section
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S 1 SPED 1 2 GND 2 3 +5V_SPED 3 4 +5VPD 4 5 5 SPPD1 6 GND 6 7 +24VPD 7 8 +24VPD_SW 8
179228-3 1 2 3
SPED GND +5V_SPED
179228-3(BLACK) 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD1 3 GND PS-187-2V 1 +24VPD 2 +24VPD_SW
SCOV SPPD1 SPED

RSPF DRIVER PWB
SPRM
SPFC
SPWS SPLS1 SPLS2

179228-3 1 SPLS1 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SPLS1
CN D SPLS1 1 GND 2 +5VPD_SPLS1 3 SPLS2 4 GND 5 +5VPD_SPLS2 6 AVCC 7 SPWS 8 GND 9 SPFC/ 10 (NC) GND 11 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 12 B12B-PH-K-S
179228-3 1 SPLS2 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC 1 1 AVCC 2 2 SPWS 3 3 GND
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B 1 SPFC/ 1 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2 2
B. Reversing section
RSPF DRIVER PWB
CN G 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD2 3 GND 4 +5VPD 5 SPPD3 6 GND 7 SOCD 8 GND 9 +5VPD_SOCD 10 +5VPD 11 SPPD5 12 GND 13 (NC) (NC) B13B-PH-K-S CN B 1 GND 2 STMPU 3 STMPS/ 4 +24VPD_STMPS 5 +5VPD 6 SPPD4 7 GND B7B-PH-K-R CN C 1 +24VPD_SGS 2 (NC) 3 SGS/ B3B-PH-K-S (NC) SPRMA/ +24VPD SPRMA SPRMB +24VPD SPRMB/ CN H 1 2 3 4 5 6 B6B-PH-K-R SPFMA/ +24VPD SPFMA SPFMB +24VPD SPFMB/ CN F 1 2 3 4 5 6 B6B-PH-K-S
179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD5 SPRM
SGS
SPPD4
MX-3100N RSPF SECTION C 1
+5VPD 1 SPPD5 2 GND 3 VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPFM
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC 1 +5VPD 1 2 SPPD2 2 3 GND 3 4 +5VPD 4 5 SPPD3 5 6 GND 6 7 SOCD 7 8 GND 8 9 +5VPD_SOCD 9 10 +5VPD 10 11 SPPD5 11 12 GND 12
179228-3(BLACK) +5VPD 1 SPPD4 2 GND 3 VHPGP1A73A+-18
C. Transport section
CN F SPFMA/ 1 +24VPD 2 SPFMA 3 SPFMB 4 +24VPD 5 SPFMB/ 6 B6B-PH-K-S CN E +24VPD_SRRC 1 SRRC/ 2 3 SPED GND 4 +5V_SPED 5 +5VPD 6 SPPD1 7 GND 8 +24VPD 9 GND 10 +24VPD_SW 11 B11B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N 1 +24VPD_SRRC 1 2 SRRC/ 2
SRRC
SPFM
RSPF DRIVER PWB
SPPD3
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC 1 +5VPD 1 2 SPPD2 2 GND 3 3 +5VPD 4 4 SPPD3 5 5 GND 6 6 SOCD 7 7 GND 8 8 +5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD 10 10 SPPD5 11 11 GND 12 12 179228-3(BLACK) 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD2 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPPD2
CN G +5VPD 1 SPPD2 2 GND 3 +5VPD 4 SPPD3 5 GND 6 SOCD 7 GND 8 +5VPD_SOCD 9 +5VPD 10 SPPD5 11 GND 12 (NC) 13 (NC) B13B-PH-K-S
179228-3(BLACK) 1 +5VPD 2 SPPD3 3 GND VHPGP1A73A+-18
179228-3 1 SOCD 2 GND 3 +5VPD_SOCD VHPGP1S73P+-18
SOCD
2.
(1)
Document size detection
A. Document size detection

Size detection on the document tray The document width is detected with the SPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the SPF document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length according to the table below. When documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size is detected.
Document size AB series A5 B5 11" x 8.5" A4 B5R A4R 8.5" x 13" B4 A3 11" x 17" 8.5" x 5.5" 11" x 8.5" A4 11" x 8.5"R 8.5" x 13" 8.5" x 14" A3 11" x 17" Document length sensor SPLS1 SPLS2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
SPWS SPLS1 SPLS2
Inch series
B. Paper feed transport operation

(1)
1)
7)
Preliminary paper feed completion (Second sheet)
Single-side scan
Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) 2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet) Pickup roller falling
Paper feed start (Second sheet)
9) 3) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First sheet)
Scan completion (First sheet)/Resist operation (Second sheet)
10) Scan start (Second sheet) 4) Resist operation (First sheet)
11) Paper exit completion (First sheet) 5) Scan start (First sheet)
6)
Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
12) Scan completion (Second sheet)
13) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)
5)
Scan start (First sheet front surface)
14) Pickup roller rising
6)
Gate falling (First sheet front surface)
(2)
1)
Duplex scan
7)
Scan completion (First sheet front surface)
2)
Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet) Pickup roller falling
8)
Reverse stop Gate rising
3)
Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First sheet)
9)
Reverse start
4)
Resist operation (First sheet front surface)
10) Reverse after resist operation
11) Resist operation (First sheet back surface)
17) Document transport continuation
12) Scan start (First sheet back surface)
18) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
13) Gate falling (First sheet back surface)
19) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (Second sheet)
14) Scan completion (First sheet back surface)
20) Resist operation (Second sheet front surface)
15) Reverse stop gate rising 21) Paper exit completion (First sheet)
16) Reverse start 22) Scan start (Second sheet front surface)
23) Same operations as "5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)" and later.
(3)
1)
Stamping operation
2)
Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet) Pickup roller falling
3)
Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First sheet)
4)
Resist operation (First sheet)
5)
Scan start (First sheet)
6)
Scan completion (First sheet)
7)
Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (First sheet)
8)
Paper exit start (First sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
C. RSPF mixed document select switch

This machine is provided with the random paper feed function which allows feeding documents of different sizes. The random paper feed can be used only for single surface document of the following combinations.
Destination AB series Combinations for random paper feed A3 and B4 B4 and A4R A4 and B5 B5 and A5 8.5" and 11" width
Inch width
9)
Paper exit completion (First sheet)
To enable the mixed document mode, set the mixed document select switch to ON. To disable le, turn it OFF.
10) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (Second sheet)
ON
OFF
11) Paper exit start (Second sheet)
3.
4)
Remove the rear cabinet.
A. Document tray unit
5)
Parts SPF document with sensor
Remove the stopper.
1)
Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
2)
Open the paper feed unit, and remove the screw. 6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed PG holder, and remove the document tray unit.
2 1
1 3
3)
Remove the front cabinet.
(1)
1) 2)
SPF document with sensor

Remove the document tray unit. Remove the document tray lower.
B. Paper feed unit
Parts a SPF cover SW
1) 2) 3)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the earth wire. Remove the spring and the paper feed PG holder, and remove the paper feed unit and the upper PG link arm.
3)
Remove the SPF document width sensor.
(1)
1) 2) 3) 4)
SPF cover SW
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the paper feed unit. Remove the screws.
5)
Remove the upper cover.
3)
Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
4)
Remove the screws.
6)
Remove the SPF cover SW.
5)
Remove the transport unit.
C. Transport unit
1) 2) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the connecter.
D. Reversing section
1) 2) 3) 4)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the document tray unit. Remove the resin E-ring and the bearing. Remove the drive unit, and remove each part.
a
Parts Document paper exit gate solenoid
(1)
1) 2) 3)
Document paper exit gate solenoid

Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the solenoid adjustment plate. Remove the SPF document paper exit gate solenoid. * When installing, insert the pin of the SPF document paper exit gate solenoid into the gate.
(1)
1) 2)
SPF paper feed clutch

Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF paper feed clutch.
E. Drive unit
(2)
1) 2) 3)
SPF resist roller clutch

Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF resist roller clutch.
a
Parts SPF paper feed clutch SPF resist roller clutch SPF paper feed reverse motor SPF transport motor
a b c d
(3)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
SPF paper feed reverse motor

Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the document tray unit. Remove the drive unit. Remove the SPF paper feed reverse motor.
F. Base tray section
Parts a RSPF drive PWB
(1)
1) 2)
RSPF drive PWB

Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the RSPF drive PWB.
(4)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
SPF transport motor

Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. Remove the transport unit. Remove the document tray unit. Remove the drive unit. Loosen the screw of the tension holder to reduce the tension of the belt. Remove the SPF transport motor.
MX-3100N [D] SCANNER SECTION
Service Manual
1.
MHPS
5 4
6 7 CLI 3 8
CL INVERTOR MHPS D-GND 5V P-GND 5 4 P-GND 3 CL 2 24VPD 24VPD 1 5597-05APB
9 MIM
3 2 1 EHR-3
2 1
2
CN2
1 MHPS 2 D-GND 3 5V BM03B-GHS-TBT
P-GND 5 4 P-GND 3 CL 24VPD 2 1 24VPD 5597-05CPB7F
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN9
CN5
GND 1 AFE_RDD 2 AFE_WRD 3 AFE_SCLK 4 5 AFE_CS 6 /RES_CCDAD 7 GND 8 3.3V 9 3.3V 3.3V 10 3.3V 11 3.3V 12 3.3V 13 GND 14 5V 15 5V 16 5V 17 GND 18 10V 19 10V 20 GND 21 22 RA23 RA+ 24 GND 25 RBRB+ 26 GND 27 RC28 29 RC+ 30 GND 31 CLK32 CLK+ GND 33 RD34 RD+ 35 GND 36 RE37 RE+ 38 GND 39 40 AFE_CSTG 41 GND FI-RE41S-VF
Signal CLI MHPS MIM
Name Scanner lamp Scanner home position sensor Scanner motor
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Name Pulley belt Pulley Scanner drive wire Reflector No. 2 mirror No. 3 mirror Lens CCD PWB Idle gear
Function/Operation Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley. Drives the scanner drive wire. Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit. Condenses the copy lamp light. Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror. Inducts the document image into the lens. Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD. Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal. Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
41 GND AFE_RDD 40 AFE_WRD 39 AFE_SCLK 38 AFE_CS 37 /RES_CCDAD 36 GND 35 3.3V 34 3.3V 33 3.3V 32 3.3V 31 3.3V 30 3.3V 29 GND 28 5V 27 5V 26 5V 25 GND 24 10V 23 10V 22 GND 21 RA20 RA+ 19 GND 18 RB17 RB+ 16 15 GND 14 RC13 RC+ GND 12 CLK11 CLK+ 10 GND 9 RD8 RD+ 7 GND 6 RE5 4 RE+ GND 3 AFE_CSTG 2 GND 1 FI-RE41S-VF
CCD PWB
Function/Operation Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp) Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit. Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
MX-3100N SCANNER SECTION D 1
1 MiM_A 2 MiM_B 3 MiM_/A MiM_/B 4 B4P-PH-H-S CN4
2.
G B
A. Outline
This section performs the following functions. 1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter. The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
2) 3)
B. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive
(Image data for 1 line) The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by the drive wires. The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from the scanner control PWB.
R G B
(2)
Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal sent from the scanner control PWB.
R Red component image data
G Green component image data
B Blue component image data
(3)
Image scan/color separation
(4)
1)
Image signal A/D conversion

The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter. Each color pixel has 10bit information. The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image process section.
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue components. This operation is called the color separation. The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD elements, R, G, and B. The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected to the CCD. The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
2)
CCD PWB CCD (6 Lines) R G B
Analog IC AFE ADC LVDS
Buffer
TG
Timing Generator
(5)
Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction. Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically, but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
3.
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
A. Scanner unit
f b a d
c e
Parts Scanner lamp CL inverter PWB CCD unit Scanner motor Document detection light receiving PWB Document detection light emitting PWB
a b c d e f
(1)
1)
Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB

Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and the table glass (C).
1) 2) 3) 4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet rear. Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.. Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
2 1 C
2)
Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and remove the wire.
3)
While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit.
(2)
1)
CCD unit
Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and remove the CCD unit.
3 2 1
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
(3)
1) 2)
Scanner motor
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet rear. Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.
1
5) Remove the CL inverter PWB.
(4)
1) 2)
Document detection light receiving PWB

Remove the operation base plate. Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection light receiving PWB.
(5)
1) 2)
Document detection light emitting PWB

Remove the upper cabinet rear. Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3)
Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.
MX-3100N [E] PAPER FEED SECTION
Service Manual
1.
A. Manual paper feed section
DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 5 6 3 1 4
B13B-PASK-1
CN1 5VN 1 D-GND 2 SIN3 3 SELIN1 4 SELIN2 5 SELIN3 6 APPD1 7 APPD2 8 APPD3 9 POD3 10 11 MPFD 5VNPD 16 MPWD 13 14 TH_M 15 HUD_M S16B-PHDSS-B
1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 10 7 23 8 15 31 30 14 28 13 P
5VN D-GND SIN3 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 APPD1 APPD2 APPD3 POD3 MPFD 5VNPD MPWD TH_M HUD_M 24V3 /MPGS /MPFS 24V3 /MPUC 24V3 QR/P4 32PIN
1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 10 7 23 8 15 31 30 14 28 13 S
CN7 1 13 2 16 3 15 4 18 5 17 6 10 7 19 8
PCU PWB
5VN D-GND SIN3 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 APPD1 APPD2 NC(APPD3) POD3 MPFD 5VNPD MPWD TH_M HUD_M
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB CN3(2/2)

NC (GND) NC (5VLED) NC (GND) NC (GND) NC (GND) NC (GND) NC (GND) NC MPED 11 12 17 21 23 26 30 32 7 8 9 1 2 3 R 1 2 SM2P 24V3 /MPFS
1 2 R
/MPUC 24V3 SM2PIN
1 2 P
9 24V3 14 /MPGS 22 /MPFS 11 24V3 20 /MPUC 12 24V3 B22B-PHDSS
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 8 24V3 1 7 /MPFS 2 6 MPED 3 5 4 2 3 D-GND 5VLED7 /MPGS 5VLED6 4 5 7 6
P 1 2
PFM
R 1 2 SM2P 24V3 /MPGS P 1 2
D-GND 5VLED7 NC (FAX_D) NC (GND) 5VLED6
1 2 3
MPED D-GND 5VLED7
MPFD APPD2 D-GND 5VLED10
10 4 5 6
MPFD
8 6 4 2 5 3 1 24V3 24V3 24V3 D-GND D-GND D-GND DF11-6DP-SP2
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H 4 /MPGS 2 1 5VLED6 5 5 24V3 1 2 D-GND 4 3 MPFD 3
MPUC
1 2 3
MPFD D-GND 5VLED6
MPFD MPED MPGS 2
MPFS 3 TH_D/HUD_M MTOP2
MPWD
MTOP1 MPLD
MPLD MPLD2 5VLED12 5VN MPWD
16 13 18 19 20
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H 12 MPLD 3 14 MPLD2 1 4 11 5VLED12 10 9 5VN MPWD 5 6
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H 9 NC 1 8 2 NC 3 7 NC MPLD 6 4 5 D-GND 5 4 5VLED12 6 3 5VN 7 2 8 MPWD D-GND 9 1 1 2 3 MTOP2 D-GND 5VLED13 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 3 5 4 2 7 6 8 5VN HUD_M D-GND TH_M
1 2 3
MPLD D-GND 5VLED12
3 2 1
5VN MPWD D-GND
MTOP2 5VLED13 MTOP1 5VLED9
22 24 25 27
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13
MTOP2 5VLED13 MTOP1 5VLED9 5VN HUD_M D-GND TH_M 5VLED4
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2
MTOP1 D-GND 5VLED9
5VN 28 HUD_M 29 D-GND 14 TH_M 31 5VLED4 15 S32B-PHDSS-B
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-3100N PAPER FEED SECTION E 1
Signal name CPFM MPED MPFD MPDS MPGS MPLD MPUC MPWD MTOP1 MTOP2 PFM TH_M/HUD_M No. 1 2 3 4 5
Name Paper feed motor Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper entry detection Paper pickup solenoid Manual paper feed gate solenoid Manual paper feed length detector Manual paper feed clutch Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Transport motor Temperature/humidity detection Name Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Torque limiter Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Function/Operation Drives the paper feed section. Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper entry detection Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid. Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section. Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Storing position) Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Pulling out position) Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller and the right door section. Detects temperature and humidity. Function/Operation Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Separates paper to prevent double feed. Sends paper to the paper transport section. A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent double feed. Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
B. Tray paper feed section
INT24V2 P-GND /CPFM_GAIN /CPFM_CK /CPFM_D CPFM_LD NC R 1 2 R 1 2 R 1 2 SM-2Pin /CPFC 24V3 SM-2Pin /CPUC1 24V3 SM-2Pin /CPUC2 24V3 P-GND /CLUM1 P-GND /CLUM2 P 1 2 P 1 2 P 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 R /CPFC 24V3 /CPUC1 24V3 /CPUC2 24V3 P-GND /CLUM1 P-GND /CLUM2 SM-10Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P
CN6 32 INT24V2 30 P-GND 28 /CPFM_GAIN 26 /CPFM_CK /CPFM_D 24 22 CPFM_LD B32B-PHDSS CN5 /CPFC 1 2 24V3 3 /CPUC1 24V3 4 5 /CPUC2 6 24V3 7 P-GND 8 /CLUM1 9 P-GND 10 /CLUM2 B24B-PHDSS
PCU PWB
24V1 24V(RDSW)
1 2
5VNPD CLUD1 D-GND 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
10 11 12 7 8 9 4 5 6
PHNR-12-H + BU12P-TR-P-H 5VNPD 3 2 CLUD1 D-GND 1 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 6 5 4 9 8 7
CN16 24V1 1 2 24V(RDSW) 3 24V(RDSW) 4 24V(FDSW) B4P-VH
P 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 31 30 29
DF1B-32DE 5VNPD CLUD1 D-GND 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 5VN DSW_C D-GND
S 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 31 30 29
C N9 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 31 30 29
5VNPD CLUD1 D-GND 5VNPD CPED1 D-GND 5VN CPFD1 D-GND 5VN DSW_C D-GND
CLUM1 CPFM CPUC1
CLUD1 CPED1 2
CLUM2 1 3 CPUC2 DSW_R CPFD1 CSS1 CSPD1
10 9
CPFC
5VNPD CSPD1 D-GND CSS1 D-GND NC NC
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
19 21 23 25 27
5VNPD CSPD1 D-GND CSS1 D-GND
19 21 23 25 27
19 21 23 25 27
11
5VNPD CLUD2 D-GND 5VNPD CPED2 D-GND
1 2 3 1 2 3
7 8 9 4 5 6
PHNR-9-H BU09P-TR-P-H 5VNPD 3 2 CLUD2 D-GND 1 5VNPD CPED2 D-GND 6 5 4
2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12
CLUD2 CPED2 6
5 7
8 12
CPFD2
5VN CPFD2 D-GND
1 2 3
1 2 3
5VN CPFD2 D-GND
9 8 7
14 16 18
5VN CPFD2 D-GND
14 16 18
14 16 18
5VN CPFD2 D-GND
CSS2 CSPD2
5VNPD CSPD2 D-GND CSS2 D-GND NC NC 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
20 22 24
11
20 22 24 26 28
20 22 24
5VNPD CSPD2 D-GND
26 28
26 CSS2 28 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
Signal name CLUD1 CLUD2 CLUM1 CLUM2 CPED 1 CPED 2 CPFC CPFD1 CPFD2 CPFM CPUC1 CPUC2 CSPD1 CSPD2 CSS1 CSS2 DSW_C No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Name Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray vertical transport clutch Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Paper feed motor Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 installation detection Tray 2 installation detection Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection Name Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Torque limiter Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transport roller 5 (drive) Transport roller 7 (drive) Rotating plate Transport roller 14 (drive)
Function/Operation Tray 1 upper limit detection Tray 2 upper limit detection Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section. Detects tray 1 paper pass. Detects tray 2 paper pass. Drives the paper feed section. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section. Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section. Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 installation defection Tray 2 installation defection Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection Function/Operation Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Sends paper to the paper transport section. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Always provides a certain level of resistance to the rotation of the separation roller, preventing against double feed. Feeds paper to the paper transport section. Sends paper to the paper transport section. Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and the paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7. Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7. Transport paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2 and 3, 4 to the transport roller 8. Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position. Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
2.
B. Tray paper feed
(1) Paper feed front operation
Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor. The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up. The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
A. Hand feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the paper feed roller section. The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual transport roller.
(2)
Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding paper. At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3)
Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result is displayed.
(4)
Paper remaining quantity detection method
The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets) The no-paper detection sensor detects the state of no remaining paper. During no-paper detection CPED (paper sensor) Turn plate Remaining Paper Detection Actuator
1/3 Field Sensor logic: Low
CSPD (remaining paper detection)
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field Sensor logic: Low
3.

1) Open the right door.
A. Manual paper feed unit
d a
b
2)
Parts Temperature humidity sensor Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Manual paper feed gate solenoid Paper pickup solenoid
Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
a b c d
3)
Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
(1)
1) 2)
Temperature and humidity sensor/Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
3) 4) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and disconnect the connector.
1
2 3
4)
Remove the temperature and humidity sensor.
2
5) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual feed tray unit.
5)
Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector.
6)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed unit.
(2)
1) 2)
Manual paper feed gate solenoid

Remove the manual paper feed unit. Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
4)
Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
5) 3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
1
6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.
(3)
1) 2)
Paper pickup solenoid

Remove the manual paper feed unit. Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
7)
Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
3)
Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1 2
2 1
8)
Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
5)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
B. Tray paper feed unit

1) 2) Remove the right cabinet front. Remove the tray 1 and 2.
C. Others
1
Parts Tray 1, 2 installation detection
3)
Remove the right lower door unit.
(1)
1)
Tray 1, 2 installation detection

4)
Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
2)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the tray 1, 2 installation detection unit.
3)
Disengage the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 installation detection. Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 installation detection.
MX-3100N
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION

1.
Service Manual
RRM
INT24V1 INT24V1 PFMB/ PFMB PFMA PFMA/ PHR-6 2 5 6 3 1 4 1 6 3 5 4 2
DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3 1 2 3 4 5 6 INT24V1 INT24V1 PFMB/ PFMB PFMA PFMA/
1 2
PFM
PPD2 3 PPD1
5VNPD PPD1 D-GND 1 2 3 179228-3
INT24V1 INT24V1 RRMB/ RRMB RRMA RRMA/ B6P-PH-K-R
7 INT24V1 8 INT24V1 9 RRMB/ 10 RRMB 11 RRMA 12 RRMA/ N,C 13 B13B-PASK-1
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H 4 5VNPD 3 5 PPD1 2 6 D-GND 1 3 5VNPD 4 2 PPD2 5 1 D-GND 6
5VNPD PPD2 D-GND
1 2 3 179228-3
CN6 10 5VNPD 12 PPD1 14 D-GND 16 5VNPD 18 PPD2 20 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
PCU PWB
Signal name PFM PPD1 PPD1 RRM No. 1 2 3
Name Transport motor Resist pre-detection Resist detection Resist motor Name Resist roller (drive) Resist roller (idle) Transport roller 8 (drive)
Function/Operation Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller and the right door section. Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF. Function/Operation Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper, and adjusts the relative relations between images and paper. Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport power of the transport roller. Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 1
2.
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
3.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Remove the developing unit (K). Remove the drum unit (K). Remove the primary transfer unit. Remove the tray paper feed unit 1. Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the ADU connection drive.
A. Resist roller unit
7)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the resist roller unit.
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 2
R P 1 1 2 2 SM-2Pin
LSUSS
CN19 INT24V1 1 NC 2 /LSUSS_B 3 B7B-PH-K-S
D-GND n BD D-GND 5VN B4B-PH-K-S
P R 1 1 2 2 SM-2Pin
4 3 2 1
PCU PWB
D-GND LSUTH1 NC NC B4B-PH-K-S
4 3 2 1
10 9
CN1 1 D-GND n BD 2 D-GND 3 5VN 4 5 D-GND 6 LSUTH1 7 NC B7B-PH-K-S
Service Manual
CN3 3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND S06B-XASK-1
2 1 4 3 5 6
CN4 1 8 5 7 2 4
3.3V CN D-GND 5V CN D-GND 24V P-GND
+5V +5V
5V_LD 5V_LD
n SH_YMC1 GND n SH_YMC2 GND DT_C1+ DT_C1GND n LDERR_C VREF_C1 VREF_C2 DT_C2+ DT_C2GND n ENB_YMC
40 42 44 46 23 21 25 20 24 22 17 15 19 38
49 47 45 43 50 48 46 41 39 37 44 42 40 35
/SH_C1 D-GND /SH_C2 D-GND DT_C1+ DT_C1D-GND /LDERR_C VREF_C1 VREF_C2 DT_C2+ DT_C2-
S20B-PHDSS
D-GND /ENB_C DT_M1+ DT_M1GND n LDERR_M VREF_M1 VREF_M2 DT_M2+ DT_M2GND DT_Y1+ DT_Y1GND n LDERR_Y VREF_Y1 VREF_Y2 DT_Y2+ DT_Y2GND 47 45 49 32 36 34 41 39 43 35 33 37 26 30 28 29 27 31 LDCHK_1 1 LDCHK_2 2 501571-5007 /BREAK POLYCLK /LOCK /START P-GND 24V1 B6B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 4 5 6 38 36 34 33 31 29 32 30 28 26 24 22 27 25 23 20 18 16 DT_M1+ DT_M1D-GND /LDERR_M VREF_M1 VREF_M2 DT_M2+ DT_M2D-GND DT_Y1+ DT_Y1D-GND /LDERR_Y VREF_Y1 VREF_Y2 DT_Y2+ DT_Y2D-GND 19 LDCHK_1 21 LDCHK_2 501190-5017 CN2 6 /BREAK POLYCLK 5 /LOCK 4 /START 3 P-GND 2 24V1 1 B6B-PH-K-S
MX-3100N
[G] LSU SECTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CN5 CH0_N 23 CH0_P 24 22 D-GND 21 D-GND CH1_N 19 CH1_P 20 CH2_N 17 CH2_P 18 16 D-GND 15 D-GND CLCLK_N 13 14 CLCLK_P CH3_N 11 CH3_P 12 10 D-GND D-GND 9 CH4_N 7 CH4_P 8 5 ECLK_LSU_N 6 ECLK_LSU_P 4 D-GND 3 D-GND HSYNC_LSU_P 1 2 HSYNC_LSU_N B24B-PHDSS
1.
LD PWB
MOTHER PWB
LSU PWB
DT_K1+ DT_K1GND n SH_K1 GND n SH_K2 GND n LDERR_K DT_K2+ DT_K2GND VREF_K1 VREF_K2 n ENB_K
11 9 13 4 6 8 10 12 5 3 7 16 14 18
14 12 10 9 7 5 3 17 8 6 4 15 13 11
2 3
DT_K1+ DT_K1D-GND /SH_K1 D-GND /SH_K2 D-GND /LDERR_K DT_K2+ DT_K2D-GND VREF_K1 VREF_K2 /ENB_K
LSU_ASIC_RST
/TRANS_RST JOBEND_INT TH_LSU /PCU_TRG VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_C_P VSYNC_C_N VSYNC_M_N VSYNC_M_P VSYNC_Y_P VSYNC_Y_N
MX-3100N LSU SECTION G 1

PGM 1 4
CN1 50 48
CN7 1 2
CN4 5VLD D-GND /SCK_LSU D-GND /TRANS_DAT D-GND /RST_DAT
1 2 4 3 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6 5VLD 12 D-GND 14 /SCK_LSU 15 D-GND /TRANS_DAT 13 18 D-GND 16 /RST_DAT 10 LSU_ASIC_RST /TRANS_RST 11 JOBEND_INT 17 20 TH_LSU 19 /PCU_TRG VSYNC_K_N 28 VSYNC_K_P 27 VSYNC_C_P 26 VSYNC_C_N 25 VSYNC_M_N 24 VSYNC_M_P 23 VSYNC_Y_P 22 VSYNC_Y_N 21 B28B-PHDSS
: '09/Sep
Name Polygon motor LSU shutter solenoid Function/Operation Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating. Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Signal name PGM LSUSS
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Name LD PWB Cylindrical lens f lens 1 f lens 1 Reflection mirror Cylindrical lens Collective lens for BD BD PWB LSU PWB LSU thermistor
Function/Operation Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values. Converges laser beams to focus. Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as that at the center. Assures the optical path for laser. Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum. Converges laser beams to the BD PWB. Detects the timing for starting laser scanning. Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control signal and image data. Measures the temperature in LSU.
2.
(Scanning system)
A. Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum.
2
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2 lines of laser for one color are radiated. However, the 23ppm model employs the one-laser system which radiates one laser for one color. The LSU unit is composed of the optical element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system including the mirror which assures light path, and the main scanning system.
B. Composition
(Primary system)
LD1 LD2
LD2 LD1
LD1 LD2
LD1 LD2
Main scanning direction

Rear Scanning direction LD2 LD1 Scanning direction LD2 LD1
BK C M Y Front
: '09/Sep
(Writing position on paper)
3.
Paper exit direction Rear Scanning direction
A. LSU
LD2
LD1
LD2
LD1
LD1
LD2
LD2
LD1 Front
(On the polygon motor)

Model Number of mirror surface 7 surfaces Rotating speed 27334rpm Bearing OIL Remarks a Polygon motor
Parts
1) 2)
MX-2301/2600/ 3100
Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."] Remove the waste toner box.
C. Outline of LSU specifications

2
Effective scan width : Resolution: Beam diameter: Laser power: LD wavelength: 307mm 1200dpi (26/31 ppm models) 600dpi (23 ppm model) Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m Max 0.255mW (26/31 ppm models) Max 0.380mW (23 ppm model) 770 to 795nm
3)
Remove the LSU left plate PA.
4)
Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen the screw (B). Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screw.
(1)
1) 2)
Polygon motor
Remove the LSU. Remove the screw, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
5)
Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove the LSU shaft.
3)
Remove the screw, and lift the LSU CNT PWB cover F (A). Remove the screw, and lift the polygon motor unit (B).
A 2
3 1 B
A 2
6)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the polygon motor. * When installing, do not touch the polygon mirror movable section and the mirror surface.
B. Others
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
a
Parts LSU shutter solenoid 1
(1)
1) 2) 3)
LSU shutter solenoid 1

Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the MC PWB. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the filter box unit.
6)
Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
7) 8)
Remove the LSU. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid unit.
4)
Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Disconnect the connector.
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the solenoid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.
9)
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter lever arm.
1.
MC
MC-CL GB-Y GB-M GB-C GB-K MC-K B32B-PHDSS
GB
MC PWB
MC
D-GND NC /DL_BK 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK 1 2 3 PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 9 D-GND 2 D-GND CN10 3
GB
CN1 8 INT24V2 D-GND 7 6 /HV_DATA /HV_CLK 5 4 /HV_LD 3 HV_REM 2 MC_CL_ERR 1 MC_BK_ERR B8B-PASK CN6 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR
MC 2
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H D-GND 2 9 23 21 /DL_C D-GND 10 PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 9 D-GND 2 4 2 /DL_M D-GND 10 /DL_M 1 /DL_C 1 D-GND NC /DL_C 1 2 3
GB
MX-3100N [H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
MC
GB
PCU PWB
D-GND NC /DL_M
1 2 3
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 2 D-GND 9 24 22 /DL_Y D-GND 10 /DL_Y 1
2 DL_Y
B40B-PADSS-1
D-GND NC /DL_Y 1 2 3
DL_M DL_C
MX-3100N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION H 1

DL_BK DVM_CL DVM_K
1 2 4 5 7 3 6 INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD NC NC VM_CL INT24V2 P-GND /DVMC_CK /DVMC_D DVMC_LD NC NC 1 2 4 5 7 3 6 CN11 1 3 5 7 9 INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD INT24V2 2 P-GND 4 /DVMC_CK 6 /DVMC_D 8 DVMC_LD 10 B18B-PHDSS
Service Manual
Signal name DVM_CL DVM_K DL MC GB No. 1 2
Name Developing drive motor (Color) Developing drive motor (Black) Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Main charger (Y,M,C,K) Grid (Y,M,C,K) Name OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Cleaning blade
Function/Operation Color developing unit/Color drum drive Black developing unit/Black drum drive Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface. The OPC drum surface is charged negatively. The OPC drum surface potential is controlled. Function/Operation Latent electrostatic images are formed. Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
2.
3)
After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the cleaning blade. Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. 1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
Aluminum layer CGL CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid
High voltage unit
Main corona unit

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied to the screen grid. 2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
OPC drum
Laser beams
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative and positive charges are generated. Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum. Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage. Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC drum surface.
4)
The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
2)
Remove the waste toner box unit.
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens, light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface. When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum CGL, positive and negative charges are generated. Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum. Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC drum. 3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is released, and open the drum positioning unit.
A B
(CAUTION) When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position. 4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1position for each color)
3.
1)

1
A. Drum unit
5)
(1)
1) 2)
Waste toner drive motor

Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External view.") Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive unit. Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor from he waste toner drive unit.
6)
Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly. Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both hands.
(2)
1) 2)
Waste toner full detection switch

Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External view.") Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive unit.
B. Others
b a
3)
a b Parts Waste toner drive motor Waste toner full detection switch
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner box instillation lever. Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove the waste toner full detection switch.
1.
[i]
MX-3100N
Signal name TNM CRUM
No. 1
1 2 3 4 D-GND 5VN /CRM_C_DT /CRM_C_CK D-GND 5 6 7 8 2 5VN 4 /CRM_C_DT 3 /CRM_C_CK D-GND 1 TSR-04V-K 1 2 3 4 5VN 2 4 /CRM_K_DT 3 /CRM_K_CK 1 D-GND TSR-04V-K 5 6 7 8 5VN /CRM_K_DT /CRM_K_CK
: '09/Sep
Toner motor (Y,M,C,K) CRUM(Y,M,C,K)
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
Toner transport pipe
Name
Name
CN15 5VN /CRM_K_DT /CRM_K_CK
D-GND
1 9 11 5
5VN /CRM_C_DT /CRM_C_CK
D-GND
3 13 15 7
CRUM(Y)
5VN /CRM_M_DT /CRM_M_CK
D-GND 13 14 15 16 P D-GND SM-18Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 5VN /CRM_Y_DT /CRM_Y_CK 13 14 15 16 R 2 5VN 4 /CRM_Y_DT 3 /CRM_Y_CK 1 D-GND TSR-04V-K
2 10 12 6
9 10 11 12
5VN /CRM_M_DT /CRM_M_CK D-GND
9 10 11 12
2 5VN 4 /CRM_M_DT 3 /CRM_M_CK 1 D-GND TSR-04V-K
CRUM(M)
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 1

CRUM(C) 1 CRUM(K)
1 2 3 4 5 6
5VN /CRM_Y_DT /CRM_Y_CK
Service Manual
4 14 16 D-GND 8 B16B-PHDSS
TNM_Y
PCU PWB
TNM_M
Function/Operation Toner supply motor to the developing unit Data memory for toner cartridge.
CN14 24V3 TNM_Y_/B TNM_Y_B TNM_Y_/A TNM_Y_A P-GND TNM_K_/B TNM_K_B TNM_K_/A TNM_K_A
TNM_C
Function/Operation Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K
22 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 P-GND P-GND 12 TNM_M_A 14 TNM_M_/A 16 TNM_M_B 18 TNM_M_/B 20 24 TNM_C_A 26 TNM_C_/A TNM_C_B 28 30 TNM_C_/B B30B-PHDSS 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN3 24V3 12 TMY_/B 1 TMY_B 3 5 TMY_/A 7 TMY_A 9 P-GND 17 TMK_/B 15 TMK_B 13 TMK_/A 11 TMK_A 19 P-GND P-GND 2 TMM_A 10 TMM_/A 8 TMM_B 6 4 TMM_/B 20 TMC_A 18 TMC_/A 16 TMC_B TMC_/B 14 B20B-PNDZS
TM-DRV PWB
CN5 +24V +24V TMK_A TMK_/A TMK_B TMK_/B CN4 +24V +24V TMC_A TMC_/A TMC_B TMC_/B CN2 +24V +24V TMM_A TMM_/A TMM_B TMM_/B CN1 +24V +24V TMY_A TMY_/A TMY_B TMY_/B
2.
3.
1)

When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock pawl is released and the supply shutter is opened.
A. Toner cartridges
2)
Lift the lock lever, and pull it out slowly and horizontally.
The transport shutter is opened and closed by the shaft linked with the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and closed when the open/close level on the unit pushes the block .
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 2
DVM_K
INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD NC NC
1 2 4 5 7 3 6
CN11 1 3 5 7 9
INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD
INT24V2 P-GND /DVMC_CK /DVMC_D DVMC_LD NC NC
1 2 4 5 7 3 6
INT24V2 2 P-GND 4 /DVMC_CK 6 /DVMC_D 8 DVMC_LD 10 B18B-PHDSS
BS-M
DVM_CL
BS-C BS-K
BS_K
MC PWB
BS-Y
INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR
CN1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Service Manual
B8B-PASK
C N6 31 INT24V2 29 D-GND 27 /HV_DATA 25 /HV_CLK 23 /HV_LD 21 HV_REM 19 MC_CL_ERR 17 MC_BK_ERR B32B-PHDSS
TCS_Y
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
TCS_C 24V3 TCS_C D-GND TSG_C
2 3 4 1
TCS_M 24V3 TCS_M D-GND TSG_M
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C
5VN TCS_C D-GND TSG_C D-GND DVTYP_C TNCRU_C 5VN QR/P8-8P
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 3 5VN 8 4 7 TCS_C 6 D-GND 5 6 TSG_C 5 4 D-GND 7 3 DVTYP_C 8 9 TNCRU_C 2 10 5VN 1
25 27 31 29 33 35 37 39
5VN TCS_C D-GND TSG_C D-GND DVTYP_C TNCRU_C 5VN
2 3 4 1
TCS_Y 24V3 TCS_Y D-GND TSG_Y
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C
5VN TCS_M D-GND TSG_M D-GND DVTYP_M TNCRU_M 5VN QR/P8-8P
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 3 5VN 8 TCS_M 4 7 D-GND 6 5 TSG_M 6 5 D-GND 4 7 DVTYP_M 3 8 TNCRU_M 2 9 5VN 1 10
6 8 12 10 14 16 18 20
5VN TCS_M D-GND TSG_M D-GND DVTYP_M TNCRU_M 5VN
2 3 4 1
: '09/Sep
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C
5VN TCS_Y D-GND TSG_Y D-GND DVTYP_Y TNCRU_Y 5VN QR/P8-8P
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 3 8 5VN 7 TCS_Y 4 5 D-GND 6 6 TSG_Y 5 4 D-GND 7 8 3 DVTYP_Y TNCRU_Y 2 9 1 5VN 10
26 28 32 30 34 36 38 40
B40B-PADSS-1
MX-3100N
1.
PCU PWB
TCS_M
TCS_K 24V3 TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK
2 3 4 1
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 C
5VN TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK D-GND DVTYP_K TNCRU_K 5VN QR/P8-8P
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 P
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H 3 8 5VN 7 TCS_K 4 6 5 D-GND 5 6 TSG_BK 4 D-GND 7 3 DVTYP_K 8 TNCRU_K 2 9 5VN 10 1
CN10 5 7 11 9 13 15 17 19
5VN TCS_K D-GND TSG_BK D-GND DVTYP_K TNCRU_K 5VN
MX-3100N DEVELOPING SECTION J 1

BS_C BS_M TCS_K TCS_C 2 2 BS_Y
: '09/Sep
Name Developing drive motor (Color) Developing drive motor (Black) Developing bias (Y,M,C,K) Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K) Name Developer roller Mixing roller Toner filter (Y,M,C,K) Function/Operation Color developing unit/Color drum drive Black developing unit/Black drum drive Developer bias Controls the toner density in the developing unit. Function/Operation Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images. Mixing of developer Prevents dispersing of toner
Signal name DVM_CL DVM_K BS TCS No. 1 2 3
2.
3.

2
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum generated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
A. Development unit
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported by the mixing roller. By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively charged due to mechanical friction. The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC component) is applied to the developing roller. Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing bias. If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
a Density sensor
Parts
1)
2)
: '09/Sep Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. * When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
3)
(1)
1) 2)
Density sensor
Remove the developing unit. Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide. Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector. Remove the density sensor.
2
A B
4)
5)
: '09/Sep
[K] TRANSFER SECTION

MX-3100N
Service Manual
1.
A. Transfer section
2
1st TC PWB
1TC-Y 1TC-M
1TC-C 1TC-K
CN1 INT24V2 8 7 P-GND 6 1TC-REV 1TC-Y-CC 5 1TC-M-CC 4 1TC-C-CC 3 1TC-K-CC 2 HV_REM 1 9 N,C B9B-PASK
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B9B-PASK
MC PWB
INT24V2 D-GND 1TC-REV 1TC-Y-CC 1TC-M-CC 1TC-C-CC 1TC-K-CC HV_REM N,C INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR
CN1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C N6 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17
INT24V2 D-GND /HV_DATA /HV_CLK /HV_LD HV_REM MC_CL_ERR MC_BK_ERR
B8B-PASK
B32B-PHDSS
1TUD_CL D-GND 5VNPD
1 2 3
P 1 2 3
SM-3Pin 1TUD_CL D-GND 5VNPD
R 1 2 3
CN13 1TUD_CL 31 D-GND 29 5VNPD 27 B32B-PHDSS CN12 27 1TUD_BK 28 D-GND 29 5VLED 30 PTC_HEAT B30B-PHDSS
1TUD_BK D-GND 5VLED
1 2 3
5 6
1 2 3 4 P
1TUD_BK D-GND 5VLED PTC_HEAT SM-4pin
1 2 3 4 R
14
1TURC
DVM_K
INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD NC NC 1 2 4 5 7 3 6 P 1 2
PCU PWB
CN11 1 3 5 7 9 INT24V2 P-GND /DVMK_CK /DVMK_D DVMK_LD
1 1TC_CMY 1TC_K 3 2 3 4 9 7 8 PTC 2TC

2-TC PS-187
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
R 1 2
SM-2Pin 24V3 1TURC
11 24V3 12 1TURC B18B-PHDSS
2nd TC PWB
PTC B2P-VH
CN1 INT24V2 1 D-GND 2 /TC_DATA 3 /TC_CLK 4 /TC_LD 5 /HV_REM 6 PTC_ERR 7 /PTC_CLK 8 B8B-PASK
CN14 2 INT24V2 4 D-GND 6 /TC_DATA /TC_CLK 8 10 /TC_LD 5 /HV_REM 7 PTC_ERR 9 /PTC_CLK B30B-PHDSS
13 11
1TNFD WTNM 12
10
P 1 2 SL2PIN WTNM_1 WTNM_2 1TNFD D-GND R 1 2 1 2 P 17 19 21 23 DF1B-24DE WTNM_1 WTNM_2 1TNFD D-GND S 17 19 21 23 CN13 11 13 WTNM_1 WTNM_2
7 1TNFD 9 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
Signal name 1TC_CMY 1TC_K 1TNFD 1TUD_BK 1TUD_CL 1TURC 2TC DVM_K WTNM PTC No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Name Primary transfer output (CMY) Primary transfer output (K) Waste toner full detection switch Transfer belt separation BK detection Transfer belt separation CL detection Primary transfer separation clutch Secondary belt transfer output Developing drive motor (K) Waste toner drive motor PTC output Name Primary transfer cleaner blade Primary transfer belt Primary transfer roller Primary transfer belt drive roller Primary transfer belt follower roller Primary transfer belt tension roller Belt CL brush
Function/Operation Color transfer high voltage B/W transfer high voltage Waste toner full detection B/W transfer folder position detection Color transfer roller position detection Transfer roller separation control Secondary transfer high voltage Transfer unit drive (Commonly used with the B/W developing drive roller) Transports waste toner. PTC high voltage Function/Operation Clean and remove residual toner from the primary transfer belt. Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt. Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt. Drives the transfer belt. Transfer belt follower. Apply a tension to the transfer belt. Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
MX-3100N TRANSFER SECTION K 1
: '09/Sep
No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name PTC opposing roller Secondary transfer belt Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer belt dirve roller Secondary transfer belt follower roller PTC unit Y auxiliary roller Function/Operation Roller to flow a PTC current. Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper. Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper. Drives the transfer belt. Transfer belt follower. Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt. Holds the belt position by separation of the Y transfer roller.
B. Pro-reg sensor section
PCU PWB
24V3 /PCSS /REGS_R_LED REGS_R D-GND 5VNPD PCS_CL
CN6 13 11 8 6 4 2 9
7 /REGS_F_LED 5 REGS_F 3 D-GND 1 5VNPD B32B-PHDSS
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P
NC NC NC 24V3 /PCSS /REGS_R_LED REGS_R D-GND 5VNPD NC PCS_CL NC D-GND 5VNPD /REGS_F_LED REGS_F D-GND 5VNPD SM18P
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 R
P 1 2
SM2P 24V3 /PCSS
R 1 2
3 4 2 1 5
/REGS_R_LED REGS_R D-GND 5VNPD PCS_R
PCSS
5 3 4 2 1
PCS_F /REGS_F_LED REGS_F D-GND 5VNPD
REGS_R
REGS_F
Signal name PCSS REGS_F REGS_R
Name Color image density sensor PWB reflection plate shutter solenoid Color image density sensor/ Image registration sensor F Black image density sensor/ Image registration sensor R
Function/Operation Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the resist sensor. Detection of resist shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of the color toner patch density. Detection of resist shift on the machine rear (R) side, and detection of the black toner patch density.
2.
(1)
Transfer operation
(2)
A. Transfer
a. Transfer operation
Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation mechanism and contents
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, separates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the operation mode. When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing separating operation of the roller.
All pressing
PTC
Constant current
All separating
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary transfer roller. Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this weakens positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the attractive force between the primary transfer belt and toner. By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is improved. Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary transfer belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt are transferred to paper. In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black (K) transfer voltage is selected. b. Cleaning operation In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying voltage of the secondary transfer belt is made negative, and unnecessary toner is transferred to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the primary transfer belt cleaning blade, and transported to the waste toner section.
Pressing only black
It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_K) and the separation detection arm.
1TUD_CL ON OFF OFF 1TUD_K OFF ON OFF
All pressing All separating Pressing only black
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant voltage
B. Image density detection and resist detection

Image density detection and image resist detection are performed by the sensors arranged on the front frame side and the rear frame side.
3.
1)

A. Primary transfer unit
(1)
Function and operation of the color image density sensor/image resist sensor F (REGS F) provided on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color toner patch density is detected. When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist shift on the front frame side is detected. The shutter plate is provided on the sensor. The shutter plate is closed before operation of the process control. The sensor sensitivity adjustment is performed by using the shutter plate as the reference reflection plate. The operation of the shutter plate is controlled by the process control shutter solenoid (PCSS). 2) Open the right door.
(2)
Function and operation of the black image density sensor/image resist sensor R (REGS R) provided on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black toner patch density is detected. When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist shift on the rear frame side is detected.
3)
Loosen the blue screw.
4)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum positioning unit. * Failure to complete this step may damage the primary transfer belt.
A B
5)
Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer unit.
C. Pro-reg sensor unit
(NOTE) When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
a
Parts Process control shutter solenoid
1) 2) 3) 4)
Remove the developing unit (K). Remove the drum unit (K). Remove the resist roller unit. Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
B. Secondary transfer unit

1) Open the right door.
2)
Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
(1)
1) 2)
Process control shutter solenoid

Remove the pro-reg sensor unit. Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the process control shutter solenoid. * When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).
1 2
1.
P 5 4 3 2 1
SM-5pin_N 24V3 PRM_A PRM_B PRM_/A PRM_/B
R 5 4 3 2 1
P 1 3 5 7 9
DF1 B - 2 4D E 24V3 PRM_A PRM_B PRM_/A PRM_/B
S 1 3 5 7 9
TM-DRV PWB
CN6 PRM_A 9 PRM_B 5 PRM_/A 7 PRM_/B 3 B10B- PNDZS
CN6 24V3 1 PRM_A 8 PRM_B 4 PRM_/A 6 PRM_/B 2 B10B-PNDZS
5VN HLPCD D-GND 11 13 15 5VN HLPCD D-GND 15
1 2 3
11 13
780W BK (AWG16) L-HL(MAIN) 810W BK (AWG16) 5 L-HL(SUB) 5 810W (AWG16)
P 4 780W (AWG16)
R 4
HL PWB
CN2 3 1 2 L-HL(UM) N-HL(UM) N-HL(US) B03P-VL(BK)
WH (AWG18) 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 2 CN3 2 3 1 N-HL(UW) L-HL(US) N-HL(LM) B03P-VL(RD) N-HL(SUB) 2
480W (AWG18)
MX-3100N [L] FUSER SECTION
PRM
VL-3pin
2 1
YL-2pin 1 1 2 2 P R 510W WH (AWG18) 510W (AWG18) R 300W WH (AWG18) 6 N-HL(UW) 6 300W (AWG18) YL P
2 1
CN4 /HL_PR 7 HL_OUT_UW 6 HL_OUT_LM 5 HL_OUT_US 4 HL_OUT_UM 3 2 D-GND 1 INT24V1 B07B-PASK-S
P BK WH BL P 1 2 3 SM-3pin(BK) TH_UM_IN TH_UMCS_IN D-GND R 1 2 3 CN13 INT24V1 4 D-GND 6 HL_OUT_UW 8 HL_OUT_LM 10 HL_OUT_US 12 HL_OUT_UM 14 16 /HL_PR B32B-PHDSS
HLPCD
YL R P 1 2 P 1 2 SM-2pin TH_LM_IN D-GND R 1 2 SM-2pin TH_US_IN D-GND R 1 2 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-9 B-8 B-7 B-6 B-5 B-4 B-3 B-2 B-1 P 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 CN12 TH_UM_IN 8 D-GND 6 TH_US_IN 4 D-GND 2 TH_LM_IN 9 D-GND 7 POFM_CNT 5 D-GND 3 TH_UMCS_IN 1 B30B-PHDSS DF1B-20DE N,C TH_UM_IN D-GND TH_US_IN D-GND TH_LM_IN D-GND POFM_CNT D-GND TH_UMCS_IN E 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
300W WH (AWG18) 3 N-HL(LOW) 3
300W (AWG18)
2
D-GND HLPCD 5VN
HL_U HL_LM
CN13 32 30 28 PRM_/B PRM_/A PRM_B PRM_A 26 24 22 20 B32B-PHDSS
TH_UM_IN D-GND TH_US_IN D-GND TH_LM_IN D-GND POFM_CNT D-GND TH_UMCS_IN RCZR 9PIN
HLTS2
PCU PWB
2 2
YL P
MX-3100N FUSER SECTION L 1

RTH1 2 HLTS1 HLTS3 2 1 4 1
DRIVER MAIN PWB
FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ P 1 2 3 4 5 6 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ P 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN1 FUMB 4 5 FUMA 1 INT24V1 2 INT24V1 3 FUMB/ 6 FUMA/ B6B-PASK-1
Service Manual
2
FUM
HLTS3
Signal name FUM HL_LM HL_U HL_US HLPCD HLTS1 HLTS2 HLTS3 PRM RTH1 RTH2 RTH3
Name Fusing motor Heater lamp (3) Heater lamp (1) Heater lamp (2) Fusing pressure release sensor Thermostat (1) Thermostat (2) Thermostat (3) Fusing pressure release motor Fusing temperature sensor (1) Fusing temperature sensor (2) Fusing temperature sensor (3)
Function/Operation Drives the fusing unit. Heats the fusing roller (pressing). Heats the fusing roller (heating). Heats the fusing roller (heating). Detects pressure release of the fusing roller. Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)] Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)] When the temperature rises abnormally, conduction to the heater lamp is cut off. [For the fusing roller (pressing)] Adjusts the fusing roller pressure. Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressing).
No. 1 2 3 4
Name Fusing roller (Heating) Separation pawl Fusing roller (Pressing) Fusing cleaning roller
Function/Operation Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper. Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating). Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper. Cleans the fusing roller (pressing).
2.
C. Fusing operation
Color toner (Y,M,C,K) on paper is subject to heat and pressure to be fused on paper. At that time, color toner of Y, M, C, and K are mixed to reproduce colors approximate to the document image colors. The heater lamps are provided in the lower and the upper heat roller to heat paper from the upper and the lower sides. This is because paper must be heated both from the upper side and from the lower side together in order to melt and fuse toner in the four layers on the paper. The upper and the lower heat rollers of silicon rubber are employed. This is because of the following reasons.
A. Fusing unit drive

For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat roller gear. Driving by the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed according to the control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU
B. Heater lamp drive
FUM
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB. The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and heating the heat roller. To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, the thermostat is provided for safety. When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the heater lamp is cut off.
1) 2) 3)
To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity for paper. By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused without deformation. An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner layers (multi-layer structure).
: '09/Sep
D. Automatic pressure release system

The upper and the lower heat rollers are normally pressed. When, however, one of the following conditions is satisfied, they are released from the pressure. When the machine shifts to the pre-heating mode. When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode. When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF. When the machine has been left in the ready state for 20 minutes. When the envelope mode is used.
E. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensor is provided at the center and the edge section of the upper heat roller and at the edge section of the lower heat roller. The heat roller temperature is detected by each temperature sensor to control the heater lamp to maintain the temperature at the specified level. In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind of paper. In the case of SW-A
Mode Paper Upper heater lamp main 170 170 170 165 180 180 Upper heater lamp sub 180 180 175 165 180 160 Lower heater lamp main 140 140 140 135 145 145
(1)
Pressure release operation
The pressure release motor (PRM) rotates to drive the pressure release lever of the fusing unit to the pressure release state via the reduction gears (6 pcs.). When 1710ms passes from operating the pressure release detection level and driving the pressure release sensor (HLPCD) to the transmission state (L level), the pressure release motor stops to complete the pressure release operation.
Ready condition Print mode
Pressure release lever
Black/White plain paper Color plain paper Thick paper OHP Envelope Glossy paper
3.
Pressing condition
A. Fusing unit
c a
Pressure release motor (PRM) Pressure release state
d
(2) Pressing operation
When an end use performs any operation or when the machine receives a job signal, the pressure release motor rotates reversely to dive the pressure release lever to the pressing state. When 430ms passes from when the pressure release sensor (HLPCD) is in the interruption state (H level), the pressure motor stops to complete the pressing operation. NOTE: When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to confirm that 10 sec. passed after the LCD is turned OFF. If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD displayed, the power is tu5ned off without completion of the pressure release operation. This will deform the upper and the lower heat rollers. When, in addition, the fusing roller is installed again after removing it, be sure to install it under the pressure release state.
a b c d Upper thermostat Lower thermostat Upper heater lamp Lower heater lamp
Parts
1)
2)
Remove the blue screw. Release the lock lever. Remove the fusing unit.
(2)
1) 2)
Lower thermostat
Remove the fusing unit. Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
2 2 1 1
(1)
1) 2)
Upper thermostat
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the lower thermostat. * Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces down.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the upper thermostat. * Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces up.
(3)
1) 2)
Upper heater lamp

5)
Remove the screw and remove the lamp holder. Remove the upper heater lamp. NOTE: When installing, fit the projected section of the upper heater lamp with the hole in the cover.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
(4)
1) 2)
Lower heater lamp

4)
Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
4)
Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp.
B. Others
5)
Remove the screw and the clamp. Remove the screw and the lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp. * When installing, treat the wires so that the harness of the lower heater lamp does not separate from the boss (A).
a Parts Fusing pressure release motor
(1)
1) 2)
Fusing pressure release motor

Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to "Front cabinet upper" in "External view.") Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release motor unit.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release motor.
MX-3100N
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION

1.
A. Duplex section
Service Manual
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB

TFD3 D-GND 5VLED1 POD3 D-GND 5VLED4 1 2 3 1 2 3 6 5 4 TFD3 D-GND 5VLED1 1 2 3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 TFD3 D-GND 5VLED1 POD3 D-GND 5VLED4
3 POD3 TFD3
DSW_ADU D-GND 5VLED2 1 2 3
POD3 4 3 5 D-GND 2 1 5VLED4 6 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 4 1 3 D-GND 2 2 DSW_ADU 3 1 5VLED2 4 PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H 3 APPD1 1 D-GND 2 2 1 5VLED5 3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
APPD1 D-GND 5VLED5
1 2 3
7 DSW_ADU D-GND 8 9 5VLED2 APPD1 10 D-GND 11 5VLED5 12 APPD3 13 GND 14 5VLED 15 NC 16 S16B-PHDSS-B CN3(1/2) APPD2 4 D-GND 5 6 5VLED10 S32B-PHDSS-B
APPD1 1
DSW_ADU ADUML
APPD2 D-GND 5VLED10
1 2 3
INT24V1 INT24V1 ADUMLB/ ADUMLB ADUMLA ADUMLA/
2 5 6 3 1 4
CN2 7 INT24V1 8 INT24V1 9 ADUMLB/ 10 ADUMLB 11 ADUMLA 12 ADUMLA/ B12B-PASK-1
DRIVER MAIN PWB
APPD2
Signal name ADUML APPD1 APPD2 DSW_ADU POD3 TFD3 No. 1 2 3
Name ADU motor lower ADU transport path detection 1 ADU transport path detection 2 ADU transport open/close detection Right tray paper exit detection Right tray paper exit full detection Name Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transport roller 11 (Drive) Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
Function/Operation Drives the right door section. Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass detection Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection Detects the paper exit to right tray. Detects the right tray paper exit full. Function/Operation Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11. Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12. Discharges paper.
MX-3100N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M 1
B. Paper exit section
DF11-4DP-SP1
/POFM_V /POFM_V /POFM_V /POFM_V 3 2 1 4
SSJC6-4
P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND P-GND /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT /POFM_CNT 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 7 8
R 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 R
SM4PIN POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD1 POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD2 SM4PIN
P
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
P 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 6 7 11 8 9 1 2 3 4 5
DF1B-26p N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C POFM_V /POFM_CNT P-GND POFM_LD1 POFM_LD2 24V2 /OSM_XB /OSM_XA /OSM_B /OSM_A
S 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 6 7 11 8 9 1 2 3 4 5
PCU PWB
CN12 POFM_V 16 17 /POFM_CNT 20 P-GND POFM_LD1 18 19 POFM_LD2 11 12 13 14 15 24V2 /OSM_/B /OSM_/A /OSM_B /OSM_A
TFD2
R 5 1 2 3 4 6
SM-6Pin 24V2 /OSM_XB /OSM_XA /OSM_B /OSM_A NC 5VNPD TFD2 D-GND 5VNPD POD2 D-GND
P 5 1 2 3 4 6 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HPOS
13
TFD2
13
22
TFD2
14
POD2
14
23
POD2
OSM
15 5VNPD HPOS D-GND 5VNPD POD1 D-GND
HPOS
15
24
HPOS
16 17 12 10 18 19
POD1 D-GND 5VNPD NC NC NC
16 17 12 10 18 19
25 POD1 26 D-GND 21 5VNPD B30B-PHDSS
POFM_R POD2 POD1
POM
D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD 5VNPD
SSJC6-6 FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ P 1 2 3 4 5 6 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM-12p FUMB FUMA INT24V1 INT24V1 FUMB/ FUMA/ P 1 2 3 4 5 6
POFM_F 2
FUM
CN1 FUMB 4 FUMA 5 1 INT24V1 2 INT24V1 3 FUMB/ FUMA/ 6 B6B-PASK-1
DRIVER MAIN PWB
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
CN2 POMA 5 1 INT24V1 4 POMB 6 POMA/ 2 INT24V1 3 POMB/ B12B-PASK-1
Signal name FUM HPOS OSM POD1 POD2 POFM_F POFM_R POM TFD2
Name Fusing drive motor Shifter home position detection Shifter motor Fusing rear detection Paper exit detection Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Paper exit drive motor Paper exit full detection
Function/Operation Drives the fusing unit. Detects the shifter home position. Performs offset of paper. Detects paper exit from fusing. Detects the exit paper. Cools the fusing unit. Cools the fusing unit. Drives the paper exit roller. Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
No. 1 2 3
Name Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transport roller 13 (Drive) Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Function/Operation Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13. Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section. Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
2.
1)
A. Duplex
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit roller 1. At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide. When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and rotates reversely after the specified time. By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the right side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight. The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position. Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then transported to the machine again. 2) Remove the right door unit.
B. Paper exit
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray. When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. Paper is passed through the ADU reverse gate, and discharged to the right tray.
3.
A. Duplex unit
(1) RD I/F PWB
Open the right door. Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
1) 2)
c
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
a b c
Parts RD I/F PWB Manual paper feed clutch ADU motor lower
(2)
1) 2) 3)
Manual paper feed clutch

Open the right door. Remove the connector cover and the ADU inner cover. Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the connector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
B. Paper exit unit

b
a a
4)
Remove the manual paper feed clutch.

Parts Paper exit cooling fan motor Shifter motor Fusing drive motor Paper exit drive motor
a b c d
1)
(3)
1) 2)
ADU motor lower

Remove the rear cabinet. Open the control box.
2)
Remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.
2 1
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.
(1)
1) 2)
Paper exit cooling fan motor

Remove the paper exit unit. Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3)
Remove the shifter motor.
(3)
1) 2)
Fusing drive motor

Remove the paper exit unit. Remove the fusing drive motor.
3)
Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor.
(4)
1) 2)
Paper exit drive motor

Remove the paper exit unit. Remove the paper exit drive motor.
(2)
1) 2)
Shifter motor
Remove the paper exit unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal. Remove the snap band, and remove the slide motor unit.
MX-3100N
[N] DRIVE SECTION

1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Main drive unit
3) Remove the flywheel. Service Manual
* Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM (3)KM (Engraved mark for each color) * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with the harness.
b b b c a
KM
d
KM
e
a b c d e f
f
Parts
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the main drive unit. * Hold section A and remove.
TM drive PWB Toner motor Developing drive motor (K) Developing drive motor (CL) Rresist motor Primary transfer separation clutch
1) 2)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Remove the screw, and open the control box.
MX-3100N DRIVE SECTION N 1
(1)
1) 2) 3)
TM drive PWB/Toner motor

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the TM dive PWB.
(3)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Developing drive motor (CL)

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the flywheel. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the developing drive motor (CL).
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the toner motor.
(4)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Resist motor
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the flywheel. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the resist motor.
(2)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Developing drive motor (K)

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the flywheel. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the developing drive motor (K)
(5)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Primary transfer separation clutch

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the flywheel. Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the connector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary transfer separation clutch. * When installing, engage the projected section for stopping the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
1) 2) 3)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the each terminal. Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Disengage the pawl, and remove the filter box unit.
B. Paper feed drive unit
5)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive unit.
a d f c e b
a b c d e f
Parts Transport motor Paper feed motor Paper tray lift-up motor Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Tray vertical transport clutch
(1)
1) 2) 3)
Transport motor
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the transport motor.
(3)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Paper tray lift-up motor

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the driver main PWB unit. Remove the filter box unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
(2)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Paper feed motor

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the driver main PWB unit. Remove the filter box unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the paper feed motor. 6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
(4)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/Paper feed tray 2)/Tray vertical transport clutch
Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit. Remove the paper feed motor. Remove the paper feed drive unit. Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
9)
Remove the tray vertical transport clutch unit.
6)
Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport clutch.
7)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
8)
Remove the belt.
: '08 Oct 15 * Inserting position Service Manual an inserting procedure when the DIMM memory is removed
1
[O] PWB SECTION

MX-3100N
1.
A. Control box
DIMM1 DIMM2
i e a c f d b
3) DIMM1: Option DIMM2: 512MB DIMM3: 1GB DIMM4: Empty Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock of the memory PWB.
1
h g
DIMM4 DIMM3
a b c d e f g h i
Parts DIMM memory PWB (512MB) DIMM memory PWB (1GB) PROG1 ROM PWB PROG2 ROM PWB MFP cnt PWB HDD PCU Flash ROM PWB PCU PWB Mother PWB
(1)
1) 2)
DIMM memory PWB (512MB/1GB)/PROG1 ROM PWB/PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
Remove the right cabinet rear cover. Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB. 4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out under that state. * Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out. * Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a spacer.
MX-3100N PWB SECTION O 1
* Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first. (Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency of work.)
c)
Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper clicks. * Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center of the lock hole. * The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB.
Outside
Inside
Outside
Inside
* Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first. (Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency of work.)
B A A B
5)
Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
Outside
a)
Inside
Outside
Inside
Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure. * When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
6)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the MFP cnt PWB.
b)
Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the bottom. * Be careful not to tilt left and right. * The gold plated section must be hidden.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]
(2)
1) 2) 3)
HDD
Remove the right cabinet rear cover. Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the HDD unit.
2)
Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
(4)
1) 2) 3)
PCU PWB
Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the PCU PWB.
4)
Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD. * Since the HDD is weak to shock, carefully treat it without knocking the edge of the HDD or falling or applying a shock.
(5)
1) 2)
Mother PWB
Remove the rear cabinet. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the mother PWB.
(3)
1)
PCU Flash ROM PWB

Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.
B. Power unit
3)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the filter box unit.
b a
Parts a b AC power PWB DC power PWB
4)
(1)
1) 2)
AC power PWB
Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB.
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.
5)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the DC power PWB.
(2)
1) 2)
DC power PWB
C. Others
3)
Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit. Disconnect the connector.
b a
c d f g
4)
Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.
a b c d e f g
Parts SCN Flash ROM PWB Scanner control PWB HL PWB Secondary transfer PWB Driver main PWB Primary transfer PWB MC PWB
(1)
1) 2)
SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB

Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
(2)
1) 2) 3)
2 1
HL PWB
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover. Open the control box. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the duct.
4)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the HL PWB.
(5)
1) 2) 3)
Primary transfer PWB

Remove the rear cabinet. Open the control box. Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel. * Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM (3)KM (Engraved mark for each color) * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with the harness.
(3)
1) 2) 3)
Secondary transfer PWB

Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover. Open the control box. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the secondary transfer PWB.
KM C KM
4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the primary transfer PWB.
(4)
1) 2)
Driver main PWB

Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the driver main PWB.
(6)
1) 2) 3)
MC PWB
Remove the rear cabinet. Open the control box. Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel. * Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM (3)KM (Engraved mark for each color) * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with the harness.
KM C KM
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the supporter, and remove the primary transfer PWB unit.
5)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the MC PWB and the supporter.
MX-3100N
[P] FAN SECTION

1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Fan motor
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove Service Manual the duct.
f e g
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the rear cooling fan motor. * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and be careful of the pulling direction of the harness (B).
d c b
a b c d e f g
Parts Rear cooling fan motor Ozone fan motor Power cooling fan motor Power cooling fan motor2 Controller cooling fan motor Fusing fan motor Process air inlet fan motor
(1)
1) 2)
Rear cooling fan motor

(2)
1) 2) 3)
Ozone fan motor

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the filter box unit.
MX-3100N FAN SECTION P 1
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the ozone fan motor from the filter box unit.
(4)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Power cooling fan motor2

Remove the rear cabinet. Open the control box. Remove the filter box unit. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.
(3)
1) 2) 3) 4)
Power cooling fan motor

Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.") Open the control box. Remove the filter box unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan. * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate. 5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power unit.
C B A
6) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan motor. * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the harness (B) facing upward.
(5)
1) 2)
Controller cooling fan motor

Remove the right cabinet rear cover. Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
(7)
1) 2)
Process air inlet fan motor

Remove the LSU. Remove the screw. Remove the duct. At the unit on its side and disconnect the connector.
3)
Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the process air inlet fan motor.
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the controller cooling fan motor. * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the harness (B) facing downward.
B A
(6)
1) 2)
Fusing fan motor

Remove the paper exit unit. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing fan motor. * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the harness (B) facing downward.
MX-3100N [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
3) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch unit. Service Manual
1.
A. Sensor/Switch
4)
c b a
Disconnect the connector, disengage the pawl, and remove the main switch. * When installing, be careful of connection of the connector.
3 3 2 2 R 1
a b c
Parts Main switch Front door open/close switch Right door open/close switch
(1)
1) 2)
Main switch
Remove the front cabinet. [Refer to "Front cabinet" in "External view."] Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
(2)
1) 2)
Front door open/close switch

Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External view.") Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close switch unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close switch.
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 1
(3)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Right door open/close switch

Remove the rear cabinet. Open the control box. Open the right door. Remove the resist roller unit. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the right door open/close switch cover unit.
6)
Remove the right door open/close switch.
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 2
COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft Corporation in the U. S.A. and other countries. Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 and Internet Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 -2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION Business Solutions Group CS Promotion Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 September Printed in Japan

MX 2301N 2600N 3100 S3e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MX 2301N 2600N 3100 S3e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2

DIGITAL FULL COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-2301N MX-2600N/3100N MX-2600G/3100G

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

NOTE FOR SERVICING

NOTE FOR SERVICING

5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord. Service Manual

1. Precautions for servicing

3. Note for installing site

Place of much vibrations It may cause a breakdown.

2. Warning for servicing

MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

Paper exit system

Document feeder system

EXIT TRAY UNIT

REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER

DIGITAL FULL COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM PUNCH MODULE

Paper feed system

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

13 AR-SC3 (For saddle) 9 MX-FN10 11 MX-PNX5

PAPER PASS UNIT

STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER

STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT

BARCODE FONT KIT

PS3 EXPANSION KIT

FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT

INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT

APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE

XPS EXPANSION KIT

NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT

DATA SECURITY KIT

DATA SECURITY KIT

SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT

SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE

SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE

EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD

SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT

MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

Main function of the main unit

Document feeder system Paper feed system Paper exit system

Image send expansion

Includes the Sharpdesk. Commercial version Authentication version

Authentication/ Security Application/ Solution

(4) Warmup Service Manual

First copy time

Smoothing Gradation (Monochrome/Color)

Max. print size Void area Image loss

MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: Approx. 102 kg MX-2600N/3100N: Approx. 112 kg

Engine speed (ppm)

a. Tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding

* LCC is not allowed the heavy paper passing. MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1

b. Manual paper feed tray paper feeding

OHP Envelope Heavy paper

*1: Engine speed in finisher output

Voltage / Current Frequency Power source code Power switch

CPU Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Ethernet

(10) Power consumption

USB authentication acquisition Serial I/F Memory expansion slot

Memory, hard disk

15K 1 15K 1 15K *1 100K 60K

15K 1 15K 1 15K *1 100K 60K

15K 1 15K 1 15K *1 100K 60K